OPERATION MANUAL CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit CRT1 Series

OPERATION MANUAL CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit CRT1 Series
Cat. No. W457-E1-07
CRT1 Series
CompoNet Slave Units
and Repeater Unit
OPERATION MANUAL
10152
CRT1 Series CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit Operation Manual
Corrections Insert
OMRON Corporation
Cat. No.: W457-E1-07
Thank you for supporting OMRON and OMRON products.
Mistakes have been discovered in the CRT1 Series CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit Operation
Manual (Cat. No. W457-E1-07) issued in October 2009. We sincerely apologize for the mistakes.
Please mark your manuals so that the corrections are noted on the pages concerned, and then securely add
any required pages from the Corrections Insert to the rear of the manual.
„ Relevant location
Page 223 CRT1-MD16S (NPN), Page 241 CRT1-MD32S (NPN)
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
Page 223 CRT1-MD16S-1 (PNP), Page 242 CRT1-MD32S-1 (PNP)
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
Page 224 CRT1-MD16SH (NPN), Page 242 CRT1-MD32SH (NPN)
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
Page 224 CRT1-MD16SH-1 (PNP), Page 243 CRT1-MD32SH-1 (PNP)
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
11156
CRT1 Series CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit Operation Manual
Corrections Insert
OMRON Corporation
Cat. No.: W457-E1-07
Thank you for supporting OMRON and OMRON products.
Mistakes have been discovered in the CRT1 Series CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit Operation
Manual (Cat. No. W457-E1-07) issued in October 2009. We sincerely apologize for the mistakes.
Please mark your manuals so that the corrections are noted on the pages concerned, and then securely add
any required pages from the Corrections Insert to the rear of the manual.
■ Relevant location
Page 340 Voltage/Current Input Mode Settings Switch
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
Page 341 Internal Circuits
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
Page 342 3-wire sensor
Current Contents
Corrected Contents
CRT1 Series
CompoNet Slave Units
and Repeater Unit
Operation Manual
Revised October 2009
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2006
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
5
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
6
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
SECTION 1
Features and Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
Slave Unit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
SECTION 2
Wiring Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-1
CompoNet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2-2
Wiring Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-3
Communications Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
3-1
Installing Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-2
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
3-5
Power Supply Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
SECTION 4
Basic Specifications of Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4-1
Basic Specifications of Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
SECTION 5
Digital I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5-1
Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
5-2
Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
5-4
Units with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
282
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6
Analog I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
6-1
Analog I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
6-3
Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
6-4
Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
6-5
Analog Data Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
6-7
Units with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
SECTION 7
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7-1
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
7-3
Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
376
7-4
Monitoring Temperature Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
7-5
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
SECTION 8
Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
8-1
Expansion Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
392
8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
SECTION 9
Bit Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
9-1
Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
408
9-2
Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
409
9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
437
SECTION 10
Repeater Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
viii
10-1 Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
472
10-2 Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
474
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 11
Smart Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
11-1 CX-Integrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
486
11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
495
11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
507
11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
530
11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
540
SECTION 12
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
580
12-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
581
12-3 Device Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
588
Appendices
A
CompoNet Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
591
B
Object Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
615
C
Current Consumption Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
631
D
Precautions with Connecting Two-wire DC Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
637
E
I/O Power Supply Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
639
F
Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
641
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
ix
x
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CompoNet Slave Units, and the Repeater
Unit and includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install or operate a CompoNet Slave Unit or Repeater Unit. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section. Also be sure to read the CompoNet Master Unit Operation Manual (see following table) together with this manual.
Precautions provide general precautions for using the CompoNet Slave Units, Repeater Units, Programmable Controller, and related devices.
Section 1 introduces the CompoNet Slave Units and the various models that are available.
Section 2 describes the configurations of CompoNet Networks.
Section 3 describes how to install and wire a CompoNet Network.
Section 4 provides the basic specifications of the Slave Units.
Section 5 describes the Digital I/O Slave Units.
Section 6 describes the Analog I/O Slave Units.
Section 7 describes the Temperature Input Units.
Section 8 describes the Expansion Units.
Section 9 describes the Bit Slave Units.
Section 10 describes the Repeater Unit.
Section 11 individually describes the functions provided by CompoNet Slave Unit. The functions are
divided into those supported by all CompoNet Slave Units and those supported only by specific CompoNet Slave Units.
Section 12 provides troubleshooting information that can be used in the event a problem occurs in
CompoNet Slave Unit operation. It also provides information on maintenance that should be performed
to ensure optimum application of the CompoNet Slave Units.
The Appendices provide specialized information, including information on CompoNet explicit messages, object mounting, connectable devices, current consumption, and precautions for connecting
two-wire DC sensors.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xi
Related Manuals:
Cat. No.
Models
W457
CRT1 Series
(this manual)
W456
CS1W-CRM21 and CJ1WCRM21
W342
CS1G/[email protected]@H
CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1
[email protected]@H
Name
CompoNet Slave Units and
Repeater Unit Operation
Manual
CS/CJ-series CompoNet
Master Units Operation
Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP Series
SYSMAC One NSJ Series
Communications Commands Reference Manual
Description
Provides the specifications of CompoNet
Slave Units and Repeater Unit.
Provides an overview of CompoNet Networks,
communications specifications, wring methods, and CompoNet Master Unit functions.
Describes the communications commands
used with CS-series, CJ-series, and CPseries PLCs and NSJ Controllers.
[email protected]@S
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]@-V1
CJ1G/[email protected]@H
[email protected]@P
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@-V1
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@@(B)-G5D
W464
xii
[email protected]@@@@(B)-M3D
[email protected]@[email protected]/
[email protected]@[email protected]
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP/NSJ
Series CX-Integrator Ver.
2.3 Operation Manual
Describes CX-Integrator operating methods,
e.g., for setting up and monitoring networks.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xiii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xiv
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xv
xvi
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CompoNet Slave Units, and the Repeater Unit.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CompoNet Slave
Units and Repeater Unit. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting
to set up or operate a CompoNet Network using CompoNet Slave Units or Repeater Units.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
xviii
xviii
xix
xx
xxii
xxii
xxii
xxii
xvii
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation. Be sure this manual is delivered to the persons actually using the CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater
Units.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart and do not touch the interior of any Unit
while the power is being supplied. Also, do not turn ON the power supply
while the cover is open. Doing any of these may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not input voltages or currents exceeding the rated range to the Unit.
Exceeding the rated range may cause Unit failure or fire.
xviii
Operating Environment Precautions
4
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Slave Units),
including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality
occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor affecting the
PLC operation. (“PLC” includes CPU Units, other Units mounted in the PLC,
and Remote I/O Terminals.) Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of
the output relays, or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply) is overloaded or shortcircuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned
OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures
must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming
Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals (including acids).
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
xix
5
Application Precautions
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Make sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the
life of the system.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using a CompoNet Network.
• When transporting the Unit, use special packing boxes and protect it from
being exposed to excessive vibration or impact during transportation.
• Do not drop any Unit or subject any Unit to excessive shock or vibration.
Otherwise, Unit failure or malfunction may occur.
• Mount the Units securely using DIN Track, a Mounting Bracket, or screws.
• Make sure that all Slave Unit mounting screws and cable connector
screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals.
Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Make sure that the terminal blocks, communications cables, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
• When installing the Units, ground to 100 Ω min.
• Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in the manual.
• Always separate Special Flat Cables (Standard and Sheathed) for different CompoNet systems by at least 5 mm to prevent unstable operation
due to interference. Do not bundle Special Flat Cables.
• Do not extend connection distances or the number of connected nodes
beyond the ranges given in the specifications.
• Do not allow foreign matter to enter the Units when wiring and installing
the Units.
• Use the correct wiring materials to wire the Units.
• Use the correct tools to wire the Units.
• Always use the specified communications cables and connectors.
• Confirm the polarity of all terminals before wiring them.
• Make sure that all terminal block screws are tightened to the torque specified in this manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in fire, malfunction, or failure.
• Always use the power supply voltage specified in this manual.
• Do not bend cables past their natural bending radius or pull on cables.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications
cable.
• Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high-tension lines.
• Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending radius.
• Do not pull on the communications cables.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables.
• Always lay communications cable inside ducts.
xx
5
Application Precautions
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Confirm voltage specifications when wiring communications, the power
supply, and I/O crossovers. Incorrect wiring may result in malfunction.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• After replacing Units, resume operation only after transferring to the new
CPU Unit and/or Special I/O Units the contents of the DM Area, HR Area,
and other data required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result in
an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation.
• Check all wiring and switch settings to be sure they are correct.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC and Slave Units before
attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may
result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Removing or attaching terminal blocks to Slave Units and Expansion
Units
• Removing or attaching the terminal blocks or connectors
• Replacing components (e.g., relays)
• Setting the DIP Switches and Rotary Switches
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory
from the user program
• Touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge static electricity from your
body before touching any Unit.
• When replacing relays or other parts, be sure to confirm that the ratings of
the new part are correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to
do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
• On IP54 Bit Slaves, tighten the cover screws to the specified torque after
setting the rotary switches or performing wiring. The specified degree of
protection will not be achieved if the screws are not tightened sufficiently.
xxi
6
Conformance to EC Directives
• Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems
in the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
6
6-1
Conformance to EC Directives
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
The OMRON products described in this manual are designed so that they
individually comply with the related EMC Directives so that they can be more
easily built into other devices or the overall machine. The actual products have
been checked for conformity to EMC Directives (see note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however,
cannot be checked by OMRON and must be checked by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note
Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility):
EN 61131-2 and EN 61000-6-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN 61131-2 and EN 61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75
to 1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards.
Applicable standard: EN 61131-2
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives
The OMRON products described in this manual comply with the related EMC
Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the products are
used complies with EC Directives, the products must be installed as follows:
1,2,3...
1. The products must be installed within a control panel.
2. A DC power supply with reinforced insulation or double insulation that can
maintain a stable output even if the input is interrupted for 10 ms must be
used for communications power, internal power, and I/O power. The
OMRON S82J-series Power Supply is recommended. (See note.)
xxii
6
Conformance to EC Directives
3. Products complying with EC Directives also conform to the Emission Standards (EN 61131-2 and EN 61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteristics
(10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control
panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other
conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
4. Conformance with the EC Directives was confirmed with a system configuration using I/O wiring lengths of less than 30 m.
Note
Conformance with the EMC Directive was confirmed when using
the recommended power supply.
xxiii
Conformance to EC Directives
xxiv
6
SECTION 1
Features and Slave Units
This section introduces the CompoNet Slave Units and the various models that are available.
1-1
1-2
Features of CompoNet Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-1
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-2
Features of CompoNet Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-3
CompoNet Slave Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Slave Unit Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
1-2-1
Word Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
1-2-2
Bit Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
1-2-3
Repeater Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
1-2-4
Slave Unit Installation and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
1
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
1-1
1-1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Overview
CompoNet Slave Units do not simply input and output ON/OFF signals, they
can also collect a variety of information that can improve equipment operating
rates.
They can also be used to build maintenance systems separate from control
systems. Coexisting control and maintenance systems can contribute to
reducing equipment startup time, recovery time after problems, and preventative maintenance of equipment.
■
Control System:
For remote I/O communications with the PLC, I/O is allocated for each node
address by default. In addition, Slave Unit status information other than I/O is
allocated in an input area in the Master Unit. The allocation can be set using
the CX-Integrator or explicit messages.
■
Maintenance System:
Slave Units can store several kinds of equipment data. This data can be read
from or written to the Slave Unit’s memory using the CX-Integrator or by sending explicit messages from the Master Unit (PLC) to the Slave Unit.
1-1-2
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
CompoNet Slave Units have the following features.
Main Features
The functions that can be used depend on the type of Slave Unit. For details,
refer to 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions.
Operation Time Monitor
The Slave Unit can quickly measure the ON/OFF timing of input and output
contacts without relying on the ladder program. Contact types (IN - OUT, OUT
- IN, IN - IN, OUT - OUT) and trigger patterns (ON → OFF, OFF → ON, ON →
ON, OFF → OFF) can be freely combined for measurement. A time can be
set in the Slave Unit memory to enable notification of the status when the
measured time exceeds the set time.
This data can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator.
Contact Operation
Monitor
The number of times each input contact or output contact is turned ON can be
counted at a sampling frequency of 50 Hz maximum and stored. A value can
also be set in the Slave Unit to enable notification of the status if the number
of contact operations reaches the set value.
This data can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator.
Note
Total ON Time Monitor
The contact operation monitor and the total ON time monitor cannot both be used for the same contact at the same time.
The total ON time of sensors, relays, and other devices are stored in the Slave
Unit memory. A value can also be set in the Slave Unit to enable notification of
the status if the total time reaches the set value.
These values can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator.
Note
Automatic Baud Rate
Detection
2
The total ON time monitor and the contact operation monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact.
The baud rate is automatically set to the same baud rate as the Master Unit;
therefore, there is no need to set the baud rate of the Slave Units.
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Unit Conduction Time
Monitor
Section 1-1
The total ON time of the Slave Unit's internal circuit power supply can be
stored. This value can be read using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. A
value can also be set in the Slave Unit to enable obtaining notification of the
status if the total time reaches a set monitor value.
This data can be read or written by using the CX-Integrator.
Naming Units
The user can set any name for each Unit as a comment. The names are
stored in Slave Unit memory.
This data can be read or written by using the CX-Integrator.
Naming Connected
Devices
Any name can be set for each I/O contact (e.g., sensor or valve) connected to
a Slave Unit. The names are stored in Slave Unit memory.
This data can be read or written by using the CX-Integrator.
Network Power Voltage
Monitoring
The network power supply voltage (present, maximum, and minimum values)
can be stored in the Slave Unit memory. A monitor voltage can also be set in
the Slave Unit to enable notification of the status if the voltage drops to the
preset value.
These values can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator.
I/O Power Status Monitor
The I/O power status monitor function checks if the I/O power is ON or not,
and provides notification in a status area.
This data can be checked by using the CX-Integrator.
Communications Error
History Monitor
Enables storing the error condition (communication failure details, the communications power supply voltage at the time of failure, and the Unit conduction time) for the most recent 4 communication failures, within the slave unit.
This data can be read by using the CX-Integrator.
Input Filters
The Slave Units read input values multiple times during the set period to eliminate the effect of switch chattering and data omissions caused by noise. An
ON delay or OFF delay can also be implemented by using this function.
These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Communications Error
Output Setting
The output value when a communications error occurs can be set for each
word of an Output Unit.
These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Preventing Malfunctions
Caused by Inrush Current
at Startup
This function holds inputs from when the power is turned ON until the Unit stabilizes, i.e., inputs are not received while the I/O power is OFF and for 100 ms
after the I/O power is turned ON. This contributes to eliminating input errors
caused by inrush current when the I/O power is turned ON.
These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Power Short-circuit
Detection
The I/O power current is monitored. If an excessive current is detected, it is
assumed that a power short-circuit has occurred and the sensor power output
is turned OFF forcibly.
The status can be checked by using the LED indicators on the Slave Unit or
by using the CX-Integrator.
Load Short-circuit
Detection
The output load current is monitored. If an excessive current is detected, it is
assumed that an load short-circuit has occurred and the output is turned OFF
forcibly to prevent damage to the Unit's output circuit.
The status can be checked by using the LED indicators on the Slave Unit or
by using the CX-Integrator.
Removable Terminal Block
The terminal block can be removed.
3
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Section 1-1
Expansion Using
Expansion Units
One Expansion Unit can be added to a Digital I/O Slave Unit (with 2-tier terminal block and 16 points). This extends the range of possible system configurations by making it possible to expand to a variety of I/O combinations, e.g., 16
inputs and 8 outputs or 24 inputs (16 inputs + 8 inputs).
Scaling
Converted data can be scaled to any value by the user. Ladder program calculations for the Master Unit are not required if the scaling function is used
with the Slave Unit. The offset compensation function can also be used to offset scaled values.
These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Last Maintenance Date
(Maintenance Function)
The date that maintenance was performed can be written in the Slave Unit by
using the CX-Integrator.
Cumulated Count
The cumulated count function calculates the integral time for input (or output)
analog values and reads the cumulated value. Monitor values can be set in
Units. If the cumulated counter value exceeds the set monitor value, the
Cumulated Counter Over Flag in general status turns ON.
These values can be set and read by using the CX-Integrator.
Moving Average
An Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit can calculate the moving average of the last eight inputs and use it as the converted data. Smooth input values can be obtained by averaging the inputs if there are rapid fluctuations in
the input.
Settings for averaging are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Setting the Number of AD
Conversion Points
The conversion cycle is 4 ms max. when using all 4 analog inputs. The AD
conversion cycle can be made faster if fewer AD conversion points are used.
Rate of Change
Calculations
You can find the rate of change during the set data sampling cycle for the
input value to an Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit.
The rate of change settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Comparator
Input data captured into the Analog Input Slave Unit/Temperature Input Unit or
calculation data is compared to alarm settings (Alarm Trip Point High (HH),
Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning Trip Point Low (L), and Alarm Trip Point
Low (LL)) and the results can be reflected in the "Analog Status Flag" (or
"Temperature Data Status Flag"). The Normal Flag (pass signal) turns ON for
values that are in set range.
The alarm settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Peak/Bottom Hold
The peak/bottom hold function holds the maximum (peak) or the minimum
(bottom) input value to an Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit. The
maximum (peak) or minimum (bottom) value can be compared with an alarm
set value and used to turn ON an alarm flag as status data. This is called the
comparator function.
The peak/bottom hold settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Top/Valley Hold
The top/valley hold function holds the top or valley input value to an Analog
Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit. The Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag
can be used to check when top and valley values were detected. The top and
valley values can be compared with an alarm set value and used as status
data to turn ON alarm flags (comparator function).
The top/valley hold settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
4
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Disconnected Line
Detection
With Analog Input Units, the Disconnected Line Detection Flag for each input
can be used in the Master Unit to check whether the analog input lines (for
voltage inputs or current inputs) are disconnected for analog inputs that are
enabled under the setting of the number of AD conversion points.
This function is supported only when the input range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.
With Temperature Input Units, disconnections can be detected for each sensor input. The status can be checked at the Master Unit using the Disconnected Line Detection Flag.
User Adjustment
The user adjustment function can be used to compensate offsets in input (or
output) values that occur due to the features of or connection method used for
input or output devices to adjust the input (or output). The conversion line is
adjusted at two points: 0% and 100%.
The adjustments can be made by using the CX-Integrator.
Top/Valley Count
With Temperature Input Units, the maximum or minimum number of times the
top or valley value is reached can be counted for an application that has fixed
cycles of temperature changes. Explicit messages can be used to see if the
number of cycles has exceeded a monitoring set value.
The settings are made by using the CX-Integrator.
Temperature Range Total
Time Count
With Temperature Input Units, the length of time that the temperature input
value is within a user-set temperature range can be measured in seconds.
Explicit messages can be used to see if the measured time has exceeded a
monitoring set value.
The temperature range total time count settings are made by using the CXIntegrator.
Input Temperature
Variation Detection
With Temperature Input Units, the temperature difference between two inputs
for inputs 0 to 3 can be detected and compared with a monitoring set value.
Explicit messages can be used to see if the temperature difference has
exceeded the monitoring set value.
The input temperature variation detection settings are made by using the CXIntegrator.
Input Error Detection
Disable Function
With Temperature Input Units, if there is an unused input, detection of input
errors (including disconnection) can be disabled.
Input error detection is disabled by using the CX-Integrator.
Other Features
Rotary Switch Setting of
Node Addresses
Node addresses can now be set much more easily using rotary switches.
(except some models)
Bit-level Distribution (Bit
Slaves)
Slave Units are available with 2 inputs, 2 outputs, 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 1 input/1
output, or 2 inputs/2 outputs. These enable bit-level distribution of Slave Units.
At the same time, unused Slave Unit I/O can be suppressed.
IP54 Dust-tight, Splashproof Units (Bit Slaves)
The [email protected]@@SP(-1) Units conform to the IEC IP54 dust-tight, splashproof degree of protection (see note).
Note
For protection against human bodies and solid foreign objects,
IP54 requires that dust will not penetrate inside the device to a degree that would affecting operation. For protection against water ingress, water splashing from any direction must have no adverse
effect.
5
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Section 1-1
Flat Cable Included
(Bit Slaves, except Bit
Slave Units with Compact
Connectors)
Models of Bit Slave Units are available with a Flat Cable included (standard or
sheathed). Models with a Flat Cable included, however, do not support a baud
rate of 4 Mbps. (Branching is not possible.)
No I/O Power Supply
Wiring Required
(Bit Slaves)
External I/O (sensors or actuators) connected to Bit Slaves using e-CON connectors, clamp terminals, or compact connectors are supplied power from the
CompoNet communications power supply. No separate wiring is required for
I/O power supply.
Industry Standard Sensor
e-CON Connectors
([email protected](-1)/
[email protected]@S(-1)/
[email protected](-1)/
[email protected](-1)/
[email protected]@SP(-1)/
CRT1-VAD04S/
CRT1-VDA02S)
No special tools are required for connections because industry standard eCON connectors are used. Electrical cables do not need to be stripped and
are simply inserted with pliers. When using e-CON connectors, there is no
need to prepare special tools for wiring, and connectors from different makers
can be used interchangeably.
Units with MIL Connectors
([email protected]@@ML(-1)/
CRT1-VAD04ML/
CRT1-VDA02ML)
MIL connectors, widely used in the electronic components and semiconductor
industries, help reduce wiring requirements.
Units with Clamp Terminal
Blocks
([email protected]@@SL(-1)/
CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1))
There is no need to tighten the screws because these Units use screw-less
clamp terminal blocks. Connections are made simply by inserting the pin terminals. Wiring can be completed in one step.
6
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
1-1-3
CompoNet Slave Unit Functions
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Digital I/O Slave Units
2-tier Terminal block
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
Input Units Output Units
Input Units
Output Units
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
I/O Units
--Yes
---
Yes
--Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
7
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History
Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD
Conversion Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time
Count
Input Temperature Variation
Detection
Input Error Detection Disable
Function
Note
8
Digital I/O Slave Units
2-tier Terminal block
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROF16
Output Units
Output Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
Yes
--Yes
---
--Yes
---
--------Yes
--------Yes
---
Yes
---
Yes
--Yes
-------
--Yes
-------
-----------
-------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
Digital I/O Slave Units
3-tier Terminal block
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
(without Short-circuit and
(with Short-circuit and
Disconnected Line Detection)
Disconnected Line Detection)
Input Units
Output Units
Input Units
Output Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
----Yes
--Yes
Yes
--Yes
-----------
Yes
Yes
-----
----Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
9
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Digital I/O Slave Units
3-tier Terminal block
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
(without Short-circuit and
(with Short-circuit and Disconnected
Disconnected Line Detection)
Line Detection)
Function
Input Units
Output
I/O Units Input Units
Output
I/O units
Units
Units
Operation Time Monitor
Yes
Contact Operation Monitor
Yes
Total ON Time Monitor
Yes
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Yes
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Yes
Naming Units
Yes
Naming Connected Devices
Yes
Network Power Voltage Monitor
Yes
I/O Power Status Monitor
Yes
Communications Error History Monitor
Yes
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Yes
--Yes
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
10
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------
Yes
Yes
---
----Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at
I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Digital I/O Slave Units
Units with e-CON Connectors
[email protected](-1)
Input Units
Output Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
----Yes
Yes
-------
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
---------
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
--Yes
-------------------------
Note
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
11
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Digital I/O Slave Units
Units with e-CON Connectors
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
(without Short-circuit and
(with Short-circuit and Disconnected
Disconnected Line Detection)
Line Detection)
Function
Input Units
Output
I/O Units Input Units
Output
I/O units
Units
Units
Operation Time Monitor
Yes
Contact Operation Monitor
Yes
Total ON Time Monitor
Yes
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Yes
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Yes
Naming Units
Yes
Naming Connected Devices
Yes
Network Power Voltage Monitor
Yes
I/O Power Status Monitor
--Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Communications Error History Monitor
Yes
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Yes
--Yes
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
12
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------
Yes
Yes
---
----Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
---
Yes
Yes
------Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Yes
--Yes
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
Digital I/O Slave Units
Units with e-CON Connectors
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
(without Short-circuit and
(with Short-circuit and Disconnected
Disconnected Line Detection)
Line Detection)
Input Units
Output
I/O Units Input Units
Output
I/O units
Units
Units
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------
Yes
Yes
---
----Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
---
Yes
Yes
------Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
13
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
14
Digital I/O Slave Units
Units with MIL Connectors
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
Input Units Output Units
Input Units
Output Units
I/O Units
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
--------------Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by
Inrush Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion
Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
Digital I/O Slave Units
Units with Screw-less Clamp Terminals
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
Input Units Output Units
Input Units
Output Units
I/O Units
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
--Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Yes
--------Yes
----Yes
-------------------------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
15
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Units with 2-tier
Terminal block
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
Input
Output
Units
Units
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush
Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
16
---
Yes
Analog l I/O Slave Units
Units with e-CON
Connectors
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VDA02S
Input
Output
Units
Units
------Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
----Yes
---
Units with MIL
Connectors
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
Input
Output
Units
Units
---
Yes
---
Yes
---
-------------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------------
------Yes
---
Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-------------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---------
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Function
Operation Time Monitor
Contact Operation Monitor
Total ON Time Monitor
Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Naming Units
Naming Connected Devices
Network Power Voltage Monitor
I/O Power Status Monitor
Communications Error History Monitor
Input Filter
Communications Error Output
Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush
Current at I/O Startup
Power Short-circuit Detection
Unconnected Line Detection
Load Short-circuit Detection
Disconnected Line Detection
Removable Terminal Block Structure
Expansion Using Expansion Units
Scaling
Last Maintenance Date
Cumulated Count
Moving Average
Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points
Rate of Change
Comparator
Peak/Bottom Hold
Top/Valley Hold
User Adjustment
Top/Valley Count
Temperature Range Total Time Count
Input Temperature Variation Detection
Input Error Detection Disable Function
Note
Temperature Input Units
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Input Units
------Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
------------Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
17
Section 1-1
Features of CompoNet Slave Units
Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported
Unit
Bit Slave Units
[email protected](-1)
Function
Input
Units
Output
Units
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors
[email protected]@SP(-1)
CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)
Input
Units
Output I/O
Units units
[email protected](-1)
Input
Units
Output
Units
I/O
units
Repea
ter
Unit
[email protected](-1)
Input
Units
CRS1RPT01
Output
I/O
Units units
Operation Time Monitor
Yes
---
---
---
Contact Operation Monitor
Yes
---
---
---
Total ON Time Monitor
Yes
---
---
---
Automatic Baud Rate
Detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Yes
---
---
Yes
Naming Units
Yes
---
---
Yes
Naming Connected Devices
Yes
---
---
---
Network Power Voltage
Monitor
Yes
---
---
Yes
I/O Power Status Monitor
---
---
---
---
Communications Error History
Monitor
Yes
---
---
Yes
Input Filter
Yes
---
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
---
Communications Error Output
---
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
---
Preventing Malfunctions
Caused by Inrush Current at
I/O Startup
Yes
---
Yes
---
Yes
---
---
---
Power Short-circuit Detection
Yes
---
Yes
---
Yes
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Unconnected Line Detection
---
Load Short-circuit Detection
---
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Disconnected Line Detection
---
---
---
---
Removable Terminal Block
Structure
---
---
---
---
Expansion Using Expansion
Units
---
---
---
---
Scaling
---
---
---
---
Last Maintenance Date
Yes
---
---
Yes
Cumulated Count
---
---
---
---
Moving Average
---
---
---
---
Setting the Number of AD
Conversion Points
---
---
---
---
Rate of Change
---
---
---
---
Comparator
---
---
---
---
Peak/Bottom Hold
---
---
---
---
Top/Valley Hold
---
---
---
---
User Adjustment
---
---
---
---
Top/Valley Count
---
---
---
---
Temperature Range Total
Time Count
---
---
---
---
Input Temperature Variation
Detection
---
---
---
---
Input Error Detection Disable
Function
---
---
---
---
Note
18
The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be
used at the same time for the same contact.
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
1-2
Slave Unit Models
CompoNet Slave Units can be classified into the following groups.
Word Slave Units
Word Slave Units are Slave Units that are allocated units of 16 bits (i.e.,
1 word) in I/O memory of the CPU Unit.
Digital I/O Slave Units:
Slave Units with digital I/O
Analog I/O Slave Units:
Slave Units with analog I/O
Temperature Input Units: Slave Units with temperature inputs
Expansion Units:
Bit Slave Units
Units that can be used to expand the number of I/O
points for Digital I/O Slave Units (with 2-tier terminal blocks and 16 points).
Bit Slave Units are Slave Units that are allocated units of 2 bits in I/O memory
of the CPU Unit.
Bit Slave Units :
Bit Slave Units are Slave Units with 2 points or 4
points of digital I/O. They come with a Standard or
Sheathed Flat Cable included.
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors:
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors are Slave
Units with 2 points or 4 points of digital I/O. They
have built-in compact connectors for the I/O interface that support connections with communications
cables using internal hook communications connectors.
Repeater Units
Units that can be used to expand the network by extending trunk lines or
branching.
19
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
1-2-1
Word Slave Units
Digital I/O Slave Units
Terminal Block with
Screws
Type
Digital I/O Slave Units
with 2-tier Terminal
Block
Appearance
WO
MS
RD
NO
OM
DE
AD
R
0
RO
N
1
2
OU
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
11
3 14
121
15
Model
CRT1-ID08
8 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID08-1
8 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD08
8 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD08-1
16 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-ID16
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID16-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD16
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD16-1
T
X1
X10 63]
[0-
NS
I/O capacity
8 inputs (NPN)
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16
(NPN)
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16-1
(PNP)
20
8 outputs (relay
outputs)
8 outputs
(SSR outputs)
CRT1-ROS08
16 outputs
(relay outputs)
16 outputs
(SSR outputs)
CRT1-ROS16
Features
• Terminal blocks can be attached/
removed from the Unit.
• Expansion Units cannot be
added.
• Terminal blocks can be attached/
removed from the Unit.
• Expansion Units can be added.
• Terminal blocks can be attached/
removed from the Unit.
• Expansion Units cannot be
added.
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROF16
• Terminal blocks can be attached/
removed from the Unit.
• Expansion Units can be added.
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Type
Digital I/O Slave
Units with 3-tier
Terminal Block
Appearance
Without
Short-circuit and
Disconnected
Line
Detection
With
Short-circuit and
Disconnected
Line
Detection
Without
Short-circuit and
Disconnected
Line
Detection
With
Short-circuit and
Disconnected
Line
Detection
I/O capacity
8 inputs (NPN)
Model
CRT1-ID08TA
8 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID08TA-1
8 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD08TA
8 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD08TA-1
8 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-ID08TAH
8 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID08TAH-1
8 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD08TAH
8 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD08TAH-1
16 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-ID16TA
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID16TA-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD16TA
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD16TA-1
Features
• Terminal blocks can be
attached/removed from
the Unit.
• Expansion Units cannot
be added.
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TA
(NPN)
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TA-1
(PNP)
16 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-ID16TAH
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID16TAH-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD16TAH
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD16TAH-1
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TAH
(NPN)
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TAH-1
(PNP)
21
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Units with Connectors
Type
Digital I/O Slave
Units with e-CON
Connectors
Appearance
Without
Shortcircuit
and Disconnected
Line
Detection
With
Shortcircuit
and Disconnected
Line
Detection
Without
Shortcircuit
and Disconnected
Line
Detection
With
Shortcircuit
and Disconnected
Line
Detection
22
I/O capacity
Model
8 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-VID08S
8 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-VID08S-1
8 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-VOD08S
8 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-VOD08S-1
16 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-ID16S
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID16S-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD16S
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD16S-1
8 inputs and 8
outputs (NPN)
8 inputs and 8
outputs (PNP)
16 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-MD16S
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID16SH-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD16SH
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD16SH-1
8 inputs and 8
outputs (NPN)
8 inputs and 8
outputs (PNP)
32 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-MD16SH
32 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID32S-1
32 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD32S
32 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD32S-1
16 inputs and 16
outputs (NPN)
16 inputs and 16
outputs (PNP)
32 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-MD32S
32 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID32SH-1
32 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD32SH
32 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD32SH-1
16 inputs and 16
outputs (NPN)
16 inputs and 16
outputs (PNP)
CRT1-MD32H
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-ID16SH
CRT1-MD16SH-1
CRT1-ID32S
CRT1-MD32S-1
CRT1-ID32SH
CRT1-MD32H-1
Features
• Equipped with e-CON
connectors.
• Expansion Units cannot
be added.
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Type
Digital I/O Slave Units
with MIL Connectors
Appearance
I/O capacity
16 inputs (NPN)
Model
CRT1-VID16ML
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-VID16ML-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-VOD16ML
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-VOD16ML-1
32 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-VID32ML
32 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-VID32ML-1
32 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-VOD32ML
32 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-VOD32ML-1
16 inputs/16
outputs (NPN)
16 inputs/16
outputs (PNP)
CRT1-VMD32ML
Features
• Equipped with MIL connectors.
• Expansion Units cannot be
added.
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Type
Digital I/O Slave
Units with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks
Appearance
I/O capacity
8 inputs (NPN)
Model
CRT1-ID08SL
8 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID08SL-1
8 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD08SL
8 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD08SL-1
16 inputs (NPN)
CRT1-ID16SL
16 inputs (PNP)
CRT1-ID16SL-1
16 outputs (NPN)
CRT1-OD16SL
16 outputs (PNP)
CRT1-OD16SL-1
Features
• Equipped with screw-less clamp
terminals.
• Expansion Units cannot be
added.
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16SL
(NPN)
8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16SL-1
(PNP)
23
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Analog I/O Slave Units
Terminal Block with
Screws
Type
Analog I/O Slave
Units with 2-tier Terminal Block
Appearance
A/D
MS
NS
WO
NO
RD
DE
AD
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW1
2
ON
T
INPU GE
0,1
RAN
T
CH
INPU GE
3
2,3
RAN
4
CH
5
6
I/O capacity
4 inputs
Model
CRT1-AD04
2 outputs
CRT1-DA02
I/O capacity
4 inputs
Model
CRT1-VAD04S
2 outputs
CRT1-VDA02S
4 inputs
CRT1-VAD04ML
2 outputs
CRT1-VDA02ML
X1
X10 63]
[0-
04
AD
T1- AL
CR MIN
N TER
RO G
ALO
OM
AN
Features
I/O range:
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V, −10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA,
4 to 20 mA
Units with Connectors
Type
Analog I/O Slave
Units with e-CON
Connectors
Analog I/O Slave
Units with MIL Connectors
24
Appearance
Features
I/O range:
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V, −10 to 10 V,
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Temperature Input Units
Type
Temperature Input
Units with 2-tier Terminal Block
Appearance
A/D
MS
NS
WO
NO
RD
DE
AD
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW1
2
ON
T
INPU GE
0,1
RAN
T
CH
INPU GE
3
2,3
RAN
4
CH
5
I/O capacity
4 inputs
Model
CRT1-TS04T
6
X1
X10 63]
[0-
04
AD
T1- AL
CR MIN
N TER
RO G
ALO
OM
AN
CRT1-TS04P
Features
Thermocouple input (Switchable
between R, S, K, J, T, E, B, N, L, U,
W, and PL2.)
Platinum resistance thermometer
input (PT100 only)
Expansion Units
Type
Expansion Units with
2-tier Terminal Block
Appearance
I/O capacity
8 inputs (NPN)
8 inputs (PNP)
8 outputs (NPN)
8 outputs (PNP)
16 inputs (NPN)
16 inputs (PNP)
16 outputs (NPN)
16 outputs (PNP)
Model
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-ID16
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD16
XWT-OD16-1
Features
• Expansion Units are used to add
points to Digital. I/O Slave Units
with 2-tier terminal blocks and 16
points.
• One Expansion Unit can be added
to one Slave Unit.
25
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
1-2-2
Bit Slave Units
Slaves with Connectors
Type
Bit Slave Units with
e-CON Connectors
Appearance
I/O capacity
2 inputs (NPN)
Model
CRT1B-ID02S
2 inputs (PNP)
CRT1B-ID02S-1
2 outputs (NPN)
CRT1B-OD02S
2 outputs (PNP)
CRT1B-OD02S-1
2 inputs (NPN)
2 inputs (PNP)
2 outputs (NPN)
2 outputs (PNP)
CRT1B-ID02SP
CRT1B-ID02SP-1
CRT1B-OD02SP
CRT1B-OD02SP1
CRT1B-ID04SP
CRT1B-ID04SP-1
CRT1B-ID02JS
CRT1B-ID02JS-1
4 inputs (NPN)
4 inputs (PNP)
2 inputs (NPN)
2 inputs (PNP)
Bit Slave Units with
Compact Connectors
2 outputs (NPN)
2 outputs (PNP)
1 input/1output
(NPN)
1 input/1output
(PNP)
4 inputs (NPN)
4 inputs (PNP)
4 outputs (NPN)
4 outputs (PNP)
2 inputs/2 outputs
(NPN)
2 inputs/2 outputs
(PNP)
Features
• Standard Flat Cable connected as
standard feature.
• Sheathed Flat Cable connected as
standard feature.
• IP54 dust-tight and splash-proof
• Compact, space-saving design
• Internal hook communications connectors
CRT1B-OD02JS
• Network power supply
CRT1B-OD02JS-1
• Multidrop connections are supCRT1B-MD02JS
ported for DCN4 Flat Cable I (sold
separately).
CRT1B-MD02JS-1
CRT1B-ID04JS
CRT1B-ID04JS-1
CRT1B-OD04JS
CRT1B-OD04JS-1
CRT1B-MD04JS
CRT1B-MD04JS-1
Slaves with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Type
Bit Slave Units with
Screw-less Clamp
Terminal Blocks
Appearance
Note
26
I/O capacity
2 inputs/2 outputs
(NPN)
2 inputs/2 outputs
(PNP)
Model
Features
CRT1B-MD04SLP • Sheathed Flat Cable connected as
standard feature.
• IP54 dust-tight and splash-proof
CRT1BMD04SLP-1
Bit Slave Unit models with a Standard or Sheathed Flat Cable included do not
support a baud rate of 4 Mbps. (Branching is not possible.)
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
1-2-3
Repeater Units
Appearance
T
RP
S
MS
RT2
PO
X1
1
RT
PO
0 3]
X1 -6
LY
[0
01 SUPP
R
N RT ER
AD
T
PR DE
RO 1-P K POW
NO
OM S
CR
1-2-4
OR
TW
NE
24V
DC PUT
IN
Specification
Two communications connectors (Upstream port and downstream port)
One downstream port power
supply connector
Up to 64 Units can be connected for each Master Unit.
Model
CRS1-RPT01
Features
• For trunk line-branch line formations, sub-trunk
lines can be connected under a Repeater Unit
just like they can be under the Master Unit.
• For unrestricted branching formations, there are
no restrictions on the connections.
• Repeater Units enable branching the trunk line,
adding more nodes, increasing the connection
distance, and changing the type of cable
upstream and downstream of the Repeater Unit.
Slave Unit Installation and Connection
Installing Slave Units
Refer to the following table for the installation and wiring methods for the
Slave Units.
Slave Unit Installation and
Wiring Methods
Name
Digital With 2-tier TerI/O
minal Block
Slave
Units
With 3-tier Terminal Block
Model
CRT1-ID08(-1)
CRT1-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1)
Slave Unit I/O connection
installation
method
DIN Track
Terminal block
with M3 screws
Internal power
External power
An external I/O
Supplied along
with communica- power supply is
required for contions power
nected devices.
CRT1-OD16(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ID08TA(-1)
CRT1-OD08TA(-1)
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)
CRT1-ID16TA(-1)
CRT1-OD16TA(-1)
CRT1-MD16TA(-1)
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
27
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Name
Digital With e-CON
I/O
Connectors
Slave
Units
Model
CRT1-VID08S(-1)
DIN Track
or Mounting Bracket
CRT1-VOD08S(-1)
CRT1-ID16S(-1)
CRT1-OD16S(-1)
CRT1-MD16S(-1)
CRT1-ID16SH(-1)
CRT1-OD16SH(-1)
CRT1-MD16SH(-1)
CRT1-ID32S(-1)
CRT1-OD32S(-1)
CRT1-MD32S(-1)
CRT1-ID32SH(-1)
CRT1-OD32SH(-1)
CRT1-MD32SH(-1)
28
Slave Unit I/O connection
installation
method
DIN Track
e-CON connectors
Internal power
External power
Shared with comSupplied along
with communica- munications power
supply. (See note.)
tions power
I/O power must be
supplied externally
for connected
devices.
Shared with communications power
supply. (See note.)
I/O power must be
supplied externally
for connected
devices.
Shared with communications power
supply only for
inputs. (See note.)
Shared with communications power
supply. (See note.)
I/O power must be
supplied externally
for connected
devices.
Shared with communications power
supply only for
inputs. (See note.)
Shared with communications power
supply. (See note.)
I/O power must be
supplied externally
for connected
devices.
Shared with communications power
supply only for
inputs. (See note.)
Shared with communications power
supply. (See note.)
I/O power must be
supplied externally
for connected
devices.
Shared with communications power
supply only for
inputs. (See note.)
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Name
Model
Digital With MIL ConI/O
nectors
Slave
Units
CRT1-VID16ML(-1)
CRT1-VOD16ML(-1)
CRT1-VID32ML(-1)
CRT1-VOD32ML(-1)
CRT1-VMD32ML(-1)
With Screw-less CRT1-ID08SL(-1)
Clamp Terminal CRT1-OD08SL(-1)
Blocks
CRT1-ID16SL(-1)
CRT1-OD16SL(-1)
CRT1-MD16SL(-1)
AnaWith 2-tier
CRT1-AD04
log I/O Terminal Block
CRT1-DA02
Slave
With
e-CON
CRT1-VAD04S
Units
Connectors
CRT1-VDA02S
With MIL
CRT1-VAD04ML
Connectors
CRT1-VDA02ML
Temperature Input Units CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Digital I/O Slave Units
XWT-ID08(-1)
Expansion Units
XWT-OD08(-1)
XWT-ID16(-1)
XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1B-ID02S(-1)
With
Bit
Slave e-CON
CRT1B-OD02S(-1)
Units ConnecIP54 CRT1B-ID02SP(-1)
tors
CRT1B-OD02SP(-1)
CRT1B-ID04SP(-1)
With
IP54 CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)
Screwless
Clamp
Terminal
Blocks
With Compact
CRT1B-ID02JS(-1)
Connectors
CRT1B-OD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-ID04JS(-1)
CRT1B-OD04JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD04JS(-1)
Repeater Units
CRS1-RPT01
Note
Slave Unit I/O connection
installation
method
DIN Track
or Mounting Bracket
MIL connectors
DIN Track
Screw-less
clamp terminal
block
Terminal block
with M3 screws
Internal power
External power
I/O power must be
Supplied along
with communica- supplied externally
for connected
tions power
devices.
---
e-CON
DIN Track
or Mounting connectors
Bracket
MIL connectors
DIN Track
Terminal block
with M3 screws
Refer to the following section.
M4 screw
installation
e-CON connectors
Supplied along with
communications
power (See note.)
Screw-less
clamp terminal
block
M4 screen
mounting
using
CRT1BATT03
Mounting
Bracket
Compact connectors
DIN Track
or M4
screw
installation
---
Communications
power for the downstream line must be
supplied from the
communications
power supply connector.
For Bit Slave Units, the external I/O (sensor and actuator) power is also provided through the Flat Cable from the communications power supply connected to the Master Unit or the Repeater Unit. When calculating the output
current of the communications power supply, always include the external I/O
current consumption for Bit Slave Units.
29
Section 1-2
Slave Unit Models
Supplying I/O Power
to Expansion Units
Supply I/O power to Expansion Slave Units according to the following table.
Combination
I/O power supply to
Expansion Slave Unit
Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit
Not required (The Expansion
Unit uses the same I/O power
Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-ID16 (or XWT-ID08)
supply as the Digital I/O Slave
Unit.)
Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Output Unit Required (I/O power must be
Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-OD16 (or XWT-OD08) supplied to both Units.)
Digital Output Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit Required (I/O power must be
Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-ID16 (or XWT-ID08) supplied to both Units.)
Digital Output Slave Unit with Expansion Output
Required (I/O power must be
Unit
supplied to both Units.)
Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-OD16 (or XWTOD08)
Devices for Connection to CompoNet Communications
Refer to the following for information on cables and connectors for connection
to CompoNet communications.
• 2-3-1 Cables That Can Be Used
• 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors
• 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
30
SECTION 2
Wiring Configurations
This section describes the configurations of CompoNet Networks.
2-1
CompoNet Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2-1-1
Overall System Configuration and Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
2-1-2
Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
2-2
Wiring Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-3
Communications Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
2-3-1
Cables That Can Be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
2-3-2
Criteria for Selecting Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
2-3-3
Maximum Distance and Number of Connected Units for Types of
Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
Communications Cable Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
2-4-1
Round Cable I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
2-4-2
Round Cable II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
2-4-3
Flat Cable I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
2-4
31
Section 2-1
CompoNet Networks
2-1
2-1-1
CompoNet Networks
Overall System Configuration and Elements
A CompoNet Network is a remote I/O system that consists of the following
elements.
System Configuration Example
: Repeater Unit
CompoNet Master Unit
: Terminating Resistor
: T-branch
Branch
line
: Multidrop
Slave Unit
Trunk line
Sub-trunk line
Repeater Unit
Terminating
Resistor
Branch line
Repeater Unit
Repeater
Unit
Branch line
Slave Unit
Repeater
Unit
Terminating
Resistor
Sub-trunk line
Terminating
Resistor
Branch line
Sub-trunk
line
Branch
line
Terminating
Resistor
Sub-trunk
line
Sub-trunk line
Repeater
Unit
Branch line
Terminating
Resistor
Branch line
Sub-branch
lines
Terminating
Resistor
Multidrop connection on branch line
Communications Cables
CompoNet Networks use round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I (DCA44F10 Standard Flat Cable), and Flat Cable II (DCA5-4F10 Sheathed Flat
Cable) for Communications Cables.
Master Unit
The Master Unit manages the CompoNet Network and transfers I/O data
between the PLC and the Slave Units.
There is only one Master Unit per network. The Master Unit must be connected to the trunk line.
32
Section 2-1
CompoNet Networks
Slave Units
Some Slave Units receive output data from the Master Unit across the CompoNet Network and output it. Other Slave Units send data that has been input
across the network to the Master Unit. There are two types of Slave Unit
according to the I/O capacity of the Slave Unit.
• Word Slave Units: A Word Slave Unit is allocated 16 bits (i.e., 16 I/O
points) in the I/O memory of the CPU Unit.
• Bit Slave Units: A Bit Slave Unit is allocated 2 bits (i.e., 2 I/O points) in the
I/O memory of the CPU Unit.
Repeater Unit
Using Repeater Units enables expanding network connections as follows:
• Extending the Communications Cable
• Increasing the number of nodes (Units)
• Creating long-distance T-branches from the trunk line and sub-trunk lines
(See note.)
• Converting between different types of cable (round cable I, round cable II,
Flat Cable I, and Flat Cable II)
A sub-trunk line downstream from a Repeater Unit can be connected with the
same communications specifications (i.e., distances and number of Slave
Units) as the trunk line.
Up to 64 Repeater Units can be connected per network (i.e., per Master Unit).
When Repeater Units are connected in series from the Master Unit, up to two
layers can be created.
Note
Terminating Resistors
With a CompoNet Network, the Master Unit is located at one end of the trunk
line and a Terminating Resistor is connected to the other end of the trunk line.
If Repeater Units are used, each Repeater Unit is treated like a Master Unit,
i.e., Terminating Resistor is connected to the most remote end of the subtrunk line downstream from the Repeater Unit.
Note
Trunk Lines and Branch
Lines
The physical layer is not connected across a Repeater Unit. The
connection is thus different from a branch connection, which
branches the same physical layer.
A Terminating Resistor reduces signal bouncing to stabilize communications and must always be connected to the most remote end
of the network lines below the Master Unit and each Repeater Unit.
Always connect a Terminating Resistor to ensure the quality of the
transmission path.
The trunk lines and branch lines in a CompoNet Network are defined as follows:
• Trunk line: The transmission path between the Master Unit and the Terminating Resistor.
• Sub-trunk line: The transmission path between the Repeater Unit and the
Terminating Resistor (when a Repeater Unit is used)
• Branch line: The transmission path created using a T-branch from the
trunk line or sub-trunk line.
• Sub-branch line: The transmission path created using a T-branch from a
branch line. (T-branching is not possible from sub-branch lines.)
Note
Branches
Due to differences in functionality, the same type of cable must be
used between the trunk line and a branch line, a sub-trunk line and
a branch line, and a branch line and a sub-branch line. Different
types of cable can be used between the trunk line and a sub-trunk
line.
There are two ways to create branch lines.
33
Section 2-1
CompoNet Networks
1) T-branch Connections
• T-branch connections using Flat Connectors (when Flat Cable I or Flat
Cable II is used)
• T-branch connections using commercially available relay terminals (when
round cable I or round cable II is used)
2) Multidrop Connections
• Multidrop connections using Flat Connectors and Multidrop Connectors
(when Flat Cable I or Flat Cable II is used)
• Multidrop connections using Open Type Connectors (when round cable I
or round cable II is used)
Note
Communications Power
Supply
Flat Connectors can also be used to extend the Communications
Cable.
This is the power supply for communications and internal operations for each
Unit.
A commercially available 24-VDC power supply is used for communications
and internal operations in each Unit.
One communications power supply can be connected for a trunk line or a subtrunk line. Communications power is supplied to the trunk line from the Master
Unit and to a sub-trunk line from the Repeater Unit.
One power supply cannot be used to supply communications power to more
than one line (i.e., to the trunk line and sub-trunk line or to two sub-trunk
lines).
I/O Power Supply
2-1-2
A commercially available 24-VDC power supply is used to power the I/O operations of the external I/O device connected to a Unit. It is connected to the I/O
power supply terminal of the Unit.
Segments
Segment Layers
When Repeater Units are used, the CompoNet Network is divided into segments by the Repeater Units. Each segment is connected to the network, but
is isolated electrically. Three layers of these isolated segments can be configured, called segments 1, 2, and 3, counted in order from the Master Unit.
Repeater Units can be used to add a maximum of two extra segment layers.
Therefore, up to two extra segment layers can be created from the Master
Unit using Repeater Units. Accordingly, you can expand the length of one
trunk line and one branch line to up to 1,500 m (500 m × 3, 93.75 kbps).
Including Repeater Units connected using multidrop connections, a maximum
of 64 Repeater Units can be connected in a single network (i.e., to a single
Master Unit).
34
Section 2-2
Wiring Formations
: Repeater Unit
Master Unit
: Terminating Resistor
: T-branch
Branch
line
Slave Unit
: Multidrop
Segment 2
Trunk line
Sub-trunk line
Repeater
Unit
Segment 1
Terminating
Resistor
Branch line
Repeater
Unit
Repeater
Unit
Slave Unit
Segment 3
Terminating
Resistor
Sub-trunk line
Branch line
Branch line
Repeater Unit
Sub-trunk line
Terminating
Resistor
Segment 3
Branch
line
Terminating
Resistor
Segment 3
Sub-trunk line
Segment 2
Sub-trunk line
Repeater
Unit
Terminating
Resistor
Branch
line
Branch
line
Sub-trunk
line
Terminating
Resistor
Multidrop
Number of Units Per
Segment
2-2
A maximum of 32 Slave Units and Repeater Units can be connected in one
segment.
Wiring Formations
There are two possible wiring formations for a CompoNet Network.
Trunk Line-Branch
Line Formation
With this wiring formation, the trunk line is differentiated from branch lines and
there are restrictions on the number of branches and the number of connections.
Master Unit
Trunk line
Terminating Resistor
Branch line
Slave Unit
Branch line
Slave Unit
Branch line
Slave Unit
35
Section 2-2
Wiring Formations
Unrestricted Wiring
Formation
With this wiring formation, there is no distinction between the trunk line and
branch lines. Wiring can be performed without restrictions as long as the total
cable length per segment is no longer than 200 m. There is also no limit in the
number of branches.
Master Unit
Segment range
Terminating
Resistor
Segment range
Repeater Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Terminating
Resistor
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Relation between Baud
Rate and Communications
Cable
The Cables that can be used and the required baud rates are automatically
determined by whether a trunk line-branch line formation or an unrestricted
wiring formation is used.
Cable type
Round cable I
Round cable II
Flat Cable I
Flat Cable II
Note
Baud rate
4 Mbps
3 Mbps
1.5 Mbps
Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line branch line wir- branch line wir- branch line wiring formation
ing formation
ing formation
(See note 1.)
--- (See note
2.)
93.75 kbps
Trunk line branch line wiring formation
Unrestricted
wiring formations
(1) If a baud rate of 4 Mbps is used, branching is not possible from the trunk
line. (Only multidrop connections are possible.)
(2) If a baud rate of 4 Mbps is used, branching and multidrop connections are
not possible from the trunk line. (There are no Multidrop Connectors for
Flat Cable II.)
The following table shows the conditions and restrictions for each formation.
Item
Master Unit location
Maximum number of Slave
Units connected to any one
branch line
Terminating Resistor location
36
Wiring formation
Trunk line-branch line formation
Unrestricted wiring formation
End of network
Anywhere in network (not necessarily at the
end)
1 or 3 depending on the cable type and
No restrictions
baud rate
On the opposite ends of the trunk line and On the most remote ends from the Master
all sub-trunk lines from the Master Unit and Unit and each Repeater Unit
each Repeater Unit
Section 2-3
Communications Cable
2-3
2-3-1
Communications Cable
Cables That Can Be Used
The following four types of cable can be used in a CompoNet network.
Round cable I
Check with the manufacturer for applicable CompoNet products.
Use commercially available VCTF cable with two 0.75-mm2 conductors (JIS
C3306) that meet CompoNet specifications.
Blue or black: BDL
Round cable II
White: BDH
Check with the manufacturer for applicable CompoNet products.
Use commercially available VCTF cable with four 0.75-mm2 conductors (JIS
C3306) that meet CompoNet specifications.
Red: BS+
White: BDH
Green or Blue: BDL
Black: BS−
Flat Cable I (DCA4-4F10 Standard Flat Cable)
Red: BS+
White: BDH Blue: BDL Black: BS−
Conductor No.
Insulation
color
1
Red
2
White
3
4
Blue
Black
Application
Nominal
cross-section
BS+ (communications power 0.75 mm2
supply positive side)
BDH (signal high)
0.5 mm2
BDL (signal low)
BS− (communications power
supply negative side)
0.5 mm2
0.75 mm2
Allowable
current (A)
5 max.
----5 max.
CompoNet-compatible products other than DCA4-4F10 can be used. Confirm
applicability with the manufacturer.
37
Section 2-3
Communications Cable
Flat Cable II (DCA5-4F10 Sheathed Flat Cable)
Red: BS+
White: BDH Blue: BDL Black: BS−
Conductor No.
Insulation
color
1
Red
2
White
3
4
Blue
Black
Application
Nominal
cross-section
BS+ (communications power 0.75 mm2
supply positive side)
BDH (signal high)
0.5 mm2
BDL (signal low)
BS− (communications power
supply negative side)
mm2
0.5
0.75 mm2
Allowable
current (A)
5 max.
----5 max.
CompoNet-compatible products other than DCA5-4F10 can be used. Confirm
applicability with the manufacturer.
Note
(3) The characteristics of each conductor in Flat Cable I and Flat Cable II
have been adjusted to the application. Check the line insulator colors and
use each line only for the application given in the above table.
(4) For information on applicable CompoNet products and manufacturers, refer to the ODVA home page.
http://www.odva.org/
2-3-2
Criteria for Selecting Cables
Selecting Cable Types
Item
Application
Slave
Unit
connections
38
Word Slave Units
Bit Slave
Units (com- IP54 Bit
munications Slave
section Flat Units
Cable standard connection)
Bit Slave Unit (communications section connector)
Select the cable type using the following items as conditions.
Cable type
Round cable I
Round cable II
Flat Cable I
Flat Cable II
• When using com- • When using com- • To supply commu- • To supply communications power to
nications power to
mercially available
mercially available
all Slave Units with all Slave Units with
cable is desirable.
cable is desirable.
the communicathe communica• To provide commu- • To supply commutions cable.
tions cable.
nications power to
nications power
• Applications in
all Slave Units with
separately.
environments that
the communicarequired IP54 comtions cable.
pliance (drip-proof,
splash-proof).
Supported.
Supported. (See
note 2.)
Not supported. (See Not supported. (See Supported.
Not supported.
note 1.)
note 1.)
Not supported.
Supported.
Supported.
Supported. (See
note 2.)
Section 2-3
Communications Cable
Item
Wiring method for communications power supply
Master Unit location
Note
Cable type
Round cable II
Flat Cable I
Flat Cable II
Supplied via Communications Cable. (Power is supplied from the
Master Unit and Repeater Units.)
Round cable I
Wired separately
from the Communications Cable.
End of trunk line
Baud rate other than 93.75 kbps: End of trunk line
93.75 kbps: Anywhere in network
(1) Bit Slave that come with a flat cable already connected cannot be connected if the preconnected cable is removed.
(2) If a baud rate of 4 Mbps is used, branching and multidrop connections are
not possible from the trunk line. (There are no Multidrop Connectors for
Flat Cable II.)
Using Different Cable
Types
The same type of cable must be used for all lines downstream from the Master Unit (i.e., the trunk line and branch lines, sub-trunk lines and their branch
lines, and branch lines and sub-branch lines must use the same type of
cable).
When Repeater Units are used, however, different cables can be used for the
trunk line and sub-trunk lines, and for sub-trunk lines and sub-trunk lines,
above and below a Repeater Unit.
Master
Unit
The same type of cable must be used.
Cable (trunk line)
Different types of cable can be used.
Repeater Unit
Cable (sub-trunk line)
Slave Unit
Note
The same type of cable must be used.
Slave Unit
Round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I (Standard) and Flat Cable II
(Sheathed) are treated as different types of cable.
Restrictions in Distance between Cables of Multiple CompoNet Systems
When using more than one CompoNet System with Flat Cable I or II, operation may be unstable due to interference. To prevent this, the Flat Cables for
the different CompoNet Systems must be separated from each other by at
least 5 mm.
39
Section 2-3
Communications Cable
2-3-3
Maximum Distance and Number of Connected Units for Types of
Communications Cables
The maximum cable lengths for each segment are shown below, along with
the maximum number of Slave Units that can be connected. Do not exceed
these limits.
Master Unit
Sub-trunk line length
Terminating
Resistor
Branch
line length
Sub-trunk line length
Sub-trunk line length
Branch
line length
Branch
line length
Sub-trunk line length
Sub-trunk line length
Slave Units
Sub-branch
line length
Sub-trunk line length
Branch line
length
Branch line length
Branch line length
Repeater
Unit
Branch line length
Trunk line length
Baud Rate of 4 Mbps (No Branching, See note.)
Item
Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line
Branch line length
Total branch line length
Restrictions on branch line locations
Round cable I/II
Flat Cable I
30 m (90 m)
30 m (90 m)
Lines cannot be branched from the
trunk line. (Only multidrop connections
are possible from the trunk line or subtrunk lines.)
Number of Slave Units (including Repeater 32
32
Units)
Note
Bit Slave Units come with Flat Cable and cannot be connected. Also, there is
no applicable connector for multidrop connections for Flat Cable II, and therefore multidrop connection cannot be made.
Baud Rate of 3 Mbps
Item
Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line
Branch line length
Total branch line length
Restrictions on branch line locations
Number of Units per branch (See note 1.)
Maximum sub-branch line length
Total sub-branch line length
Number of Slave Units (including Repeater
Units)
40
Round cable I/II
30 m (90 m)
0.5 m
8m
3/m
1
Not supported.
Not supported.
32
Flat Cable I/II
30 m (90 m)
0.5 m
8m
3/m
1
Not supported.
Not supported.
32
Section 2-3
Communications Cable
Baud Rate of
1.5 Mbps
Item
Round cable I
Without
With
branch- branching
ing
Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line
100 m
30 m
(300m) (90m)
Branch line length
Not sup- 2.5 m
ported.
(See
note 2.)
Total branch line length
Not sup- 25 m
ported.
(See
note 2.)
Restrictions on branch line locations
--3/m
Number of Units per branch (See note 1.)
3
Maximum sub-branch line length
Not supported.
Total sub-branch line length
Not supported.
Number of Slave Units (including Repeater 32
32
Units)
Note
Round cable II
Flat Cable I/II
30 m (90 m)
2.5 m
25 m
3/m
3
0.1 m (See note 3.)
2 m (See note 3.)
32
(1) The number of Units per branch is the maximum number of Slave Units
or Repeater Units that can be connected to one branch using multidrop
or T-branch connections (sub-branch lines).
(2) Lines cannot be branched from the trunk line. (Only multidrop connections are possible from the trunk line or sub-trunk lines.)
(3) Sub-branch lines can be branched from branch lines.
Baud Rate of
93.75 kbps
Item
Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line
Branch line length
Total branch line length
Restrictions on branch line locations
Number of Units per branch (See note.)
Maximum sub-branch line length
Total sub-branch line length
Number of Slave Units (including Repeater
Units)
Note
Round cable I
500 m
6m
120 m
3/m
1
----32
Round cable II
Flat Cable I/II
Unrestricted wiring
is enabled for a total
length of 200 m.
32
The number of Units per branch is the maximum number of Slave Units or
Repeater Units that can be connected to one branch using multidrop or Tbranch connections (sub-branch lines).
41
Section 2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples
2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples
The following wiring is required in a CompoNet Network.
• Two communications signal lines (communications data): BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications data low)
• Two communications power supply lines (power for communications and
internal Slave Unit circuits): BS+ (communications power supply plus
side) and BS− (communications power supply minus side)
The wiring method depends on the type of cable that is used.
2-4-1
Round Cable I
• Connect the two communications signal lines in parallel between the Master Unit or Repeater Unit and multiple Slave Units.
• Use Open Type Connectors (DCN4-TB4, for connecting Units) to connect
Communications Cables to Master Units, Repeater Units, and Slave
Units.
• To supply the communications power (24 VDC), connect the two communications power supply lines to each Slave Unit separately from the Communications Cables.
• Power is not supplied to the Master Unit or Repeater Units.
• A Terminating Resistor (DRS1-T) must be connected at the end of the
network.
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
Relay terminal block
BS+
BDH
Two communications
signal lines
BDL
BS−
Communications
Communications
Communications
Open Connector
Slave Unit
BS+
BS−
BDH BDL
Slave Unit
BS+
BS−
BDH BDL
Slave Unit
BS+
BS−
BDH BDL
Open Connector
24-VDC
communications
power supply
24-VDC
communications
power supply
24-VDC
communications
power supply
Slave Units can also be connected in parallel using multidrop connections.
42
Section 2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS−
Communications
Open Connector
Communications
Communications
Slave Unit
BS+
BS−
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
BS+
BS−
BS+
BS−
BDH BDL
BDH BDL
BDH BDL
24-VDC
communications
power supply
24-VDC
communications
power supply
24-VDC
communications
power supply
Open Connector
2-4-2
Round Cable II
• Connect the two communications signal lines and two communications
power lines in parallel between the Master Unit or Repeater Unit and multiple Slave Units.
• Use Open Type Connectors (DCN4-TB4, for connecting Units) to connect
Communications Cables to Master Units, Repeater Units, and Slave
Units.
• Connect the communications power supply (24 VDC) to the communications power supply connector for the Master Unit or Repeater Unit.
• Connect DCN4-TM4 Terminating Resistors and DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets at the ends of the network.
43
Section 2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Communications
power supply
connector
24-VDC
communications
power supply
Communications
power
Relay terminal block
Two communications
power lines
Two communications
signal lines
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS-
Open Connector
Slave Unit
BS+ BDH BDL BS-
Slave Unit
BS+ BDH BDL BS-
Slave Unit
BS+ BDH BDL BS-
Open Connector
Slave Units can also be connected in parallel using multidrop connections.
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Communications
power
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
BS+
BDH
BDL
Two communications
signal lines
BS-
Two communications
power lines
Open Connector
BS+ BDH BDL BS-
Slave Unit
Open Connector
44
BS+ BDH BDL BS-
Slave Unit
BS+ BDH BDL BS-
Slave Unit
Section 2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples
2-4-3
Flat Cable I/II
• The two communications signal lines and the two communications power
supply lines are connected to the Master Unit, Repeater Units, and Slave
Units using Flat Cable.
• Connect the communications power supply (24 VDC) to the communications power supply connector for the Master Unit or Repeater Unit.
• A Terminating Resistor (DCN4-TM4 or DCN5-TM4) must be connected at
the end of the network.
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Communications Communications
power supply
power supply,
connector
24 VDC
Flat Cable
• Communications signal lines: BS+ (red) and BS− (black)
• Communications power supply lines: BDH (white) and BDL (blue)
Communications
power
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
Communications
connector
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Units can also be connected in parallel by using multidrop connections.
A DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector is required for this. (Only Flat Cable I can
be used.)
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Communications
power supply
connector
Communications
power
Communications
power supply,
24 VDC
Flat Cable I
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
Flat Connector Plug
Multidrop Connector
Communications
connector
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
45
Section 2-4
Communications Cable Wiring Examples
DCN4-MR4 Flat Multidrop Connectors are used for multidrop connections for
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors. (Only Flat Cable I can be used.)
Side of Bit Slave Units with
Compact Connectors
Master Unit or
Repeater Unit
Communications
power supply
connector
Communications
power supply,
24 VDC
Back side of Bit Slave Units
with Compact Connectors
Communications
power
Flat Multidrop Connectors
Terminating Resistor
(121 Ω)
Communications
connector
Flat Multidrop Connectors
46
Flat Cable I
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install and wire a CompoNet Network.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
Installing Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-1-1
Installation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
3-1-2
Installation Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
3-1-3
Mounting to a DIN Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
3-1-4
Mounting with a Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
3-1-5
Mounting with Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
3-1-6
Screw Mounting with a Mounting Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
3-2-1
Round Cable I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
3-2-2
Flat Cable I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
Preparing Flat Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
3-3-1
Round Cable II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
3-3-2
Flat Cable I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
3-3-3
Flat Cable II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
3-4-1
Connecting Communications Cable to Slave Units and Repeater
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
3-4-2
Branching Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
3-4-3
Extending Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
3-4-4
Connection Locations for Terminating Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
3-5-1
Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
3-5-2
Connection Locations for Communications Power Supplies . . . . . .
87
3-5-3
Connecting the I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
3-5-4
Connecting the Communications and I/O Power Supplies. . . . . . . .
91
3-5-5
Precautions when Supplying Communications Power . . . . . . . . . . .
96
3-5-6
Precautions when Providing the I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
3-5-7
Other Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
3-6-1
Connecting to a Screw Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
3-6-2
Connecting to e-CON Connector Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
3-6-3
Connecting to MIL Connector Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
3-6-4
Connecting to Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
3-6-5
Connecting External I/O to IP54 Bit Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
3-6-6
Connecting to Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113
47
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
3-1
3-1-1
Installing Slave Units
Installation Method
The installation method for Slave Units and Repeater Units depends on the
model.
Digital I/O Slave
Units
Name
With 2-tier Terminal Block
With 3-tier Terminal Block
With e-CON Connectors
With MIL Connectors
With Screw-less Clamp Terminal
Blocks
48
Model
CRT1-ID08(-1)
CRT1-OD08(-1)
Installation method
DIN Track
CRT1-ID16(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ID08TA(-1)
CRT1-OD08TA(-1)
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)
CRT1-ID16TA(-1)
CRT1-OD16TA(-1)
CRT1-MD16TA(-1)
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-VID08S(-1)
CRT1-VOD08S(-1)
CRT1-ID16S(-1)
CRT1-OD16S(-1)
CRT1-MD16S(-1)
CRT1-ID16SH(-1)
CRT1-OD16SH(-1)
CRT1-MD16SH(-1)
CRT1-ID32S(-1)
CRT1-OD32S(-1)
CRT1-MD32S(-1)
CRT1-ID32SH(-1)
CRT1-OD32SH(-1)
CRT1-MD32SH(-1)
CRT1-VID16ML(-1)
CRT1-VOD16ML(-1)
CRT1-VID32ML(-1)
CRT1-VOD32ML(-1)
CRT1-VMD32ML(-1)
CRT1-ID08SL(-1)
CRT1-OD08SL(-1)
CRT1-ID16SL(-1)
CRT1-OD16SL(-1)
CRT1-MD16SL(-1)
DIN Track or Mounting
Bracket
DIN Track
DIN Track or Mounting
Bracket
DIN Track
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
Name
Analog I/O Slave
Units
Model
With 2-tier Terminal Block
With e-CON Connectors
With MIL Connectors
Temperature Input Units
Expansion Units
Bit Slave Units
With e-CON Connectors
IP54
With Screw-less Clamp Termi- IP54
nal Blocks
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
XWT-ID08(-1)
XWT-OD08(-1)
XWT-ID16(-1)
XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1B-ID02S(-1)
CRT1B-OD02S(-1)
CRT1B-ID02SP(-1)
CRT1B-OD02SP(-1)
CRT1B-ID04SP(-1)
CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)
CRT1B-ID02JS(-1)
CRT1B-OD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-ID04JS(-1)
Installation method
DIN Track
DIN Track or Mounting
Bracket
DIN Track
Screw installation (M4)
M4 screw mounting using
CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting
Bracket
CRT1B-OD04JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD04JS(-1)
CRS1-RPT01
Repeater Unit
3-1-2
DIN Track or screw installation (M4)
Installation Orientation
There are no restrictions in the orientation unless otherwise specified in the
instructions for the Unit. Installation is possible in any of the following six orientations.
WORD NODE ADR
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
23
23
901
901
78
67 8
901
901
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OUT
X1
67 8
45
67 8
X10
[0-63]
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
45
OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
WORD NODE ADR
X1
4 56
OUT
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CRT1-OD16
CRT1
OD16-1
X10
[0-63]
X1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
REMOTE TERMINAL
45
45
MS NS
901
23
X10
[0-63]
23
901
23
45
23
WORD NODE ADR
CRT1-OD16
CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERMINAL
901
67 8
MS NS
67 8
901
3-1-3
Vertical
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
WORD NODE ADR
23
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X1
CRT1-OD16
CRT1
OD16-1
23
4 56
REMOTE TERMINAL
78
X10
[0-63]
78
4 56
CRT1-OD16
CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERMINAL
MS NS
MS NS
Mounting to a DIN Track
Materials Required for
Installation
Name
Model
35-mm DIN Track PFP-50N
PFP-100N
PFP-100N2
End Plate
PFP-M
Remarks
Length: 50 cm
Length: 100 cm
Length: 100 cm
Two End Plates are required for each Slave Unit
and each Repeater Unit.
49
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
Installation
Orientation
1,2,3...
1. Hook the slot on the back of the Unit into the top of the DIN Track. Pull
down the DIN Track mounting pin and insert the Unit.
DIN Track
DIN Track mounting pin
2. Hook the bottom of the End Plate on the DIN Track first, and then the top.
Attach an End Plate on each side of the Unit, and tighten the screws to secure them. Check to make sure that the Unit is firmly secured.
End Plate
3-1-4
Mounting with a Mounting Bracket
Slave Units with e-CON connectors ([email protected](-1)/CRT1-VAD04S/
CRT1-VDA02S) or MIL connectors ([email protected]@@ML(-1)/CRT1-VAD04ML/
CRT1-VDA02ML) can be panel-mounted or wall-mounted, either vertically or
horizontally, using special Mounting Brackets.
Required Brackets
Name
Mounting Bracket
Model
CRT1-ATT01
Applicable Slave Unit
Units with MIL Connectors
CRT1-ATT02
[email protected](-1)
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
Units with e-CON Connectors
SRT2-ATT02
50
[email protected](-1)
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VDA02S
Units with MIL Connectors
[email protected](-1)
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
Dimensions
CRT1-ATT01
13
18.7
Mounting Hole Dimensions
35
16±0.2
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3
(mm)
CRT1-ATT02
13
26.7
Mounting Hole Dimensions
35
16±0.2
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3
(mm)
SRT2-ATT02
7.3
32.5
Mounting Hole Dimensions
Vertical Mounting
16±0.2
35
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3
(mm)
Use a Mounting Bracket to vertically mount a Slave Unit to a panel or a wall.
Example: Mounting a [email protected] Slave Unit with MIL Connectors
Panel surface (wall)
Vertical on
panel surface
(wall)
SRT2-ATT02
Mounting Bracket
Mounting Procedure
1. Attach the Mounting Bracket to the panel surface (or wall) with two Phillips
screws, as shown in the following diagram. For mounting hole dimensions,
refer to Dimensions above.
51
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
2. Mount the Slave Unit to the Mounting Bracket. The Mounting Bracket is the
same shape as a DIN Track, so use the same method as when mounting
to a DIN Track.
Horizontal Mounting
Use a Mounting Bracket to horizontally mount (side mount) a Slave Unit to a
panel or a wall.
Example: Mounting a [email protected] Slave Unit with MIL Connectors
Panel surface (wall)
Horizontal (side)
mounting to panel
surface (or wall)
SRT2-ATT02
Mounting Bracket
Mounting Procedure
1. Attach the Mounting Bracket to the panel surface (or wall) with two Phillips
screws, as shown in the following diagram. For mounting hole dimensions,
refer to Dimensions above.
2. Mount the Slave Unit to the Mounting Bracket. The Mounting Bracket is the
same shape as a DIN Track, so use the same method as when mounting
to a DIN Track.
Mounting Dimensions
Vertical Mounting to a Wall
52
• Units with e-CON Connectors ([email protected](-1)/CRT1-VAD04S/CRT1VDA02S)
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
45
45
• Units with MIL Connectors ([email protected]@@ML(-1)/CRT1-VAD04ML/
CRT1-VDA02ML)
Mounting Bracket
(mm)
6.0
(The Unit shown in the diagram is the [email protected](-1).)
45
35
• Units with MIL Connectors ([email protected](-1))
Mounting Bracket
3.3
• Units with e-CON Connectors ([email protected](-1)/CRT1-VAD04S/CRT1VDA02S)
45
• Units with MIL Connectors ([email protected]@@ML(-1)/CRT1-VAD04ML/
CRT1-VDA02ML)
Mounting
Bracket
45
Horizontal Mounting to a
Wall
(mm)
2.45
(mm)
(The Unit shown in the diagram is the [email protected](-1).)
53
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
35
• Units with MIL Connectors ([email protected](-1))
45
Mounting
Bracket
0.1
3-1-5
(mm)
Mounting with Screws
Refer to the dimensions for the particular Unit and prepare the mounting holes
in the panel. Tighten the M4 screws to a torque of 0.9 N·m, and check to be
sure that the Unit is securely mounted.
Mounting Bit Slave
Units Using Screw
Brackets
The Bit Slave Units (CRT1B-ID02S(-1) and CRT1B-OD02S(-1)) are installed
using the enclosed screw bracket along with screw holes in one of the two orientations shown below.
Screw brackets
Use the following procedure to mount the screw bracket.
1,2,3...
54
1. Insert the screw bracket into the back of the Bit Slave Unit along the
guides.
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
Guides
Screw bracket
2. Press the screw bracket in until the hooks on the bracket are completely
locked into place.
Screw bracket hook
3-1-6
Screw Mounting with a Mounting Bracket
Slave Units with Compact Connectors ([email protected](-1) or [email protected](-1)) can be mounted using special Mounting Brackets.
Required Brackets
Name
Mounting Bracket
Model
CRT1-ATT03
Applicable Slave Unit
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
Dimensions
■
CRT1-ATT03
Mounting Hole Dimensions
38
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
29.4
37.7
46
21
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Perform mounting using either of the two sets of holes.
55
Section 3-1
Installing Slave Units
Mounting Dimensions
■
[email protected](-1)
27.05
20.4
46 24
■
15
[email protected](-1)
6.65
25.4
46 24
20
Mounting Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Mount the Unit using two M4 screws in the mounting holes A or the mounting holes B. Tighten the screws to the following torque.
• Tightening torque: 0.9 N·m
A
B
2. As shown in the following figure, press in on the Unit until the internal
hooks of the Mounting Bracket make a clicking sound. After mounting the
Unit, be sure to check that the Bit Slave Unit with Compact Connectors is
correctly mounted to the Mounting Bracket.
56
Section 3-2
Connecting Cables
3-2
Connecting Cables
In a CompoNet Network, Units can be connected and cables can be branched
and extended by using Communications Cable and mounting connectors to
Units. The methods for connecting Communications Cables and Units and for
branching depend on the cable type and branching formation used.
The differences are shown in the following table.
3-2-1
Round Cable I/II
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
connections
Open Type Connector
Cable branches
T-branch connections
Commercially available relay terminal
block
Branch line or
sub-branch line
Open Type Connector
Relay terminal block
Trunk line,
sub-trunk line,
or branch line
Multidrop connections
Open Type Connector
Trunk line,
sub-trunk line,
or branch line
Open Type Connector
Slave/Repeater Unit
Open Type Connector
Slave/Repeater Unit
Note Bits Slave Units with a Flat
Cable included cannot use
Open Type Connectors.
Slave/Repeater Unit
57
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
3-2-2
Flat Cable I/II
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
connections
Cable branches
T-branch connections
Multidrop connections
Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector Socket + Flat Connector Multidrop Connector
• Word Slave Units, Bit Slave Units with Plug
Flat Connector
a communications connector, or
Trunk line,
Multidrop Connectors
Socket
Trunk line, sub-trunk line,
sub-trunk line,
Repeater Units
or branch line
or branch line
Branch line or
sub-branch line
Flat Connector
Plug
Branch line or
sub-branch line
Flat Connector Plug
(or connector provided with cable)
Slave/Repeater Unit
Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector
Plug
Flat Connector
Plug
Slave/Repeater Unit
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors
Slave/Repeater Unit
• Bit Slave Unit with Flat Cable
Included
Multidrop Connector
(DCN4-MR4)
Flat Connector Plug
Flat Cable (included)
Trunk line, sub-trunk
line, or branch line
(Flat Cable)
Bit Slave Unit
Bit Slaves with
Compact Connectors
Note If a Sheathed Flat Cable II is
used, multidrop connections
using multidrop connectors cannot be used.
Note Bit Slave Units are available with
a Flat Cable included as a standard feature.
Cable Extension
Flat Connector Socket + Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector Socket
Flat Connector Socket
Trunk line and sub-trunk line
Trunk line and sub-trunk line
Flat Connector Plug
3-3
Flat Connector Plug
Preparing Flat Connectors
To connect a Terminating Resistor to round cable II, to connect Flat Cable I or
II to Units and to branch or extend the wiring, Flat Connectors must be prepared and attached to the cables.
Note
(1) Flat Connectors cannot be reused once they have been attached. Perform the procedure with care.
(2) Always hold on to the Flat Connector when connecting or disconnecting
it.
(3) When connecting a Flat Connector, press it all the way in and then pull on
it to be sure it is locked into place.
58
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Connectors Used
Name
Flat Connector I Socket
Appearance
Model
DCN4-TR4
Flat Connector I Plug
DCN4-BR4
Flat Connector II Socket
DCN5-TR4
Flat Connector II Plug
DCN5-BR4
Flat Multidrop Connector
Plug
DCN4-MR4
Application
Used as a set with the DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector
Plug in the following applications:
• Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines.
• T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or
sub-trunk lines.
• T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line.
Used independently when connecting a DCN4TM4 Terminating Resistor to the end of the trunk
line or a sub-trunk line.
Used as a set with the DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket in the following applications:
• Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines.
• T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or
sub-trunk lines.
• T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line.
Used independently in the following applications:
• Connecting Communications Cable to a Unit.
• Connecting Communications Cable to a DCN4MD4 Multidrop Connector (when a multidrop connection is used).
Used as a set with the DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector
Plug in the following applications:
• Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines.
• T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or
sub-trunk lines.
• T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line.
Used independently when connecting a DCN5TM4 Terminating Resistor to the end of the trunk
line or a sub-trunk line.
Used as a set with the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket in the following applications:
• Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines
• T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or
sub-trunk lines
• T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line
Used independently to connect Communications
Cable to a Unit.
Used independently in the following application:
• Connecting Communications Cable to a Unit in a
multidrop connection
This connector can be used with the following
Units:
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
([email protected]@JS(-1))
59
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Tools Required
Pliers
Name
Model
DWT-A01
Application
Crimping tool for DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket, DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug, or DCN4MR4 Flat Multidrop Connector Plug.
Pliers
DWT-A02
Crimping tool for DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket or DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug
3-3-1
Appearance
Round Cable II
This procedure is only required to connect a Terminating Resistor.
Preparing DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets
Component Names
Cover
Housing
Cable labels
(Black, blue/green, white, and red)
Cable confirmation slot
Black
■ Preparing the Cable
Cut the cable perpendicular to the length, and strip the sheath as shown in the
following diagram.
Red
White
Green or blue
Black
■ Setting the Cable Stopper
Set the Cable Stopper.
Close the cover, secure the hooks, and then press down on the cable stopper
until it clicks into place.
60
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Cable stopper
■ Attaching the Cable
Confirm that the cable colors match the cable labels, and then insert the cable
end all the way to the back of the cover in which the cable stopper has already
been set.
Location of cable stopper
■ Attaching the Housing
Confirm that the cable labels match the cable colors, and then temporarily
secure the housing to the cover.
Housing
Note
The housing cannot be removed from the cover once it has been attached.
The connector may be damaged if the housing is forcefully removed.
■ Pressure-welding the Connector
The connector is pressure-welded using the DWT-A01 Pliers.
61
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
1,2,3...
1. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with
the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers.
Pliers
Connector cover
2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into
place.
Note
(1) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the edges.
(2) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the back of the pressurewelding block.
(3) Set the connector in the correct orientation.
OK
NG
NG
3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as
shown below.
Be sure the connector is locked
on both the left and right sides.
Be sure there are no gaps here.
3-3-2
Flat Cable I
Preparing DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets
Component Names
Cover
Housing
Cable labels
(Flat cable: black, blue, white, and red)
Cable confirmation slot
Black
62
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
■ Cutting the Cable (when Extending Cable or Connecting a Terminating
Resistor)
Cut the cable perpendicular to the length.
To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires.
■ Setting the Cable Stopper (when Extending Cable or Connecting a
Terminating Resistor)
A stopper must be set in advance when extending a line or connecting a Terminating Resistor.
Close the cover, secure the hooks, and then press down on the cable stopper
until it clicks into place.
Cable stopper
■ Attaching the Cable
■
1,2,3...
T-branch Connections
1. Align the cable labels and cable colors and insert the cable into the cover.
63
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
2. Hold the cable and secure it with the hooks.
■
Line Extensions and Terminating Resistors
Insert the cable end all the way into a cover with the cable stopper already set.
Location of cable stopper
■ Attaching the Housing
Confirm that the cable labels and cable colors match and then temporarily
secure the housing to the cover.
Housing
Note
The housing cannot be removed from the cover once it has been
attached. The connector may be damaged if the housing is forcefully removed.
■ Pressure-welding the Connector
The connector is pressure-welded using the DWT-A01 Pliers.
1,2,3...
1. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with
the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers.
Pliers
Connector cover
2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into
place.
64
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Note
(1) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the edges.
(2) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the back of the pressurewelding block.
(3) Set the connector in the correct orientation.
OK
NG
NG
3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as
shown below.
Be sure the connector is locked on both
the left and right sides.
Be sure there are no gaps here.
Processing and Mounting Procedure for DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector Plug
Component Names
Black
Cable labels
(Flat Cable: Black, blue, white, and red)
Lock lever
■ Cutting the Cable
Cut the cable perpendicular to the length.
To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires.
65
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
■ Attaching the Cable
Align the cable labels and cable colors and insert the cable.
Confirm that the cable is inserted all the way to the back. (The cover is semitransparent.)
Insert the cable to this point.
■ Crimping the Connector
Crimp the connector using the DWT-A01 Pliers.
1,2,3...
1. As shown in the following figure, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with the center of the crimping block on the Pliers.
Pliers
Connector cover
2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into
place.
Note
(1) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the edges.
(2) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the back of the pressurewelding block.
(3) Set the connector in the correct orientation.
OK
NG
NG
NG
3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as
shown below.
Be sure there are no gaps here.
66
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Preparing and Connecting DCN4-MR4 Multidrop Connectors
Componet Names
Cover
Housing
Cable labels (Black,
blue/green, white, and red)
Black
■ Wiring Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Align the line colors of the cable with the cable labels, and place the cable
on the Connector.
2. Close the cover until the hooks lock in place.
Cable Attached to
Connector
■ Attaching the Housing
1,2,3...
1. Confirm the colors again, and temporarily secure the housing to the cover.
■ Pressure-welding the Connector
Use the DWT-A01 Pliers to pressure-weld Connector.
1,2,3...
1. As shown in the following figure, set the connector cover so that the center
of it (indicated by the arrows) is in the center of the pressure-welding block
of the Pliers.
2. Squeeze the Pliers firmly until you hear the connector lock into place.
67
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Pliers
Note
3-3-3
Connector cover
After pressure-welding the cable, confirm that it has been pressure-welded
correctly. The tabs on the cover of the Housing must be completely locked.
Flat Cable II
Preparing DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets
Component Names
Cover
■ Cutting the Cable
Cut the cable perpendicular to the length.
To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires.
■ Setting the Cable Stopper (when Extending Cable or Connecting a
Terminating Resistor)
A stopper must be set in advance when extending a line or connecting a Terminating Resistor.
Set the cable into the cover and position it so that the cable end strikes the
cable stopper.
Cable stopper
68
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
■ Attaching the Cable
1,2,3...
1. As shown in the diagram below, place the cable so that the white line is in
the direction of the side with the open cover, with the white line on the cable
facing upward.
(Top View)
Connector
Middle of connector
Cable
White line
(Side with cover open)
T-branch Connections
White line
Line Extensions and Terminating Resistor Connections
2. Hold the cable so that it does not move and close the cover.
69
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Note
When extending the cable or connecting it to a Terminating Resistor, make sure that the end of the cable is inserted all the way to the
cable stopper so that it will not be pulled out.
■ Pressure-welding the Connector
Use the DWT-A02 Pliers to pressure-weld the connector.
1,2,3...
1. Set the connector on the pressure-welding block of the crimping tool.
As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with
the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers.
Connector position reference surfaces
Pliers
Connector cover
2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into
place.
3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as
shown below.
Be sure that the connector is locked.
Be sure there are no gaps here.
Preparing DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plugs
Component Names
Cover
70
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
■ Cutting the Cable
Cut the cable perpendicular to the length.
To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires.
■ Attaching the Cable
1,2,3...
1. As shown in the diagram below, place the cable so that the white line is in
the direction of the side with the open cover, with the white line on the cable
facing upward.
White line
From the left: red, white, blue, and black
(Side with cover open)
2. Hold the cable so that it does not move and close the cover.
■ Pressure-welding the Connector
Use the DWT-A02 Pliers to pressure-weld the connector.
1,2,3...
1. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with
the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers.
Connector position reference surfaces
71
Section 3-3
Preparing Flat Connectors
Pliers
Connector cover
2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into
place.
3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as
shown below.
Be sure that the connector is locked.
Be sure there are no gaps here.
72
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
This section describes how to connect Flat Cable I/II or round cable I/II to
Slave Units, Repeater Units, and Terminating Resistors, and how to extend or
branch the cables.
Peripheral Devices Used
Name
Open Type Connector (for
connecting Units)
Relay terminal block
Appearance
---
Model
DCN4-TB4
Application
Converts the Unit's communications connector into a screw terminal block to enable
connecting round cable I or round cable II to
a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit.
Multidrop Connector
Commercially available Used for T-branching round cable I or round
cable II.
DCN4-MD4
Used to connect Slave Units or Repeater
Units to trunk lines, sub-trunk lines, or
branch lines by using multidrop connections.
Terminating Resistor
DCN4-TM4
This is a Connector-type Terminating Resistor for Flat Cable I and round cable II.
It is connected to a DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket at the end of a trunk line or subtrunk line.
Terminating Resistor
DCN5-TM4
This is a Connector-type Terminating Resistor for Flat Cable II.
It is connected to a DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket at the end of a trunk line or subtrunk line.
Terminating Resistor
DRS1-T
This is a Terminal Block-type Terminating
Resistor for round cable I.
It is connected to the end of a trunk line or
sub-trunk line round cable I.
Terminating Resistor Specifications
Type
Model
Resistance
Rated power
Accuracy
Capacity between power supply lines
DCN4-TM4
121 Ω
1/4 W
1% max.
0.01 µF
Connector
DCN5-TM4
121 Ω
1/4 W
1% max.
0.01 µF
Terminal block
DRS1-T
121 Ω
1/4 W
-----
73
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
3-4-1
Connecting Communications Cable to Slave Units and Repeater
Units
Connecting Round
Cable I/II
The DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector is used to convert the communications
connector on the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit to a terminal block (M3) for connecting the cable wires.
Open Connector
M3 terminal block
Communications
connector
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
Installation Method
1,2,3...
1. Attach the Open Type Connector to the communications connector of the
Slave Unit or Repeater Unit.
Orient the Open Type Connector so that the side with the open terminals
is facing to the left and press in the Open Type Connector until it clicks into
place.
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
MS NS
WORD NODE ADR
456
X10
[0-63]
456
789
23
01
23
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
X1
01
23
456
789
01
X10
[0-63]
789
789
456
23
WORD NODE ADR
CRT1-OD16CRT1
REMOTE TERM OD16
1
INAL
01
MS NS
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
X1
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
Note
To remove the Open Type Connector once it has been attached,
firmly press in on the latches on both sides and pull out the Open
Type Connector.
2. Open the terminal cover of the Open Type Connector and connect the cable wires to BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications
data low) in the terminal block. For round cable II, connect the cable wires
to BS+ (communications power supply plus) and BS- (communications
power supply minus).
Note
Before connecting the cable wires to the terminal block, first attach the M3
crimp terminals shown below to the wires.
6.0 mm max.
74
6.0 mm max.
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
Connecting Flat
Cable I
A DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug attached to a Communications Cable is
connected to the communications connector of a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit.
Communications
connector
Flat Connector Plug
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
Be sure the face of the Connector on which line colors are indicated (red,
white, black, and blue) is facing to the left and press in the Connector until it
clicks into place.
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
MS NS
WORD NODE ADR
X10
[0-63]
456
789
789
456
X1
23
01
23
23
456
01
X10
[0-63]
789
789
456
CRT1-OD16CRT1
REMOTE TERM OD16
1
INAL
23
WORD NODE ADR
01
MS NS
01
Installation Method
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
X1
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
Note
Connecting Flat
Cable II
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the
latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
A DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug attached to a Communications Cable is
connected to the communications connector of a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit.
Communications
connector
Flat Connector Plug
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
Orient the Connector so that the white line on the cable is facing to the left and
press in the Connector until it clicks into place.
X1
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
MS NS
WORD NODE ADR
456
X10
[0-63]
456
789
23
01
23
23
456
789
01
X10
[0-63]
789
789
456
23
WORD NODE ADR
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
01
MS NS
01
Installation Method
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
X1
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
Note
Connecting Flat Cable I for
Bit Slave Units with
Compact Connectors
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the
latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
Connect a DCN4-MR4 Flat Multidrop Connector to a Flat Cable I cable. For
details, refer to Preparing and Connecting DCN4-MR4 Multidrop Connectors
on page 67.
75
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
Multidrop Connector
Plug cover
Use DWT-A01 Pliers
to pressure-weld
Connector.
Multidrop Connector
Plug housing
■ Mounting Method
Align the Multidrop Connector Plug with the communications connector on the
Bit Slave Unit with a Compact Connector and press it in until it clicks into
place.
Multidrop
Connector Plug
Note
Flat Cable II
76
Bit Slave Unit with
Compact Connector
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on
both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
Flat Cable II cannot be used for multidrop connections.
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
3-4-2
Branching Communications Cables
There are two methods that can be used to branch the trunk line, sub-trunk
lines, and branch lines: T-branches and multidrop connections.
T-branches
Using Round Cable I/II
Connect the cable wires by using a commercially available relay terminal
block.
Example: Round cable I
Relay terminal block
Slave Unit
Note
Before connecting the cable wires to the terminal block, first attach the M3
crimp terminals shown below to the wires.
6.0 mm max.
6.0 mm max.
Using Flat Cable I
Attach a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to the DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to Communications Cable.
Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector Socket
Slave Unit
■
Installation Method
Be sure the surface of the Flat Connector Plug on which line colors are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) is facing downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place.
Note
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the
latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
77
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
Using Flat Cable II
Attach a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to Communications Cable.
Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector Socket
Slave Unit
■
Installation Method
Place the Flat Connector Plug so that the white line on the cable is facing
downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place.
Note
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in firmly
on the latches on both sides of the front of the Connector and pull
it out.
Multidrop Connections
Using Round Cable I/II
The DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector is used to convert the communications
connector on the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit to a terminal block (M3) for connecting the cable wires.
Example: Round cable I
Open Connector
M3 terminal block
Communications connector
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
78
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
■
1. Orient the Open Type Connector so that surface with the open terminals is
facing to the left and press in the Open Type Connector until it clicks into
place.
WORD NODE ADR
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
23
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
MS NS
WORD NODE ADR
456
01
456
01
X10
[0-63]
789
23
X1
789
01
X10
[0-63]
789
456
789
23
456
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
23
MS NS
01
1,2,3...
Connection Method
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
X1
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
Note
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in firmly
on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
2. Open the terminal cover of the Open Type Connector and connect the cable wires to BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications
data low) in the terminal block. For round cable II, connect the cable wires
to BS+ (communications power supply plus) and BS- (communications
power supply minus).
Note
Before connecting the cable wires to the terminal block, first attach the M3
crimp terminals shown below to the wires.
6.0 mm max.
6.0 mm max.
Using Flat Cable I
Attach a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector to the communications connector of
the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit, and then attach two DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plugs that are already connected to Communications Cables.
Flat Connector Plug
Multidrop Connector
Communications connector
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
1. Place the Multidrop Connector so that the surface with the printed number
is facing to the left and press in the Connector until it clicks into place.
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
MS NS
WORD NODE ADR
456
X10
[0-63]
456
789
X1
23
23
23
456
789
01
X10
[0-63]
789
789
456
CRT1-OD16CRT1
REMOTE TERM OD16
1
INAL
23
WORD NODE ADR
01
MS NS
01
1,2,3...
Installation Method
01
■
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
X1
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
79
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
2. Be sure the surfaces of the two Flat Connector Plugs on which line colors
are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) are facing to the left and press
in the Connectors until they click into place.
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
MS NS
WORD NODE ADR
456
X10
[0-63]
01
CRT1CRT1
OD16-1
REMOTE TERM OD16
INAL
456
789
23
01
23
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
X1
01
23
456
789
X10
[0-63]
789
789
456
23
WORD NODE ADR
01
MS NS
0 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
OUT
8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15
X1
CRT1-OD16CRT1
REMOTE TERM OD16
1
INAL
Note
Using Flat Cable II
3-4-3
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on
both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
Branching is not possible using multidrop connections.
Extending Communications Cables
The cable length for the trunk line, sub-trunk lines, branch lines, and subbranch lines can be extended by up to 10 levels by using Flat Connectors. The
maximum extendable length, however, is the maximum trunk line length.
(Refer to 2-3-3 Maximum Distance and Number of Connected Units for Types
of Communications Cables.)
Flat Connector Socket
Flat Connector Socket
Trunk line or sub-trunk line
Trunk Line or
Sub-trunk Line
Flat Connector Plug
Terminating Resistor
Flat Connector Plug
Up to 10 sets of
Connectors can be used.
Flat Cable I
Attach a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to a DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to Communications Cable.
Flat Connector Plug
Flat Connector Socket
Installation Method
Be sure the surface of the Flat Connector Plug on which line colors are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) is facing downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place.
Note
80
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the
latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
Flat Cable II
Attach a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to a DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to Communications Cable.
Flat Connector Socket
Installation Method
Flat Connector Plug
Orient the Flat Connector Plug so that the white line on the cable is facing
downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place.
Note
To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in firmly
on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out.
81
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
3-4-4
Connection Locations for Terminating Resistor
A Terminating Resistor must always be connected to the trunk line and each
sub-trunk line on the opposite end from the Master Unit or Repeater Unit.
Connect the Terminating
Resistor on the opposite
end of the trunk line from
the Master Unit.
Master Unit
Terminating Resistor
Trunk line
Repeater
Unit
Slave Unit
Sub-trunk line
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Connect the Terminating
Resistor on the opposite
end of the sub-trunk line
from the Repeater Unit.
Terminating
Resistor
Note
(1) Do not connect the Terminating Resistor at the same end of the cable as
the Master Unit or Repeater Unit.
(2) When the cable is branched at the locations shown in the figure below,
connect the Terminating Resistor at the end of the line so that the length
of a is greater than b.
Master Unit
Terminating Resistor
Trunk line
Repeater
Unit
a
b
Slave Unit
Sub-trunk line
Cable length: a > b
Slave Unit
Round Cable I
Connect the cable wires to a DRS1-T Terminating Resistor.
Round cable I
Terminating Resistor
82
Section 3-4
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
Connection Method
Connect the cable wires to the Terminating Resistor and tighten the screws.
The Terminating Resistor has no polarity, so either wire can be connected to
either terminal regardless of the color.
Terminating Resistor
Round cable I
BDH (black) or BDL (white)
BDL (white) or BDH (black)
Note
Before connecting the cable wires to the Terminating Resistor, first attach the
M3 crimp terminals shown below to the wires.
6.0 mm max.
Round Cable II
6.0 mm max.
Attach a DCN4-TM4 Terminating Resistor to the DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to the cable.
Round cable II
Flat Connector Socket
Connection Method
Push in the Terminating Resistor until it clicks into place.
Note
Flat Cable I
To remove a Terminating Resistor once it has been connected, press in on the
latches on both sides and pull it out.
Attach a DCN5-TM4 Terminating Resistor to the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to Communications Cable.
Flat Connector Socket
Installation Method
Terminating Resistor
Terminating
Resistor
Push in the Terminating Resistor until it clicks into place.
83
Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor
Note
Section 3-4
To remove a Terminating Resistor once it has been connected,
press in on the latches on both sides and pull it out.
When using a multidrop connection for branching a Slave Unit or Repeater
Unit, the Terminating Resistor can be directly connected to the Multidrop Connector that is connected to the Unit. (This is only possible when Flat Cable I is
used.)
Terminating Resistor
Flat Connector
Multidrop Connector
Slave Unit/Repeater Unit
Flat Cable II
Attach a DCN5-TM4 Terminating Resistor to the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector
Socket connected to Communications Cable.
Flat Connector
Socket
Installation Method
Push in the Terminating Resistor until it clicks into place.
Note
84
Terminating
Resistor
To remove a Terminating Resistor once it has been connected,
press in on the latches on both sides and pull it out.
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
3-5
Power Supply Wiring
The following power supplies are required to operate the CompoNet Network.
• Communications power supply:
• I/O power supply:
Used for communications with individual Units
and for internal circuit operations of Units.
Used for I/O operations for Units with external I/O.
The method for supplying communications power and I/O power depends on
the types of cable and Slave Unit that are used. The differences are shown in
the following table.
Slave Unit classification according to
power supply method
Multi-power supply
Cable type
Round cable I
Round cable II
Flat Cable I/II
Network power supply
Round cable I
Round cable II
Flat Cable I/II
Communications
power supply
I/O power supply
Supplied to Units
Supplied to indiindividually.
vidual Units separately from the
Supplied through
the Communications communications
Cable by supplying power supply.
power to the Master
Unit.
Cannot be used.
The communications power supply and
the I/O power supply are provided
together through Communications Cable.
Multi-power Supply
Slave Units
Using Round Cable I
• Communications Power Supply
Supply power to the power supply terminals of the communications connectors of individual Units (or to the PORT1 connector for Repeater Units).
• I/O Power Supply
Supply I/O power to the I/O power supply terminals of individual Units, separately from the communications power supply. To prevent noise, be sure
to use separate power supplies for I/O and communications.
Communications power
supply
terminals
BD
BD
BS
BS
H
L
+
−
I/O power
supply
terminals
V
G
24-VDC
I/O power
supply
Master Unit
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS−
BS+
BS−
Using Round Cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Round cable I
Overcurrent
protection
(current limit: 4 A)
When using the UL standards,
please install a unit to restrict
current between the external power
supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
communications power supply)
24-VDC communications
power supply
• Communications Power Supply
Supply communications power to the Master Unit's communications power
supply connector (or to the downstream port communications power supply connectors on Repeater Units).
85
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
• I/O Power Supply
Supply I/O power to the I/O power supply terminals of individual Units, separately from the communications power supply.
Communications power
supply
terminals
Master Unit
(or Repeater Unit)
BD
BD
BS
BS
H
L
+
−
I/O
power
supply
terminals
V
24-VDC
I/O power
supply
G
BS+
BDH
BDL
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
BS−
BS+
BS−
When using the UL standards,
Overcurrent
please install a unit to restrict
protection
current between the external power
(current limit: 4 A) supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
communications power supply)
24-VDC communications
power supply
Communications power supply connector on Master Unit
(or downstream port communications power supply connector
on Repeater Unit)
Network Power
Supply Slave Units
These Units use the same set of power supply terminals for both communications and I/O power, so there is no need to provide separate power supplies.
(Bit Slave Units are sold with a Flat Cable already attached.) The common
communications and I/O power supply is provided to the Master Unit's communications power supply connector (or to the downstream port communications power supply connectors on Repeater Units).
BD
H
BD
L
BS
+
BS
−
Master Unit
(or Repeater Unit)
BS +
BDH
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
BDL
BS −
BS +
BS −
Overcurrent
protection
(current limit: 4 A)
When using the UL standards,
please install a unit to restrict
current between the external power
supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
communications power supply)
24-VDC communications
power supply
Communications power supply connector on Master Unit
(or downstream port communications power supply connector
on Repeater Unit)
3-5-1
Power Supply Specifications
Use a communications power supply that meets the following specifications.
Item
Output voltage
Output ripple
86
Specification
24 VDC ±10%
600 mVp-p
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Item
Output current
Specification
Use a power supply that equals or exceeds the following total
current consumption:
• The current consumption of all Word Slave Units and
Repeater Units
• The current consumption of all Bit Slave Units and the current
consumption of their external I/O
Between output and AC power and between output and chassis ground
Insulation
An OMRON S82-series Power Supply for the communications power supply
for CompoNet Slave Units is recommended.
Note
(1) For network power supply Slave Units, the external I/O power supply is
also provided through the Flat Cable from the communications power
supply connected to the Master Unit or the Repeater Unit.
When calculating the output current of the communications power supply,
always include the external I/O current consumption and actual load current for network power supply Slave Units.
For example, the power supply current consumption for Bit Slave Unit is
expressed by the following formula.
• Input Bit Slave Units:
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number
of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used)
• Output Bit Slave Units:
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current × number of actuators used)
• I/O Bit Slave Units:
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number
of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used)
+ (actual load current × number of actuators used)
(2) Use a power supply with sufficient capacity considering the inrush current
at startup.
For details on current consumption for each Unit, refer to Appendix C Current
Consumption Summary.
3-5-2
Connection Locations for Communications Power Supplies
Round Cable I
A 24-VDC power supply is connected individually to each Slave Unit. Power
does not need to be supplied to the Master Unit.
24-VDC communications
power supply
+
Master Unit
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Open Type Connector
−
Note:
When using the UL standards, please install a unit
to restrict current between the external power
supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications
power supply)
Supply communications power directly to each Slave Unit.
Terminating Resistor
Round cable I
Open Type Connector
Open Type Connector
Open Type Connector
Communications
connector
Word Slave Unit
Word Slave Unit
Word Slave Unit
87
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Before connecting the power supply, first connect a DCN4-TB4 Open Type
Connector to the communications connector to convert it to a screw terminal
block.
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
24-VDC
communications power
supply
BS+
BS−
Note:
When using the UL standards, please
install a unit to restrict current between
the external power supply and this unit to
4 A. (Only communications power supply)
Connect an Open Type Connector here.
When using a Repeater Unit, supply power through the BS+ and BS− terminals of the Repeater Unit's PORT1 connector.
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
24-VDC
communications power
supply
BS+
BS−
Note:
When using the UL standards, please
install a unit to restrict current between
the external power supply and this unit to
4 A. (Only communications power supply)
Round Cable II or Flat
Cable I/II
Master Unit
Communications
power
supply
Connect an Open Type Connector here.
Connect a 24-VDC power supply to the Master Unit's communications power
supply connector (BS+ and BS−). This provides communications power to
each Slave Unit and Repeater Unit connected by round cable II or Flat Cable
I/II. Connect only one communications power supply for the trunk line. The
cable between the communications power supply and the communications
power supply connector must be no longer than 3 m.
Communications
power supply
connector
Communications
power supply,
24 VDC
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Note:
When using the UL standards, please install a
unit to restrict current between the external power
supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications
power supply)
3 m max.
Terminating Resistor
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Communications
connector
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
Slave Unit
When Repeater Units are used, communications power to sub-trunk lines is
supplied by the downstream port communications power supply connectors
(BS+ and BS−) of the Repeater Units. The cable between the communications power supply and the communications power supply connector must be
no longer than 3 m.
88
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
When using the UL standards,
please install a unit to restrict
current between the external power
supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
communications power supply)
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
24-VDC
communications power
supply
3 m max.
Downstream port communications
power supply connector
BS+
BS−
Recommended Ferrules
24-VDC communications power supply
The following ferrules are recommended for the communications power supply cable.
Product number
AI0,5-10 WH
H0.5/16 orange
Applicable power
Crimping tool
cable size
0.5 mm (AWG20)
CRIMPFOX UD6
(Product No.
1204436) or
CRIMPTFOX ZA3
series
0.5 mm (AWG20)
Crimper PZ1.5
(Product No.
900599)
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
Weidmuller
The following screwdriver is recommended for use when removing ferrules.
Product number
XW4Z-00C
3-5-3
Manufacturer
OMRON
Connecting the I/O Power Supply
Provide a 24-VDC I/O power supply to the I/O terminals of all Slave Units
(multi-power supply models). For details on connections, refer to 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units.
Connection to output I/O power supply connector (only for digital I/O slave unit
(e-CON connector type))
Output Units and I/O Units with e-CON connectors have output I/O power
supply connectors for supplying I/O power to external devices. A 24-VDC
power supply is provided using the following method.
Units with e-CON Connectors ([email protected]@S(-1), [email protected]@S(-1), [email protected]@SH(-1), and [email protected]@SH(-1))
Connect the 24-VDC power supply line to the V terminal and G terminal of the
output I/O power supply connector.
89
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
V terminals
24-VDC
power
supply
G terminals
Output I/O power supply connector
Units with e-CON
Connectors
(CRT1-VOD08S(-1))
Peel back the coating on the included power supply cable and connect it to
the 24-VDC power supply, then attach the power supply cable connector to
the output I/O power supply connector on the bottom of the unit.
Bottom of Unit
24-VDC
power
supply
Red
Black
Output I/O power supply connector
Power supply cable
(provided)
Connection to the connector for the sensor power supply connector (for CRT1VAD04S only)
E-CON connector type Analog Input Slave Units (CRT1-VAD04S) are
equipped with a sensor power supply connector for supplying of power to the
connected sensor.
Peel back the coating on the included power supply cable and connect the
wires to the 24-VDC power supply, then attach the power supply cable connector to the sensor power supply connector on the bottom of the unit.
Bottom of Unit
24-VDC
power supply
Red
Black
Sensor power supply connector
Power supply cable (provided)
90
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
3-5-4
Connecting the Communications and I/O Power Supplies
Round Cable I
When round cable I is used, the communications power cannot be supplied
through the communications cable. The communications power must be supplied to each Slave Unit and Repeater Unit through separate lines. For Slave
Units that require power for I/O (i.e., multi-power supply Slave Units), the I/O
power must also be supplied separately.
There is no need to provide an external communications power supply for the
Master Unit.
Not Using a Repeater Unit
Master Unit
BS+
BS-
Communications
power supply Overcurrent
protection
(current limit: 4 A)
Power
supply
When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict
current between the external power supply and this unit to 4
A. (Only communications power supply)
V
G
Trunk line
BS+
Round cable I
Terminating
Resistor
BDH
BDL
BS-
BSBDL
Slave Unit Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
Open Type
Connector
Slave Unit Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
BS+
Open Type
Connector
BDH
BSBDL
BDH
Power
supply
Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
BS+
BSBDL
BDH
BS+
Slave Unit
I/O power supply
Open Type
Connector
V
G
91
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Using Repeater Units
Master Unit
BS+
BS−
BS+
BDH
Note:
When using the UL standards, please install a
unit to restrict current between the external
power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
communications power supply)
Round cable I
BDL
BS−
Communications
power supply
Communications
power supply Overcurrent
Repeater Unit
Overcurrent
protection
(See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
PORT1
(upstream)
V
Power
supply
BS+ 1
BDH 1
Open Type
Connector
G
Power
supply
V
protection
(See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Round cable I
G
PORT2
(downstream)
BDL 1
BS+ 2
BS− 1
BDH 2
Sub-trunk
line
Terminating
Resistor
BDL 2
BS− 2
BS−
BDL
BS+
BDH
Power
supply
Open Type
Connector
Slave Unit Multi-power Slave Unit
supply
Slave Unit
I/O power supply
Round cable I
BS−
BDL
BS+
BDH
Trunk line
Open Type
Connector
Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
V
G
Communications
Overcurrent
power supply
Communications
power supply
PORT1
(upstream)
BS+ 1
V
Power
supply
protection
(See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Repeater Unit
Overcurrent
protection
(See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
BDH 1
Open Type
Connector
G
Power
supply
Round cable I
V
G
PORT2
(downstream)
BDL 1
BS+ 2
BS− 1
BDH 2
Sub-trunk
line
Terminating
Resistor
BDL 2
BS− 2
BS−
BDL
Using Round Cable II
or Flat Cable I/II
Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
BS+
I/O power supply
Open Type
Connector
BDH
Slave Unit
Power
supply
Note
BS−
BDL
BS+
Terminating Resistor
BDH
Round cable I
Open Type
Connector
Slave Unit
Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
V
G
The I/O power supply to multi-power supply Slave Units may be a source of
noise depending on the connected devices. Even when supplying the communications power supply together to all Slave Units, use a separate I/O power
supply so that noise does not affect the network.
When round cable II or Flat Cable I/II is used, the Slave Unit communications
power is supplied through the Flat Cable I/II. There is no special wiring
required to provide the communications power supply to individual Slave
Units. The same communications power supply is shared for the entire trunk
line or sub-trunk line.
For Slave Units requiring an I/O power supply (i.e., multi-power supply Slave
Units), however, I/O power must be supplied separately.
92
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Not Using Repeater Unit
Communications power
supply connector
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Master Unit
Communications
power supply
Note:
When using the UL standards, please install a
unit to restrict current between the external
power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
communications power supply)
V
BS+
Power
supply
BS−
G
Trunk line
Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II
BS+
Terminating
Resistor
BDH
BDL
BS−
BS−
BDL
BS+
Slave
Units
BDH
BS−
BDL
Slave
Units
BDH
BS+
BS−
BDL
Slave
Units
BDH
BS+
BS−
BDL
BS+
BDH
Branch
line
Slave
Units
Network power
supply Slave
Units
Using Repeater Units
Communications power
supply connector Overcurrent
Master Unit
Communications
power supply
Note:
V
When using the UL standards, please install a
Power
unit to restrict current between the external
supply
power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
G
communications power supply)
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
BS+
BS−
BS+
Downstream port communications power supply connector
BDH
BDL
BS−
Repeater Unit
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Communications power
supply and I/O power
supply (shared)
V
BS+ 2
PORT1
(upstream)
BS− 2
Power
supply
BS+ 1
PORT2
BDH 1 (downstream)
BS+ 2
BDL 1
G
BDH 2
BS− 1
BDL 2
BS− 2
Subtrunk line
Branch line
BS−
PORT2
G
BDH 2
BDL
Overcurrent
protection (See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
Power
supply
(downstream)
BS+ 2
BDH
Slave
Units
Communications power
supply and I/O power
supply (shared)
V
BDL 1
BS+
Slave
Units
BS+ 2
BS− 2
BS− 1
BS−
BDL
BDH 1
BDH
BS+ 1
BS+
PORT1
(upstream)
BS−
BDL
Slave
Units
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Repeater Unit
BDH
BS+
Trunk line
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Terminating
Resistor
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Terminating
Resistor
Multidrop
Connector
BDL 2
BS− 2
Subtrunk line
Branch line
Slave
Units
BS−
Multi-power
supply
Slave Unit
BDL
V
G
BDH
Slave Units
BS+
BS−
BDL
BDH
BS+
BS−
BDL
BS+
Slave Units
I/O power supply
Power
supply
Note
BDH
Terminating Resistor
Network
power
supply
Slave
Units
Network
power
supply
Slave
Units
(1) Do not supply communications power from more than one location for the
trunk line or for any one sub-trunk line. The quality of communications will
decrease and normal communications may not be possible.
93
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
(2) Do not supply communications power to the trunk line and a sub-trunk
line or to two sub-trunk lines from the same power supply. Also do not
supply communications power to two or more CompoNet systems from
the same power supply. The quality of communications will decrease and
normal remote I/O communications may not be possible.
(3) The I/O power supply to multi-power supply Slave Units may be a source
of noise depending on the connected devices. Even when supplying the
communications power supply together to all Slave Units, use a separate
I/O power supply so that noise does not affect the network.
Restrictions
The following restrictions apply when supplying communications power
through Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II.
• The communications power supply can be connected at only one location
for the trunk line and one location each for the sub-trunk lines.
• Communications power to the trunk line can be supplied only through the
communications power supply connector on the Master Unit. Communications power to a sub-trunk line can be supplied only through the downstream port communications power supply connector on the Repeater
Unit. Communications power cannot be supplied at any other location.
Power can be supplied here.
Master Unit/
Repeater
Unit
Communications
power supply
3 m max.
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Trunk line or
sub-trunk line
Repeater Unit
Communications
power supply
Sub-trunk line
Power can be
supplied here.
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Power cannot be
supplied here.
Master Unit/
Repeater
Unit
Trunk line or
sub-trunk line
Communications
power supply
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Repeater Unit
Slave Unit
Sub-trunk line
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Slave Unit
Power cannot be
supplied here.
Communications
power supply
94
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
• Use separate power supplies for the Master Unit trunk line and for each
sub-trunk line (i.e., for the trunk line or sub-trunk line upstream from a
Repeater Unit and the sub-trunk line downstream from a Repeater Unit).
Separate power supplies
Master Unit/
Repeater Unit Communications
power supply
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Trunk line or
sub-trunk line
Repeater Unit
Communications
power supply
Sub-trunk line
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Same power supply
Master Unit/
Repeater Unit
Communications
power supply
Trunk line or
sub-trunk line
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Repeater Unit
Sub-trunk line
Round cable II or
Flat Cable I/II
Transmission quality will not be maintained and communications errors may
occur if this restriction is not observed.
95
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Using Round Cable I and Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II Together
One or more Repeater Units can be used in a CompoNet Network to use both
round cable I and round cable II, or round cable I and Flat Cable I/II under the
same Master Unit.
Master Unit
BS+
BS-
BS+
BDH
Round cable I
BDL
BS-
Repeater Unit
BS+ 2
PORT1 BS- 2
(upstream)
BS+ 1
PORT2
BDH 1 (downstream)
BS+ 2
BDL 1
Open Type
Connector
BS- 1
Downstream port communications power supply connector
Communications power
Overcurrent
Note:
supply and
protection
When using the UL standards, please install a
I/O power supply (shared)
(See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
unit to restrict current between the external
V
power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only
Power
communications power supply)
supply
G
Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II
Terminating
Resistor
BDH 2
BDL 2
BS- 2
Branch line
BSBDL
BDH
BS+
BSBDL
Slave Unit
V
Power
supply
G
Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II
Terminating
Resistor
Multidrop
Connector
BDH 2
BDL 2
BS- 2
BSBDL
BDH
Slave Unit
Network
power supply
Slave Unit Slave Units
BS+
BS-
BDL
BDH
Slave Unit
Subtrunk
line
BS+
3-5-5
BSBDL
Note
V
G
BDH
Power
supply
BS+
Round cable I Branch line
Terminating Resistor
I/O power supply
Network
power supply
Slave Units
Communications power
supply and
I/O power supply (shared)
Overcurrent
protection
(See note.)
(current limit: 4 A)
BS+ 1
PORT2
BDH 1 (downstream)
BS+ 2
BDL 1
BS- 1
BS+
Slave Unit
BS+ 2
PORT1 BS- 2
(upstream)
Open Type
Connector
BDH
BSBDL
Slave Unit
Round cable I
Repeater Unit
BDH
BS+
Trunk line
Subtrunk
line
Multi-power
supply Slave
Unit
The I/O power supply to multi-power supply Slave Units may be a source of
noise depending on the connected devices. Even when supplying the communications power supply together to all Slave Units, use a separate I/O power
supply so that noise does not affect the network.
Precautions when Supplying Communications Power
When supplying communications power and I/O power, the allowable currents
of cables and connections, the voltage drop, and the capacity and location of
power supplies must be considered.
Allowable Current
Restrictions
96
Do not allow the total current consumption of all Slave Units to exceed the
allowable current of the communications cables and connectors. Exceeding
the allowable current may result in heating or burnout of the cables or connectors.
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Flat Connector Plug: 5 A max. (UL: 4 A)
Flat Connector Socket: 5 A max. (UL: 4A)
Master
Unit
Power
supply,
24 VDC
Cable
Terminating
Resistor
(a)
Slave Unit
current consumption I1
Slave Unit
current consumption I2
Slave Unit
current consumption In
Slave Unit
current consumption I3
The allowable currents for cables and connectors are given below.
Allowable Currents for
Cables
Select the communications cable so that the total current consumption of all
Slave Units does not exceed the allowable current of the cable.
Cable allowable current ≥ I1 + I2 + I3 + · · · · In
(For the allowable cable current for “a” in the above diagram)
Allowable Currents for
Connectors
There are limits to the allowable current for the communications power supply
connectors on the Master Unit and Repeater Units, Flat Connector Sockets,
and Flat Connector Plugs. Do not allow the current flow where these connectors are used to exceed the allowable current.
Name
Communications power supply connectors on CS/
CJ-Master Units
Communications power supply connector on
Repeater Unit
Flat Connector Sockets
Flat Connector Plugs
Multidrop Connector
Flat Multidrop Connector Plug
Model
CS1W-CRM21
CJ1W-CRM21
CRS1-RPT01
Allowable
current
5A
(UL: 4 A)
DCN4-TR4
DCN5-TR4
DCN4-BR4
DCN5-BR4
DCN4-MD4
DCN4-MR4
Voltage Drop
Cable Voltage Drop
The voltage drop must be considered so that the power supply voltage at the
Slave Unit that is the farthest from the power supply will still be within the
allowable power supply range.
The voltage drop is expressed by the following formula.
Voltage drop (V) = Current (A) × Cable conductor resistance (Ω/m) × Cable length
(m) × 2
If the voltage drop is too large and power cannot be supplied to the farthest
Slave Unit within the allowable range, add a Repeater Unit and supply power
from the Repeater Unit.
97
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
L1
L2
Ln
L3
Terminating
Resistor
Master
Unit
3 m max.
Power
supply,
24 VDC
■
Slave Unit
current consumption I1
Slave Unit
current consumption I2
Slave Unit
current consumption I3
Slave Unit
current consumption In
Calculation Example
The allowable power supply voltage range for Slave Units is 14 to 26.4 VDC. If
a 24-VDC power supply is used, the allowable voltage drop is 10 V.
The extended length of cable that can be used is expressed by the following
formula:
10 (V) ≥ {(I1 + I2 + I3 + … + In) × R1 × L1 × 2} + {(I2 + I3 + … + In) × R2 × L2 × 2} + {(I3
+ … + In) × R3 × L3 × 2} + … + {In × Rn × Ln × 2}
To provide leeway when selecting the cable, use the following formula.
10(V) ≥ {(I1 + I2 + I3 + … + In) × R × L × 2}
R = Cable conductor resistance = 0.025 Ω/m for Flat Cable
Therefore the length that the cable can be extended is as follows:
L (m) ≤ 200 ÷ (I1 + I2 + I3 + … + In) … For Flat Cable
3-5-6
Precautions when Providing the I/O Power Supply
When installing a system, the supply methods for communications power and
I/O power must be considered. Not only hardware, such as selecting the
power supplies and cables based on allowable currents and voltage drop, be
considered, but also system operation for power supply errors, costs, and
other software issues must be considered when studying power supply methods.
Supplying I/O Power
from One Source
When supplying I/O power to the entire system from one source, the power
consumed by each device and all the loads must be considered. Select the
cables so that the power supply voltage for the last Slave Unit and load will be
within the allowable range.
Also, give proper consideration to the power supply capacity and be sure the
total line current is within the allowable current range of the cable.
The following measures can be considered to keep the voltage drop within the
allowable range when supplying power from one power supply.
• Increase the thickness of the power supply cables.
• Increase the output voltage of the power supply.
• Shorten the wiring.
• Locate the power supply in the middle of the network.
98
Section 3-5
Power Supply Wiring
Slave
Slave
Load
Load
1
Power supply
(24 VDC)
I1
I2
I3
I4
If a stable power supply voltage cannot supplied to the end load, place the power supply
in the middle of the network.
Supplying I/O power from multiple power supplies instead of from one power
supply enables reducing the line current, reducing the voltage drop, and
decreasing the size of the cable. Using multiple power supplies should also be
considered to increase system safety when power supply errors occur.
Slave
Power supply
(24 VDC)
3-5-7
Load
Design the wiring so that a stable power supply voltage is supplied to the end load.
4
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Supplying I/O Power
from Multiple Sources
Load
3
2
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Power supply
(24 VDC)
Other Precautions
Power Supply Errors
The location of power supplies and the grouping of Slave Units should be considered based on whether the overall system is to be stopped when a power
supply error occurs.
If it is necessary to prevent the overall system from stopping to ensure system
safety, consider placing power supplies in more than one location and consider the way Slave Units should be grouped when supplying power.
Cost Considerations
Also consider the power supply methods in light of the total cost, including the
following items:
The capacity and number of power supplies, Cable thickness (allowable current) and length (voltage drop), System safety, and Wiring work.
99
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
This section describes how to connect external devices, such as sensors, to
the I/O terminals of Slave Units. The connection method varies depending on
the type of Slave Unit that is used. The following table shows the differences
in external I/O connection methods according to the Slave Unit.
Digital I/O Slave
Units
Name
With 2-tier Terminal Block
With 3-tier Terminal Block
With e-CON Connectors
With MIL Connectors
With Screw-less Clamp Terminal
Blocks
100
Model
CRT1-ID08(-1)
CRT1-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ID08TA(-1)
CRT1-OD08TA(-1)
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)
CRT1-ID16TA(-1)
CRT1-OD16TA(-1)
CRT1-MD16TA(-1)
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-VID08S(-1)
CRT1-VOD08S(-1)
CRT1-ID16S(-1)
CRT1-OD16S(-1)
CRT1-MD16S(-1)
CRT1-ID16SH(-1)
CRT1-OD16SH(-1)
CRT1-MD16SH(-1)
CRT1-ID32S(-1)
CRT1-OD32S(-1)
CRT1-MD32S(-1)
CRT1-ID32SH(-1)
CRT1-OD32SH(-1)
CRT1-MD32SH(-1)
CRT1-VID16ML(-1)
CRT1-VOD16ML(-1)
CRT1-VID32ML(-1)
CRT1-VID32ML(-1)
CRT1-VMD32ML(-1)
CRT1-ID08SL(-1)
CRT1-OD08SL(-1)
CRT1-ID16SL(-1)
CRT1-OD16SL(-1)
CRT1-MD16SL(-1)
I/O connection method
Screw terminal block
(M3)
e-CON connector
MIL connector
Screw-less clamp terminal block
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Analog I/O Slave
Units
Name
With 2-tier Terminal Block
With e-CON Connectors
With MIL Connectors
Temperature Input Units
Expansion Units
Bit Slaves
With e-CON Connectors
IP54
With Screw-less Clamp Termi- IP54
nal Blocks
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Model
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
XWT-ID08(-1)
XWT-OD08(-1)
XWT-ID16(-1)
XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1B-ID02S(-1)
CRT1B-OD02S(-1)
CRT1B-ID02SP(-1)
CRT1B-OD02SP(-1)
CRT1B-ID04SP(-1)
CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)
CRT1B-ID02JS(-1)
CRT1B-OD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-ID04JS(-1)
CRT1B-OD04JS(-1)
I/O connection method
Screw terminal block
(M3)
e-CON connector
MIL connector
Screw terminal block
(M3)
e-CON connector
Screw-less clamp terminal block
XA-series Connector
from J.S.T. Mfg
CRT1B-MD04JS(-1)
3-6-1
Connecting to a Screw Terminal Block
For Slave Units with screw terminal blocks, attach the following M3 crimp terminals to signal lines and then connect them to the terminal block.
Tighten the terminal block screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m.
6.0 mm max.
Note
6.0 mm max.
Mounting and Removing Terminal Blocks
When attaching a terminal block to a Slave Unit with two or three terminal
blocks, tighten the mounting screws alternately a little at a time. When removing a terminal block, loosen the mounting screws alternately a little at a time. If
you tighten or loosen only one of the screws all the way without tightening or
loosening the other screw, the terminal block will warp, possibly causing it to
crack.
101
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
The following Slave Units have one or two terminal blocks.
Digital I/O Slave
Units
Analog I/O Slave
Units
Temperature Input
Units
Expansion Units
3-6-2
Name
Model
Models with 2 terminal blocks CRT1-ID08(-1)
CRT1-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
Models with 3 terminal blocks CRT1-ID08TA(-1)
CRT1-OD08TA
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)
CRT1-ID16TA(-1)
CRT1-OD16TA(-1)
CRT1-MD16TA(-1)
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
Models with 2 terminal blocks CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
--CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
--XWT-ID08(-1)
XWT-OD08(-1)
XWT-ID16(-1)
XWT-OD16(-1)
Connecting to e-CON Connector Terminals
For Slave Units with e-CON connector terminals, a special cable connector
must be attached to an external device cable. Follow the procedure below to
attach the connector to the cable.
■ Checking the Cable Connector and Cable Wire Size
The wire size and sheath diameter of applicable cables depend on the type of
cable connector. Use the following table to check that the cable connector and
external device cable wire size and sheath diameter are compatible.
Tyco Electronics Connectors
Model
3-1473562-4
1-1473562-4
1473562-4
2-1473562-4
4-1473562-4
Housing color
Orange
Red
Yellow
Blue
Green
Applicable wire range
sheath outer diameter: 0.9 to 1.0 mm
sheath outer diameter: 0.9 to 1.0 mm
sheath outer diameter: 1.0 to 1.15 mm
sheath outer diameter: 1.15 to 1.35 mm
sheath outer diameter: 1.35 to 1.60 mm
Cross-sectional area:
0.08 to
0.5 mm2
Sumitomo 3M Connectors
Model
37104-3101-000FL
37104-3122-000FL
37104-3163-000FL
102
Housing color
Applicable wire range
Red
AWG26 (0.14 mm2) to AWG24 (0.2 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 0.8 to 1.0 mm
Yellow
AWG26 (0.14 mm2) to AWG24 (0.2 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 1.0 to 1.2 mm
Orange
AWG26 (0.14 mm2) to AWG24 (0.2 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 1.2 to 1.6 mm
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Model
Housing color
Applicable wire range
37104-2124-000FL
Green
AWG22 (0.3 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 1.0 to 1.2 mm
37104-2165-000FL
Blue
AWG22 (0.3 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 1.2 to 1.6 mm
37104-2206-000FL
Gray
AWG22 (0.3 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 1.6 to 2.0 mm
OMRON Connectors
Model
XN2A-1430
Specification
Applicable wire range
Spring clamp type AWG28 (0.08 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2),
sheath outer diameter: 1.5 mm max.
■ Preparing External Device Cables
Using Tyco Electronics or Sumitomo 3M Connectors
The sensor and other external device cables for connector output with transistors are normally either semi-stripped or stripped, as shown in the following
diagram.
Semi-stripped cable
Stripped cable
When the cables are prepared this way, a cable connector cannot be
attached, so first cut the end and remove the cable sheath as shown in the following diagram. (Do not strip the sheaths of the core wires.)
20 mm min.
Using OMRON Connectors
Align the cable with the strip gauge on the side of the connector. Remove 7 to
8 mm of the wiring sheath, and twist the exposed wires several times.
7 to 8 mm
■ Inserting Cable Wires into the Cable Connector
Insert the cable wires of the external device into the cable connector, and connect each wire so that the terminal number on the connector cover matches
the wire color as shown in the following table.
• For Digital I/O Slave Unit
Terminal
Using CRT1-VID08S, CRT1number ID16S(H), CRT1-MD16S(H), CRT1ID32S(H), CRT1-MD32S(H),
CRT1B-ID02S, CRT1B-ID02SP,
CRT1B-ID04SP
3-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnostic
output)
1
2
Brown (red)
---
2-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnostic
output)
-----
Using CRT1-VID08S-1, CRT1ID16S(H)-1, CRT1-MD16S(H)-1,
CRT1-ID32S(H)-1, CRT1MD32S(H)-1, CRT1B-ID02S-1,
CRT1B-ID02SP-1, CRT1BID04SLP-1
3-wire sensor
2-wire sensor
(without self(without selfdiagnostic
diagnostic
output)
output)
Brown (red)
Brown (white)
-----
103
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Terminal
Using CRT1-VID08S, CRT1number ID16S(H), CRT1-MD16S(H), CRT1ID32S(H), CRT1-MD32S(H),
CRT1B-ID02S, CRT1B-ID02SP,
CRT1B-ID04SP
3-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnostic
output)
3
4
Blue (black)
Black (white)
Note
2-wire sensor
(without selfdiagnostic
output)
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Using CRT1-VID08S-1, CRT1ID16S(H)-1, CRT1-MD16S(H)-1,
CRT1-ID32S(H)-1, CRT1MD32S(H)-1, CRT1B-ID02S-1,
CRT1B-ID02SP-1, CRT1BID04SLP-1
3-wire sensor
2-wire sensor
(without self(without selfdiagnostic
diagnostic
output)
output)
Blue (black)
Black (white)
--Blue (black)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS
standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
• For Analog I/O Slave Unit
The wire colors differ by external devices. Please see the catalog or manual for the specific external device.
Using Tyco Electronics or Sumitomo 3M Connectors
1,2,3...
1. Confirm that the terminal number matches the wire color, and insert each
wire all the way into the opening on the cable connector cover.
2. Use a tool, such as a pliers, to push the cover straight in so that it is parallel
with the body.
Using OMRON Connectors
1,2,3...
1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the operation lever inside the connector's operation opening until it locks, as shown in the following diagram.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Operation opening
2. Insert the wire all the way to the back of the wire insertion opening. Check
that the sheath of the line is inserted into the wire insertion opening, and
that the end of the conductor has passed through the connection part.
Connection part
Wire sheath
Wire insertion opening
3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the reset opening and pull back the lever
lightly. A click will be heard and the operation lever will return to its normal
position.
104
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Operation lever
(white)
Reset opening
4. Lightly pull the wire to confirm that it is connected properly.
Note
3-6-3
To remove a wire, push in the operation lever, check that the operation lever
has locked, and then pull out the wire. After removing the wire, always return
the operation lever to its normal position.
Connecting to MIL Connector Terminals
Use any of the following methods to connect to a MIL connector.
• Use an OMRON MIL Cable.
• Pressure-weld a Flat Cable to a MIL Socket.
• Pressure-weld a loose-wire cable to a MIL connector.
Using OMRON MIL
Cable
• Connecting Relay Terminals
The MIL Cables for connecting OMRON Relay Terminals are shown in the
following table. Select the appropriate Cable depending on the combination of Remote I/O Terminals and Relay Terminals that are
used.
[email protected](-1)
[email protected](-1)
105
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Slave model
MIL Cable model
CRT1-VID16ML
[email protected]
CRT1-VOD16ML
[email protected]
CRT1-VOD16ML-1
[email protected]
[email protected]
CRT1-VID32ML
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
CRT1-VOD32ML
CRT1-VOD32ML-1
CRT1-VMD32ML
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-M50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-M50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D2 (75 cm)
Connected Relay
Terminal
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-OC16/OC08
G7OD-SOC16/VSOC16
G7OD-FOM16/VFOM16
G7OA-ZOC16-3
G7OD-SOC08
G7OR-SOC08
G7TC-OC16-1
G7OD-SOC16-1
G7OD-FOM16-1
G7OA-ZOC16-4
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
G7TC-OC16/OC08
G7OD-SOC16/VSOC16
G7OD-FOM16/VFOM16
G7OA-ZOC16-3
G7OD-SOC08
G7OR-SOC08
G7OD-SOC16-1
G7OD-FOM16-1
G7OA-ZOC16-4
G7TC-OC16-1
Inputs: G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
Outputs:
G7TC-OC16/
OC08
G7OD-SOC16/
VSOC16
G7OD-FOM16
VFOM16
G7OA-ZOC16-3
G7OD-SOC08
G7OR-SOC08
Inputs: G7OA-ZIM16-5
G7OD-SOC16-1
G7OD-FOM16-1
G7OA-ZOC16-4
Remarks
-----
---
-----
---
Inputs and outputs are distinguished by color.
Input tube color: Red
Output tube color: Yellow
Inputs and outputs are distinguished by color.
Input tube color: Red
Output tube color: Yellow
Connecting to a Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
The following Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units are available.
For details, refer to the SYSMAC Selection Guide (Cat. No. X066).
Type
Slim
Through-type
With common terminal
106
Series
XW2D
XW2B
XW2C
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Type
Three-tier with common terminal
Screw-less clamp terminals
e-CON connector
■
Series
XW2E
XW2F
XW2N
Connecting Loose Wires to Devices
The following table shows the Cables available when the Slave Unit has a MIL
connector and the other device has loose wires. Use these Cables as needed.
Slave model
[email protected]
20 pins
[email protected]
40 pins
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-VAD04ML
MIL Cable model
G79-A200C (2 m)
G79-A500C (5 m)
G79-Y100C (1 m)
G79-Y150C (1.5 m)
G79-Y200C (2 m)
G79-Y300C (3 m)
G79-Y500C (5 m)
G79-A200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-A500C-D1 (5 m)
G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m)
G79-Y200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m)
10 pins
16 pins
Remarks
Loose wire size: AWG24
Loose wires are cut.
Forked terminals are attached to the loose
wires.
Forked terminal: 161071-M2
(Nippon Terminal)
Loose wire size: AWG28
Loose wires are cut.
Forked terminals are attached to the loose
wires.
Forked terminal: 161071-M2
(Nippon Terminal)
Indicated cable is not available
The following table shows the MIL connector pin numbers, loose wire colors,
dot markings, and dot colors.
20 Pins ([email protected]@@C)
Pin No.
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Wire color
Light brown
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
Dots
„
Dot color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Pin No.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Wire color
Light brown
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
Dots
„„
Dot color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
107
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
20 Pins ([email protected]@@C)
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wire color
Light brown
Dots
„
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
Dot color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Pin No.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Wire color
Light brown
Dot color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Pin No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Wire color
Light brown
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Light brown
Dots
„„
Dot color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Dots
„„„
Dot color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
„„„„
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
40 Pins
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wire color
Light brown
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Light brown
Dots
„
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
„„
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
Yellow
Light green
Gray
White
Pressure-welding a Flat Cable to a MIL Socket
To make your own connecting cable by pressure-welding the flat cable to the
MIL socket, use the components shown in the table below and follow the
directions.
• Required Components
Number of connector pins
10 pins
No polarity guide
Uses polarity guide
16 pins
XG4M-1630-T
20 pins
XG4M-2030-T
40 pins
XG4M-4030-T
• Procedure
108
Model
XG4M-1031-T
XG4M-1030-T
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
1,2,3...
Section 3-6
1. Using a fine flat-bladed screwdriver, open the hooks at both ends of the
MIL Socket and separate the contact side and the cover side. There are
two latches at each end of the Socket (i.e., the contact side, and altogether
four laches). Release the bottom laches on both sides at the same time,
and then release the upper two. Do not attempt to release two latches on
one side without releasing the latches on the other side.
2. Insert the Flat Cable between the separated Socket sides, line it up with
the contacts, align the contact side with the cover side, and lock them in
place. Use an object such as a vise to firmly press them together until they
mesh with the latches.
Applicable wires for pressure-welding: 1.27-mm pitch Flat Cable (7-strand)
• UL2651 (Standard cable)
• UL20012 (Folding cable)
• UL20028 (Color-coded cable)
XG4M-1031-T/1030-T/1630-T/2030-T
XG4M-4030-T
3. Bend back the cable as required, insert a Strain Relief, and lock the cable
in place.
109
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
XG4M-1031-T/1030-T/1630-T/2030-T
XG4M-4030-T
Pressure-welding a Loose-wire Cable to a MIL Connector.
To prepare a connecting cable by pressure-welding a loose-wire cable to a
MIL connector, assemble the connector from the components shown in the
following table.
10-pin Cable
Component
Wire size: AWG24
Socket No polarity guide
XG5M-1031-N
Uses polarity guide XG5M-1032-N
Semi-cover (See note.)
XG5S-0501
Wire size:
AWG28 to AWG26
XG5M-1034-N
XG5M-1035-N
16-pin Cable
Component
Socket
Semi-cover (See note.)
Wire size: AWG24
XG5M-1632-N
XG5S-0801
Wire size:
AWG28 to AWG26
XG5M-1635-N
20-pin Cable
Component
Socket
Semi-cover (See note.)
Hood Cover
Wire size: AWG24
XG5M-2032-N
XG5S-1001
XG5S-2012
Wire size:
AWG28 to AWG26
XG5M-2035-N
40-pin Cable
Component
Socket
Semi-cover (See note.)
Hood Cover
Note
Wire size: AWG24
XG5M-4032-N
XG5S-2001
XG5S-4022
Wire size:
AWG28 to AWG26
XG5M-4035-N
Two Semi-covers are required per connector.
For details on individual components, refer to the Connectors Group Catalog
(Cat. No. G015).
110
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Note
3-6-4
When using a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector to branch a Communications
Cable, bind together the loose wires where the cable comes out of the Hood
Cover. Wire the Communications Cable and loose-wire cable so that they do
not interfere with each other.
Connecting to Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks
For Slave Units with screw-less clamp terminal blocks, the terminal blocks can
be easily wired by inserting pin terminals. Follow the procedure below to connect the external device cable to a screw-less clamp terminal block.
■ Applicable Pin Terminals
When wiring an external device cable to a screw-less clamp terminal block,
special pin terminals must be placed on the cable wires. The applicable pin
terminals are listed in the following table.
Name
H0.5/14 orange
H0.75/14 white
H1.5/14 red
Applicable wire size Crimp tool
0.5 mm2/AWG20
PZ6 roto
0.75 mm2/AWG18
1.5 mm2/AWG16
Manufacturer
Weidmuller Co. Ltd.
The pin terminal conductor should be about 8 to 10 mm in length.
Conductor length: 8 to 10 mm
■ Wiring to the Screw-less Clamp Terminal Block
Inserting Pin Terminals
Insert the pin terminal all the way to the back of the terminal hole.
Insert the pin terminal all the way to the back.
Removing Pin Terminals
Press down the release button next to the terminal hole with a small flat-blade
screwdriver and pull out the pin terminal while the release button is down.
Small flat-blade screwdriver
Release button
The following screwdriver is recommended for removing pin terminals.
Model
SD0.6 × 3.5 × 100 Flat-blade
Screwdriver
Manufacturer
Weidmuller Co. Ltd.
111
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Note
3-6-5
Side
Front
0.6 mm
3.5 mm
Press the release button with a force of 30 N or less. Applying excessive force
may damage the clamp terminal block.
Connecting External I/O to IP54 Bit Slave Units
Components
Cover screws
Cover
Sealing section cover
NC pin
Small cable sealing pieces
Housing
Sealing section housing
External I/O is connected to e-CON connector terminals or screw-less clamp
terminals inside the housing. Connected external I/O cables are passed
through the sealing.
The cables are held between the sealing section cover and sealing section
housing to ensure resistance to splashing.
For cables with smaller outer diameters, the sealing pieces can be used to
ensure splash resistance.
Applicable Cables
The range of outer diameters of cables that can be connected is 2.2 to
6.3 mm. When the diameter is within the range of 2.2 to less than 3.6 mm,
then the sealing section for small-diameter cables must be attached.
Split
112
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Section 3-6
Installation Method
1,2,3...
1. Expand the split in the sealing piece and insert the cable.
2. Place the groove on the sealing pieces onto the inside of the housing to
secure it. (See following diagram.)
Handling
Unconnected
Terminals
For terminals that are not connected, insert an NC pin into the small cable
sealing piece as shown in the following diagram. Then secure the sealing
piece onto the housing as described above.
Tightening the Cover
Finally, close the cover and tighten the cover screws.
The tightening torque is 0.8 to 1.0 N·m.
3-6-6
Connecting to Compact Connectors
The compact connectors use XA-series Connectors from JST Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Special cable connectors must be attached for cables connecting to external
devices if a Slave Unit with Compact Connectors is used.
XA-series Connectors
from J.S.T. Mfg.
Name
Applicable cable range
Model
Crimping
Tool
AWG#
Wire sheath
external
diameter
0.08 to 0.33 28 to 22
1.2 to 1.9
SXA-001T-P0.6 YC692 or
YC692R
0.22 to 0.5
24 to 20
1.5 to 1.9
SXA-01T-P0.6 YRS701 to
YC701R
mm2
Contacts
113
Section 3-6
Connecting External I/O for Slave Units
Name
Housing
Note
Model
XAP-03V-1
(1) Automated Crimp Tools are also available. For details, contact the manufacturer.
(2) For information on the processing procedure, refer to the instruction manual included with the tool or contact the manufacturer (JST Mfg. Co., Ltd.).
114
SECTION 4
Basic Specifications of Slave Units
This section provides the basic specifications of the Slave Units.
4-1
Basic Specifications of Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
4-1-1
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
4-1-2
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
4-1-3
Communications Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
117
115
Section 4-1
Basic Specifications of Slave Units
4-1
Basic Specifications of Slave Units
This section gives the specifications that are the same for all Slave Units. For
specifications that vary with the Slave Unit, refer to the section for each Slave
Unit.
4-1-1
Communications Specifications
Item
Communications protocol
Types of communications
Baud rate
Modulation
Coding
Error control
Communications media
Communications distance and
wiring
Connectable Master Units
Connectable Slave Units
Maximum I/O capacity
Maximum number of nodes
Bits allocated per node address
Maximum number of nodes per
segment
Applicable node addresses
Repeater Unit application conditions
Signal lines
Power lines
Connection forms
116
Specification
CompoNet Network protocol
Remote I/O communications (programless, constant sharing of data with Slave Units)
and message communications (explicit message communications as required with
Slave Units and FINS message communications as required with PLCs)
4 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 1.5 Mbps, 93.75 kbps
Base-band
Manchester code
Manchester code rules, CRC
The following media can be used.
• Round cable I
• Round cable II
• Flat Cable I
• Flat Cable II
Note Round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I, and Flat Cable II are all different
types of cable. To use more than one type of cable at a time, Repeater Units
must be used to separate them on trunk lines and sub-trunk lines.
Refer to 1-2-1 Cable Types, Baud Rates, and Maximum Distances in the Master Unit
Operation Manual.
CompoNet Master Units
CompoNet Slave Units
Word Slave Units: 1,024 inputs and 1,024 outputs (2,048 I/O points total)
Bit Slave Units: 256 inputs and 256 outputs (512 I/O points total)
Word Slave Units: 64 input nodes and 64 output nodes
Bit Slave Units: 128 input nodes and 128 output nodes
Repeater Units: 64 nodes
Word Slave Units: 16 bits
Bit Slave Units: 2 bits
32 nodes (including Repeater Units)
Word Slave Units: IN0 to IN63 and OUT0 to OUT63
Bit Slave Units: IN0 to IN127 and OUT0 to OUT127
Repeater Units: 0 to 63
Up to 64 Repeater Units can be connected per network. When Repeater Units are
connected in series from the Master Unit, up to 2 extra segment layers can be created
(i.e., up to 2 Repeater Units are allowed between a Slave Unit and the Master Unit).
Two lines: BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications data low)
Two lines: BS+ and BS− (power for communications and internal Slave Unit circuits)
• Power is supplied from the Master Unit or Repeater Units.
Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II at baud rate of 93.75 kbps: No restrictions
Other cables or baud rates: Trunk line and branch lines
Connections for Slave Units and Repeater Units: T-branch or multidrop connections
Section 4-1
Basic Specifications of Slave Units
4-1-2
Performance Specifications
Item
Communications power supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Ambient operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
Storage humidity
Terminal block screw tightening torque
(See note.)
Installation
Note
Specification
14 to 26.4 VDC
20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC −15%/+10%)
Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line).
10 to 60 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 60 to 150 Hz and 50 m/s2 in X, Y,
and Z directions for 80 min each
150 m/s2 (3 times each in 6 directions on 3 axes)
500 VAC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits)
−10 to 55°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
−25 to 65°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m
M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m
Mounting with 35-mm DIN Track, M4 screws, or Mounting Brackets (depending
on model)
Applicable only to Slaves to which screw terminal blocks are mounted.
Some of the specifications are different for the CRT1-ROS08/ROS16 (with
relay outputs) and the CRT1-ROF08/ROF16 (with SSR outputs). For details,
refer to 5-3-8 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) and 5-3-9 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR
Outputs).
4-1-3
Communications Indicators
The communications indicators have the following meanings.
MS (Module Status): Indicates the status of the node with a two-color LED
(green/red).
NS (Network Status): Indicates the status of communications with a two-color
LED (green/red).
Name
MS
Indicator status
Lit green.
Node/communications
status
Normal status
Lit red.
Fatal error
Flashing red.
Non-fatal error
Not lit.
Power OFF/Startup
Meaning
The Unit is operating normally.
A hardware error has occurred in the Unit. The watchdog
timer has timed-out.
There is an error in the switch settings.
An EEPROM checksum error has occurred.
The power supply is OFF, the Unit is being reset, or the Unit
is being initialized.
117
Section 4-1
Basic Specifications of Slave Units
Name
NS
Indicator status
Lit green.
Flashing
green.
Lit red.
Flashing red.
Not lit.
Node/communications
status
Online and participating
Normal communications are in progress and the node is participating in the network.
Online but not participatNormal communications are in progress but the node is not
ing
yet participating in the network.
Fatal communications
The address is set out of range.
error
The same address has been set for more than one node.
Non-fatal communications Polling has timed out. The network has timed out.
error
Power OFF/Baud rate not The power supply is OFF or the baud rate has not been
yet detected.
detected.
Note
118
Meaning
When flashing, indicators are lit for 0.5 s and not lit for 0.5 s.
SECTION 5
Digital I/O Slave Units
This section describes the Digital I/O Slave Units.
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Data Allocation for Word Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Data Allocation for Word Slave Units with Expansion Units . . . . .
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Eight-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-4 Sixteen-point Output Units
(2-tier Terminal Block with Transistor Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units
(2-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-6 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs)
5-3-7 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs)
5-3-8 Sixteen-point Output Units
(2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-9 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs)
5-3-10 Eight-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-11 Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-12 Sixteen-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-13 Sixteen-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block). . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-14 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units
(3-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units with Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-1 Eight-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-2 Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors)
5-4-6 Thirty-two-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-7 Thirty-two-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-8 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units
(e-CON Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-9 Sixteen-point Input Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-10 Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-11 Thirty-two-point Input Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-12 Thirty-two-point Output Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4-13 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units
(MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1 Eight-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2 Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps). . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units
(With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
120
121
121
123
125
125
129
134
138
142
147
152
156
161
165
172
177
183
190
197
197
203
209
214
220
228
233
239
246
252
258
266
273
282
282
286
290
295
299
119
Section 5-1
Status Areas
5-1
Status Areas
A Digital I/O Slave Unit has two internal status areas: the Warning Status
Area and the Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned
ON and OFF based on the threshold values set by the user for each function
in that Unit.
When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master
Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices
and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns
ON.
The Digital I/O Slave Unit's status area information can be read by using the
CX-Integrator or explicit messages.
Master Unit
The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all
slaves
Transmitted
to Master Unit
Digital I/O Slave Unit
The Digital I/O Slave Unit has two status areas:
the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area.
Warning Status Area
The Digital I/O Slave Unit's Warning Status Area contains the following
16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
120
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Network Power Voltage Drop Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Voltage dropped below
threshold.)
Unit Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Operation Time Monitor Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Connected Device Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Description
----Monitors the voltage set as the
threshold for the network power voltage monitor function.
Monitors the power ON time warning
value set as the threshold for the Unit
Conduction Time Monitor function.
--------Turns ON when the threshold set for
the operation time monitor function is
exceeded.
Turns ON when the threshold set for
the contact operation monitor function or the total ON time monitor function is exceeded.
---------
Section 5-2
Allocating I/O Data
Bit
14
15
Alarm Status Area
Description
-----
The Digital I/O Slave Unit's Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits.
These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5-2
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Content
Reserved
EEPROM Data Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error occurred
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
I/O Power Supply Status Flag 1
OFF: I/O power is ON
ON: I/O power is not ON.
I/O Power Supply Status Flag 2
OFF: I/O power is ON
ON: I/O power is not ON.
Reserved
Reserved
Operation Time Configuration Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Description
--Turns ON when there is an error in
the EEPROM data.
------------Turns ON when I/O power is not
being supplied.
Turns ON when I/O power is not
being supplied to the Expansion Unit.
----Turns ON when a threshold value is
set for the operation time monitor
function between a Digital I/O Slave
Unit and Expansion Unit if an Expansion Unit is not connected.
-------
Allocating I/O Data
Input and output areas in I/O memory in the Master Unit are allocated to the
I/O data of Word Slave Units in a CompoNet Network. Node address areas
are allocated in order of node addresses for Slave Units of the same type. In a
CompoNet Network, Units are allocated node address areas of the size
required for each Unit, based on the node address set for the Unit.
5-2-1
Data Allocation for Word Slave Units
Word Slave Units are allocated node address areas in units of 16 points (one
word).
• Units with 8 inputs or outputs are allocated one word (the node address
set for the Unit).
• Units with 16 inputs or outputs are allocated one word (the node address
set for the Unit).
• Units with 16 I/O points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) are allocated two words
(the node address set for the Unit). The data is allocated to the lower
bytes of the words, and the upper bytes remain unused.
121
Section 5-2
Allocating I/O Data
• Units with 32 inputs or outputs are allocated two words per node (node
address m and m+1 for the Input Area or Output Area).
• Units with 32 I/O points (16 inputs and 16 outputs) are allocated two
words per node (node address m for the Input Area, and node address m
for the Output Area).
Eight-point Input Unit
Input Area
Not used.
Eight-point Output
Unit
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Area
15
Sixteen-point Output
Unit
6
Output Area
Not used.
Sixteen-point Input
Unit
7
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Output Area
15
14
Sixteen-point I/O Unit
Output Area
Input Area
Thirty-two-point Input
Unit
Thirty-two-point
Output Unit
Thirty-two-point I/O
Unit
Input Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Output Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Output Area
15
14
Input Area
15
122
14
Section 5-2
Allocating I/O Data
5-2-2
Data Allocation for Word Slave Units with Expansion Units
When an Expansion Unit is used, memory is allocated in the same way as it
would be allocated to a Word Slave Unit that includes the input and output
data of the Expansion Unit.
Sixteen-point Input Unit +
Sixteen-point Expansion
Input Unit
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and
node address m+1 in the Input Area.
Input Area
Sixteen-point Input Unit +
Eight-point Expansion
Input Unit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and
node address m+1 in the Input Area.
Input Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Not used.
Sixteen-point Input Unit +
Sixteen-point Expansion
Output Unit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and
node address m in the Output Area.
Output Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Area
15
Sixteen-point Input Unit +
Eight-point Expansion
Output Unit
14
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and
node address m in the Output Area.
Output Area
Not Used.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Area
15
Sixteen-point Output Unit
+ Sixteen-point Expansion
Output Unit
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area
and node address m+1 in the Output Area.
Output Area
Sixteen-point Output Unit
+ Eight-point Expansion
Output Unit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area
and node address m+1 in the Output Area.
123
Section 5-2
Allocating I/O Data
Output Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Not Used.
Sixteen-point Output Unit
+ Sixteen-point Expansion
Input Unit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area
and node address m in the Input Area.
Output Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Area
15
Sixteen-point Output Unit
+ Eight-point Expansion
Input Unit
14
Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area
and node address m in the Input Area.
Output Area
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input Area
Not Used.
124
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3
5-3-1
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Eight-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-ID08/CRT1-ID08-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
CRT1-ID08
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Note
CRT1-ID08-1
8 inputs
NPN
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input 15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
160 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID08 and CRT1-ID08-1)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input indicators 0 to 7
Communications
connector
I/O terminal block (removable)
125
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID08 (NPN)
BS+
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
126
V 24 VDC
0
1
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
G
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID08-1 (PNP)
BS+
V 24 VDC
Photocoupler
0
BDH
Physical
layer
BDL
1
Internal circuits
BS−
Photocoupler
G
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Wiring
CRT1-ID08 (NPN)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
12
1
2
3
G
0
14
5
4
2
15
7
5
4
16
NC
6
NC
17
NC
7
NC
18
NC
8
NC
NC
9
NC
NC
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
I/O power supply
Blue (Black)
+
Black (White)
−
13
3
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
CRT1-ID08-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
13
3
3
0
14
5
4
2
5
4
15
7
6
6
16
NC
NC
17
NC
7
NC
18
NC
8
NC
NC
9
NC
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
I/O power supply
Black (White)
+
Blue (Black)
−
12
1
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
127
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Note
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID08 and CRT1-ID08-1)
115
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
128
(mm)
74.4
57.6
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
5-3-2
Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-OD08/CRT1-OD08-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-OD08
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
CRT1-OD08-1
8 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
160 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
129
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD08 and CRT1-OD08-1)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Output indicators 0 to 7
Communications
connector
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
130
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD08 (NPN)
BS+
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
BDH
Physical
layer
0
Internal circuits
BDL
V 24 VDC
BS−
1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G
CRT1-OD08-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
BS+
Photocoupler
BDH
0
Physical
layer
1
Internal circuits
BDL
BS−
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G
Wiring
CRT1-OD08 (NPN)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
−
12
1
13
3
3
0
4
2
14
5
5
4
15
7
6
6
16
NC
NC
7
NC
18
17
NC
NC
NC
8
NC
9
NC
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid valve, etc.
Solenoid valve, etc.
131
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-OD08-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
−
12
1
13
3
3
0
4
2
14
5
15
7
5
4
6
6
16
NC
NC
17
NC
7
NC
18
NC
8
NC
NC
9
NC
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid valve, etc.
Note
132
Solenoid valve, etc.
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD08 and CRT1-OD08-1)
115
74.4
57.6
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
133
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-3
Sixteen-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-ID16/CRT1-ID16-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-ID16
16 inputs
NPN
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
1 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 inputs/common
CRT1-ID16-1
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
85 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
141 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16 and CRT1-ID16-1)
Node address switches:
Communications Communications
indicators: MS and NS ×10 and ×1 (from left)
connector
WORD NODE ADR
23
23
X10
[0-63]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
456
IN
78
78
456
9 01
MS NS
Input indicators 0 to 15
X1
9 01
CRT1-ID16
REMOTE TERMINAL
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
134
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID16 (NPN)
Photocoupler
BS+
BDH
BDL
V 24 VDC
0
Physical
layer
1
Internal circuits
BS−
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G
CRT1-ID16-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
BS+
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
0
1
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
G
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
135
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Wiring
CRT1-ID16 (NPN)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
12
1
2
3
G
0
14
5
4
2
15
7
5
4
16
9
6
6
17
11
7
8
18
13
8
10
15
9
12
14
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
I/O power supply
Blue (Black)
+
Black (White)
−
13
3
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
CRT1-ID16-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
12
1
2
G
4
16
9
6
6
7
8
17
11
8
10
18
13
15
9
12
14
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
136
5
4
15
7
+
I/O power supply
Note
14
5
2
Blue (Black)
−
3
0
13
3
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16 and CRT1-ID16-1)
115
66.9
50.1
58.73
51.6
3.14
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
67.8
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
104.4
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
83.9
■
(mm)
(mm)
137
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-4
Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Transistor
Outputs)
CRT1-OD16/CRT1-OD16-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
CRT1-OD16
16 outputs
NPN
0.5 A/output, 4 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 outputs/common
CRT1-OD16-1
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the V terminal)
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
85 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
141 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16 and CRT1-OD16-1)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Communications
connector
WORD NODE ADR
23
23
X10
[0-63]
Output indicators 0 to 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
456
OUT
78
78
456
9 01
MS NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
X1
9 01
CRT1-OD16
CRT1
REMOTE TERMINAL
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
138
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD16 (NPN)
Photocoupler
BDH
BS−
V 24 VDC
0
Internal circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
Voltage
drop
BS+
1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G
CRT1-OD16-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
BS+
Photocoupler
BDH
1
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
Internal circuits
BDL
0
Physical
layer
G
139
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Wiring
CRT1-OD16 (NPN)
24 VDC
10
11
V
12
1
1
2
G
−
13
3
3
0
14
15
5
4
2
7
5
4
16
9
6
6
7
8
18
17
11
15
13
8
10
9
14
12
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid valve, etc.
Solenoid valve, etc.
CRT1-OD16-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
−
12
1
13
3
3
0
4
2
14
5
15
7
5
4
6
6
16
9
7
8
17
11
8
10
18
13
15
9
12
14
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid valve, etc.
Note
140
Solenoid valve, etc.
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16 and CRT1-OD16-1)
115
66.9
50.1
58.73
51.6
3.14
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
67.8
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
104.4
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
83.9
■
(mm)
(mm)
141
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-5
Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal
Block)
CRT1-MD16/CRT1-MD16-1
Common Specifications
Item
Model
Installation
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Specification
CRT1-MD16
CRT1-MD16-1
DIN Track
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
170 g max.
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
CRT1-MD16
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Power supply type
Note
CRT1-MD16-1
8 inputs
NPN
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
142
Specification
CRT1-MD16
8 outputs
NPN
0.5 A/output, 2A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between
each output terminal and the G
terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
CRT1-MD16-1
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between
each output terminal and the V terminal)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Item
Power supply type
Output handling for communications errors
Note
Specification
Multi-power supply
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16/CRT1-MD16-1)
Communications
indicators:
MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input indicators 0 to 7
Communications connector
Output indicators 0 to 7
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table.
Name
LED status
0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow.
0 to 7 (outputs)
Not lit.
Meaning
The input or output is
ON.
The input or output is
OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
9
0 1
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Input or output
ON
Input or output
OFF
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
143
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
CRT1-MD16 (NPN)
Photocoupler
V1 24 VDC
BS+
0
BDH
BDL
1
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
G1
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
Internal circuits
BS-
V2 24 VDC
0
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
1
Photocoupler
G2
CRT1-MD16-1 (PNP)
V1 24 VDC
Photocoupler
0
BS+
1
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BSG1
V2 24 VDC
0
Photocoupler
1
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
144
G2
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Wiring
CRT1-MD16 (NPN)
24 VDC
4
Blue (black)
I/O power supply
5
7
6
Brown (white)
2
Brown (red)
0
G1
3
V2
1
0
G2
Blue (black)
1
Black (white)
V1
2
5
4
7
6
NC
NC
I/O power supply
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric
sensor or
proximity sensor)
3
CRT1-MD16-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric
sensor or
proximity sensor)
Note
5
7
6
Blue (black)
4
Brown (red)
I/O power supply
2
Blue (black)
0
G1
3
Brown (white)
1
Black (white)
V1
V2
G2
1
0
3
2
5
4
NC
7
6
NC
I/O power supply
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
(1) The V1 and V2 terminals as well as the G1 and G2 terminals of the I/O
power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for
V1-G1 and V2-G2.
(2) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(3) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in
parentheses.
145
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16/CRT1-MD16-1)
115
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
146
74.4
57.6
60.3
53.2
31.4
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-6
Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay
Outputs)
CRT1-ROS08
Common Specifications
Item
Communications power supply voltage
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Specification
14 to 26.4 VDC
Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line).
10 to 55 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Ambient operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
Storage humidity
Terminal block screws tightening torque
100 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes)
500 VAC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits)
−10 to 55°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
−25 to 65°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m
M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m
Relay Output Section Specifications (per Output)
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Mounted Relays
Rated load
Rated ON current
Maximum contact voltage
Maximum contact current
Maximum switching capacity
Minimum applicable load (reference
value)
Mechanical service life
Electrical service life
Installation method
Communications power supply current
consumption
Output hold for communications errors
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-ROS08
8 outputs
DRTA-NY5W-K (5 VDC)
Resistive load
250 VAC, 2 A, common: 8 A
30 VDC, 2 A, common: 8 A
3A
250 VAC, 125 VDC
3A
750 VA AC, 90 W DC
5 VDC, 1 mA
20,000,000 operations min.
100,000 operations min.
DIN Track
95 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
150 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
170 g max.
(1) With a current of between 2 and 3 A (8 to 10 A per common), either ensure that the number of points per common that simultaneously turn ON
does not exceed 4 or ensure that the temperature does not exceed 45°C.
There are no restrictions if the current does not exceed 2 A (8 A per common).
(2) The rated current is the value for assuring normal operation, and not for
assuring durability of the relays. The relay service life depends greatly on
factors such as the operating temperature, the type of load, and switching
147
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
conditions. The actual equipment must be checked under actual operating conditions.
Component Names and Functions
Communications indicators:
MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Output indicators 0 to 7
Communications
connector
Output relays
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
148
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
Photocoupler
BS+
DRTA-NY5W-K
5 VDC
0
BDH
Physical
layer
BDL
1
Internal circuits
BSPhotocoupler
COM
DC-DC converter for
internal circuits
(not isolated)
DC-DC converter
for relay drive
(not isolated)
Wiring
OUT1
OUT0
OUT3
OUT2
Load
Load
Load
OUT5
OUT4
Load
Load
OUT7
OUT6
COM0
COM0
Load
Load
Load
149
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions
57.6
60.3
53.2
74.4
31.4
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
95
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
150
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Replacing Relays
To replace output relays, first remove the cover using the following procedure.
(1) Hook your fingers under the handle and bend it upwards.
(2) The side will bend out in
the direction of the arrow,
releasing the hook.
(3) Using a tool such as a screwdriver, press down on
the relay socket lever and remove the Relay from
the socket.
The following reference data shows actual measured data from sampling in a
production line. There is some variation in relay characteristics, so use this
data for reference only.
Durability Curve
Number of operations (x104)
Maximum Switching Capacity
Output current (A)
Reference Data
5
4
3
2
AC resistive load
1
0.5
500
120-VAC resistive load
300
30 VDC, t = 7 ms
200
240 VAC, COSφ = 0.4
120 VAC, COSφ = 0.4
100
30-VDC/240-VAC
resistive load
50
30
20
10
0.4
DC resistive load
5
3
2
0.3
30 VDC, t = 40 ms
0.2
0.1
10
100 to 200 VDC
t = 7 to 40 ms
20 30 50
100
200
300
500 1000
Output voltage (V)
0.1
0.2 0.3
0.5
1
3
4
5
Output current (A)
151
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-7
Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs)
CRT1-ROF08
Common Specifications
Item
Communications power supply
voltage
Specification
14 to 26.4 VDC
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line).
10 to 60 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 60 to
150 Hz and 50 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 min
each
150 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes)
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Ambient operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
Storage humidity
Terminal block screws tightening
torque
500 VAC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits)
−10 to 55°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
−25 to 65°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m
M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m
SSR Output Section Specifications (per Output)
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Load voltage
Load current
Inrush current resistivity
Installation method
Communications power supply
current consumption
Output hold for communications
errors
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-ROF08
8 outputs
24 to 265 VAC
0.3 A (See note.)
50 A (60 Hz)
DIN Track
60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
160 g max.
The SSRs cannot be replaced.
Load Current Vs. Ambient Temperature Characteristics
1
Load current (A)
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
0
-30 -20
0
20
40
55 60
80
100
Ambient temperature (˚C)
152
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions
Node address switches:
Communications ×10 and ×1 (from left)
indicators:
Output indicators
MS and NS
0 to 7
Communications connector
Output SSRs
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
9
0 1
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
153
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
Photocoupler
5 VDC
BS+
0
BDH
SSR
Physical
layer
BDL
1
Internal circuits
BSSSR
Photocoupler
COM
DC-DC converter
for internal circuits
(not isolated)
DC-DC converter
for relay drive
(not isolated)
Wiring
OUT1
OUT5
OUT0
OUT2
OUT4
Load
Load
Load
Load
154
OUT3
Load
OUT7
OUT6
Load
Load
Load
COM0
COM0
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions
57.6
60.3
53.2
74.4
31.4
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
95
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
155
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-8
Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay
Outputs)
CRT1-ROS16
Common Specifications
Item
Communications power supply voltage
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Ambient operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
Storage humidity
Terminal block screws tightening torque
Specification
14 to 26.4 VDC
Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line).
10 to 55 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm
100 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes)
500 VAC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits)
−10 to 55°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
−25 to 65°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m
M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m
Relay Output Section Specifications (per Output)
Item
Specification
CRT1-ROS16
16 outputs
DRTA-NY5W-K (5 VDC)
Resistive load
250 VAC, 2 A, common: 8 A
30 VDC, 2 A, common: 8 A
Rated ON current
3A
Maximum contact voltage
250 VAC, 125 VDC
Maximum contact current
3A
Maximum switching capacity
750 VA AC, 90 W DC
Minimum applicable load (reference value) 5 VDC, 1 mA
Mechanical service life
20,000,000 operations min.
Electrical service life
100,000 operations min.
Installation method
DIN Track
Communications power supply current
155 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
consumption
255 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Output hold for communications errors
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Weight
260 g max.
Model
I/O capacity
Mounted Relays
Rated load
Note
156
(1) With a current of between 2 and 3 A (8 to 10 A per common), either ensure that the number of points per common that simultaneously turn ON
does not exceed 4 or ensure that the temperature does not exceed 45°C.
There are no restrictions if the current does not exceed 2 A (8 A per common).
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
(2) The rated current is the value for assuring normal operation, and not for
assuring durability of the relays. The relay service life depends greatly on
factors such as the operating temperature, the type of load, and switching
conditions. The actual equipment must be checked under actual operating conditions.
Component Names and Functions
Communications Node address switches:
indicators: MS
×10 and ×1 (from left)
and NS
Communications connector
Output indicators
0 to 15
Output relays
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
9
0 1
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
157
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
DRTA-NY5W-K
5 VDC
Photocoupler
BS+
BDH
Physical
layer
1
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDL
BS−
0
COM0
DRTA-NY5W-K
5 VDC
Photocoupler
DC-DC converter
for internal circuits
(not isolated)
8
9
Photocoupler
COM1
DC-DC converter
for relay drive
(not isolated)
Wiring
OUT1
OUT5
OUT7
OUT0
OUT2
OUT4
OUT6
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
158
OUT3
Load
Load
Load
OUT8
COM0
Load
OUT10
OUT12
OUT14
COM1
OUT9
OUT11
OUT13
OUT15
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
AC power supply (DC power
supply is also possible.)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions
140
74.4
57.6
60.3
53.2
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
159
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Replacing Relays
To replace output relays, first remove the cover using the following procedure.
(1) Hook your fingers under the handle and bend it upwards.
(2) The side will bend
out in the direction
of the arrow,
releasing the hook.
(3) Using a tool such as a screwdriver, press
down on the relay socket lever and
remove the Relay from the socket.
Reference Data
The following reference data shows actual measured data from sampling in a
production line. There is some variation in relay characteristics, so use this
data for reference only.
Durability Curve
Number of operations (x104)
Output current (A)
Maximum Switching Capacity
5
4
3
2
AC resistive load
1
0.5
500
300
200
120-VAC resistive load
30 VDC, t = 7 ms
240 VAC, COSφ = 0.4
120 VAC, COSφ = 0.4
30-VDC/240-VAC
resistive load
100
50
30
20
10
0.4
5
3
2
DC resistive load
0.3
30 VDC, t = 40 ms
0.2
0.1
10
100 to 200 VDC
t = 7 to 40 ms
20 30 50
100
200
300
500 1000
Output voltage (V)
160
0.1
0.2 0.3
0.5
1
3
4
5
Output current (A)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-9
Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR
Outputs)
CRT1-ROF16
Common Specifications
Item
Communications power supply voltage
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Specification
14 to 26.4 VDC
Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line).
10 to 60 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 60 to
150 Hz and 50 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for
80 min each
150 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes)
500 VAC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits)
−10 to 55°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
−25 to 65°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m
M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Ambient operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
Storage humidity
Terminal block screws tightening torque
SSR Output Section Specifications (per Output)
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Load voltage
Load current
Inrush current resistivity
Installation method
Communications power supply current
consumption
Specification
CRT1-ROF16
16 outputs
24 to 265 VAC
0.3 A (See note.)
50 A (60 Hz)
DIN Track
85 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
130 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
250 g max.
Output hold for communications errors
Weight
The SSRs cannot be replaced.
Load Current Vs. Ambient Temperature Characteristics
1
0.8
Load current (A)
Note
0.6
0.4
0.3
0.2
0
-30 -20
0
20
40
55 60
80
100
Ambient temperature (˚C)
161
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions
Communications Node address switches:
indicators: MS
×10 and ×1 (from left)
and NS
Communications
connector
Output indicators
0 to 15
Output SSRs
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
162
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
5 VDC
Photocoupler
BS+
BDH
Physical
layer
BDL
0
SSR
1
BSSSR
Internal circuits
Photocoupler
COM0
5 VDC
Photocoupler
DC-DC converter
for internal circuits
(not isolated)
8
SSR
9
SSR
Photocoupler
COM1
DC-DC converter
for relay drive
(not isolated)
Wiring
OUT1
OUT3
OUT5
OUT7
OUT0
OUT2
OUT4
OUT6
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
OUT8
COM0
Load
OUT10
OUT12
OUT14
COM1
OUT9
OUT1
1
OUT13
OUT15
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
AC power supply (DC power
supply is also possible.)
163
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions
140
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
164
74.4
57.6
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Section 5-3
5-3-10 Eight-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-ID08TA/CRT1-ID08TA-1/CRT1-ID08TAH/CRT1-ID08TAH-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to input devices
Communications power supply current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-ID08TA
CRT1-ID08TA-1
CRT1-ID08TAH-1 CRT1-ID08TAH-1
8 inputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
15 VDC min.
15 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
(between each
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
5 VDC max.
5 VDC max.
----(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Operates at 50 mA/point min.
--Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/points
50 mA/point
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
190 g max.
200 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
165
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID08TA(-1)/CRT1-ID08TAH(-1))
Communications
indicators:
Node address switches:
MS and NS
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications connector
166
Input indicators
0 to 7
I/O terminal block (removable)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
The detected status is also shown below for Slave Unit with detection functions.
Name
0 to 7
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection detection
Normal status
Meaning
The power supply is shortcircuited.
A line is not connected.
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 7
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
The Unit is operating normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID08TA (NPN)
BS+
Physical
layer
BS-
V 24 VDC
G
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Internal circuits
BDH
V
Input (0 to 7)
G
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
167
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID08TA-1 (PNP)
BS+
BDH
Physical
layer
G
Internal circuits
BS-
V 24 VDC
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
G
Input (0 to 7)
V
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
CRT1-ID08TAH (NPN)
G
BS+
Physical
layer
V
BS-
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Input circuits
BDL
Internal circuits
BDH
G0 to G7
Input (0 to 7)
V
G
V
CRT1-ID08TAH-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
Physical
layer
G
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Internal circuits
BDH
V0 to V7
Input (0 to 7)
G
V
G
168
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Wiring
CRT1-ID08TA (NPN)
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
Blue (black)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Brown (red)
7
Black (white)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
CRT1-ID08TA-1 (PNP)
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
Blue (black)
Black (white)
7
Brown (red)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
CRT1-ID08TAH (NPN)
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Black (white)
V
Brown (red)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
169
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID08TAH-1 (PNP)
V0
V1
V7
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
Brown (red)
V
Black (white)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
(1) Do not wire NC terminals.
(2) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in
parentheses.
170
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID08TA(-1)/CRT1-ID08TAH(-1))
68.9
53.2
60.3
93.5
31.4
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
105
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
171
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Section 5-3
5-3-11 Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-OD08TA/CRT1-OD08TA-1/CRT1-OD08TAH/CRT1-OD08TAH-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Load short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to output
devices
Communications power supply
current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
172
Specification
CRT1-OD08TA
CRT1-OD08TA-1
CRT1-OD08TAH
CRT1-OD08TAH-1
8 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each
output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Supported.
--Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not
operate at over 3 mA.)
8 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/point
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
15 mA max. for 24voltage
VDC power supply
voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
35 mA max. for 24VDC power supply
voltage
190 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD08TA(-1)/CRT1-OD08TAH(-1))
Communications
indicators:
Node address switches:
MS and NS
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications connector
Output indicators
0 to 7
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
The detected status is also shown below for Slave Unit with detection functions.
Name
0 to 7
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
A load short-circuit
occurred.
A line is not connected.
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 7
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
9
0 1
Setting the Node
Address
The Unit is operating
normally.
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
173
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD08TA (NPN)
BS+
BDH
Voltage
drop
Physical
layer
BDL
Internal circuits
BS-
V 24 VDC
G
V
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G
CRT1-OD08TA-1 (PNP)
BS+
BDH
Internal circuits
BS-
Voltage
drop
Physical
layer
BDL
V 24 VDC
G
V
Output (0 to 7)
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G
Photocoupler
CRT1-OD08TAH (NPN)
BS+
G
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Voltage
drop
V
Internal circuits
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Photocoupler
Output (0 to 7)
G
V
G
V
174
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-OD08TAH-1 (PNP)
BS+
V
BDH
G
Physical
layer
BDL
Voltage
drop
Internal circuits
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Output (0 to 7)
V
G
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-OD08TA/
CRT1-OD08TAH (NPN)
1
7
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Brown (red)
Pink (white)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device with
NPN input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
1
7
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Note
Brown (red)
0
Blue (black)
NC
Pink (white)
CRT1-OD08TA-1/
CRT1-OD08TAH-1 (PNP)
3-wire external device with
PNP input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Use a maximum current of 500 mA for each V and G terminal accept for
the I/O power supply terminals.
(3) Do not wire NC terminals.
175
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD08TA(-1)/CRT1-OD08TAH(-1))
60.3
53.2
68.9
93.5
31.4
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
105
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
176
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-12 Sixteen-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-ID16TA/CRT1-ID16TA-1/CRT1-ID16TAH/CRT1-ID16TAH-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
CRT1-ID16TA
16 inputs
NPN
15 VDC min.
(between each input
terminal and the V
terminal)
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit
detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to input
devices
Communications power
supply current consumption
I/O power supply current
consumption
Weight
Specification
CRT1-ID16TA-1
CRT1-ID16TAH
PNP
15 VDC min.
(between each input
terminal and the G
terminal)
5 VDC max.
(between each input
terminal and the G
terminal)
5 VDC max.
(between each input
terminal and the V
terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
----8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/points
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
330 g max.
Note
NPN
10.5 VDC min.
(between each input
terminal and the V
terminal)
---
CRT1-ID16TAH-1
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
(between each input
terminal and the G
terminal)
---
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
50 mA/points
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
340 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
177
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16TA(-1)/CRT1-ID16TAH(-1))
Communications
indicators:
Node address switches:
MS and NS
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input indicators
0 to 15
I/O terminal block (removable)
Communications connector
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
The power supply is
short-circuited.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating
normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
178
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID16TA (NPN)
V1 24 VDC
Photocoupler
BDL
Physical
layer
BS-
Input circuits
BDH
G1
Internal circuits
BS+
V1
0 to 7
G1
V2 24 VDC
G2
Input circuits
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
V2
8 to 15
G2
CRT1-ID16TA-1 (PNP)
G1
BS-
Input circuits
G1
0 to 7
V1
G2
V2 24 VDC
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDH
V1 24 VDC
Photocoupler
BS+
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
G2
8 to 15
V2
CRT1-ID16TAH (NPN)
G
V
BS+
Physical
layer
BS-
V
G
V
G
V
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Input circuits
BDL
G0 to G7
Input (0 to 7)
Internal circuits
BDH
Input circuits
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
G8 to G15
Input (8 to 15)
V
G
V
179
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID16TAH-1 (PNP)
V
G
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Input circuits
Photocoupler
BS+
BDH
Physical
layer
Input (0 to 7)
G
Internal circuits
BDL
BS-
V0 to V7
V
G
V
G
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Input circuits
Photocoupler
V8 to V15
Input (8 to 15)
G
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-ID16TA (NPN)
15
V1
V1
V1
V1
V2
V2
V2
V2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G2
G2
G2
G2
Blue (black)
Black (white)
Blue (black)
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Brown (red)
9
Black (white)
8
Blue (black)
NC
Brown (white)
7
Brown (red)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
CRT1-ID16TA-1 (PNP)
V1
V1
V2
V2
V2
V2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G2
G2
G2
G2
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
180
Black (white)
V1
Brown (red)
V1
Blue (black)
15
Blue (black)
9
Brown (white)
8
Black (white)
NC
Brown (red)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID16TAH (NPN)
9
15
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
G
G0
G1
G7
G
G8
G9
G15
Blue (black)
Brown
(white)
Blue (black)
Brown
(white)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Black
(white)
8
Brown (red)
NC
Blue (black)
7
Black
(white)
1
Brown (red)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
CRT1-ID16TAH-1 (PNP)
V1
V7
V
V8
V9
V15
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Black
(white)
V0
Brown (red)
V
Blue (black)
15
Blue (black)
9
Brown
(white)
8
Black
(white)
NC
Brown (red)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown
(white)
NC
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
(1) The V terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply, and the G
terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply are not connected
internally. Supply power separately for V-G terminals on the left side and
the right side.
(2) Do not wire NC terminals.
(3) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in
parentheses.
181
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16TA(-1)/CRT1-ID16TAH(-1))
60.3
53.2
180
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
182
93.5
68.9
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Section 5-3
5-3-13 Sixteen-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-OD16TA/CRT1-OD16TA-1/CRT1-OD16TAH/CRT1-OD16TAH-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-OD16TA
CRT1-OD16TA-1
CRT1-OD16TAH
CRT1-OD16TAH-1
16 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each
output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
Leakage current
0.1 mA max.
ON delay
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits per common 8 outputs/common
Load short-circuit detection
--Supported.
Disconnection detection
--Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not
operate at over 3 mA.)
Isolation method
Photocoupler
Output indicators
LED (yellow)
Installation
DIN Track
Power supply type
Multi-power supply
Current supplied to output
100 mA/points
devices
Communications power supply 45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
current consumption
voltage
voltage
65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
I/O power supply current con15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
15 mA max. for 24- 35 mA max. for 24sumption
voltage
VDC power supply VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
Output handling for communi- Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
cations errors
Weight
330 g max.
Note
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
183
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16TA(-1)/CRT1-OD16TAH(-1))
Communications
Node address switches:
indicators:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
MS and NS
Communications
connector
184
Output indicators
0 to 15
I/O terminal block (removable)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
A load short-circuit
occurred.
A line is not connected.
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
The Unit is operating
normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
Voltage
drop
CRT1-OD16TA (NPN)
BS+
BS-
Output (0 to 7)
Photocoupler
G1
Voltage
drop
BDL
24 VDC
V1
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDH
V1
G1
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
V2
24 VDC
G2
V2
Output (8 to 15)
Photocoupler
G2
185
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Voltage
drop
CRT1-OD16TA-1 (PNP)
Physical
layer
G1
Output (0 to 7)
BS-
G1
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
Internal circuits
BDL
24 VDC
V1
BS+
BDH
V1
V2
24 VDC
G2
V2
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
Output (8 to 15)
G2
Photocoupler
CRT1-OD16TAH (NPN)
G1
V1
Voltage
drop
BS+
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Photocoupler
BS-
Output (0 to 7)
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
G1
V1
G1
V1
G2
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
V2
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Output (8 to 15)
G2
V2
G2
V2
186
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-OD16TAH-1 (PNP)
V1
Voltage
drop
BS+
Physical
layer
BDH
G1
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
BDL
Photocoupler
Output (0 to 7)
Internal circuits
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V1
G1
V1
G1
V2
G2
Voltage
drop
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection
circuit
Photocoupler
Output (8 to 15)
V2
G2
V2
G2
Wiring
CRT1-OD16TA/
CRT1-OD16TAH (NPN)
8
9
15
V1
V1
V1
V1
V2
V2
V2
V2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G2
G2
G2
G2
Solenoid
valve, etc.
3-wire external device
with NPN input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
Blue (black)
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Brown (red)
NC
Pink (white)
7
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device
with NPN input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
187
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
7
NC
8
9
15
V1
V1
V1
V1
V2
V2
V2
V2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G2
G2
G2
G2
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Note
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
3-wire external device
with PNP input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
0
Pink (white)
NC
Blue (black)
CRT1-OD16TA-1/
CRT1-OD16TAH-1 (PNP)
3-wire external device
with PNP input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
(1) The V1 and V2 terminals as well as the G1 and G2 terminals of the I/O
power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for
V1-G1 and V2-G2.
(2) Use a maximum current of 500 mA for each V1, V2, G1, and G2 terminal
aside from the I/O power supply terminals.
(3) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(4) Do not wire NC terminals.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16TA(-1)/CRT1-OD16TAH(-1))
60.3
53.2
180
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
188
93.5
68.9
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
189
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
5-3-14 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal
Block)
CRT1-MD16TA/CRT1-MD16TA-1/CRT1-MD16TAH/CRT1-MD16TAH-1
Common Specifications
Item
Model
Installation
Communications power supply
current consumption
Specification
CRT1-MD16TA
CRT1-MD16TA-1
CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1
DIN Track
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
330 g max.
340 g max.
Weight
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
CRT1-MD16TA-1
CRT1-MD16TAH
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Power supply type
Current supplied to input devices
I/O power supply current consumption
Note
190
CRT1-MD16TA
8 inputs
NPN
PNP
15 VDC min.
15 VDC min.
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
5 VDC max.
5 VDC max.
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
----8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
100 mA/points
5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
NPN
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
input terminal and
the V terminal)
---
CRT1-MD16TAH-1
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
input terminal and
the G terminal)
---
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
50 mA/points
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-MD16TA
CRT1-MD16TA-1
CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1
8 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each
output terminal
output terminal
output terminal
output terminal
and the G termiand the V terminal) and the G termiand the V terminal)
nal)
nal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Supported.
--Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not
operate at over 3 mA.)
8 outputs/common
Photocoupler
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Load short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Power supply type
Current supplied to output
devices
I/O power supply current consumption
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
100 mA/points
Output handling for communications errors
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Note
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
35 mA max. for 24VDC power supply
voltage
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16TA(-1)/CRT1-MD16TAH(-1))
Communications
indicators:
MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input indicators 0 to 7
Communications connector
Output indicators 0 to 7
I/O terminal block (removable)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
191
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
LED status
0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow.
0 to 7 (outputs)
Not lit.
I/O status
Input or output
ON
Input or output
OFF
Meaning
The input or output is
ON.
The input or output is
OFF.
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 7
(inputs)
LED status
Lit red.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection detection
Normal status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection detection
Normal status
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
0 to 7
(outputs)
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
Meaning
The power supply is shortcircuited.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating normally.
A load short-circuit occurred.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-MD16TA (NPN)
V1 24 VDC
BS+
BS-
V1
0 to 7
G1
Voltage
drop
BDL
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDH
Input circuits
G1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V2 24 VDC
G2
V2
0 to 7
Photocoupler
G2
192
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP)
V1
G1
BS+
BDH
Photocoupler
0 to 7
G1
V2
Voltage
drop
BS-
Input circuits
V1
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDL
24 VDC
24 VDC
G2
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V2
0 to 7
G2
Photocoupler
CRT1-MD16TAH (NPN)
V
BS+
BDL
G
Physical
layer
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDH
V0 to V7
0 to 7
G
V
G
Voltage
drop
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Photocoupler
0 to 7
V
G
193
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-MD16TAH-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
G
BDH
Physical
layer
BDL
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
BSInternal circuits
Input circuits
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V0 to V7
0 to 7
G
V
G
Voltage
drop
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Photocoupler
0 to 7
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-MD16TA (NPN)
Input
Output
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
V2
V2
V2
V2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G2
G2
G2
G2
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
Solenoid
valve, etc.
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
0
Brown (red)
NC
Black (white)
7
Blue (black)
1
Brown (white)
NC
0
3-wire external device
with NPN input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
CRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP)
Input
Output
7
V1
V1
V1
V1
V2
V2
V2
V2
G1
G1
G1
G1
G2
G2
G2
G2
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
194
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Blue (black)
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Pink (white)
1
Brown (red)
0
Black (white)
NC
Brown (red)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire external device
with PNP input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
CRT1-MD16TAH (NPN)
Input
Output
1
7
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
G
G0
G1
G7
G
G
G
G
Black (white)
Brown (white)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Solenoid
valve, etc.
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Pink (white)
0
Brown (red)
NC
Blue (black)
7
Brown (red)
1
Blue (black)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device
with NPN input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
CRT1-MD16TAH-1 (PNP)
Input
Output
7
V
V0
V1
V7
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
Black (white)
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Solenoid
valve, etc.
Pink (white)
1
Brown (red)
0
Blue (black)
NC
Brown (red)
7
Blue (black)
1
Blue (black)
0
Brown (white)
NC
3-wire external device
with PNP input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
(1) The V1 and V2 terminals as well as the G1 and G2 terminals of the I/O
power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for
V1-G1 and V2-G2.
(2) Use a maximum current of 500 mA for each V1, V2, G1, and G2 terminal
aside from the I/O power supply terminals on the output side.
(3) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(4) Do not wire NC terminals.
(5) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards
for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in
parentheses.
195
Section 5-3
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16TA(-1)/CRT1-MD16TAH(-1))
60.3
53.2
180
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
196
93.5
68.9
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4
5-4-1
Units with Connectors
Eight-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-VID08S/CRT1-VID08S-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Power short-circuit protection
Current supplied to input devices
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-VID08S
8 inputs
NPN
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
CRT1-VID08S-1
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
1.5 ms max.
8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
50 mA/input
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
80 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
197
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VID08S and CRT1-VID08S-1)
Front
Top
Bottom
(Mounted side)
4
01
56
789
23
4
01
56
789
23
Communications
connector
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Input indicators 0 to 7
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 63.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
5
2 3 4
6
2 3 4
198
1s digit of node address
7 8
5
(Front side)
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
6
7 8
9 0 1
(Mounted side)
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BDL
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BS+
BDH
Input circuits
CRT1-VID08S (NPN)
Short protection
Short protection
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G1
IN1
CRT1-VID08S-1 (PNP)
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
V0
NC
G
IN0
Short protection
V1
NC
G
IN1
Input circuits
Physical
layer
Input circuits
BDL
Internal circuits
BS+
BDH
Short protection
199
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-VID08S (NPN)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Blue (Black)
2
1
IN0
G0
NC
V
IN1
G1
NC
V
IN2
G2
NC
V
IN3
G3
NC
V
IN4
G4
NC
V
IN5
G5
NC
V
IN6
G6
NC
V
IN7
G7
NC
V
4
3
2
IN0
G
NC
V0
IN1
G
NC
V1
IN2
G
NC
V2
IN3
G
NC
V3
IN4
G
NC
V4
IN5
G
NC
V5
IN6
G
NC
V6
IN7
G
NC
V7
3
4
Brown
(White)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
CRT1-VID08S-1 (PNP)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Blue (Black)
Brown
(White)
Black (White)
1
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Note
200
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VID08S and CRT1-VID08S-1)
90
5.3
60
66.2
23
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
6.4
85.7
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
The numbers inside the parentheses
are reference dimensions.
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
99.9
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
25.4
■
(mm)
201
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
37
136.5
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
25.4
116
■
(mm)
(mm)
202
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-2
Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-VOD08S/CRT1-VOD08S-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-VOD08S
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to output
devices
Communications power supply current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
8 outputs
NPN
0.3 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 outputs/common
CRT1-VOD08S-1
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each
output terminal and the V terminal)
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
80 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
203
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VOD08S and CRT1-VOD08S-1)
Front
Top
Bottom
(Mounted side)
23
4
01
56
789
23
4
01
56
789
Communications
connector
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Output indicators 0 to 7
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
Output I/O power supply connector
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 63.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
5
2 3 4
6
2 3 4
204
1s digit of node address
7 8
5
(Front side)
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
6
7 8
9 0 1
(Mounted side)
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-VOD08S (NPN)
V
G
Voltage
drop
V
NC
G
OUT0
BS+
Photocoupler
BDH
Internal circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
V
NC
G
OUT1
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
CRT1-VOD08S-1 (PNP)
V
G
V
NC
G
OUT0
BS+
BDH
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDL
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
NC
G
OUT1
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
205
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-VOD08S (NPN)
Solenoid valve, etc.
4
OUT
0
Pink (white)
1
3
2
G
NC
V
OUT
1
G
NC
V
OUT
2
G
NC
V
OUT
3
G
NC
V
OUT
4
G
NC
V
OUT
5
G
NC
V
OUT
6
G
NC
V
OUT
7
G
NC
V
V
G
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
3-wire external device with
NPN input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
CRT1-VOD08S-1 (PNP)
Solenoid valve, etc.
4
OUT
0
Pink (white)
3
G
2
1
NC
V
OUT
1
G
NC
V
OUT
2
G
NC
V
OUT
3
G
NC
V
OUT
4
G
NC
V
OUT
5
G
NC
V
OUT
6
G
NC
V
OUT
7
G
NC
V
V
G
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
3-wire external device with
PNP input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
Note
206
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VOD08S and CRT1-VOD08S-1)
23
60
66.2
5.3
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
6.4
85.7
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
The numbers inside the parentheses
are reference dimensions.
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
99.9
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
25.4
■
(mm)
207
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
37
136.5
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
25.4
116
■
(mm)
(mm)
208
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-3
Sixteen-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-ID16S/CRT1-ID16S-1/CRT1-ID16SH/CRT1-ID16SH-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Power short-circuit protection
Current supplied to input devices
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-ID16S
CRT1-ID16S-1
CRT1-ID16SH
CRT1-ID16SH-1
16 inputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
(between each
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
1 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Operates at 50 mA/point min.
--16 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Network power supply
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
50 mA/input
110 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
125 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
110 g max.
Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
125 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
145 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16S(-1) and CRT1-ID16SH(-1))
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input indicators 0 to 15
Communications connector
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
209
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
CRT1-ID16SH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
The power supply is
short-circuited.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating
normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID16S (NPN)
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
210
Input circuits
BDL
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Input circuits
BS+
Short protection
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
Short protection
NC
G1
IN1
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-ID16S-1 (PNP)
Short protection
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Short protection
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDH
Input circuits
BS+
V0
NC
G
IN0
V1
NC
G
IN1
BDL
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BS+
Input circuits
CRT1-ID16SH (NPN)
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G1
IN1
CRT1-ID16SH-1 (PNP)
BDL
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BS+
Input circuits
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V0
NC
G
IN0
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V1
NC
G
IN1
211
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
4
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G8
G9
G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15
4
IN
8
IN
9
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
3
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
CRT1-ID16S-1/
CRT1-ID16SH-1 (PNP)
Blue (Black)
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
4
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1
V8
V9
V10
V11
V12 V13 V14 V15
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
3
Brown (White)
IN
12
V1
2
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) 3
4
212
IN
11
V0
1
Note
IN
10
Blue (Black)
V
Black (White)
V
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Blue (Black)
V
Black (White)
1
Brown (Red)
CRT1-ID16S/
CRT1-ID16SH (NPN)
Brown (Red)
Wiring
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16S(-1) and CRT1-ID16SH(-1))
60.3
53.2
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
95
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
213
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-4
Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-OD16S/CRT1-OD16S-1/CRT1-OD16SH/CRT1-OD16SH-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Load short-circuit
detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per
common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to output devices
Communications power
supply current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Specification
CRT1-OD16S
CRT1-OD16S-1
CRT1-OD16SH
16 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
0.5 A/output, 4 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each
output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Supported.
---
CRT1-OD16SH-1
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each
output terminal and
the V terminal)
Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not
operate at over 3 mA.)
16 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
15 mA max. for 24- 60 mA max. for 24VDC power supply VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
20 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
Output handling for
communications errors
Weight
110 g max.
Note
214
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16S(-1) and CRT1-OD16SH(-1))
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications
connector
Output indicators 0 to 15
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
Output I/O power supply connector
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
A load short-circuit
occurred.
A line is not connected.
CRT1-OD16SH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
9
0 1
Setting the Node
Address
The Unit is operating
normally.
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
215
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD16S (NPN)
V
V
G
G
BS+
Voltage
drop
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT0
Internal circuits
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT1
CRT1-OD16S-1 (PNP)
BS+
BDH
BDL
V
V
G
G
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT0
Voltage
drop
V
NC
G
OUT1
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
216
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-OD16SH (NPN)
V
V
G
G
BS+
BDL
Voltage
drop
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Internal circuits
BDH
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
V
NC
G
OUT0
V
NC
G
OUT1
CRT1-OD16SH-1 (PNP)
BS+
BDH
BDL
V
V
G
G
Physical
layer
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BSDisconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT0
Voltage
drop
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
V
NC
G
OUT1
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
217
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-OD16S/
CRT1-OD16SH (NPN)
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Brown (red)
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
G
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Brown (red)
G
3-wire external device with
NPN input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
CRT1-OD16S-1/
CRT1-OD16SH-1 (PNP)
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
3
Pink (white)
Connection can be made to
either G terminal.
V
2
V
Blue (black)
Connection can be made to
either V terminal.
Pink (white)
3-wire external device with
NPN input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
1
Blue (black)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
V
G
3
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Brown (red)
G
Solenoid valve, etc.
Note
Pink (white)
Connection can be made to
either G terminal.
1
3-wire external device with
PNP input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
Blue (black)
Connection can be made to
either V terminal.
Pink (white)
Brown (red)
Solenoid valve, etc.
Blue (black)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3-wire external device with
PNP input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power
supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the
Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use
a maximum current of 4 A per terminal.
218
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16S(-1) and CRT1-OD16SH(-1))
60.3
53.2
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
95
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
219
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-5
Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (e-CON
Connectors)
CRT1-MD16S/CRT1-MD16S-1/CRT1-MD16SH/CRT1-MD16SH-1
Common Specifications
Item
Model
Installation
Communications power supply current consumption
Weight
Specification
CRT1-MD16S
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-MD16SH
CRT1-MD16SH-1
DIN Track
75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
95 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
120 g max.
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-MD16SH
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
CRT1-MD16S
8 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Power supply type
Power short-circuit protection
Current supplied to input devices
Note
220
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
----8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Network power supply
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
50 mA/input
NPN
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
input terminal and
the V terminal)
CRT1-MD16SH-1
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
input terminal and
the G terminal)
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Load short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Power supply type
Current supplied to output devices
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications
errors
Note
Specification
CRT1-MD16S
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-MD16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1
8 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between
DC, between
DC, between
DC, between
each output tereach output tereach output tereach output terminal and the G
minal and the V
minal and the G
minal and the V
terminal)
terminal)
terminal)
terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Supported.
--Operates at 3 mA/point max.
(Does not operate at over 3 mA.)
8 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
35 mA max. for
24-VDC power
supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16S(-1)/CRT1-MD16SH(-1))
Communications
indicators:
Node address switches:
MS and NS
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input (upper) and output (lower) indicators
0 to 7
Input
Output
Communications
connector
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
Output I/O power supply connector
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
221
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
LED status
0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow.
0 to 7 (outputs)
Not lit.
I/O status
Input or output
ON
Input or output
OFF
Meaning
The input or output is ON.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
The power supply is short-circuited.
A line is not connected.
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
A load short-circuit occurred.
The input or output is OFF.
CRT1-MD16SH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 7 (inputs)
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
0 to 7
(outputs)
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
The Unit is operating normally.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
222
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-MD16S (NPN)
BDH
BDL
Input circuits
BS+
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
Internalcircuits
circuits
Internal
BS−
Short protection
Voltage
drop
V1
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G
OUT0
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
V
G
G
CRT1-MD16S-1 (PNP)
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Input circuits
BS+
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Short protection
V0
NC
G1
IN0
V
V
G
G
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT0
Voltage
drop
223
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-MD16SH (NPN)
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Input circuits
BS+
Photocoupler
Disconnection or short-circuit
detection circuit
V1
NC
G0
IN0
Internal circuits
BS−
Voltage
drop
V
NC
G
OUT0
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
V
G
G
CRT1-MD16SH-1 (PNP)
BDH
BDL
Input circuits
BS+
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
Disconnection or short-circuit
detection circuit
Internal circuits
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
V
G
G
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
V
NC
G
OUT0
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
224
V0
NC
G1
IN0
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
V1
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
3
Brown (Red)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
4
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
V
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
Solenoid valve, etc.
Blue (black)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Brown (red)
Connection can be made
to either G terminal.
V
Pink (white)
Connection can be made
to either V terminal.
Blue (Black)
1
Black (White)
CRT1-MD16S
CRT1-MD16SH (NPN)
3-wire external device
with NPN input
(Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric
sensor)
225
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
2
3
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
G1
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
Brown (Red)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
4
V0
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Connection can be made
to either V terminal.
Connection can be made
to either G terminal.
V
Blue (Black)
1
Black (White)
CRT1-MD16S-1/
CRT1-MD16SH-1 (PNP)
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
G
G
Note
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
Solenoid valve, etc.
Pink (white)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3-wire external device
with PNP input
(Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric
sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power
supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the
Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use
a maximum current of 4 A per terminal.
(3) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses
are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
226
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16S(-1)/CRT1-MD16SH(-1))
60.3
53.2
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
95
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
227
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-6
Thirty-two-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-ID32S/CRT1-ID32S-1/CRT1-ID32SH/CRT1-ID32SH-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Power short-circuit protection
Current supplied to input devices
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-ID32S
CRT1-ID32S-1
CRT1-ID32SH
CRT1-ID32SH-1
32 inputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
(between each
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Operates at 50 mA/point min.
--32 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Network power supply
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
50 mA/input
195 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
200 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
180 g max.
Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
210 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
235 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID32S(-1) and CRT1-ID32SH(-1))
Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
Communications connector
228
Input indicators 0 to 15 (IN1)
Input indicators 0 to 15 (IN2)
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
LED status
0 to 15 (IN1) Lit yellow.
0 to 15 (IN2)
Not lit.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
CRT1-ID32SH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 15 (IN1)
0 to 15 (IN2)
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
The power supply is
short-circuited.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating
normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BS+
Input circuits
CRT1-ID32S (NPN)
Short protection
Short protection
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G1
IN1
229
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Short protection
V0
NC
G
IN0
Short protection
V1
NC
G
IN1
Input circuits
BS+
Input circuits
CRT1-ID32S-1 (PNP)
CRT1-ID32SH (NPN)
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Input circuits
BS+
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G1
IN1
CRT1-ID32SH-1 (PNP)
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
230
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BS+
Input circuits
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V0
NC
G
IN0
V1
NC
G
IN1
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-ID32S/
CRT1-ID32SH (NPN)
Left side
V
V
V
V
V
V
1
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
4
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G8
G9
G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15
4
IN
8
IN
9
V0
V1
V2
V3
2 NC
NC
NC
NC
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
V4
V5
V6
V7
NC
NC
NC
NC
IN
15
Blue
(black)
Brown
(white)
Blue
(black)
Black
(white)
3-wire sensor
with NPN output
(photoelectric
sensor or
proximity sensor)
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
4
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
Brown
(red)
Blue
(black)
2 NC
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
V
2 NC
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
NC
NC
3
G8
G9
G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15
4
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
V0
V1
V2
V3
V4
V5
V6
V7
2 NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
Black
(white)
Blue
(black)
V
Brown
(red)
V
3
Brown
(white)
Right side
1
3-wire sensor
with NPN output
(photoelectric
sensor or
proximity sensor)
CRT1-ID32S-1/
CRT1-ID32SH-1 (PNP)
G
G
G
G
G
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1 V8
V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15
2 NC
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
3 G
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
4
Note
3
4
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1 V8
V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15
2 NC
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
3 G
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
4
Black
(White)
Blue
(Black)
G
IN
2
Blue
(Black)
G
IN
1
Brown
(White)
G
IN
0
Black
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Blue
(Black)
Brown
(White)
4
Brown
(Red)
3
1
Brown
(Red)
Right side
Left side
1
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
231
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID32S(-1) and CRT1-ID32SH(-1))
60.3
53.2
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
160
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
232
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-7
Thirty-two-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-OD32S/CRT1-OD32S-1/CRT1-OD32SH/CRT1-OD32SH-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Load short-circuit
detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per
common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to output devices
Communications power
supply current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Specification
CRT1-OD32S
CRT1-OD32S-1
CRT1-OD32SH
32 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
0.5 A/output, 4 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each
output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Supported.
---
CRT1-OD32SH-1
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between each
output terminal and
the V terminal)
Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not
operate at over 3 mA.)
16 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 24VDC power supply
voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Output handling for
communications errors
Weight
170 g max.
Note
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
233
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD32S(-1) and CRT1-OD32SH(-1))
Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Output indicators 0 to 15 (OUT1)
Output indicators 0 to 15 (OUT2)
I/O connectors (e-CON connectors)
Communications
connector
Output I/O power supply connector
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
LED status
0 to 15 (OUT1) Lit yellow.
0 to 15 (OUT2)
Not lit.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
A load short-circuit
occurred.
A line is not connected.
CRT1-OD32SH(-1) Only
Name
LED status
0 to 15 (OUT1) Lit red.
0 to 15 (OUT2)
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
The Unit is operating
normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
234
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD32S (NPN)
V
V
G
G
BS+
BDH
BDL
Voltage
drop
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BS-
V
NC
G
OUT0
Left side
V
V
G
G
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT0
Right side
CRT1-OD32S-1 (PNP)
V
V
G
G
BS+
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
BS-
V
NC
Left side
G
OUT0
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
Voltage
drop
V
V
G
G
Photocoupler
V
NC
G
OUT0
Right side
Voltage
drop
235
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-OD32SH (NPN)
V
V
G
G
BS+
Voltage
drop
BDH
BDL
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
V
NC
Left side
G
OUT0
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BS−
V
V
G
G
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
V
NC
Right side
G
OUT0
CRT1-OD32SH-1 (PNP)
V
V
G
G
BS+
BDH
BDL
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BS−
Voltage
drop
V
V
G
G
Disconnection
or short-circuit
detection circuit
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
236
V
Left side
NC
G
OUT0
Right side
V
NC
G
OUT0
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-OD32S/
CRT1-OD32SH (NPN)
Left side
Right side
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
V
V
G
G
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
3-wire external device with NPN
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
Brown (red)
Pink (white)
G
Blue (black)
G
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Pink (white)
Connection can be
made to either
G terminal.
3-wire external device with NPN
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
1
V
Connection can be
made to either
V terminal.
Brown (red)
3-wire external device with NPN
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
1
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Pink (white)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Blue (black)
V
Pink (white)
1
3-wire external device with NPN
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
CRT1-OD32S-1/
CRT1-OD32SH-1 (PNP)
Left side
Right side
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
3
G
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
Solenoid valve, etc.
3-wire external device with PNP
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Pink (white)
Brown (red)
Solenoid valve, etc.
Blue (black)
Blue (black)
G
Brown (red)
G
Note
V
V
3
G
1
V
Pink (white)
Connection can be
made to either
G terminal.
3-wire external device with PNP
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
V
V
Connection can be
made to either
V terminal.
Brown (red)
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
3-wire external device with PNP
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
Pink (white)
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Blue (black)
3
3-wire external device with PNP
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power
supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the
Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use
a maximum current of 4 A per terminal.
237
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD32S(-1) and CRT1-OD32SH(-1))
60.3
53.2
31.4
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
160
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
238
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-8
Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON
Connectors)
CRT1-MD32S/CRT1-MD32S-1/CRT1-MD32SH/CRT1-MD32SH-1
Common Specifications
Item
Model
Installation
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Specification
CRT1-MD32S
CRT1-MD32S-1
CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1
DIN Track
45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
voltage
70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 100 mA max. for 14-VDC power supvoltage
ply voltage
180 g max.
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
CRT1-MD32S-1
CRT1-MD32SH
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
CRT1-MD32S
16 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
(between each
input terminal and input terminal and
the G terminal)
the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Power supply short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Power supply type
Power short-circuit protection
Current supplied to input devices
Note
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
----16 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Network power supply
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
50 mA/input
NPN
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
input terminal and
the V terminal)
CRT1-MD32SH-1
PNP
10.5 VDC min.
(between each
input terminal and
the G terminal)
Operates at 50 mA/point min.
Operates at 0.3 mA/point max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
239
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Load short-circuit detection
Disconnection detection
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Power supply type
Current supplied to output
devices
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Note
Specification
CRT1-MD32S
CRT1-MD32S-1
CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1
16 outputs
NPN
PNP
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 4 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A
DC, between
DC, between
DC, between
DC, between
each output tereach output tereach output tereach output terminal and the G
minal and the V
minal and the G
minal and the V
terminal)
terminal)
terminal)
terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--Supported.
--Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does
not operate at over 3 mA.)
16 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
20 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 15 mA max. for
voltage
24-VDC power
supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
60 mA max. for
24-VDC power
supply voltage
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD32S(-1)/CRT1-MD32SH(-1))
Communications
indicators:
MS and NS
Communications
connector
Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Input indicators 0 to 15
I/O connectors
(e-CON connectors)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
240
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Output indicators 0 to 15
Output I/O power supply connector
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table.
The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions.
Name
LED status
0 to 15 (inputs) Lit yellow.
0 to 15 (outNot lit.
puts)
I/O status
Input or output ON
Meaning
The input or output is ON.
Input or output
OFF
The input or output is OFF.
CRT1-MD32SH(-1) Only
Name
0 to 15
(inputs)
LED status
Lit red.
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
0 to 15
(outputs)
Lit red.
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Flashing
red.
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Short-circuit
detection
Disconnection
detection
Normal status
Meaning
The power supply is short-circuited.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating normally.
A load short-circuit occurred.
A line is not connected.
The Unit is operating normally.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-MD32S (NPN)
Left side
BDH
BDL
Input circuits
BS+
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
Short protection
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G
OUT0
Right side
V
V
G
G
241
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
BS+
BDH
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
BDL
Input circuits
CRT1-MD32S-1 (PNP)
Left side
Short protection
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BS-
V0
NC
G
IN0
V
V
G
G
Right side
V
NC
G
OUT0
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
CRT1-MD32SH (NPN)
Left side
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
242
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BS-
Input circuits
BS+
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V
NC
G0
IN0
V
NC
G
OUT0
Right side
V
V
G
G
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-MD32SH-1 (PNP)
BDH
Physical
layer
BDL
Photocoupler
Left side
Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit
V0
NC
G
IN0
Internal circuits
BS-
Input circuits
BS+
V
V
G
G
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
Right side
NC
G
OUT0
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
Wiring
CRT1-MD32S
CRT1-MD32SH (NPN)
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
3
4
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G8
G9
G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15
4
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
Brown (red)
V
NC
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
3-wire external device with NPN
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
IN
15
1
Connection can
be made to
either V terminal.
V
Connection can
be made to
either G terminal.
G
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
G
Brown (red)
V
2-wire sensor
2 NC
(e.g., limit switch)
Brown
(Red)
Black
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Blue
(Black)
1
Pink (white)
V
Solenoid valve, etc.
Pink (white)
V
Blue (black)
V
3
Brown
(White)
Right side (output)
V
Blue (black)
Left side (input)
1
3-wire external device with NPN
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
243
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-MD32S-1/
CRT1-MD32SH-1 (PNP)
Left side (input)
V4
V5
V6
V7
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
1
V8
V9
V10
V11
V12 V13 V14 V15
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
3
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
4
IN
8
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
3
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Brown (red)
G
IN
0
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
3-wire external device with PNP
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
Solenoid valve, etc.
Connection can
be made to
either V terminal.
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
V
V
G
3
4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
G
Brown (red)
Connection can
be made to
either G terminal.
Solenoid valve, etc.
Note
Pink (white)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
V3
Blue (black)
Blue
(Black)
Brown
(White)
4
V2
Pink (white)
3
V1
Blue (black)
2
Right side (output)
V0
Brown
(Red)
Black
(White)
Blue
(Black)
1
3-wire external device with PNP
input (Through-beam emitter of
photoelectric sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power
supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the
Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use
a maximum current of 4 A per terminal.
(3) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses
are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
244
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD32S(-1)/CRT1-MD32SH(-1))
60.3
53.2
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
160
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
245
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-9
Sixteen-point Input Units (MIL Connectors)
CRT1-VID16ML/CRT1-VID16ML-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Weight
Note
Specification
CRT1-VID16ML
CRT1-VID16ML-1
16 inputs
NPN
PNP
17 VDC min. (between each input 17 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
80 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VID16ML and CRT1-VID16ML-1)
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
23
4
01
56
789
23
4
01
56
789
Communications
connector
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Input indicators
0 to 15
I/O connectors (MIL connectors)
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
246
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 63.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
5
2 3 4
1s digit of node address
6
7 8
5
(Front side)
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
6
7 8
9 0 1
(Mounted side)
2 3 4
Internal Circuits
CRT1-VID16ML (NPN)
BS+
BDL
V
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
IN0
IN1
Photocoupler
G
247
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-VID16ML-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
IN0
BDH
Physical
layer
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDL
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
IN1
Photocoupler
G
Wiring
CRT1-VID16ML (NPN)
+
−
3-wire sensor with NPN output
(photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
1
2
V
3
G
Blue (Black)
Brown
(White)
Brown (Red)
Blue (Black)
G
Black (White)
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
248
V
4
IN
15
IN
14
IN
13
IN
12
IN
11
IN
10
IN
9
IN
8
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
IN
7
IN
6
IN
5
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
IN
0
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-VID16ML-1 (PNP)
−
+
3-wire sensor with PNP output
(photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
1
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
2
V
3
V
G
Brown (Red)
Blue (Black)
4
G
Black (White)
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
Note
IN
15
IN
14
IN
13
IN
12
IN
11
IN
10
IN
9
IN
8
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
IN
7
IN
6
IN
5
IN
4
IN
3
IN
2
IN
1
IN
0
The two V terminals as well as the two G terminals are internally connected.
249
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VID16ML and CRT1-VID16ML-1)
85.7
6.4
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
21.5
60
15
5.3
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
78.7
Figures in parentheses are
reference dimensions.
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
25.4
99.9
■
(mm)
250
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
37
136.5
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
116
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
251
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-10 Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL Connectors)
CRT1-VOD16ML/CRT1-VOD16ML-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-VOD16ML
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
252
CRT1-VOD16ML-1
16 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.3 A/output, 2 A/common (See note.)
1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
70 g max.
Do not use a total external load current of more than 2 A, and do not use more
than 1 A per V terminal or G terminal.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VOD16ML and CRT1-VOD16ML-1)
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
23
4
01
56
789
23
4
01
56
789
Communications
Connector
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Output indicators
0 to 15
I/O connectors (MIL connectors)
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 63.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
5
1s digit of node address
5
6
7 8
2 3 4
(Front side)
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
6
7 8
9 0 1
(Mounted side)
2 3 4
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
253
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-VOD16ML (NPN)
Voltage
drop
BS+
BDH
BS−
OUT0
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDL
Physical
layer
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
OUT1
Photocoupler
G
CRT1-VOD16ML-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
BDL
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
254
OUT0
OUT1
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDH
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
G
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-VOD16ML (NPN)
−
+
Solenoid valve, etc.
Solenoid valve, etc.
1
2
V
V
3
4
G
5
G
6
OUT
15
7
9
8
OUT
14
OUT
7
OUT
6
OUT
13
10
OUT
5
11
OUT
12
12
OUT
4
13
OUT
11
14
OUT
3
15
OUT
10
16
OUT
2
17
OUT
9
18
OUT
1
19
OUT
8
20
OUT
0
CRT1-VOD16ML-1 (PNP)
+
1
−
2
V
Solenoid valve, etc.
3
V
G
5
7
9
Note
Solenoid valve, etc.
4
OUT
15
OUT
14
G
6
8
OUT
7
OUT
6
OUT
13
10
OUT
5
11
OUT
12
12
OUT
4
13
OUT
11
14
OUT
3
15
OUT
10
16
OUT
2
17
OUT
9
18
OUT
1
19
OUT
8
20
OUT
0
(1) The two V terminals as well as the two G terminals are internally connected. If the power exceeds 1 A per terminal, or if the total external load current exceeds 2 A, then provide the output power supply externally rather
than from the terminals.
255
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
(2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VOD16ML and CRT1-VOD16ML-1)
85.7
6.4
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
21.5
60
15
5.3
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
78.7
Figures in parentheses are
reference dimensions.
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
25.4
99.9
■
(mm)
256
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
37
136.5
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
116
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
257
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-11 Thirty-two-point Input Units (MIL Connectors)
CRT1-VID32ML/CRT1-VID32ML-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Number of simultaneous inputs
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Weight
Note
258
Specification
CRT1-VID32ML
CRT1-VID32ML-1
32 inputs
NPN
PNP
17 VDC min. (between each input 17 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
32 inputs/common
32 max. (See note.)
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
2 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
120 g max.
When Slave Units are mounted facing upwards, and 32 inputs may all turn
ON, leave the specified distance between Units according to the ambient temperature. (Refer to the Dimensions.)
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VID32ML and CRT1-VID32ML-1)
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Input indicators
I: 0 to 15
Communications
II: 0 to 15
Connector
I/O connectors (MIL connectors)
Communications indicators: MS and NS
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
I 0 to I 15
(word m)
II 0 to II 15
(word m+1)
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Lit yellow.
Input ON
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Word m: The first word allocated to the Slave Unit
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 62.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
(Mounted side)
5
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
(Front side)
9 0 1
6
7 8
1s digit of node address
5
6
7 8
2 3 4
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Input ON
2 3 4
Note
LED status
Lit yellow.
259
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-VID32ML (NPN)
Physical
layer
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Internal circuits
BS−
V
IN0
IN1
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BS+
BDH
G
CRT1-VID32ML-1 (PNP)
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
260
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Input circuits
BDL
Internal circuits
BS+
BDH
IN0
Input circuits
V
IN1
G
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-VID32ML (NPN)
40
38
36
I (word m)
34
32
30
Brown (White)
28
26
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
16
II (word m+1)
14
12
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
10
IN
5
Brown (Red)
8
6
+
−
IN
9
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
Brown (Red)
IN
14
IN
15
Black (White)
G
Blue (Black)
21
V
18
IN
8
23
22
20
IN
6
IN
7
4
V
19
IN
8
17
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
IN
9
15
13
11
9
7
5
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
3
G
G
1
2
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
39
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Blue (Black)
IN
1
24
Blue (Black)
Black (White)
IN
0
V
V
∆ mark
261
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-VID32ML-1 (PNP)
40
38
36
I (word m)
34
Brown (White)
32
30
28
Blue (Black)
26
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
24
39
IN
0
37
IN
1
35
IN
2
33
IN
3
31
IN
4
29
IN
5
27
IN
6
25
IN
7
II (word m+1)
14
Brown (Red)
12
Black (White)
IN
0
15
IN
2
13
IN
3
11
IN
4
9
7
IN
6
5
IN
7
I/O Allocation
Blue (Black)
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
IN
8
IN
10
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
G
1
2
Note
Black (White)
IN
15
3
G
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Brown (Red)
IN
14
IN
9
4
Blue (Black)
IN
13
17
IN
1
IN
5
6
IN
12
V
19
10
8
IN
11
21
V
16
IN
10
G
22
18
−
+
IN
9
23
G
20
IN
8
V
V
∆ mark
All V terminals as well as all G terminals are internally connected.
The following diagram shows the correspondence between MIL connector pin
numbers and allocated words and bits when the first word for a Slave Unit
allocated in the Master Unit is m.
Input Area
15
Word m
262
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
I9
I8
I7
I6
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1
I 0 ... 16 inputs
Word m+1 II 15 II 14 II 13 II 12 II 11 II 10 II 9
II 8
II 7
II 6
II 5
II 4
II 3
II 2
II 1
II 0 ... 16 inputs
I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VID32ML and CRT1-VID32ML-1)
83.7
5
80
90.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
35
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
25.4
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
98
■
(mm)
263
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
134.6
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
41.9
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
114.1
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
264
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
The following ambient operating temperature restrictions apply when multiple
32-point Slave Units with MIL Connectors are mounted in parallel.
When Units Are Not Mounted Facing Upwards:
Units can be densely mounted (32 points can turn ON simultaneously at an
ambient operating temperature of 55°C).
When Units Are Mounted Facing Upwards:
If 32 points may be turned ON simultaneously, the distance between the Units
must be restricted depending on the ambient operating temperature, as
shown in the following graph. For example, when the ambient operating temperature is 55°C, a space of at least 10 mm is required between Units.
L
L
Distance between Units L (mm)
Note
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
Ambient operating temperature (˚C)
265
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-12 Thirty-two-point Output Units (MIL Connectors)
CRT1-VOD32ML/CRT1-VOD32ML-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-VOD32ML
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption
I/O power supply current
consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
266
CRT1-VOD32ML-1
32 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.3 A/output, 4 A/common (See note.)
1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
32 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
6.5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
100 g max.
Do not use a total external load current of more than 4 A, and do not use more
than 1 A per V terminal or G terminal.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VOD32ML and CRT1-VOD32ML-1)
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Output indicators
I: 0 to 15
Communications
II: 0 to 15
Connector
I/O connectors (MIL connectors)
Communications indicators: MS and NS
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
I 0 to I 15
(word m)
II 0 to II 15
(word m+1)
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
Lit yellow.
Output ON
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
Word m: The first word allocated to the Slave Unit
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 62.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
(Mounted side)
5
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
(Front side)
9 0 1
6
7 8
1s digit of node address
5
6
7 8
2 3 4
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Output ON
2 3 4
Note
LED status
Lit yellow.
267
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1-VOD32ML (NPN)
Voltage
drop
BS+
Physical
layer
OUT1
Internal circuits
BDL
OUT0
Photocoupler
BDH
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
Photocoupler
G
CRT1-VOD32ML-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
BDH
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDL
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
268
OUT0
OUT1
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
G
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
I (word m)
CRT1-VOD32ML (NPN)
40
OUT
0
39
OUT
8
38
OUT
1
37
36
OUT
2
35
OUT
10
34
OUT
3
33
OUT
11
32
OUT
4
31
OUT
12
30
OUT
5
29
OUT
13
28
OUT
6
27
OUT
14
26
OUT
7
25
OUT
15
24
23
G
22
Solenoid valve, etc.
G
V
II (word m+1)
−
21
V
20
OUT
0
19
OUT
8
18
OUT
1
17
OUT
9
16
OUT
2
15
OUT
10
14
OUT
3
13
OUT
11
12
OUT
4
11
OUT
12
10
OUT
5
9
8
7
OUT
6
6
Solenoid valve, etc.
OUT
13
OUT
14
5
OUT
7
4
OUT
15
3
G
G
1
2
Solenoid valve, etc.
+
OUT
9
V
V
∆ mark
269
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
I (word m)
CRT1-VOD32ML-1 (PNP)
40
OUT
0
39
OUT
8
38
OUT
1
37
36
OUT
2
35
OUT
10
34
OUT
3
33
OUT
11
32
OUT
4
31
OUT
12
30
OUT
5
29
OUT
13
28
OUT
6
27
OUT
14
26
OUT
7
25
OUT
15
24
23
G
21
V
II (word m+1)
V
20
OUT
0
19
OUT
8
18
OUT
1
17
OUT
9
16
OUT
2
15
OUT
10
14
OUT
3
13
OUT
11
12
OUT
4
11
OUT
12
10
OUT
5
9
8
7
OUT
6
Solenoid valve, etc.
OUT
13
OUT
14
6
5
OUT
7
4
OUT
15
3
G
G
1
2
V
Solenoid valve, etc.
−
G
22
Solenoid valve, etc.
+
OUT
9
V
∆ mark
Note
(1) All V terminals as well as all G terminals are internally connected. If the
power exceeds 1 A per terminal, or if the total external load current exceeds 4 A, then provide the output power supply externally rather than
from the terminals.
(2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
I/O Allocation
The following diagram shows the correspondence between MIL connector pin
numbers and allocated words and bits when the first word for a Slave Unit
allocated in the Master Unit is n.
Output Area
15
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10
I9
I8
I7
I6
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1
I0
... 16 outputs
Word n+1 II 15 II 14 II 13 II 12 II 11 II 10 II 9
II 8
II 7
II 6
II 5
II 4
II 3
II 2
II 1
II 0
... 16 outputs
Word n
270
14
13
12
11
Bit
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VOD32ML and CRT1-VOD32ML-1)
83.7
5
80
90.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
35
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
25.4
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
98
■
(mm)
271
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
134.6
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
41.9
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
114.1
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
272
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
5-4-13 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL
Connectors)
CRT1-VMD32ML/CRT1-VMD32ML-1
Common Specifications
Item
Model
Installation
Communications power supply
current consumption
Weight
Specification
CRT1-VMD32ML
DIN Track or Mounting Bracket
45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
110 g max.
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
CRT1-VMD32ML
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Number of simultaneous inputs
Isolation method
Input indicator
Power supply type
I/O power supply current consumption
Note
16 inputs
NPN
17 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 inputs/common
16 max.
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
2 mA max.
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
PNP
17 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal)
When Slave Units are mounted facing upwards, and 16 inputs may all turn
ON, leave the specified distance between Units according to the ambient temperature. (Refer to the Dimensions.)
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
273
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Output Section Specifications]
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Power supply type
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Note
Specification
CRT1-VMD32ML
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
16 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.3 A/output, 2 A/common (See note.)
1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
6.5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Do not use a total external load current of more than 2 A, and do not use more
than 1 A per V terminal or G terminal.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VMD32ML and CRT1-VMD32ML-1)
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
I/O indicators
I: 0 to 15 (IN)
II: 0 to 15 (OUT)
Communications
Connector
Communications indicators: MS and NS
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
274
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O connectors (MIL connectors)
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
I 0 to I 15
(word m)
II 0 to II 15
(word n)
Note
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input or output ON
Meaning
The input or output is ON.
Not lit.
Input or output OFF The input or output is OFF.
Lit yellow.
Input or output ON
Not lit.
Input or output OFF The input or output is OFF.
The input or output is ON.
Word m: Word allocated for Input Area of Slave Unit
Word n: Word allocated for Output Area of Slave Unit
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the
mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch.
(The maximum node address is 63.)
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
(Mounted side)
5
10s digit of node address
9 0 1
2 3 4
(Front side)
9 0 1
6
7 8
1s digit of node address
5
6
7 8
2 3 4
Internal Circuits
CRT1-VMD32ML (NPN)
BDH
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDL
Input circuits
BS+
V1
IN0
G1
Voltage
drop
Photocoupler
V2
OUT0
G2
275
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-VMD32ML-1 (PNP)
V1
Photocoupler
Physical
layer
BS−
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
276
Internal circuits
BDH
BDL
Input circuits
BS+
IN0
G1
V2
OUT0
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
G2
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
Wiring
CRT1-VMD32ML (NPN)
40
38
36
I (word m)
34
32
30
Brown (White)
28
26
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
24
Blue (Black)
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
−
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
Brown (Red)
IN
14
IN
15
Black (White)
G1
Blue (Black)
21
V1
II (word n)
IN
10
+
23
22
V1
20
OUT
0
19
OUT
8
18
OUT
1
17
OUT
9
16
OUT
2
15
OUT
10
14
OUT
3
13
OUT
11
12
OUT
4
11
OUT
12
10
OUT
5
9
8
7
OUT
6
6
5
4
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
+
−
OUT
13
OUT
14
OUT
7
OUT
15
3
G2
G2
1
2
Solenoid valve, etc.
IN
9
G1
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
IN
8
V2
V2
Solenoid valve, etc.
∆ mark
277
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
CRT1-VMD32ML-1 (PNP)
40
38
36
Brown (White)
I (word m)
34
32
30
28
26
Blue (Black)
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
IN
4
IN
5
IN
6
IN
7
24
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
39
37
IN
9
35
33
31
29
25
−
IN
11
IN
12
IN
13
IN
14
IN
15
Black (White)
G1
Blue (Black)
23
21
V1
II (word n)
IN
10
+
Brown (Red)
27
G1
22
V1
20
OUT
0
19
OUT
8
18
OUT
1
17
OUT
9
16
OUT
2
15
OUT
10
14
OUT
3
13
OUT
11
12
OUT
4
11
OUT
12
10
OUT
5
9
8
7
OUT
6
6
5
4
3-wire sensor
(photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
+
−
OUT
13
OUT
14
OUT
7
OUT
15
3
G2
G2
1
2
Solenoid valve, etc.
IN
8
V2
V2
Solenoid valve, etc.
∆ mark
Note
(1) V1 terminals are internally connected, as are V2, G1, and G2 terminals.
(V1 and V2 terminals are not internally connected, and G1 and G2 terminals are not internally connected.) If the power exceeds 1 A per terminal
or if the total external load current exceeds 2 A, then provide the output
power supply from an external source rather than from the terminals.
(2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
278
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
I/O Allocation
The following diagram shows the correspondence between MIL connector pin
numbers and allocated words and bits when the first input word for a Slave
Unit allocated in the Master Unit is m, and the first output word is n.
Input Area
15
Word m
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10
I9
I8
I7
I6
I5
I4
I3
I2
I1
I0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
... 16 inputs
Output Area
15
Word n
14
13
12
11
10
9
II 15 II 14 II 13 II 12 II 11 II 10 II 9
8
II 8
7
II 7
II 6
II 5
II 4
II 3
II 2
II 1
II 0
Bit
... 16 outputs
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VMD32ML and CRT1-VMD32ML-1)
83.7
5
80
90.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
35
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
25.4
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
98
■
(mm)
279
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
134.6
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
41.9
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
114.1
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
280
Section 5-4
Units with Connectors
The following ambient operating temperature restrictions apply when multiple
32-point Slave Units with MIL Connectors are mounted in parallel.
When Units Are Not Mounted Facing Upwards:
Units can be densely mounted (16 points can turn ON simultaneously at an
ambient operating temperature of 55°C).
When Units Are Mounted Facing Upwards:
If 16 points may be turned ON simultaneously, the distance between the Units
must be restricted depending on the ambient operating temperature, as
shown in the following graph. For example, when the ambient operating temperature is 55°C, a space of at least 10 mm is required between Units.
L
L
Distance between Units L (mm)
Note
30
20
10
0
40
45
50
55
Ambient operating temperature (˚C)
281
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
5-5
5-5-1
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Eight-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps)
CRT1-ID08SL/CRT1-ID08SL-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
Specification
CRT1-ID08SL
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to input devices
Communications power supply
current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Weight
CRT1-ID08SL-1
8 inputs
NPN
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
1 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
1.5 ms max.
8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/input
30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
170 g max.
Note
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID08SL and CRT1-ID08SL-1)
Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O power supply
indicator
Input indicators
0 to 7
I/O power supply indicator
Release button
Communications
connector
Screw-less clamp terminal
282
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
I/O Power Supply
Indicators
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
LED status
Lit green.
I/O
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
I/O power
supply ON
I/O power
supply OFF
Meaning
The I/O power
supply is ON.
The I/O power
supply is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID08SL (NPN)
G
BS+
V
BDH
BDL
Physical
layer
G
Internal circuits
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
0 to 7
V
G
V
283
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID08SL-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
G
BDH
Physical
layer
V
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
Internal circuits
BDL
0 to 7
G
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-ID08SL (NPN)
0
1
7
NC
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Brown
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Blue
(Black)
Brown
(Red)
Black
(White)
NC
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
CRT1-ID08SL-1 (PNP)
7
NC
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
Blue
(Black)
Brown
(Red)
Black
(White)
1
Blue
(Black)
0
Brown
(White)
NC
3-wire sensor with PNP output
(photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor)
(1) Do not wire NC terminals.
(2) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses
are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
284
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID08SL and CRT1-ID08SL-1)
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
96
(mm)
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
25.4
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
■
(mm)
(mm)
285
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
5-5-2
Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps)
CRT1-OD08SL/CRT1-OD08SL-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Specification
CRT1-OD08SL
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to output
devices
Communications power supply current consumption
I/O power supply current
consumption
Output handling for communications errors
Weight
Note
CRT1-OD08SL-1
8 outputs
NPN
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 outputs/common
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the V terminal)
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
170 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD08SL and CRT1-OD08SL-1)
Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
I/O power
supply indicator
Output indicators
0 to 7
I/O power supply indicator
Communications
connector
Screw-less clamp terminal
286
Release button
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
I/O Power Supply
Indicators
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
LED status
Lit green.
I/O
I/O status
I/O power
supply ON
I/O power
supply OFF
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
Meaning
The I/O power
supply is ON.
The I/O power
supply is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD08SL (NPN)
G
BS+
V
BDH
Physical
layer
Internal circuits
BDL
Voltage
drop
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
0 to 7
Photocoupler
G
V
G
V
287
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1-OD08SL-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
G
BDH
Physical
layer
0 to 7
Internal circuits
BDL
BS-
Photocoupler
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
V
Voltage
drop
G
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-OD08SL (NPN)
7
NC
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Solenoid valve, etc.
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device with
NPN input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
CRT1-OD08SL-1 (PNP)
7
NC
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Solenoid valve, etc.
Note
288
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device with
PNP input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
(2) Do not wire NC terminals.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD08SL and CRT1-OD08SL-1)
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
96
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
(mm)
289
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
5-5-3
Sixteen-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps)
CRT1-ID16SL/CRT1-ID16SL-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
CRT1-ID16SL
CRT1-ID16SL-1
16 inputs
NPN
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input 15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
OFF voltage
5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/input
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to input devices
Communications power supply
current consumption
I/O power supply current consumption
Weight
Note
290
250 g max.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16SL and CRT1-ID16SL-1)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
I/O power supply indicator
Communications
connector
Input indicators 0 to 15
I/O power supply indicator
Release button
Screw-less clamp terminal
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
I/O Power Supply
Indicators
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
LED status
Lit green.
I/O
Not lit.
Meaning
The I/O power
supply is ON.
The I/O power
supply is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
9
0 1
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
I/O power
supply ON
I/O power
supply OFF
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
291
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Internal Circuits
CRT1-ID16SL (NPN)
G
BS+
V
BDH
BDL
Internal circuits
Physical
layer
BS−
G
Photocoupler
0 to 15
V
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
G
V
CRT1-ID16SL-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
G
BDH
BDL
BS−
V
Internal circuits
Physical
layer
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
Photocoupler
0 to 15
G
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-ID16SL (NPN)
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Black (White)
NC
Blue (Black)
15
Brown (Red)
1
Blue (Black)
0
Brown (White)
NC
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
292
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1-ID16SL-1 (PNP)
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Black (White)
NC
Blue (Black)
15
Brown (Red)
1
Blue (Black)
0
Brown (White)
NC
3-wire sensor with
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch) PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Note
(1) Do not wire NC terminals.
(2) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses
are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16SL and CRT1-ID16SL-1)
60.3
53.2
3.14
50
52
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
132
Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable
25.4
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
■
(mm)
293
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
294
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
5-5-4
Sixteen-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps)
CRT1-OD16SL/CRT1-OD16SL-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Installation
Power supply type
Current supplied to output
devices
Communications power supply current consumption
Specification
CRT1-OD16SL
CRT1-OD16SL-1
16 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 4 A/common
1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each 1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal) output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
DIN Track
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
I/O power supply current
consumption
Output handling for commu- Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
nications errors
Weight
250 g max.
Note
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16SL and CRT1-OD16SL-1)
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications
I/O power
indicators: MS and NS
supply indicator
Communications
connector
Output indicators 0 to 15
I/O power supply indicator
Release button
Screw-less clamp terminal
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
295
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
I/O Power Supply
Indicators
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
I/O
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
LED status
Lit green.
I/O status
I/O power
supply ON
Meaning
The I/O power
supply is ON.
Not lit.
I/O power
supply OFF
The I/O power
supply is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-OD16SL (NPN)
G
BS+
V
BDH
Internal circuits
BDL
Voltage
drop
Physical
layer
BS-
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
0 to 7
Photocoupler
G
V
G
V
296
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1-OD16SL-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
G
BDH
Internal circuits
Physical
layer
BDL
BS−
0 to 15
Photocoupler
V
Voltage
drop
DC-DC
converter
(not
isolated)
G
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-OD16SL (NPN)
15
NC
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Solenoid valve, etc.
Brown (red)
1
Pink (white)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device with
NPN input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
CRT1-OD16SL-1 (PNP)
15
NC
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
Solenoid valve, etc.
Note
Pink (white)
1
Brown (red)
0
Blue (black)
NC
3-wire external device with
PNP input (Through-beam
emitter of photoelectric sensor)
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Do not wire NC terminals.
297
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16SL and CRT1-OD16SL-1)
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
132
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
298
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
5-5-5
Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less
Clamps)
CRT1-MD16SL/CRT1-MD16SL-1
Common Specifications
Item
Model
Installation
Communications power supply current consumption
Weight
Specification
CRT1-MD16SL
CRT1-MD16SL-1
DIN Track
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
290 g max.
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
CRT1-MD16SL
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Input indicator
Power supply type
Current supplied to input devices
I/O power supply current consumption
Note
CRT1-MD16SL-1
8 inputs
NPN
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC min. (between each input ter- 5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal)
minal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 inputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
100 mA/input
15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
299
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Isolation method
Output indicators
Power supply type
Current supplied to output devices
I/O power supply current consumption
Output handling for communications
errors
Note
Specification
CRT1-MD16SL
CRT1-MD16SL-1
8 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.5 A/output, 2 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between
each output terminal and the G each output terminal and the V
terminal)
terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 outputs/common
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Multi-power supply
100 mA/output
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator.
Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power
supply current supplied to the V and G terminals.
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16SL and CRT1-MD16SL-1)
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
I/O indicators
Input indicators
0 to 7
I/O power
supply indicator
Release button
Communications
Connector
Screw-less clamp terminal
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
300
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Output indicators
0 to 7
I/O power supply indicator
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
LED status
0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow.
0 to 7 (outputs)
Not lit.
I/O Power Supply
Indicators
Meaning
The input or output is
ON.
Input or output
OFF
The input or output is
OFF.
The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
LED status
0 to 7 (inputs) Lit green.
0 to 7 (outputs)
Not lit.
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Input or output
ON
I/O status
I/O power supply
ON
I/O power supply
OFF
Meaning
The I/O power
supply is ON.
The I/O power
supply is OFF.
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Internal Circuits
CRT1-MD16SL (NPN)
G
V
G
BS+
BDL
0 to 7
Physical
layer
V
G
Internal circuits
BDH
Left side (input)
Photocoupler
BS−
V
G
V
DC-DC
converter
(nonisolated)
Voltage
drop
0 to 7
Photocoupler
Right side (output)
G
V
G
V
301
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1-MD16SL-1 (PNP)
V
G
V
BS+
Left side (input)
Photocoupler
0 to 7
BDH
Physical
layer
G
V
Internal circuits
BDL
BS−
G
V
G
DC-DC
converter
(nonisolated)
0 to 7
V
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
G
Right side (output)
V
G
Wiring
CRT1-MD16SL (NPN)
Right side (output)
Left side (input)
1
7
NC
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
302
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Blue
(black)
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Pink
(white)
0
Brown
(red)
NC
Black
(white)
NC
Brown
(red)
7
Blue
(black)
1
Blue
(black)
0
Brown
(white)
NC
3-wire external device
with NPN input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1-MD16SL-1 (PNP)
Right side (output)
Left side (input)
1
7
NC
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
G
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Blue
(black)
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Pink
(white)
0
Brown
(red)
NC
Black
(white)
NC
Brown
(red)
7
Blue
(black)
1
Blue
(black)
0
Brown
(white)
NC
3-wire external device
with PNP input
(Through-beam emitter
of photoelectric sensor)
(1) The V terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply, as well as
the G terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for V-G terminals on the left
side and the right side.
(2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(3) Do not wire NC terminals.
(4) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses
are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
303
Section 5-5
Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16SL and CRT1-MD16SL-1)
60.3
53.2
3.14
52
50
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
170
(mm)
Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected
When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted
69.4
25.4
■
(mm)
When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted
106
37
■
(mm)
■
When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
48
10
45.5
When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
85.5
25.4
■
(mm)
(mm)
304
SECTION 6
Analog I/O Slave Units
This section describes the Analog I/O Slave Units.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
Analog I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
6-1-1
Analog I/O Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
6-1-2
List of Data Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
306
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
6-2-1
Input Range and Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
6-2-2
Calculation and Selection Processing of Input Data. . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
6-2-3
I/O Data Type and Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
6-3-1
Output Range and Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
319
6-3-2
I/O Data Type and Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
322
6-4-1
Analog Input Slave Unit Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
323
6-4-2
Analog Output Slave Unit Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
6-5
Analog Data Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
330
6-6-1
Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block). .
330
6-6-2
Two-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block) . .
333
6-7
Units with Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
337
6-7-1
Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors). . . .
337
6-7-2
Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors) . .
345
6-7-3
Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors) . . . . . .
350
6-7-4
Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors). . . . .
356
305
Section 6-1
Analog I/O Slave Units
6-1
6-1-1
Analog I/O Slave Units
Analog I/O Slave Units
In the Analog I/O Slave Unit, various functions such as a scaling function and
a peak/bottom hold function can be used in addition to AD/DA conversion of
the analog I/O data.
Furthermore, various types of calculations for analog input values that previously had to be processed using a high level PLC ladder program can be processed in the Analog Input Slave Unit.
In addition, the data calculated using these functions can be selected as "analog data", combined with status information such as "Analog Status Flag", and
allocated to I/O.
Allocating and monitoring of this status information, setting up Analog Unit
specific functions, and data monitoring can easily be performed using CXIntegrator.
6-1-2
List of Data Processing Functions
The following tables list the data processing functions that can be used with
Analog I/O Slave Units. Refer to 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
and 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions for details on functions and
setting methods.
Analog Input Slave Unit
Function
Setting of number of
AD conversion
points
Moving average
function
Scaling
Peak/bottom hold
Top/valley hold
Rate of change
Comparator
Disconnected line
detection
User adjustment
306
Details
Reducing the number of input conversion points
increases the speed of the conversion cycle.
Averages the most recent 8 values of the analog
input value.
This provides a smooth input value for an input that
oscillates.
Performs scaling.
The analog input value can be converted into
industrial units that can be utilized by the user,
reducing the calculation load on the ladder program of the master PLC. Scaling also supports an
offset function for compensating for mounting
errors in sensors and other devices.
Holds the maximum value and minimum value of
the analog input value.
This holds the "tops of the mountains" and "bottoms of the valleys" of the analog input values.
This calculates the rate of change of the analog
input values for each set sampling cycle.
Analog input values or data after calculation (peak
value, bottom value, top value, valley value, rate of
change) are compared to 4 types of set values:
Alarm Trip Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point
High (H), Warning Trip Point Low (L), and Alarm
Trip Point Low (LL) and the results are notified
using the Analog Status Flag.
Detects disconnections of analog inputs. (Valid
only for the input ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V)
"Shift" generated from measurement error due to
hardware can be adjusted to an arbitrary input
value.
Default
4
Disabled
Disabled
0 to 6,000
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Section 6-1
Analog I/O Slave Units
Function
Cumulated count
Last maintenance
date function
Details
Provides time integration of the analog input values.
Stores the date for the last time maintenance was
performed inside the unit.
Default
Disabled
Differs for
each
model
Analog Output Slave Units
Function
Scaling
User adjustment
Cumulative counter
Communications
error output setting
Last maintenance
date function
Details
Performs scaling.
The analog output value can be converted into
industrial units that can be utilized by the user
reducing the calculation load on the ladder program in the Master Unit.
"Shift" generated from measurement error due to
hardware can be adjusted to an arbitrary output
value.
This provides time integration of the analog output
values.
Sets the value output when a communications
error occurs for each output.
Stores the date for the last maintenance was performed inside the unit.
Default
Disabled
0 to 6,000
Disabled
Disabled
Hold
Differs for
each
model
307
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
Analog Input Slave Units convert (AD conversion) analog input signals such
as 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA to digital data (binary values) and stores them in
the Master Unit.
A summary of the Analog Input Slave Unit is described below.
6-2-1
Input Range and Conversion Data
Input analog signals are converted to digital data in the following manner
using a set input range.
If the input data exceeds the data range for which conversion is possible, the
conversion data saturates at the upper or low limit.
Input Range and
Conversion Data
■ Input Range: 0 to 5 V
Voltage of 0 to 5V is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The
input data range for which conversion is possible is –0.25 to +5.25 V and here
the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). When input data is a
negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal) and
the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 V (0000
Hex).
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
−0.25 V
FED4 (−300)
Voltage
0V
5 V 5.25 V
■ Input Range:1 to 5 V
Voltage of 1 to 5V is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The
input data range for which conversion is possible is 0.8 to 5.2 V and here the
output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). If the input value falls
below the input range such as for a disconnected line (input voltage is less
than 0.76 V), a disconnected line detection function activates and data is set
to 7FFF Hex.
308
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
Clamped above
5.2 V.
7FFF
0000 (0)
Voltage
1V
FED4 (−300)
5 V 5.2 V
0.8 V
0.76 V
(Disconnection detected below 0.76 V.)
■ Input Range: 0 to 10 V
Voltage of 0 to 10V is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000).
The input data range for which conversion is possible is –0.5 to +10.5 V and
here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). When input data
is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal)
and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 V
(0000 Hex).
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
−0.5 V
FED4 (−300)
Voltage
10 V 10.5 V
0V
■ Input Range: –10 to 10 V
Voltage of –10 to +10 V is converted to data from F448 to 0BB8 Hex (–3000 to
+3000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is –11 to +11 V
and here the output data is F31C to 0CE4 Hex (–3300 to +3300). When input
data is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal) and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of
0 V (0000 Hex).
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000)
−11 V −10 V
0000 (0)
Voltage
0V
10 V 11 V
F448 (−3000)
F31C (−3300)
309
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
■ Input Range: 0 to 20 mA
Current of 0 to 20 mA is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000).
The input data range for which conversion is possible is –1 to +21 mA and
here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). When input data
is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal)
and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 mA
(0000 Hex).
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
−1 mA
FED4 (−300)
Current
0 mA
20 mA 21 mA
■ Input Range: 4 to 20 mA
Current of 4 to 20 mA is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000).
The input data range for which conversion is possible is 3.2 to 20.8 mA and
here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). If the input value
falls below the input range such as for a disconnected line (input current is
less than 3.04 mA), a disconnected line detection function activates and data
is set to 7FFF Hex.
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
Clamped above
20.8 mA.
7FFF
0000 (0)
FED4 (−300)
4 mA
3.2 mA
Current
20 mA 20.8 mA
3.04 mA
(Disconnection detected below 3.04 mA.)
Input Range Settings
1,2,3...
Setting of input range is performed using Analog Input Slave Unit DIP
switches, CX-Integrator, or Explicit message.
The method for setting the input range using CX-Integrator is described
below.
Please see "11-1 CX-Integrator" on page 481 regarding details for CX-Integrator.
1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave to be set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
Slave Unit icon and select Parameters - Edit from the menus.)
310
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
Section 6-2
3. Select the tab of the channel for which you would like to change the range
and select any input range from the pull-down list of "Input Range".
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
AD Conversion Data for
Negative Numbers
6-2-2
If the AD conversion data is a negative number, it is expressed as the two's
complement. The NEG instruction (two’s complement conversion) can be
used to obtain the absolute value of the two’s complement.
Calculation and Selection Processing of Input Data
Input Data Calculation
The following types of calculations can be performed in the unit for external
analog input values.
• Scaling to desired industry unit
• Moving average processing
After processing, the data can be allocated to the Master Unit I/O.
In addition, the following types of calculations can be performed for analog
values for which the processing described above was performed.
• Peak/hold operation
• Top/valley operation
• Rate of change operation
• Cumulated count operation
The values after these calculations are called "Peak Value", "Bottom Value",
"Top Value", "Valley Value", "Rate of Change", and "Cumulated Count Value".
311
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
The flow of data calculation is as shown in the flow chart below.
Input
A
Moving
average
Scaling
Analog input
value
A
Peak/Bottom
Top/Valley
Peak
value
Top
value
Bottom
value
Valley
value
Cumulated
count
Rate of change
Rate of change
value
Cumulated
count value
Top/Valley Detection Timing
Flags (allocated I/O data)
Hold Flag
Data Flow
Selection
Conversion
processing
Selection of Allocation
Data
Allocated
I/O data
Processing
results
After performing each calculation, 6 types of data "Raw Value", "Peak Value",
"Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", and "Rate of Change" can be
selected for allocation to I/O. The selected data becomes "Analog Data 1" and
can be allocated independently or with a status flag to the Master Unit. The
selection process is performed by either CX-Integrator or Explicit message. In
addition, comparison calculation of "Analog Data 1" with 4 types of alarm settings (Alarm Trip Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning Trip
Point Low (L), Alarm Trip Point Low (LL)) can be performed. (Comparator
function)
Six types of data
Analog value
Moving average, scaling enabled/disabled
Select one of the six types of data and
allocate it as the Analog Data.
Peak value
Bottom value
Analog Data 1
(allocated I/O data)
Top value
Allocated for I/O.
Valley value
Rate of change
Comparator
The Comparator can be used
with values allocated as the
Analog Data 1.
Analog Status Flags
(allocated I/O data)
312
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
Note
In default, "Raw Value" is to be allocated to I/O.
Math
processing
Input CH2
Input CH3
6-2-3
I/O Data
Math
processing
Other processing results
Analog input
value
Other processing results
Analog input
value
Other processing results
Analog input
value
Other processing results
Selected
processing
Math
processing
Analog input
value
Analog Data 1
Selected
processing
Input CH1
Math
processing
Analog Data 1
Selected
processing
Input CH0
Analog Data 1
Selected
processing
Furthermore, "Analog Data 1" can be selected separately for each input as
described below.
Analog Data 1
I/O Data Type and Allocation
Analog Input Slave Units support the following four types of input data, and
one type of output data. The required data can be allocated for I/O.
Data allocation is performed by CX-Integrator.
Input Data
I/O data
Analog Data 1
(4 input words (8
bytes))
Details
• Used to monitor analog data.
• One type of data from the 4-word analog value, peak value,
bottom value, top value, valley value, and rate of change is
selected and allocated. (The default is allocation of the analog value.)
Note The comparator function can be used with regards to
the value allocated to analog data 1.
Top/Valley Detection Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are allocated in one word.
Timing Flags (1 input The flag is allocated together with the top or valley value in
word (2 bytes))
order to identify the timing for the Master Unit to capture the
top or valley hold value.
Analog Status Flags Each of the bits for the Comparator Result Flag, Top/Valley
(2 input words (4
Detection Timing Flag, Disconnected Line Detection Flag are
bytes))
allocated. The function of each bit is as follows:
• Comparator Result Flags
Allow control of the judgement results only, without allocating analog values.
• Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag
Allocated simultaneously with top value and valley value
and used for data capture timing.
• Disconnected Line Detection Flag
Disconnected line can be detected even if analog value is
not allocated.
Analog Data +
From the start, the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag (1 word
Top/Valley Detection (2 bytes)) is allocated to the end of analog data 1 (4 words (8
Timing Flags (5 input bytes)).
words (10 bytes))
313
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
Output Data
I/O data
Hold Flags (1 output
word (2 bytes))
Analog Data Selection
Method
Details
This is used in conjunction with each type of hold function
(peak, bottom, top, valley) and is used to control execution
timing of the hold function on the Master Unit side.
The data type to be allocated as "Analog Data 1" can be selected from a maximum of 6 types of data using various types of calculations, which are "Raw
Value", "Peak Value", "Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", and "Rate
of Change". These values can be selected alone or in combination with the
Status Flags.
Setting Using the CXIntegrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the tab of the channel to select the analog data you want and select
the type of allocation data from the "Analog Data 1 Allocation" pull-down
list.
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Allocating I/O Data
Select allocation data using one of the following methods and perform remote
I/O communications.
1. Only allocate analog value (default I/O data)
2. Select I/O data (pattern) for allocation (fixed I/O data combination)
314
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
■ If only allocating analog value (default I/O data)
If the Analog Input Slave Unit is used with default settings, only analog value
is selected as I/O data and 4 words (8 bytes) worth of data is allocated to the
IN area of the Master Unit as shown below.
15
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
0
Analog input value for Input CH0
Analog input value for Input CH1
Analog input value for Input CH2
Analog input value for Input CH3
■ If I/O data (pattern) is selected for allocation (fixed I/O data combination)
"Analog data 1" is combined with data such as status flag and allocated as I/O
using set combinations as described below.
Data that can be integrated can be selected using CX-Integrator.
(Example) Case of allocating "Analog Data 1" + "Top/Valley Detection Timing
Flag" to the Master Unit
15
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
First word + 4CH
8 7
0
Analog Data 1 for Input CH0
Analog Data 1 for Input CH1
Analog Data 1 for Input CH2
Analog Data 1 for Input CH3
Top Detection Timing Flag Valley Detection Timing Flag
Method of selection using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Analog Input Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, rightclick the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the "General" tab and select I/O data (pattern) from the "Default
Connection Path (In)" pull-down list. The following example shows the case
for allocation of "Analog Data 1".
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
315
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
I/O Data
Analog Data 1
Analog Data is used to monitor analog values. One item from "Raw Value",
"Peak Value", "Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", and "Rate of
Change" can be selected for allocation. (The default is allocating of "Raw
Value".)
Note The comparator function can be used with regards to the value allocated to
"Analog Data 1".
The data format for allocation to the Master Unit is described below.
The data is allocated in a two's complement form. (4 words (8 bytes))
15
0
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flags
Analog Data 1 for Input CH0
Analog Data 1 for Input CH1
Analog Data 1 for Input CH2
Analog Data 1 for Input CH3
These flags turn ON for the one-shot time when detecting the top or valley for
the top/valley hold function.
These flags are used to time reading the values held as the top and valley values at the Master Unit. The following data format is used when these flags are
allocated in the Master Unit (1 word (2 bytes)).
15
8
7
0
+1
+0
+0
Bit 7
0
Bit 6
0
Bit 5
0
Bit 4
0
+1
0
0
0
0
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower
byte
T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper
byte
The meaning for each bit is as described below.
+0
Byte
Abbreviation
V_STx
+1
T_STx
Name
Details
Valley Detection Tim- Becomes 1 (ON) at the timing
ing Flag
when a valley is detected by
the top/valley hold function and
becomes 0 (OFF) after passing
of one-shot time.
Top Detection Timing Becomes 1 (ON) at the timing
Flag
when a top is detected by the
top/valley hold function and
becomes 0 (OFF) after passing
of one-shot time.
Note The one-shot time can be changed. For details, refer to the one-shot time settings for the top/valley hold function.
Analog Status Flags
The Analog Status Flags include allocations for the Comparator Result Flag,
the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, and the Disconnected Line Detection
Flags. These flags are used for detection and monitoring.
The data format used for each byte when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit is shown below (2 words (4 bytes)).
316
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
15
8
7
0
+1
+3
+0
+2
+0
Bit 7 Bit 6
Bit 5
BW0 T_ST0 V_ST0
Bit 4
HH0
Bit 3
H0
Bit 2
PS0
Bit 1
L0
Bit 0
LL0
+1
BW1 T_ST1 V_ST1
HH1
H1
PS1
L1
LL1
+2
BW2 T_ST2 V_ST2
HH2
H2
PS2
L2
LL2
+3
BW3 T_ST3 V_ST3
HH3
H3
PS3
L3
LL3
Input
CH0
Input
CH1
Input
CH2
Input
CH3
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
The meaning for each bit is as described below.
Bit
0
Analog Data 1 + Top/Valley
Detection Timing Flags
AbbreviName
ation
LLx
Compara- Low Low Limit
tor Result Alarm Flag
Flag
1
Lx
2
PSx
3
Hx
4
HHx
5
V_STx
6
T_STx
7
BWx
Details
Turns ON when the value of data
allocated in Analog Data 1 drops
below the Low Low Limit alarm setting.
Low Limit Alarm Turns ON when the value of data
Flag
allocated in Analog Data 1 drops
below the Low Limit alarm setting.
Normal Flag
Turns ON when none of the alarms
(pass signal)
(High High Limit, High Limit, Low
Low Limit, and Low Limit) have been
output.
Turns ON when the value of data
allocated in Analog Data 1 exceeds
the High Limit alarm setting.
High High Limit Turns ON when the value of data
Alarm Flag
allocated in Analog Data 1 exceeds
the High High Limit alarm setting.
Valley DetecTurns ON at the timing when a valley
Top/Valley Detec- tion Timing Flag is detected by the top/valley hold
function and becomes 0 (OFF) after
tion
passing of one-shot time.
Timing
Flags
Top Detection
Turns ON at the timing when a top is
Timing Flag
detected by the top/valley hold function and becomes 0 (OFF) after
passing of one-shot time.
Disconnected Line DetecTurns ON when a disconnection is
tion Flag
detected.
High Limit
Alarm Flag
This data pattern consists of Analog Data 1 followed by the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags and is allocated in the Master Unit using the following data
format (5 words (10 bytes)).
15
8
+1
+3
+5
+7
+9
7
0
+0
+2
+4
+6
+8
317
Section 6-2
Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units
Bit 7
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Hold Flags (Output)
Bit 6
Bit 5 Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Analog Data 1 for Input CH0
Bit 1
Analog Data 1 for Input CH1
Analog Data 1 for Input CH2
Analog Data 1 for Input CH3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
V_ST3 V_ST2
T_ST3 T_ST2
Bit 0
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte
T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte
Hold Flags are used with the peak/bottom hold and top/valley hold functions.
The Hold Flags are used to control the hold execution timing from the Master
Unit and are allocated in the Master Unit using the following data format (1
word (2 bytes)).
15
8
7
0
+1
+0
+0
Bit 7
0
Bit 6
0
Bit 5
0
Bit 4
0
Bit 3
HD3
Bit 2
HD2
Bit 1
HD1
Bit 0
HD0
+1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
The meaning for each bit is as described below.
Bit
0
Note
318
Abbreviation
Name
HD0
Hold Flag for
Input CH0
1
HD1
Hold Flag for
Input CH1
2
HD2
Hold Flag for
Input CH2
3
HD3
Hold Flag for
Input CH3
Details
The hold function is performed for Analog
Input CH0 while this flag is ON. The hold
function stops and the last value is held
when the flag goes OFF.
The hold function is performed for Analog
Input CH1 while this flag is ON. The hold
function stops and the last value is held
when the flag goes OFF.
The hold function is performed for Analog
Input CH2 while this flag is ON. The hold
function stops and the last value is held
when the flag goes OFF.
The hold function is performed for Analog
Input CH3 while this flag is ON. The hold
function stops and the last value is held
when the flag goes OFF.
After a Hold Flag is turned ON at the Master Unit, there is a transmission time
delay for notification of this to the unit.
Section 6-3
Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units
6-3
Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units
The Analog Output Slave Unit converts (DA conversion) digital data (binary
values) stored in the Master Unit into analog signals of 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
and outputs this.
A summary of the Analog Output Slave Unit is described below.
6-3-1
Output Range and Conversion Data
Digital data that is output is converted to analog data using a set output range
as shown below.
If the output data exceeds the data range for which conversion is possible, the
conversion data saturates at the upper or low limit.
Output Range and
Conversion Data
■ Output Range: 0 to 5 V
Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to voltage from 0 to 5 V and
output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from FED4
to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes from
-0.25 to +5.25 V.
Voltage
5.25 V
5V
0V
8000FED4 (−300)
−0.25 V
0000 (0)
1770 189C
(6000) (6300)
7FFF
Conversion data
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
■ Output Range: 1 to 5 V
Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to voltage from 1 to 5 V and
output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from FED4
to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes from
0.8 to 5.2 V.
Voltage
5.2 V
5V
1V
8000
FED4
(−300)
0.8 V
0V
0000(0)
1770 189C
(6000) (6300)
7FFF
Conversion data
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
319
Section 6-3
Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units
■ Output Range: 0 to 10 V
Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to voltage from 0 to 10 V
and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from
FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes
from –0.5 to +10.5 V.
Voltage
10.5 V
10 V
0V
8000FED4 (−300)
−0.5 V
1770 189C
(6000) (6300)
0000 (0)
7FFF
Conversion data
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
■ Output Range: –10 to 10 V
Data of F448 to 0BB8 Hex (–3000 to +3000) is converted to voltage from –10
to +10 V and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is
from F31C to 0CE4 Hex (–3300 to +3300) and for this case the output data
becomes from –11 to +11 V. Negative voltages are specified as two's complements (16 bits).
Voltage
11 V
10 V
F31C F448
8000 (−3300) (−3000)
0000 (0)
0V
0BB8 0CE4
(3000) (3300)
7FFF
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
−10 V
−11 V
■ Output Range: 4 to 20 mA
Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to current from 4 to 20 mA
and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from
FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes
from 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
Current
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
8000
320
FED4
(−300)
3.2 mA
0 mA
0000(0)
1770 189C
(6000) (6300)
7FFF
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
Section 6-3
Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units
■ Output Range: 0 to 20 mA
Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to current from 0 to 20 mA
and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from
0000 to 189C Hex (0 to 6300) and for this case the output data becomes from
0 to 21 mA.
Current
21 mA
20 mA
0 mA
FFFF
Output Range
Settings
0000 (0)
1770 189C
(6000) (6300)
7FFF
Conversion data
Hexadecimal (decimal)
Setting of output range is performed using Analog Output Slave Unit DIP
switches, CX-Integrator, or Explicit message.
The method for setting the output range using CX-Integrator is described
below.
Please see "11-1 CX-Integrator" on page 481 regarding details for CX-Integrator.
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Analog Output Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, rightclick the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the tab for the channel for which you would like to change the range
and select any output range from the pull-down list of "Output Range".
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
321
Section 6-4
Status Areas
DA Conversion Data
DA conversion data is output from the Master Unit as shown in the following
diagram.
15 14 13 12
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Output CH0 DA conversion data
Output CH1 DA conversion data
Please indicate the two's complement as the DA conversion data for outputting of a negative voltage.
Using the NEG (two's complement conversion) is convenient for obtaining the
two's complement from the absolute value.
6-3-2
I/O Data Type and Allocation
I/O Data
Analog Output Slave Units support one type of output data.
Data I/O allocation is performed by CX-Integrator.
Output Data
Data Type
Output data (2 output
words (4 bytes))
Details
Used to allocate two words of analog output data.
Use the CX-Integrator to allocate I/O.
I/O Data Allocated in the Master Unit
The Analog Output Slave Unit has the output data allocated by default. No
setting is required. Two words (4 bytes) of output data is allocated. The data is
output as two’s complements.
15
First word
+ 0CH
First word
+ 1CH
6-4
8 7
Analog output value for Output CH0
0
Analog output value for Output CH1
Status Areas
An Analog I/O Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and
the Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and
OFF based on the threshold/monitor values set for each function in that Unit.
When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master
Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices
and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns
ON.
The Analog I/O Slave Unit's status area information can be read by using the
CX-Integrator or explicit messages.
322
Section 6-4
Status Areas
Master Unit
The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all
slaves
Transmitted
to Master Unit
Analog I/O Slave Unit
The Analog I/O Slave Unit has two status
areas: the Warning Status Area and the
Alarm Status Area.
6-4-1
Analog Input Slave Unit Status Area
Warning Status Area
The Analog Input Slave Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following
16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Network Power Voltage Drop Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Below the monitor value)
Unit Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Higher than the monitor
value)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Analog Range Exceeded Flag
OFF: Within range (Less than the set
monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (More than the set
monitor value)
Cumulated Counter Exceeded Flag
OFF: Within range (Less than the set
monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (More than the set
monitor value)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Description
----Turns ON if the network power supply
voltage is reduced below the set
monitor value.
Turns ON when the cumulative total
unit conduction time exceeds the set
monitor value.
--------Turns ON in the case that the analog
data exceeds the displayable range
or if it exceeds the set monitor value
set by the comparator function.
Turns ON if the cumulated counter
value exceeds the set monitor value.
-------------
323
Section 6-4
Status Areas
Alarm Status Area
The Analog Input Slave Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16
bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
10
11
12
Content
Reserved
EEPROM Data Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Disconnected Line Detection Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Disconnected line detected
Analog Hardware Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6-4-2
Turns ON when there is an error in
the EEPROM data.
------------Turns ON when the line is disconnected, including wiring mistakes and
connected device failure.
Turns ON when there is an error in
the analog circuits in the Unit.
-------------
Analog Output Slave Unit Status Area
Warning Status Area
The Analog Output Slave Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following
16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
324
Description
---
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Network Power Voltage Drop Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Below the monitor value)
Unit Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Higher than the monitor
value)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Error Output Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Output is incorrect
Cumulated Counter Exceeded Flag
OFF: Within range (Less than the set
monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (More than the set
monitor value)
Description
----Turns ON if the network power supply
voltage is reduced below the set
monitor value.
Turns ON when the cumulative total
unit conduction time exceeds the set
monitor value.
--------Turns ON when the value set for the
communications error output function is being output.
Turns ON if the cumulated counter
value exceeds the set monitor value.
Section 6-5
Analog Data Monitor
Bit
10
11
12
13
14
15
Alarm Status Area
Description
-------------
The Analog Output Slave Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16
bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
6-5
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Content
Reserved
EEPROM Data Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Analog Hardware Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Description
--Turns ON then there is an error in the
EEPROM data.
--------------Turns ON when there is an error in
the analog circuits in the Unit.
-------------
Analog Data Monitor
The present value, monitor of set values, and maintenance information of
analog data can be confirmed using the CX-Integrator [Monitor] screen.
325
Section 6-5
Analog Data Monitor
Right-clicking on the Analog I/O Slave Unit icon on the Network Configuration
Window when the CX-Integrator is on-line, and selecting "Monitor" enables
displaying of the [Monitor] screen.
Maintenance information is displayed in the status check box at the bottom of
the screen and if the check box is ON, it shows that an error has occurred.
Please see "11-1 CX-Integrator" on page 481 regarding details for CX-Integrator.
Monitor Window
General Tab Page
Monitor
Display
Status
Check
Boxes
Item
Comment
Last Maintenance Date
Present Unit Conduction Time
Present Network
Power Voltage
Network Power
Voltage (Peak)
Network Power
Voltage (Bottom)
Unit Maintenance
Network Power
Voltage Drop
Cumulated
Counter Over
Unit error
326
Description
Displays the text set by the Naming Unit function.
Displays the last maintenance date that was set.
Displays the total time that the Unit has been ON
(cumulative power ON time).
Displays the present network power supply voltage.
Displays the maximum and minimum network power
supply voltages up to the present time.
Selected if the total Unit conduction time has exceed
the monitor value set by the Unit Conduction Time
Monitor Function.
Selected if the network power supply voltage has
fallen below the monitor value set by the Network
Power Voltage Monitor Function.
Selected if any of the input's cumulated time counter
values has exceeded the monitor value set by the
Temperature Integration Function.
Turns ON when an error occurs in one of the units.
Section 6-5
Analog Data Monitor
Item
Buttons
Clear Button
Update Button
Save Maintenance Counter
Button
Description
Click this button to clear the displayed values.
Click this button to update the Maintenance information.
Click this button to save the Maintenance Counter
Value in the Unit. The previous value is retained
when the power supply is turned OFF and ON again.
Note Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set.
"Analog Input"/"Analog Output" tab
327
Section 6-5
Analog Data Monitor
Monitor
Display
Item
Input Range
I/O Comment
Analog Input
Last Maintenance Date
Present Value
Peak Value
Bottom Value
Top Value
Valley Value
Rate of Change
Status
check
boxes
Cumulated
Counter
Max Value
Min Value
Over Range
High Alarm Over
High Warning
Over
Description
Displays the input range setting.
Displays the text set by the Naming Connected
Device function.
Displays the last maintenance date that was set.
Displays the present analog value.
Displays the peak value, bottom value, top value,
and valley value for the analog data being held in
the unit.
Displays the rate of change in comparison to the
previous sampling cycle.
Displays the total time calculated by the cumulated count.
Displays the maximum value and minimum value
of the analog data being held in the unit.
Turns ON if the analog data exceeds the upper
limit of the displayable range.
Turns ON if the analog data exceeds the set
monitor value set by the comparator function.
Low Warning
Over
Low Alarm Over
Under Range
Buttons
328
Turns ON if the analog data is below the lower
limit of the displayable range.
Broken Wire
Turns ON when there is a disconnected line.
(However, only for the cases when the input
range is the 1 to 5 V range or the 4 to 20 mA
range)
Threshold Cumu- Turns ON when the time integrated values
increases above the monitor value set by the
lated Counter
cumulated count function.
Over
Selected when there is an overflow in the cumuCumulated
Counter Overflow lated count value.
Selected when there is an underflow in the cumuCumulated
lated count value.
Counter Underflow
Clear Buttons
Clear the displayed values
Section 6-5
Analog Data Monitor
Item
Monitor
Display
Description
Output Range
I/O Comment
Analog Output
Last Maintenance Date
Present Value
Status
check
boxes
Buttons
Note
Displays the output range setting.
Displays the text set by the Naming Connected
Device function.
Displays the last maintenance date that was set.
Displays the present network power supply voltage.
Cumulated
Displays the total time calculated by the cumuCounter
lated count.
Threshold Cumu- Turns ON when the time integrated values
increases above the monitor value set by the
lated Counter
cumulated count function.
Over
Cumulated
Selected when there is an overflow in the cumuCounter Overflow lated count value.
Selected when there is an underflow in the cumuCumulated
lated count value.
Counter Underflow
Clear Buttons
Clear the displayed values
Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set.
Error History Tab Page
Item
Content
Network Power Voltage
Unit Conduction
Time
Clear Button
Description
Displays the contents of the communications errors that have
occurred.
Displays the power supply voltage being supplied when the
error occurred.
Displays the total time that the network power supply had
been ON when the error occurred.
Clears the error history.
329
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
6-6
6-6-1
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-AD04
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage input
Model
Input signal ranges
Current input
CRT1-AD04
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Maximum signal input
±15 V
±30 mA
Input impedance
Resolution
Overall accuracy
1 MΩ min.
1/6,000 (full scale)
Approx. 250 Ω
±0.3% FS
±0.6% FS
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
25°C
–10 to 55°C
Conversion cycle
AD conversion data
1 ms / 1 point
–10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000)
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000)
AD conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges.
Isolation method
Mounting
Power supply type
Communications power current consumption
Weight
Photocoupler isolation (between input and communications lines)
No isolation between input signal wires
DIN Track mounting
Multi-power supply
110 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
175 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
153 g
Component Names and Functions
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications connector
WORD NODE ADR
23
23
X10
[0-63]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
456
X1
9 01
CRT1
CR
T1-AD04
AD04
ANALOG TERMINAL
A/D
SW
ON
78
78
456
9 01
MS NS
DIP switch for
setting the input
ranges
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
RANGE
CH0,1
INPUT
RANGE
CH2,3
RSV
LSET
Removable terminal block
for analog I/O
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
330
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Switch Settings
Setting the Node Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
5 6
7 8
9
0 1
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Setting the Input Ranges
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
Note
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Setting
Input CH0/CH1 range settings
(common)
Specification
Default setting: All pins OFF
See the next table
Input CH2/CH3 range settings
(common)
Default setting: All pins OFF
See the next table
Always OFF.
8
Range setting method
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions
may occur if it is set to ON.
OFF: Use CX-Integrator.
ON: Use DIP switch.
(1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7.
(2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this
pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
(3) The DIP switch settings are read when the power is turned ON.
■ Input CH0/CH1 range (common)
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Pin 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
331
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
■ Input CH2/CH3 range (common)
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Note
Pin 4
Pin 5
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
(1) When the DIP switch is used to set the input ranges (pin 8 ON), the input
signal ranges must always be the same for Inputs CH0 and CH1 and for
Inputs CH2 and CH3. If it is necessary to set separate input signal ranges
for Inputs 0 to 3, use the CX-Integrator rather than the DIP switch to make
the settings.
(2) Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table
above.
Internal Circuits
V+
510 kΩ
I+
250 Ω
V−
510 kΩ
AG
Analog GND
Terminal
Arrangements
Communications
Connector
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS-
Communications power supply −
Analog I/O Terminal Block
Short-circuit
For a current input, short-circuit the V+ and I+ terminals
using the enclosed jumper.
V0
+
AG
Voltage input
0V
332
I0
+
V0
−
V1
+
AG
V1
−
I2
+
V2
+
I1
+
V2
−
AG
0V
I3
+
V3
+
AG
V3
−
NC
NC
V0 to V3: Voltage input terminals
I0 to I3: Current input terminals
AG: Analog ground
NC: Not used.
Current input
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
50
66.9
Dimensions
6-6-2
3.14
(mm)
115
Two-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block)
CRT1-DA02
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
Output signal ranges
External output allowable load resistance
Resolution
Overall accuracy
25°C
–10 to 55°C
Voltage output
CRT1-DA02
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
1 kΩ min.
1/6,000 (full scale)
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
Current output
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
600 Ω max.
±0.4% FS (See note.)
±0.8% FS (See note.)
Conversion cycle
DA conversion data
2 ms/ 2 points
–10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000)
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000)
Isolation method
Photocoupler isolation (between output and communications lines)
No isolation between output signal wires.
DIN Track mounting
Multi-power supply
125 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
205 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
155 g
DA conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges.
Mounting
Power supply type
Communications power current consumption
Weight
Note
The specified accuracy does not apply below 0.2 mA when using the 0 to
20 mA range.
333
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Component Names and Functions
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications
connector
WORD NODE ADR
23
23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
456
X10
[0-63]
A/D
SW
ON
78
78
456
9 01
MS NS
DIP switch for
setting the output
ranges
X1
9 01
CRT1-DA02
CRT1
ANALOG TERMINAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
INPUT
RANGE
CH0,1
INPUT
RANGE
CH2,3
RSV
LSET
Removable terminal block
for analog I/O
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Switch Settings
Setting the Node Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
5 6
7 8
9
0 1
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Setting the Output Ranges
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
Each pin is set according to the following table.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note
334
Setting
Range settings for output
CH0
Specification
Default setting: All pins OFF
See the next table
Range settings for output
CH1
Default setting: All pins OFF
See the next table
Always OFF.
Always set this pin to OFF. Unexpected operation may result if it is turned ON.
OFF: Use CompoNet Support Software.
ON: Use DIP switch.
Range setting method
(1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7.
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
(2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the range. If this
pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
(3) The DIP switch settings are read when the power is turned ON.
■ Range for output CH0
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Pin 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
■ Range for output CH1
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Note
Pin 4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above.
Internal Circuits
I+
V+
−
Analog GND
The negative terminals for output CH0 and
output CH1 are connected internally.
Wiring
Communications
Connector
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS−
Communications power supply −
335
Section 6-6
Units with Screw Terminal Blocks
Analog I/O Terminal Block
V0
+
NC
Output 0:
Voltage output
External
device
+
−
I0
+
0
−
V1
+
I1
+
1
−
NC
Output 1:
Current output
External
device
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
V0+, V1+: Voltage output + terminal
I0+, I1+: Current output + terminal
0−, 1−: Voltage/current output − terminal
NC: Not used.
+
−
50
66.9
Dimensions
336
3.14
(mm)
115
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
6-7
6-7-1
Units with Connectors
Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-VAD04S
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage input
Model
Input signal ranges
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
Current input
CRT1-VAD04S
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Maximum signal input
±15 V
±30 mA
Input impedance
Resolution
Overall accuracy
1 MΩ min.
1/6,000 (full scale)
Approx. 250 Ω
±0.3% FS
±0.6% FS
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
25°C
–10 to 55°C
Conversion cycle
AD conversion data
1 ms/ 1 point
–10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000)
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000)
AD conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges.
Isolation method
Mounting
Power supply type
Communications power current consumption
Sensor power supply current (See note.)
Weight
Note
Photocoupler isolation (between input and communications lines)
No isolation between input signal wires
DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
115 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
Less than 200 mA (for each CH)
85 g max.
In order to provide power to the sensor through the I/O connector, a 24-VDC
power supply must be connected to the sensor power supply connector.
337
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Communications
connector
Sensor power
supply mode
settings switch
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted
side
Input range
switch
Voltage/Current
input mode
settings switch
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
Sensor power supply
connector
I/O connector (e-CON
connector)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Switch
Setting the Node Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
7 8
90 1
10s digit of node address
90 1
4 5 6
(Mounted side)
1s digit of node address
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
2 3
(Front side)
Input range switch
(Front side)
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
338
Pin No.
Setting
1
2
3
Input CH0/CH1 range settings (common)
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Pin No.
4
5
6
7
8
Note
Setting
Input CH2/CH3 range settings (common)
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
Always OFF.
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may
occur if it is set to ON.
OFF: Use CX-Integrator.
ON: Use DIP switch.
Range setting method
(1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7.
(2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this
pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
(3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
■ Input CH0/CH1 range (common)
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Pin 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
■ Input CH2/CH3 range (common)
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Note
Pin 4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
(1) When the DIP switch is used to set the input ranges (pin 8 ON), the input
signal ranges must always be the same for Inputs CH0 and CH1 and for
Inputs CH2 and CH3. If it is necessary to set separate input signal ranges
for Inputs CH0 to CH3, use the CX-Integrator rather than the DIP switch
to make the settings.
(2) Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table
above.
Sensor Power Supply
Mode Settings Switch
1
2
3
4
ON
339
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Voltage/Current Input
Mode Settings Switch
2
1
Setting
Input CH0 sensor power
supply mode toggle
Input CH1 sensor power
supply mode toggle
Input CH2 sensor power
supply mode toggle
Input CH3 sensor power
supply mode toggle
3
Specification
OFF: Power supply for 2-wire or 4-wire sensor
ON: Power supply for 3-wire sensor
(Default setting is OFF)
4
ON
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Setting
Input CH0 voltage/current
input mode toggle
Input CH1 voltage/current
input mode toggle
Input CH2 voltage/current
input mode toggle
Input CH3 voltage/current
input mode toggle
Specification
OFF: Voltage input
ON: Current input
(Default setting is OFF)
Terminal
Arrangements
Communications
Connector
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS−
Communications power supply −
I/O Connector
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
Note
340
N: 0 to 3
CH0
4
3
2
1
CH1
4
3
2
1
CH2
4
3
2
1
CH3
4
3
2
1
Signal name
24VDC (Sensor power supply+)
n – (Voltage/current input–)
0V (Sensor power supply–)
n + (Voltage/current input+)
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Sensor Power Supply
Connector
(Front side)
+
−
Pin code
Signal name
+
24VDC
–
0V
Internal Circuits
4
510kΩ
Voltage/Current
input mode
settings switch
510kΩ
250Ω
2
n+
n−
Sensor power
supply mode
settings switch
3
0V
Analog GND
1
24-VDC
Sensor power supply
24-VDC (Sensor connector
power supply)*
*Supplied from external
Wiring and Switch
Settings
4-wire sensor
4
3
2
1
I/O connector
24-VDC (Sensor power supply+)
n − (Voltage/current input−)
0V (Sensor power supply−)
n + (Voltage/current input+)
Input type
Voltage input
Current input
Sensor power supply mode
Voltage/Current input mode
settings switch
settings switch
OFF (Power supply for 2-wire or OFF (Voltage input)
4-wire sensor)
ON (Power supply for 2-wire or ON (Current input)
4-wire sensor)
341
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
3-wire sensor
4
3
2
1
I/O connector
24-VDC (Sensor power supply+)
n − (Voltage/current input−)
/0V (Sensor power supply−)
n + (Voltage/current input+)
Input type
Voltage input
Current input
Sensor power supply mode
settings switch
OFF (Power supply for 3-wire
sensor)
ON (Power supply for 3-wire
sensor)
Voltage/Current input mode
settings switch
OFF (Voltage input)
ON (Current input)
2-wire sensor
4
3
2
1
I/O connector
Short
24-VDC (Sensor power supply+)
n + (Voltage/current input+)
Or
4
3
2
1
I/O connector
Short
n − (Voltage/current input−)
0V (Sensor power supply−)
Note
Wiring is different depending on the connected sensor.
Input type
Current input
342
Sensor power supply mode
Voltage/Current input mode
settings switch
settings switch
OFF (Power supply for 2-wire or ON (Current input)
4-wire sensor)
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Dimensions
85.7
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open
Type Connector Is
Mounted
60
23
5.3
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
6.4
The numbers inside the
parentheses are reference
(mm)
dimensions.
66.2
Communications
Connector Dimensions
Including the Connector
and Cable
25.4
99.9
■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
343
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
37
136.5
■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
(mm)
25.4
116
■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
344
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
6-7-2
Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors)
CRT1-VDA02S
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage Output
Model
Output signal ranges
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
External output allowable load resistance
Resolution
Overall accuracy
25°C
–10 to 55°C
Current Output
CRT1-VDA02S
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
1 kΩ min.
1/6,000 (full scale)
600 Ω max.
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
±0.4% FS (See note.)
±0.8% FS (See note.)
Conversion cycle
DA conversion data
2 ms/ 2 points
–10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000)
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000)
Isolation method
Photocoupler isolation (between output and communications lines)
No isolation between output signal wires.
DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
105 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
170 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
85 g max.
DA conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges.
Mounting
Power supply type
Communications power current consumption
Weight
Note
The specified accuracy does not apply below 0.2 mA when using the 0 to
20 mA range.
Component Names and Functions
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Communications
connector
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted
side
Output range
switch
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O connector (e-CON
connector)
345
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Switch
Setting the Node Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
7 8
90 1
10s digit of node address
90 1
4 5 6
(Mounted side)
1s digit of node address
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
2 3
(Front side)
Output range switch
(Front side)
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note
Setting
Range settings for output
CH0
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
Range settings for output
CH1
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
Always OFF.
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may
occur if it is set to ON.
OFF: Use CX-Integrator.
ON: Use DIP switch.
Range setting method
(1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7.
(2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this
pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
(3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
346
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
■ Range for output CH0
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Pin 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
■ During current output of output 1
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Note
Pin 4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above.
Terminal
Arrangements
Communications
Connector
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS−
Communications power supply −
I/O Connector
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
CH0
4
3
2
1
CH1
4
3
2
1
Signal name
N.C.
n – (Voltage/current output–)
In + (Current output+)
Vn + (Voltage output+)
n: 0 or 1
347
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
3
4
2
In+
Vn+
n−
Analog GND
Wiring
Wiring for Voltage Output
4
3
2
1
I/O connector
External device
Wiring for Current Output
4
3
2
1
I/O connector
External device
Dimensions
85.7
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open
Type Connector Is
Mounted
23
60
66.2
348
5.3
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
6.4
The numbers inside the
parentheses are reference
dimensions.
(mm)
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Communications
Connector Dimensions
Including the Connector
and Cable
25.4
99.9
■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
37
136.5
■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
(mm)
349
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
25.4
116
■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
6-7-3
Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors)
CRT1-VAD04ML
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage input
Model
Input signal ranges
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
Current input
CRT1-VAD04ML
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Maximum signal input
±15 V
±30 mA
Input impedance
Resolution
Overall accuracy
1 MΩ min.
1/6,000 (full scale)
Approx. 250 Ω
±0.3% FS
±0.6% FS
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
25°C
–10 to 55°C
Conversion cycle
AD conversion data
1 ms/ 1 point
–10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000)
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000)
AD conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges.
Isolation method
Mounting
Power supply type
Communications power current consumption
Weight
350
Photocoupler isolation (between input and communications lines)
No isolation between input signal wires
DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
115 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
70 g max.
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Communications
connector
Voltage/Current
input mode
settings switch
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
Input range
switch
I/O connector
(MIL connector)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Switch
Setting the Node Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
(Mounted side)
90 1
10s digit of node address
90 1
4 5 6
7 8
1s digit of node address
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
2 3
(Front side)
Input range switch
(Front side)
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
1
2
3
Setting
Input CH0/CH1 range settings (common)
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
351
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Pin No.
4
5
6
7
8
Note
Setting
Input CH2/CH3 range settings (common)
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
Always OFF.
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may
occur if it is set to ON.
OFF: Use CX-Integrator.
ON: Use DIP switch.
Range setting method
(1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7.
(2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this
pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
(3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
■ Input CH0/CH1 range (common)
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Pin 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
■ Input CH2/CH3 range (common)
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Note
Pin 4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
(1) When the DIP switch is used to set the input ranges (pin 8 ON), the input
signal ranges must always be the same for Inputs CH0 and CH1 and for
Inputs CH2 and CH3. If it is necessary to set separate input signal ranges
for Inputs CH0 to CH3, use the CX-Integrator rather than the DIP switch
to make the settings.
(2) Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table
above.
Voltage/Current Input
Mode Settings Switch
ON
1
2
3
4
352
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Pin No.
1
Setting
Input CH0 voltage/current
input mode toggle
2
Input CH1 voltage/current
input mode toggle
Input CH2 voltage/current
input mode toggle
Input CH3 voltage/current
input mode toggle
3
4
Specification
OFF: Voltage input
ON: Current input
(Default setting is OFF)
Terminal
Arrangements
Communications
Connector
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS−
Communications power supply −
I/O Connector
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
Note
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Signal name
0 + (Voltage/current input+)
RSV
0 – (Voltage/current input–)
AG (Analog GND)
2 + (Voltage/current input+)
RSV
2 – (Voltage/current input–)
AG (Analog GND)
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
Signal name
1 + (Voltage/current input+)
RSV
1 – (Voltage/current input–)
AG (Analog GND)
3 + (Voltage/current input+)
RSV
3 – (Voltage/current input–)
AG (Analog GND)
Do not connect anything to the RSV terminal.
353
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Internal Circuits
n+
510kΩ
Voltage/Current input
mode settings switch
510kΩ
250Ω
n−
Analog GND
Wiring and Switch
Settings
n+
n + (Voltage/current input+)
RSV
n − (Voltage/current input−)
n−
AG
Input type
Voltage input
Current input
Voltage/Current input mode
settings switch
OFF (Voltage input)
ON (Current input)
Dimensions
85.7
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open
Type Connector Is
Mounted
15
60
78.73
354
5.3
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
6.4
The numbers inside the
parentheses are reference
dimensions.
(mm)
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Communications
Connector Dimensions
Including the Connector
and Cable
25.4
99.9
■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
37
136.5
■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
(mm)
355
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
25.4
116
■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
6-7-4
Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors)
CRT1-VDA02ML
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage Output
Model
Output signal ranges
External output allowable load resistance
Resolution
Overall accuracy
25°C
–10 to 55°C
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
1 kΩ min.
1/6,000 (full scale)
±0.4% FS
±0.8% FS
Current Output
CRT1-VDA02ML
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
600 Ω max.
±0.4% FS (See note.)
±0.8% FS (See note.)
Conversion cycle
DA conversion data
2 ms/ 2 points
–10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000)
Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000)
Isolation method
Photocoupler isolation (between output and communications lines)
No isolation between output signal wires.
DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket
Multi-power supply
105 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
170 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
75 g max.
DA conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges.
Mounting
Power supply type
Communications power current consumption
Weight
Note
356
The specified accuracy does not apply below 0.2 mA when using the 0 to
20 mA range.
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Component Names and Functions
Top
Front
Bottom
(Mounted side)
Communications
connector
output range
switch
Node address switches:
×10 and ×1 from mounted side
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O connector
(MIL connector)
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Switch
Setting the Node Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
(Mounted side)
90 1
10s digit of node address
90 1
4 5 6
7 8
1s digit of node address
2 3
4 5 6
7 8
2 3
(Front side)
Output range switch
(Front side)
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin No.
1
2
3
Setting
Range settings for output
CH0
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
357
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Pin No.
4
5
6
7
8
Note
Setting
Range settings for output
CH1
Specification
See the next table
Default setting: All pins OFF
Always OFF.
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may
occur if it is set to ON.
OFF: Use CX-Integrator.
ON: Use DIP switch.
Range setting method
(1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7.
(2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this
pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
(3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON.
■ Range for output CH0
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Pin 1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
■ Range for output CH1
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Note
Pin 4
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Pin 6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above.
Terminal Arrangements
Communications
Connector
358
Pin 5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS−
Communications power supply −
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
I/O Connector
Pin No.
1
3
5
7
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Signal name
V0 + (Voltage output+)
I0 + (Current output+)
0 – (Voltage/current output–)
N.C.
N.C.
Pin No.
2
4
6
8
10
Signal name
V1 + (Voltage output+)
I1 + (Current output+)
1 – (Voltage/current output–)
N.C.
N.C.
Internal Circuits
In+
Vn+
n−
Analog GND
Wiring
Wiring for Voltage Output
Vn+
External device
In+
nN.C.
N.C.
Wiring for Current Output
Vn+
In+
External device
n−
N.C.
N.C.
359
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
Dimensions
85.7
92.8
When a DCN4-TB4 Open
Type Connector Is
Mounted
60
15
78.73
Communications
Connector Dimensions
Including the Connector
and Cable
25.4
99.9
■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
360
5.3
90
(101.7)
96.7
(90)
(102)
6.4
The numbers inside the
parentheses are reference
(mm)
dimensions.
Section 6-7
Units with Connectors
37
136.5
■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted
(mm)
■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted
10
48
(mm)
25.4
116
■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted
(mm)
361
Units with Connectors
362
Section 6-7
SECTION 7
Temperature Input Units
This section describes the Temperature Input Units.
7-1
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
7-1-1
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
7-1-2
List of Data Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
364
7-1-3
Temperature Input Unit Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
Overview of Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
7-2-1
Math Operations and Processing Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
7-2-2
I/O Data Type and Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
7-3
Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
376
7-4
Monitoring Temperature Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
7-2
7-5
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
7-5-1
382
Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
363
Section 7-1
Temperature Input Units
7-1
7-1-1
Temperature Input Units
Temperature Input Units
A Temperature Input Unit supports a variety of functions, such as scaling and
peak/bottom hold functions. They can internally perform math operations on
temperature input values, which previously required ladder programming at a
host PLC.
Temperature data can be obtained from math operations and allocated as I/O
in combination with Temperature Status Flags or other status information. The
CX-Integrator can be used to easily allocate and monitor status information,
set Temperature Input Unit functions, and monitor data.
7-1-2
List of Data Processing Functions
The following tables list the data processing functions that can be used with
Temperature Input Units. Refer to 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions for
details on functions and setting methods.
Function
Moving average
Details
Calculates the average of the past eight temperature
input values, and produces a stable input value even
when the input value is unsteady.
Scaling
Performs scaling.
Scaling allows conversion of temperature input values
into values using the industry unit required by the user. It
reduces the number of operations requiring ladder programming in the master PLC Unit. Scaling also supports
an offset function for compensating for mounting errors in
sensors and other devices.
Peak/bottom hold
Holds the maximum and minimum temperature input values.
Top/valley hold
Holds the top and valley temperature input values.
Rate of change
Calculates the rate of change for temperature input values for each sampling period.
Comparator
Temperature input value or data after calculation (peak
value, bottom value, top value, valley value, rate of
change) are compared to 4 types of set values: Alarm Trip
Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning
Trip Point Low (L), and Alarm Trip Point Low (LL) and the
results are provided using the Temperature Data Status
Flag.
Input Error Detection Disable Can be used to disable detection of input errors (including
Function
disconnection). This function is used when there are
unused inputs.
Off-wire detection
Detects disconnections of analog inputs.
User adjustment
Can be used to adjust the input value when an offset
occurs due to hardware errors.
Last maintenance date
Records the date of the last maintenance in the Unit.
Input temperature variation
Makes a relative comparison of two inputs and detects a
detection function
temperature difference between two inputs.
Compiles the total heat exposure of a device or sensor by
ReplaceTemperature
ment moni- integration func- multiplying the temperature and measurement time.
toring
tion
functions
Top/Valley count Counts the number of heating cycles handled by a device
function
or application that has fixed cycles of temperature
changes.
Temperature
Measures how long the system is at a user-set temperaRange Count
ture or within a user-set temperature range.
364
Default
Moving average disabled.
Disabled
0 to 28,000
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
2008/10/1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Temperature Input Units
Section 7-1
Note
Data will be undefined if default values are set using the CX-Integrator or
other Support Software.
7-1-3
Temperature Input Unit Display Modes
Temperature Input Units have two Display Modes: normal and 1/100 display.
Normal Display Mode
(Default Setting)
The input temperature data is converted to 4-digit hexadecimal digital data
and transmitted to the Master Unit. If the conversion data is negative, the negative value is expressed as the two's complement.
Four words are allocated in the Master Unit for the four inputs, as shown in the
following diagram. If the data for the input type contains a digit below the decimal place, the value sent to the master will be 10 times the actual value. (The
decimal point is omitted.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
First word + 0CH
Input CH0 Temperature conversion data
First word + 1CH
Input CH1 Temperature conversion data
First word + 2CH
Input CH2 Temperature conversion data
First word + 3CH
Input CH3 Temperature conversion data
2
1
0
• Example 1: R type thermocouple at 1,000°C
1,000 converted to hexadecimal → 03E8 hex
• Example 2: U type thermocouple at 350.0°C
350 × 10 = 3,500 converted to hexadecimal → 0DAC hex
1/100 Display Mode
The input temperature data for all input types is transmitted to the Master as
data with precision to 0.01 digits. The temperature data is multiplied by 100
and converted to 8-digit hexadecimal digital data (four long values).
If the conversion data is negative, the negative value is expressed as the two’s
complement.
365
Section 7-1
Temperature Input Units
Eight words are allocated in the Master Unit for the four inputs, as shown in
the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
First word + 0CH
Input CH0 Temperature conversion data (rightmost)
First word + 1CH
Input CH0 Temperature conversion data (leftmost)
First word + 2CH
Input CH1 Temperature conversion data (rightmost)
First word + 3CH
Input CH1 Temperature conversion data (leftmost)
First word + 4CH
Input CH2 Temperature conversion data (rightmost)
First word + 5CH
Input CH2 Temperature conversion data (leftmost)
First word + 6CH
Input CH3 Temperature conversion data (rightmost)
First word + 7CH
Input CH3 Temperature conversion data (leftmost)
• Example 1: 850.00°C
850 × 100 = 85,000 converted to hexadecimal → 0001 4C08 hex
Rightmost data = 4C08 hex; Leftmost data = 0001 hex
• Example 2: −200.00°C
−200 × 100 = −20,000 converted to hexadecimal → FFFF B1E0 hex
Rightmost data = B1E0 hex; Leftmost data = FFFF hex
Setting the 1/100 Display Mode
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. With the CX-Integrator, double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit
to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and
select Parameter - Edit to open the Configuration Window.
3. Click the General Tab and select Temperature Data1 (1/100) in the Default
Connection Path (In) Field.
366
Overview of Temperature Input Units
Section 7-2
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Note
1. The 1/100 Display Mode must be enabled by setting the connection path
with the CX-Integrator.
If the Normal Display Mode is selected for the I/O data from the CX-Integrator, the temperature data will change to 0.
2. In 1/100 Display Mode, the temperature data will be converted to two decimal places even though the actual resolution is not 0.01°C (or °F). Consequently, the display for temperatures in 0.1 °C/°F or 0.01 °C/°F ranges may
jump back and forth between values. Treat any values displayed in Normal
Display Mode beyond the specified input resolution as reference data.
7-2
7-2-1
Overview of Temperature Input Units
Math Operations and Processing Input Data
Performing Math Operations on Input Data
The following math operations can be performed on external temperature
input values.
• Scaling to user-specified industrial units
• Moving average processing
Processed data can be allocated as I/O in the Master Unit.
The following math operations can be performed on temperature input values
that have undergone the above processing.
• Peak/hold operation
• Top/valley operation
• Rate of change calculations
• Cumulative operation
The values after processing are called peak value, bottom value, top value,
valley value, rate of change, and cumulated value.
Math operations are performed according to the following flowchart.
367
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
Input
A
Moving
average
Scaling
Analog or
Temp. input
value 1
A
Peak/Bottom
Top/Valley
Peak
value 2
Top
value 4
Bottom
value 3
Valley
value 5
Rate of change
Rate of change
value 6
Cumulated
value
Cumulated
value
Top/Valley detection timing
(allocated I/O data)
Hold Flag
Data Flow
Selection
Conversion
processing
Allocated
I/O data
Processing
results
Selecting Allocation Data
After performing math operations, select the data to be allocated to I/O in the
Master Unit from the following six values: temperature input value, peak value,
bottom value, top value, valley value, and rate of change. The selected data
will be Temperature Data 1, and can be allocated in the Master Unit alone or
in combination with Status Flags. The data is selected using the CX-Integrator
or explicit messages.
Comparison with four alarm set values, HH, H, L, and LL can be performed for
Temperature Data 1. This is called the comparator function.
Flow of Data in
Temperature Input Units
368
In a Temperature Input Unit, it is possible to switch the display mode of the
data selected from the six values. The Display Mode can be the Normal Display Mode or the 1/100 Display Mode. The data can be allocated in either
mode for Temperature Data 1.
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
Moving average and scaling
enabled/disabled
Six values
Temperature input
value
1/100 Display Mode (2 words/input)
Peak value
Temperature Data 1
(allocated I/O data)
Bottom value
Display mode
(Set from CX-Integrator.)
Top value
Normal Display Mode (1 word/input)
Temperature Data 1
(allocated I/O data)
Data can be
allocated for I/O
as Temperature
Data 1 in either
mode.
Valley value
Rate of change
Comparator
The Comparator can be used for the
value allocated as Temperature Data 1.
Temperature Data Status Flag
(allocated I/O data)
Note
By default, the temperature input value will be allocated as I/O.
Math processing
Input value
Other processing
results
Input value
Input 2
Math processing
Input 3
Math processing
Other processing
results
Input value
7-2-2
Other processing
results
Selected
processing
Input 1
Other processing
results
Temperature Data 1
Selected
processing
Math processing
Temperature Data 1
Temperature Data 1
Selected
processing
Input value
Input 0
Selected
processing
Temperature Data 1 can be set separately for each input, as shown in the following diagram.
Temperature Data 1
I/O Data Type and Allocation
A Temperature Input Unit support the following four types of input data and
one type of output data. Required data can be allocated to I/O and used. Data
is allocated using the CX-Integrator.
369
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
Input Data
Input data
Description
Temperature Data 1
• Allocated to monitor temperature data.
Normal Display: 4 input words • Select one of the following values: temperature
input value, peak value, bottom value, top value,
(8 bytes)
valley value, or rate of change. (The temperature
1/100 Display: 8 input words
input value is allocated by default.)
(16 bytes)
Note The comparator function can be used with the
value allocated as Temperature Data 1.
Top/Valley Detection Timing
Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are allocated to
Flags (1 input word (2 bytes)) one input word. These flags are allocated together
with the top/valley value and used to time the reading
of value held as the top or valley value.
Temperature Data Status
These words contain the bits for the Comparator
Flag (2 input words (4 bytes)) Result Flag, Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag, and
Disconnected Line Detection Flag. The function of
each bit is as follows:
• Comparator Result Flags:
Allow control of the judgement results even if temperature input value is not allocated.
• Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags:
These flags are allocated together with the top/valley value and used to time the reading of value held
as the top or valley value.
• Off-wire Detection Flags:
Disconnections can be detected even when the temperature input value is not allocated.
Temperature Data 1 + Top/
These words contain Temperature Data 1 followed by
Valley Detection Timing Flags the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags.
Normal Display: 5 input words
(10 bytes)
1/100 Display: 9 input words
(18 bytes)
Output Data
Output data
Hold Flags
1 output word (2 bytes)
Description
These flags are used with the hold functions (peak,
bottom, top, and valley) to control the execution timing of hold functions from the Master Unit.
Note Data can be allocated using other data combinations if an OMRON CS/CJseries Master Unit is used. The settings are made in the Master Unit.
Selecting
Temperature Data
The data can be selected from six calculated values to allocate as Temperature Data 1. Select one of the following: temperature input value, peak value,
bottom value, top value, valley value, or rate of change. The selected data is
allocated in the Master Unit alone or in combination with Status Flags.
Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the table for the input where the temperature data is to be selected
and select the data to allocated in the Allocate Temperature Data 1 Field.
370
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Selecting I/O Data for
Allocation
Use one of the following methods to select data for allocation and then perform remote I/O communications.
1,2,3...
1. Allocating only the temperature input values (default I/O data)
2. Allocating selected I/O data patterns (fixed I/O data combinations)
■
Allocating Only the Temperature Input Values
When using the Temperature Input Unit's default settings, only the temperature input values are selected as I/O data and allocated in the four words
(eight bytes) of the Master Unit's Input Area, as shown in the following diagram.
15
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
0
Temperature Input Value for Input CH0
Temperature Input Value for Input CH1
Temperature Input Value for Input CH2
Temperature Input Value for Input CH3
If the 1/100 Display Mode is set for the temperature input value with the CXIntegrator, eight words (sixteen bytes) will be allocated in the Master's Input
Area, as shown in the following diagram.
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
First word + 4CH
First word + 5CH
First word + 6CH
First word + 7CH
15
0
Temperature Input Value for Input CH0, Lower Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH0, Upper Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH1, Lower Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH1, Upper Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH2, Lower Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH2, Upper Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH3, Lower Word
Temperature Input Value for Input CH3, Upper Word
371
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
■
Allocating Selected I/O Data Patterns
Data such as Status Flags can be allocated together with Temperature Data 1
as I/O in the following combinations. The data to be combined can be selected
from the CX-Integrator.
Example: Allocating Temperature Data 1 + Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags
in the Master Unit using normal display.
15
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
First word + 4CH
■
1,2,3...
8 7
0
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3
Top Detection Timing Flag
Valley Detection Timing Flag
Using the CX-Integrator
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the General Tab and select an I/O data pattern in the Default Connection Path (In) Field. The following example shows selecting the temperature data and status flags.
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
I/O Data
Temperature Data 1
Temperature Data 1 is used to monitor the temperature input value. The temperature input value is allocated as the default setting, but any of the following
data can be allocated: temperature input value, peak value, bottom value, top
value, valley value, or rate of change.
Note The comparator function can be used for the data allocated as Temperature
Data 1.
372
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
The following tables show the data format used for allocating data in the Master Unit.
Data is allocated as two's complements.
Normal Display (4 Words (8 Bytes))
15
0
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3
1/100 Display Mode (8 Words (16 Bytes))
15
First word + 0CH
First word + 1CH
First word + 2CH
First word + 3CH
First word + 4CH
First word + 5CH
First word + 6CH
First word + 7CH
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flags
0
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Lower Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Upper Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Lower Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Upper Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Lower Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Upper Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Lower Word
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Upper Word
These flags turn ON for the one-shot time when a top or valley is detected for
the top/valley hold function. These flags are allocated when detecting the time
to read the values held as the top or valley values at the Master Unit. The following data format is used when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit
(1 word (2 bytes)).
15
8
7
+1
+0
+1
Bit 7
0
0
Bit 6
0
0
0
+0
Bit 5
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte
T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte
Each bit is described in the following table.
+0
Byte
Abbreviation
V_STx
Name
Valley Detection
Timing Flag
+1
T_STx
Top Detection
Timing Flag
Description
Turns ON when a valley is
detected by the top/valley hold
function and then turns OFF after
the one-shot time has elapsed.
Turns ON when a top is detected
by the top/valley hold function and
then turns OFF after the one-shot
time has elapsed.
Note The one-shot time can be changed. For details, refer to 11-6-4 Top/Valley
Hold.
Temperature Data Status
Flag
The Temperature Status Flags include the Comparator Result Flag, the Top/
Valley Detection Timing Flags, and the Disconnected Line Detection Flags.
These flags are allocated for detection and monitoring. The data format used
for each byte when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit is shown
below (2 words (4 bytes)).
373
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
15
8
7
0
+1
+3
+0
+2
+0
Bit 7
BW0
Bit 6
Bit 5
T_ST0 V_ST0
Bit 4
HH0
Bit 3
H0
Bit 2
PS0
Bit 1
L0
Bit 0
LL0
+1
BW1
T_ST1 V_ST1
HH1
H1
PS1
L1
LL1
+2
BW2
T_ST2 V_ST2
HH2
H2
PS2
L2
LL2
+3
BW3
T_ST3 V_ST3
HH3
H3
PS3
L3
LL3
Input
CH0
Input
CH1
Input
CH2
Input
CH3
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
Lower
byte
Upper
byte
Each bit is described in the following table.
Bit
0
Temperature Data 1 + Top/
Valley Detection Timing
Flags
374
AbbreviName
ation
LLx
Compara- Low Low Limit
tor result Alarm Flag
1
Lx
2
PSx
3
Hx
4
HHx
5
V_STx
6
T_STx
7
BWx
Description
Turns ON when the value of
data allocated in Temperature
Data 1 drops below the Low
Low Limit alarm setting.
Low Limit Alarm Turns ON when the value of
Flag
data allocated in Temperature
Data 1 drops below the Low
Limit alarm setting.
Normal Flag
Turns ON when none of the
(pass signal)
alarms (High High Limit, High
Limit, Low Low Limit, and Low
Limit) have been output.
High Limit
Turns ON when the value of
Alarm Flag
data allocated in Temperature
Data 1 exceeds the High Limit
alarm setting.
High High Limit Turns ON when the value of
Alarm Flag
data allocated in Temperature
Data 1 exceeds the High High
Limit alarm setting.
Valley DetecTurns ON when a valley is
Top/Valley Detec- tion Timing Flag detected by the top/valley hold
function and then turns OFF
tion
after the one-shot time has
Timing
elapsed.
Flag
Top Detection- Turns ON when a top is
Timing Flag
detected by the top/valley hold
function and then turns OFF
after the one-shot time has
elapsed.
Off-wire Detection Flag
Turns ON when a disconnection
is detected.
This data pattern consists of Temperature Data 1 followed by the Top/Valley
Detection Timing Flags. It is allocated in the Master Unit using the following
data format.
Section 7-2
Overview of Temperature Input Units
Normal Display (5 Words (10 Bytes))
15
8
7
+1
+3
+5
+7
+9
Bit 7
Bit 6
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
0
+0
+2
+4
+6
+8
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0
Bit 0
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1
0
0
0
0
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3
Lower byte
Upper byte
0
0
V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte
0
0
T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte
1/100 Display Mode (9 Words (18 Bytes))
15
8
+1
+3
+5
+7
+9
+11
+13
+15
+17
Bit 7
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
0
0
7
0
+0
+2
+4
+6
+8
+10
+12
+14
+16
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Lower Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Upper Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Lower Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Upper Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Lower Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Upper Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Lower Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Upper Word
Lower byte
Upper byte
0
0
0
V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte
0
0
0
T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte
375
Section 7-3
Status Areas
Hold Flags (Output)
The Hold Flags are used with the peak/bottom hold and top/valley hold functions. They are used to control the hold execution timing from the Master Unit.
They are allocated in the Master Unit using the following data format (1 word
(2 bytes)).
15
8
7
0
+1
Bit 7
0
0
+0
+1
Bit 6
0
0
+0
Bit 5
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
Bit 3
HD3
0
Bit 2
HD2
0
Bit 1
HD1
0
Bit 0
HD0
0
Lower byte
Upper byte
Each bit is described in the following table.
Bit
0
Note
7-3
Abbreviation
Name
HD0
Hold Flag for
Input 0
1
HD1
Hold Flag for
Input 1
2
HD2
Hold Flag for
Input 2
3
HD3
Hold Flag for
Input 3
Description
The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 0 while this flag is ON.
The hold function stops and the last
value is held when the flag goes OFF.
The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 1 while this flag is ON.
The hold function stops and the last
value is held when the flag goes OFF.
The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 2 while this flag is ON.
The hold function stops and the last
value is held when the flag goes OFF.
The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 3 while this flag is ON.
The hold function stops and the last
value is held when the flag goes OFF.
A transmission delay may occur between when the Master Unit's power is
turned ON and the status of the Hold Flag is transferred to the Temperature
Input Unit.
Status Areas
A Temperature Input Unit has two status areas. The flags are turned ON and
OFF based on the threshold values set by the user for each function in that
Unit.
When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master
Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices
and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns
ON.
The Temperature Input Unit's status area information can be read by using the
CX-Integrator or explicit messages.
376
Section 7-3
Status Areas
Master Unit
The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR
of all slaves
Transmitted to Master Unit
Temperature Input Unit
The Status Area in the Temperature Input
Unit has a Warning Status Area and an
Alarm Status Area.
Warning Status Area
The Temperature Input Unit's Warning Status Area contains the following 16
bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Content
Reserved.
Reserved.
Network Power Voltage Drop Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Voltage dropped below
threshold.)
Unit Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Temperature Input Warning Flag
OFF: Within range (below set monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above
set monitor value)
Cumulative Counter Exceeded Flag
OFF: Within range (below set monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above
set monitor value)
Input Temperature Variation Detection Threshold Exceeded Flag
OFF: Within range (below set monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above
set monitor value)
Set Temperature Range Total Time
Exceeded Flag
OFF: Within range (below set monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above
set monitor value)
Description
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Turns ON when the Network Power
Voltage drops below the voltage set as
the threshold for monitoring.
Turns ON when the Total Unit Conduction Time exceeds the value set as the
threshold for monitoring.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Turns ON when the temperature data
exceeds the displayable range or the
monitor value set for the comparator
function.
Turns ON when the cumulative value
exceeds the set monitor value.
Turns ON when the difference between
input temperatures exceed the set monitor value.
Turns ON when time in the set temperature range exceeds the set monitor
value.
377
Section 7-4
Monitoring Temperature Data
Bit
12
13
14
15
Alarm Status Area
Description
Turns ON when the number of tops or
valleys exceeds the set monitor value.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
The Temperature Input Unit's Alarm Status Area contains the following 16
bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Content
Reserved.
EEPROM Data Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved.
Description
Cannot be used.
Turns ON when there is an error with
data in the EEPROM.
Cannot be used.
10
11
12
13
14
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Disconnected Line Detection Flag
OFF: Normal or input error detection is disabled
ON: Disconnected line detected or
cold junction compensator error
occurred
Cold Junction Compensator Offwire Flag (CRT1-TS04T only)
OFF: Normal
ON: Disconnected line detected
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
15
Reserved.
Cannot be used.
9
7-4
Content
Number of Top/Valley Exceeded Set
Value Flag
OFF: Within range (below set monitor value)
ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above
set monitor value)
Reserved.
Reserved.
Reserved.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Cannot be used.
Turns ON when the line is disconnected
or when there is a Cold Junction Compensator Error.
Turns ON when the cold junction compensator is disconnected.
Monitoring Temperature Data
The Monitor Window of the CX-Integrators can be used to monitor the set values and current status of temperature data, and to check Unit maintenance
information.
With the CX-Integrator connected online, right-click a Temperature Input Unit
icon in the Network Configuration Window and select Monitor from the popup menu to display the Monitor Window. The check boxes (flags) shown in the
following table will be selected if the corresponding error had occurred.
Refer to 11-1 CX-Integrator on page 481 for details on the CX-Integrator.
378
Section 7-4
Monitoring Temperature Data
Monitor Window
General Tab Page
Monitor
Display
Status
Check
Boxes
Item
Comment
Last Maintenance Date
Present Unit Conduction Time
Present Network
Power Voltage
Network Power
Voltage (Peak)
Network Power
Voltage (Bottom)
Unit Maintenance
Network Power
Voltage Drop
Cumulated
Counter Over
Buttons
Note
Description
Displays the text set as the Unit comment.
Displays the last maintenance date that was set.
Displays the total time that the Unit has been ON
(cumulative power ON time).
Displays the present network power supply voltage.
Displays the maximum and minimum network power
supply voltages up to the present time.
Selected if the total Unit conduction time has exceed
the monitor value set by the Unit Conduction Time
Monitor Function.
Selected if the network power supply voltage has
fallen below the monitor value set by the Network
Power Voltage Monitor Function.
Selected if any of the input's cumulative time counter
values has exceeded the monitor value set by the
Temperature Integration Function.
Selected if a Unit Error has occurred in the Unit
memory.
Selected if a Temperature Resistance Sensor Disconnection error has occurred.
EEPROM Data
Error
Temperature
Resistance Sensor Disconnected
Clear Button
Click this button to clear the displayed values.
Update Button
Click this button to update the Maintenance information.
Click this button to save the Maintenance Counter
Save MainteValue in the Unit. The previous value is retained
nance Counter
when the power supply is turned OFF and ON again.
Button
Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set.
379
Section 7-4
Monitoring Temperature Data
Temperature Input Tab Page
Monitor
Display
Item
Input Type
Display Mode
I/O Comment
Last Maintenance Date
Present Value
Peak Value
Bottom Value
Top Value
Valley Value
Rate of Change
Temperature
Total Time
Top/Valley Count
Cumulative
Counter
Max Value
Min Value
380
Description
Displays the present input sensor type.
Indicates the number of digits displayed.
0000: No decimal point
0000.0: One digit below the decimal point
0000.0: Two digits below the decimal point
Displays the text set as the connected device
comment.
Displays the last maintenance date that was set.
Displays the present temperature input value.
Display the peak value, bottom value, top value,
and valley value of the temperature data retained
by the Unit.
Displays the rate of change in comparison to the
previous sampling cycle.
Displays the total time the temperature has been
within the set temperature range.
Displays the count measured by the Top/Valley
Count Function.
Displays the total time calculated by the cumulative counter.
Displays the maximum and minimum values of
the temperature data retained in the Unit.
Section 7-4
Monitoring Temperature Data
Item
Status
check
boxes
Buttons
Note
Description
Over Range
High Alarm Over
High Warning
Over
Low Warning
Over
Low Alarm Over
Under Range
Selected when the temperature data is above the
displayable range.
Selected when the temperature data exceeds the
monitor value set for the comparator function.
Selected when the temperature data is below the
displayable range.
Broken Wire
Selected when there is a disconnected wire.
Threshold Cumu- Selected when the cumulated time exceeds the
monitor value set for the Cumulative Temperature
lated Counter
Function.
Over
Cumulative
Selected when there is an overflow in the cumuCounter Overflow lative counter value.
Selected when there is an underflow in the cumuCumulative
lative counter value.
Counter Underflow
Temperature
Selected when the present value in the set temTotal Time Over
perature range exceeds the monitor value.
Top/Valley Count Selected when the top or valley count exceeds
Over
the monitor value.
User Adjustment Selected when the user-set adjustment function
is operating.
Clear Buttons
Clear the displayed values
Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set.
Data Comparison between Channels Tab Page
Item
Comparison Contents
Calculation Result
Description
Displays the inputs used in the error calculation.
Displays the calculation results.
381
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
Note
If either of the comparison inputs is disconnected, the results will
be 0.00
Error History Tab Page
Item
Content
Network Power
Voltage
Unit Conduction
Time
Clear Button
7-5
7-5-1
Description
Displays the contents of the communications errors that occurred.
Displays the power supply voltage being supplied when the error
occurred.
Displays the total time that the network power supply had been ON
when the error occurred.
Clears the error history.
Temperature Input Units
Temperature Input Units
Specifications
Item
Model
Input type
382
Specifications
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Switchable between R, S, K, J, T, E, B, N, L,
Switchable between PT100 (−200 to 850°C)
U, W, and PL2
and PT100 (−200 to 200°C)
When set with CX-Integrator: Input types can When set with CX-Integrator: Input types can
be set individually for each input.
be set individually for each input.
Wen set with DIP switch: The same input type Wen set with DIP switch: The same input type
setting applies to all 4 inputs.
setting applies to all 4 inputs.
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
Item
Indicator accuracy
Specifications
(±0.3% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever −200 to 850°C input range:
is larger) ±1 digit max. (See note.)
(±0.3% of indication value or ±0.8°C, whichever is larger) ±1 digit max.
Indicator Accuracy in Exceptional Cases
−200 to 200°C input range:
Input type and
Input accuracy
(±0.3% of indication value or ±0.5°C, whichtemperature range
ever is larger) ±1 digit max.
K, T, and N below
±2°C ±1 digit max.
−100°C
Conversion cycle
Temperature conversion
data
Isolation method
U and L
±2°C ±1 digit max.
R and S below 200°C
±3°C ±1 digit max.
B below 400°C
Not specified.
W
±0.3% of indication value or
±3°C (whichever is larger) ±1
digit max.
PL2
±0.3% of indication value or
±2°C (whichever is larger) ±1
digit max.
250 ms/4 points
Binary data (4-digit hexadecimal when Normal Display Mode is selected or 8-digit hexadecimal when 1/100 Display Mode is selected.)
Between input and communication lines: Photocoupler isolation
Between temperature input signals: Photocoupler isolation
35-mm DIN track mounting (See note.)
75 mA max. at 24 VDC
75 mA max. at 24 VDC
110 mA max. at 14 VDC
110 mA max. at 14 VDC
148 g max.
147 g max.
Mounting method
Communications power
supply current
Weight
Note
Effects of Mounting
Direction on Accuracy
There are specifications that apply to the mounting direction and input accuracy. Refer to the next page for details.
A cold junction compensator is included in the Terminal Block of the CRT1TS04T. The input accuracy depends on the mounting direction if only the Unit
is replaced.
Mounting direction
Mounted normally
Mounted in any direction
other than the above
Input accuracy
As specified in the Performance Specifications.
±0.3% of indication value or ±2°C (whichever is larger)
±1 digit max.
Indicator Accuracy in Exceptional Cases
Input type and temperature
range
Input accuracy
K, T, and N below −100°C
±3°C ±1 digit max.
U and L
±3°C ±1 digit max.
R and S below 200°C
±4°C ±1 digit max.
B below 400°C
Not specified.
W
±0.3% of indication value or ±4°C
(whichever is larger) ±1 digit max.
PL2
±0.3% of indication value or ±3°C
(whichever is larger)
383
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
Names and Functions of Parts
CRT1-TS04T
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
x10 and x1(from left)
DIP switch (Sets
the input range.)
Communications connector
TS
89
234
567
89
234
567
01
01
Removal Input Terminal Block
CRT1-TS04P
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
x10 and x1(from left)
DIP switch (Sets
the input range.)
Communications connector
TS
234
89
01
234
567
89
567
01
Removal Input Terminal Block
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
Node Address
Settings
The node address of the Temperature Input Unit is set as a decimal value
using the left rotary switch for the ten's digit and the right rotary switch for the
one's digit. (Up to 63 nodes can be set.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
Note The rotary switch settings are read when the power is turned ON.
0 1
Node address, x1
Node address, x10
384
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
Setting the Input Type
Setting with the DIP
Switch
The input type can be set using the DIP switch or the CX-Integrator.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
Set each pin according to the following table.
Pin No.
Setting
SW1
Sets the input type (input
range)
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
Always OFF
Specifications
Refer to the following table.
Default setting: All pins OFF
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may
occur if it is set to ON.
OFF: °C conversion
ON: °F conversion
Default setting: OFF
Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may
occur if it is set to ON.
SW6
Selects °C or °F display.
SW7
Always OFF
SW8
Selects the input type set- OFF: Set with CX-Integrator.
ting method.
ON: Set with DIP switch.
Note When the input type is set with the DIP
switch, all inputs are set to the same
input type. To set different input types,
use the CX-Integrator to make the settings.
CRT1-TS04T
SW1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Note
SW2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Input type
R
S
K (−200 to 1300°C)
K (0.0 to 500.0°C)
J (−100 to 850°C)
J (0.0 to 400.0°C)
T
E
L (−100 to 850°C)
L (0.0 to 400.0°C)
U
N
W
B
PL2
Not used.
If the settings are incorrect, the MS Indicator will flash red and the
Unit will not operate. In this case, make the settings again and reset
the power supply.
385
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
CRT1-TS04P
SW1
Always
OFF
Note
Note
SW2
OFF
ON
SW3
Always OFF.
SW4
Input type
PT100 (−200 to 850°C)
PT100 (−200 to 200°C)
If the settings are incorrect, the MS Indicator will flash red and the
Unit will not operate. In this case, make the settings again and reset
the power supply.
1. Always set pin 5 and pin 7 to OFF (default).
2. Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin
is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled.
3. The DIP switch settings are read when the power is turned ON.
4. °C/°F display settings cannot be set individually for each input.
Setting Using the CXIntegrator
1,2,3...
Input types can be set for each temperature input using the CX-Integrator.
Use the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where the input type is to be set and select an
input type in the Input Type Field.
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Temperature Ranges
by Input Type
The following tables show the temperature ranges for each input type.
CRT1-TS04T
Input type
R
S
K (−200 to 1300°C)
386
Temperature range (°C)
0 to 1,700
0 to 1,700
−200 to 1,300
Temperature range (°F)
0 to 3,000
0 to 3,000
−300 to 2,300
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
Input type
K (0.0 to 500.0°C)
J (−100 to 850°C)
J (0.0 to 400.0°C)
T
E
L (−100 to 850°C)
L (0.0 to 400°C)
U
N
W
B
PL2
Temperature range (°C)
0.0 to 500.0
−100 to 850
0.0 to 400.0
−200.0 to 400.0
0 to 600
−100 to 850
0.0 to 400.0
−200.0 to 400.0
−200 to 1,300
0 to 2,300
100 to 1,800
0 to 1,300
Temperature range (°F)
0.0 to 900.0
−100 to 1,500
0.0 to 750.0
−300.0 to 700.0
0 to 1,100
−100 to 1,500
0.0 to 750.0
−300.0 to 700.0
−300 to 2,300
0 to 4,100
300 to 3,200
0 to 2,300
Input type
PT100 (−200 to
850°C)
Temperature range (°C)
−200.0 to 850.0
Temperature range (°F)
−300.0 to 1,500.0
PT100 (−200 to
200°C)
−200.0 to 200.0
−300.0 to 380.0
CRT1-TS04P
Note The temperature ranges listed above are the ranges in which the input accuracy is within the specified range.
Convertible
Temperature Ranges
The convertible data range depends on the selected input type, as shown in
the following tables.
CRT1-TS04T Data Ranges
Note
Input type
R
S
K (−200 to
1,300°C)
K (0.0 to
500.0°C)
°C
−20 to 1,720
−20 to 1,720
−220 to 1,320
Display
FFEC to 06B8
FFEC to 06B8
FF24 to 0528
°F
−20 o 3,020
−20 to 3,020
−320 to 2,3200
Display
FFEC to 0BCC
FFEC to 0BCC
FEC0 to 0910
−20.0 to 520.0
FF38 to 1450
−20.0 to 920.0
FF38 to 23F0
J (−100 to
850°C)
J (0.0 to
400.0°C)
T
E
L (−100 to
850°C)
L (0.0 to
400.0°C)
U
N
W
B
PL2
−120 to 870
FF88 to 0366
−120 to 1,520
FF88 to 05F0
−20.0 to 420.0
FF38 to 1068
−20.0 to 770.0
FF38 to 1E14
−220.0 to 420.0
−20 to 620
−120 to 870
F768 to 1068
FFEC to 026C
FF88 to 0366
−320.0 to 720.0
−20 to 1,120
−120 to 1,520
F380 to 1C20
FFEC to 0460
FF88 to 05F0
−20.0 to 420.0
FF38 to 1068
−20.0 to 770.0
FF38 to 1E14
−220.0 to 420.0
−220 to 1,320
−20 to 2,320
80 to 1,820
−20 to 1,320
F768 to 1068
FF24 to 0528
FFEC to 0910
0050 to 071C
FFEC to 0528
−320.0 to 720.0
−320 to 2,320
−20 to 4,120
280 to 3,220
−20 to 2,320
F380 to 1C20
FEC0 to 0910
FFEC to 1018
0118 to 0C94
FFEC to 0910
1. The display data will be clamped at the minimum value when the value is
below the minimum display value but higher than the value at which an offwire condition is detected.
387
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
2. When an off-wire condition is detected, the display data will be 7FFF.
(In 1/100 Display Mode, the display data will be 7FFF FFFF.)
CRT1-TS04P Data Ranges
Input type
°C
PT100
−220.0 to 870.0
(−200 to
850°C)
PT100
−220.0 to 220.0
(−200 to
200°C)
Note
Display
F768 to 21FC
°F
−320.0 to
1,520.0
Display
F380 to 3B60
F768 to 0898
−320.0 to 400.0
F380 o 0FA0
1. If the Unit is subjected to sudden temperature changes, moisture may condense in the Unit and cause incorrect indications. If there is condensation,
remove the Unit from service and keep it at a steady temperature for about
1 hour before using it again.
2. If the input temperature exceeds the convertible range, the temperature
data will be clamped at the minimum or maximum value.
If the temperature exceeds the convertible range by a certain value, an offwire condition (broken or disconnected input wire) will be detected and the
temperature data will be set to 7FFF Hex. If the input temperature returns
to the convertible range, the off-wire detection function will be reset automatically and normal conversion data will be stored.
Terminal Arrangement
CRT1-TS04T
0
+
NC
0
−
NC
1
+
NC
1
−
NC
2
+
NC
NC
2
−
3
+
NC
3
−
NC
Cold junction compensator
Adjusts the input temperature. Do not touch or remove
the compensator. The correct temperature data will not
be displayed if the compensator is disturbed.
CRT1-TS04P
0A
NC
0B
0B
1A
NC
1B
1B
NC
NC
2A
NC
2B
2B
3A
NC
Wiring
CRT1-TS04T
Thermocouple input
0
+
NC
0
−
388
CRT1-TS04P
Platinum-resistance
thermometer input
0A
0B
0B
3B
3B
Section 7-5
Temperature Input Units
Note If there are inputs that are not connected because they are not being used, an
off-wire condition may be detected. To prevent an off-wire detection, wire the
unused input terminals as shown in the following diagram. Alternatively, set
the Input Error Detection Disable Function from the CX-Integrator.
CRT1-TS04T
Thermocouple input
CRT1-TS04P
Platinum-resistance
thermometer input
0
+
NC
0
−
0A
0B
0B
Short the terminals.
Connect a resistance
of 50 Ω to 150 Ω.
66.9
50.1
3.14
50
Dimensions (Same for CRT1-TS04T and CRT1-TS04P)
115
(mm)
389
Temperature Input Units
390
Section 7-5
SECTION 8
Expansion Units
This section describes the Expansion Units.
8-1
8-2
Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
392
Expansion Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
8-2-1
Eight-point Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
394
8-2-2
Eight-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
397
8-2-3
Sixteen-point Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400
8-2-4
Sixteen-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
403
391
Section 8-1
Expansion Units
8-1
Expansion Units
One Expansion Unit can be combined with one Digital I/O Slave Unit (CRT1ID16(-1), CRT1-OD16(-1), CRT1-ROS16, or CRT1-ROF16). The following
Expansion Units are available. They can be combined in various ways for flexible I/O capacity expansion.
Model
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-ID16
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD16
XWT-OD16-1
I/O points
8 DC inputs (NPN)
8 DC inputs (PNP)
8 transistor outputs (NPN)
8 transistor outputs (PNP)
16 DC inputs (NPN)
16 DC inputs (PNP)
16 transistor outputs (NPN)
16 transistor outputs (PNP)
Input capacity
8
8
0
0
16
16
0
0
Output capacity
0
0
8
8
0
0
16
16
Installing Expansion Units
1,2,3...
1. Remove the cover from the right side of the Digital I/O Slave Unit.
2. Align the connector on the Expansion Unit with the connector on the Digital
I/O Slave Unit and press the Units together.
3. Press the Expansion Unit and Digital I/O Slave Unit together until they click
into place with the connectors properly mated.
I/O Power Supply
392
If an Expansion Input Unit is connected to a Digital Input Slave Unit, then I/O
power must be supplied only to the Digital I/O Slave Unit. If any other combination of Units is used, I/O power must be supplied to both the Digital I/O
Slave Unit and Expansion Unit. This includes connecting an Expansion Input
Unit to a Digital Output Slave Unit, an Expansion Output Unit to a Digital Input
Slave Unit, or an Expansion Output Unit to a Digital Output Slave Unit.
Section 8-1
Expansion Units
Refer to the following table and write the I/O power correctly when connecting
an Expansion Unit.
Combination
Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit
Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-ID16
Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Output Unit
Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-OD16
Digital Output Slave Unit with
Expansion Input Unit
Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-ID16
Digital Output Slave Unit with
Expansion Output Unit
Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-OD16
Note
I/O power supply to Expansion Slave Unit
Not required.
(The Expansion Unit uses the same I/O power
supply as the Digital I/O Slave Unit.)
Required (I/O power must be supplied to both
Units.)
Required (I/O power must be supplied to both
Units.)
Required (I/O power must be supplied to both
Units.)
Do not connect Expansion Units while the power supply is ON.
393
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
8-2
8-2-1
Expansion Unit Specifications
Eight-point Input Units
XWT-ID08/XWT-ID08-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
XWT-ID08
Internal I/O common
I/O capacity
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per
common
NPN
8 inputs
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
XWT-ID08-1
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
1.5 ms max.
8 inputs/common
Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-ID08 and XWT-ID08-1)
Indicator Section
Shows the status of each input.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IN
XWT-ID08
REMOTE TERMINAL
Removable terminal block
Operation Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
394
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
Internal Circuits
XWT-ID08 (NPN)
Photocoupler
V 24 VDC
0
Internal circuits
1
Photocoupler
G
XWT-ID08-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
Photocoupler
0
Internal circuits
1
Photocoupler
G
Wiring
XWT-ID08 (NPN)
24 VDC
6
7
V
1
2
G
9
3
3
0
10
5
4
2
7
5
4
6
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
I/O power supply
Black (White)
+
Brown (Red)
−
8
1
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
395
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
XWT-ID08-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
6
7
V
1
2
G
9
3
3
0
4
7
5
4
6
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
+
I/O power supply
Note
10
5
2
Blue (Black)
−
8
1
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for XWT-ID08 and XWT-ID08-1)
13
396
66
3.1
50
43.9
29.9
49.7
(mm)
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
8-2-2
Eight-point Output Units
XWT-OD08/XWT-OD08-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
Internal I/O common
I/O capacity
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per
common
Specification
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD08-1
NPN
8 outputs
0.5 A/output, 2.0 A/common
1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
8 outputs/common
PNP
1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-OD08 and XWT-OD08-1)
Indicator Section
Shows the status of each output.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0UT
XWT-OD08
REMOTE TERMINAL
Removable terminal block
Operation Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 7
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
397
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
Internal Circuits
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
XWT-OD08 (NPN)
V 24 VDC
0
Internal circuits
1
Photocoupler
G
XWT-OD08-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
Photocoupler
0
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
Internal circuits
1
398
G
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
Wiring
XWT-OD08 (NPN)
24 VDC
6
7
V
1
8
1
2
G
−
9
3
3
0
10
5
4
2
7
5
4
6
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Solenoid, valve, etc.
XWT-OD08-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
6
7
V
1
2
G
−
8
1
9
3
3
0
10
5
4
2
7
5
4
6
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Note
Solenoid, valve, etc.
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Dimensions (Same for XWT-OD08 and XWT-OD08-1)
50
43.9
66
3.1
29.9
13
49.7
(mm)
399
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
8-2-3
Sixteen-point Input Units
XWT-ID16/XWT-ID16-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
Internal I/O common
I/O capacity
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per
common
Specification
XWT-ID16
NPN
16 inputs
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
1.0 mA max.
At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input
At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 inputs/common
XWT-ID16-1
PNP
15 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the G terminal)
Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-ID16 and XWT-ID16-1)
Indicator Section
Shows the status of each input.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
IN
XWT-ID16
REMOTE TERMINAL
Removable terminal block
Operation Indicators
The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
400
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
Internal Circuits
XWT-ID16 (NPN)
Photocoupler
V 24 VDC
0
Internal circuits
1
Photocoupler
G
XWT-ID16-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
Photocoupler
0
Internal circuits
1
Photocoupler
G
Wiring
XWT-ID16 (NPN)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
13
3
3
0
14
5
4
2
5
4
15
7
6
6
16
9
7
8
17
11
8
10
18
13
15
9
12
14
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
I/O power supply
Brown (Red)
+
Black (White)
−
12
1
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
401
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
XWT-ID16-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
13
3
3
0
15
7
5
4
16
9
6
6
17
11
7
8
18
13
8
10
9
12
14
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for XWT-ID16 and XWT-ID16-1)
12
94
3.1
50
43.9
402
15
+
I/O power supply
Note
14
5
4
2
Blue (Black)
−
12
1
29.9
49.7
(mm)
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
8-2-4
Sixteen-point Output Units
XWT-OD16/XWT-OD16-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
Internal I/O common
I/O capacity
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per
common
Specification
XWT-OD16
XWT-OD16-1
NPN
16 outputs
0.5 A/output, 4.0 A/common
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the G terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
16 outputs/common
PNP
1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each
output terminal and the V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-OD16 and XWT-OD16-1)
Indicator Section
Shows the status of each output.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
XWT-OD16
REMOTE TERMINAL
Removable terminal block
Operation Indicators
The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 15
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
403
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
Internal Circuits
Internal Circuits
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
XWT-OD16 (NPN)
V 24 VDC
0
1
Photocoupler
G
XWT-OD16-1 (PNP)
V 24 VDC
Photocoupler
0
Photocoupler
Voltage
drop
Internal Circuits
1
404
G
Section 8-2
Expansion Unit Specifications
Wiring
XWT-OD16 (NPN)
24 VDC
10
11
V
12
1
1
2
G
3
0
−
13
3
14
5
4
2
15
7
5
4
16
9
6
6
7
8
18
17
11
15
13
8
10
9
14
12
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Solenoid, valve, etc.
XWT-OD16-1 (PNP)
24 VDC
10
11
V
1
2
G
13
3
3
0
−
12
1
14
5
4
2
5
4
15
7
16
9
6
6
17
11
7
8
8
10
18
13
15
9
12
14
+
I/O power supply
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Note
Solenoid, valve, etc.
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Dimensions (Same for XWT-OD16 and XWT-OD16-1)
12
94
3.1
50
43.9
29.9
49.7
(mm)
405
Expansion Unit Specifications
406
Section 8-2
SECTION 9
Bit Slave Units
This section describes the Bit Slave Units.
9-1
Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
408
9-2
Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
409
9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
9-3-1
Two-point Input Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
411
9-3-2
Two-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
415
9-3-3
Two-point Input Units (IP54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
419
9-3-4
Two-point Output Units (IP54). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
423
9-3-5
Four-point Input Units (IP54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
427
9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
Two-point Input/Two-point Output Units (IP54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
432
9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
437
9-5-1
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
437
9-5-2
Two-point Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
438
9-5-3
Two-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
442
9-5-4
Four-point Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
446
9-5-5
Four-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
452
9-5-6
One-point Input/One-point Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
457
9-5-7
Two-point Input/Two-point Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
463
9-4-1
407
Section 9-1
Status Areas
9-1
Status Areas
A Bit Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm
Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and OFF based
on the threshold values set by the user for each function in that Unit. When
any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit
turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and
bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON.
The Bit Slave Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages.
Master Unit
The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all
slaves
Transmitted
to Master Unit
Bit Slave Unit
The Bit Slave Unit has two status areas:
the Warning Status Area and Alarm Status Area.
Warning Status Area
The Bit Slave Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These
bits indicate minor errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note
408
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Network Power Voltage Drop Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Voltage dropped below
threshold.)
Unit Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Operation Time Monitor Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Connected Device Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Description
----Monitors the voltage set as the
threshold for the network power voltage monitor function.
Monitors the power ON time warning
value set as the threshold for the Unit
Conduction Time Monitor function.
--------Turns ON when the threshold set for
the operation time monitor function is
exceeded.
Turns ON when the threshold set for
the contact operation monitor function or the total ON time monitor function is exceeded.
-------------
For Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors, all bits are reserved.
Section 9-2
Allocating I/O Data
Alarm Status Area
The Bit Slave Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These
bits indicate serious errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
--Turns ON when there is an error in
the EEPROM data.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Power Short-circuit Detection Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Short-circuit
11
Load Short-circuit Detection Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Short-circuit
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
--------------Turns ON when there is a short in the
power supply connection to the connected devices, including wiring mistakes and connected device failure.
Turns ON when there is a short in the
load connection, including wiring mistakes and connected device failure.
12
13
14
15
9-2
Description
Reserved
EEPROM Data Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error occurred
Reserved
2
Note
Content
---
---------
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors support only the EEPROM Data
Error Flag.
Allocating I/O Data
Bit Slave Units are allocated node address areas in units of two points (two
bits).
• Input Units and Output Units
Units with two points are allocated two bits (the node address set for the
Unit).
Units with four points are allocated four bits (the node address set for the
Unit and the next node address area).
• I/O Units
Units are allocated four bits (the input and output node address areas).
Two-point Input Units
Bit Input Area
1
0
1
0
Four-point Input Units
Bit Input Area
3
2
409
Section 9-2
Allocating I/O Data
Two-point Output Units
Bit Output Area
1
0
1
0
Not used.
(See note.)
0
Not used.
(See note.)
0
Four-point Output Units
Bit Output Area
3
2
Two-point I/O Units
Bit Output Area
Bit Input Area
Note
Upper bits indicated “not used” for two-point Output Units are unused bits.
Treat unused bits as follows:
• Unused bits in bit output area: Use 0.
• Unused bits in bit input area: 0 is input.
Four-point I/O Units
Bit Output Area
1
0
1
0
Bit Input Area
Bit Slave Units are allocated node address areas in order without leaving any
bits unused in the middle. For example, eight, two-point Slave Units are allocated one word. Likewise, four, two-point Slave Units and two, four-point Slave
Units are also allocated one word.
410
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
9-3
9-3-1
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Two-point Input Units
CRT1B-ID02S/CRT1B-ID02S-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
CRT1B-ID02S
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
Sensor power supply voltage
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Power short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption (See
note.)
Input device supply current
Weight
CRT1B-ID02S-1
2 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each input 10.5 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input ter- 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal)
minal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
2 inputs/common
Supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
Screw installation (M4)
Network power supply
65 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
80 mA/2 points
70 g max.
Note
45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
411
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID02S and CRT1B-ID02S-1)
Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0)
I/O indicators 0 and 1
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×100, ×10, and ×1
MS NS SHOT 0 1
Flat Cable
(attached)
I/O connectors
(e-CON connectors)
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input and status indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
0 to 1
SHT0
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Lit red.
Power short-circuit
The power supply is
short-circuited.
The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the
100s digit set on the left rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary
switch, and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch.
2 3 4
7 8
7 8
9
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
100s digit of node address
412
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1B-ID02S (NPN)
V
NC
G
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
IN0
Internal circuits
BS+
V
NC
G
BD L
IN1
Load shortcircuit
protection
circuit
CRT1B-ID02S-1 (PNP)
V
NC
G
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
IN0
Internal circuits
BS+
V
NC
G
BD L
IN1
Load shortcircuit
protection
circuit
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
CRT1B-ID02S (NPN)
V
2 NC
3
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
4
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
V
NC
G
G
IN
0
IN
1
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
1
3-wire sensor with NPN output
(photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor)
413
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
CRT1B-ID02S-1 (PNP)
2
3
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
4
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
V
V
NC NC
G
G
IN
0
IN
1
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
1
3-wire sensor with PNP output
(photoelectric sensor or
proximity sensor)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID02S and CRT1B-ID02S-1)
48
(548)
32.1
48
414
5.7
Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions.
(mm)
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
9-3-2
Two-point Output Units
CRT1B-OD02S/CRT1B-OD02S-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
Specification
CRT1B-OD02S
CRT1B-OD02S-1
2 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.2 A/output
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.)
1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each
output terminal and BS−)
output terminal and BS+)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Load short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Output indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption (See
note.)
Weight
1.5 ms max.
2 outputs/common
Supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
Screw installation (M4)
Network power supply
55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
75 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
59 g max.
Note
55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply
voltage
70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply
voltage
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply
is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The
power supply current consumption is expressed by the following
formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current ×
number of actuators used)
415
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD20S and CRT1B-OD20S-1)
Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0)
I/O indicators 0 and 1
Communications
indicators: MS and NS
Node address switches:
×100, ×10, and ×1
MS NS SHOT 0 1
Flat Cable
(attached)
I/O connectors
(e-CON connectors)
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output and status indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
0 to 1
LED status
Lit yellow.
SHT0
Setting the Node
Address
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
Lit red.
Load power short-circuit detection
The load power supply
is short-circuited.
The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the
100s digit set on the left rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary
switch, and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch.
2 3 4
7 8
7 8
9
2 3 4
5 6
0 1
5 6
9
0 1
5 6
7 8
9
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
100s digit of node address
416
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1B-OD02S (NPN)
V
NC
NC
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
Internal Circuits
BS+
BD L
OUT0
V
NC
NC
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
OUT1
CRT1B-OD02S-1 (PNP)
NC
NC
G
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
BD L
Wiring
Internal Circuits
BS+
OUT0
NC
NC
G
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
OUT1
The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
CRT1B-OD02S (NPN)
1
V
V
2
NC NC
3
NC NC
4 OUT OUT
0
1
Solenoid valve, Solenoid valve,
etc.
etc.
417
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
CRT1B-OD02S-1 (PNP)
1 NC
NC
2 NC
NC
3
G
G
4 OUT OUT
0
1
Solenoid valve, Solenoid valve,
etc.
etc.
Note
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD02S and CRT1B-OD02S-1)
48
(548)
32.1
48
418
5.7
Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions.
(mm)
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
9-3-3
Two-point Input Units (IP54)
CRT1B-ID02SP/CRT1B-ID02SP-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
Specification
CRT1B-ID02SP
CRT1B-ID02SP-1
2 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
Sensor power supply voltage
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Power short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption (See note.)
Input device supply current
Weight
Note
2 inputs/common
Supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP54
Screw installation (M4)
Network power supply
65 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
80 mA/2 points
184 g max.
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
419
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID02SP and CRT1B-ID02SP-1)
Node address switches:
×100, ×10, and ×1
Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0)
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O indicators 0 and 1
I/O connectors
(e-CON connectors)
Flat Cable
(attached)
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input and status indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
0 to 1
SHT0
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Lit red.
Power short-circuit
The power supply is
short-circuited.
The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the
100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary
switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch.
3
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
100s digit of node address
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
10s digit of node address
9
7 8
420
4
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
1s digit of node address
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1B-ID02SP (NPN)
V
BS+
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
Internal Circuits
NC
G
IN0
V
NC
G
BD L
IN1
Load shortcircuit
protection
circuit
CRT1B-ID02SP-1 (PNP)
V
NC
DC-DC
converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
Internal Circuits
G
BS+
IN0
V
NC
G
BD L
IN1
Load shortcircuit
protection
circuit
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
CRT1B-ID02SP (NPN)
V
G
IN
0
IN
1
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Blue (Black)
G
4
Brown (Red)
NC NC
3
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
2
V
Black (White)
1
3-wire sensor with
NPN output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
421
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
CRT1B-ID02SP-1 (PNP)
V
1
G
IN
1
Brown (Red)
Blue (Black)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Note
Blue (Black)
G
IN
4 0
3
Black (White)
NC NC
2
Brown (White)
V
3-wire sensor with
PNP output
(photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID02SP and CRT1B-ID02SP-1)
(594.5)
50
51
113
96.27
73
94.5
61.25
Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions.
(mm)
422
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
9-3-4
Two-point Output Units (IP54)
CRT1B-OD02SP/CRT1B-OD02SP-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
CRT1B-OD02SP
CRT1B-OD02SP-1
2 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.2 A/output
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.)
Residual voltage
1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each
output terminal and BS−)
output terminal and BS+)
Leakage current
0.1 mA max.
ON delay
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits per common
2 outputs/common
Load power short-circuit detection Supported.
Isolation method
No isolation
Output indicators
LEDs (yellow)
Degree of protection
IEC standard IP54
Installation
Screw installation (M4)
Power supply type
Network power supply
Communications power supply
50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
current consumption (See note.)
75 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Weight
169 g max.
Note
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply
is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The
power supply current consumption is expressed by the following
formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current ×
number of actuators used)
423
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD02SP and CRT1B-OD02SP-1)
Node address switches:
×100, ×10, and ×1
Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0)
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O indicators 0 and 1
I/O connectors
(e-CON connectors)
Flat Cable
(attached)
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the output and status indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
0 to 1
SHT0
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit.
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
Lit red.
Load short-circuit
detection
The load is short-circuited.
The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the
100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary
switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch.
3
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
100s digit of node address
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
10s digit of node address
9
7 8
424
4
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
1s digit of node address
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1B-OD02SP (NPN)
V
NC
NC
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
Internal Circuits
BS+
BD L
OUT0
V
NC
NC
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
OUT1
CRT1B-OD02SP-1 (PNP)
NC
NC
G
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BS−
BD H
BD L
Wiring
Internal Circuits
BS+
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
OUT0
NC
NC
G
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
OUT1
The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
CRT1B-OD02SP (NPN)
1
V
V
2
NC NC
3
NC NC
4 OUT OUT
0
1
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
425
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
CRT1B-OD02SP-1 (PNP)
1
2
3
NC NC
NC NC
G
G
4 OUT OUT
0
1
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Note
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in
diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD02SP and CRT1B-OD02SP-1)
(594.5)
73
51
113
96.27
50
94.5
61.25
426
Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions.
(mm)
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
9-3-5
Four-point Input Units (IP54)
CRT1B-ID04SP/CRT1B-ID04SP-1
Input Section
Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
Sensor power supply voltage
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Power short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption (See note.)
Input device supply current
Weight
Note
CRT1B-ID04SP
CRT1B-ID04SP-1
4 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal)
5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
1.0 mA max.
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
4 inputs/common
Supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP54
Screw installation (M4)
Network power supply
85 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
80 mA/2 points
188 g
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
427
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID04SP/CRT1B-ID04SP-1)
Node address switches:
×100, ×10, and ×1
Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0)
I/O indicators 0 and 3
Communications indicators:
MS and NS
I/O connectors
(e-CON connectors)
Flat Cable
(attached)
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the input and status indicators are given in the following
table.
Name
0 to 3
SHT0
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Lit red.
Power short-circuit
The power supply is
short-circuited.
The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the
100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary
switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch.
3
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
100s digit of node address
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
10s digit of node address
9
7 8
428
4
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
1s digit of node address
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
Internal Circuits
CRT1B-ID04SP (NPN)
V0
NC
G0
BS+
IN0
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BS−
V0
BD H
NC
G0
BD L
Internal Circuits
IN1
Load shortcircuit protection circuit
V1
NC
G1
IN2
V1
NC
G1
IN3
Load shortcircuit protection circuit
429
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
CRT1B-ID04SP-1 (PNP)
V0
NC
G0
BS+
IN0
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BS−
V0
BD H
NC
G0
BD L
Internal Circuits
IN1
Load shortcircuit protection circuit
V1
NC
G1
IN2
V1
NC
G1
IN3
Load shortcircuit protection circuit
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
V0
V1
V1
2
NC
NC
NC
NC
G0
G0
G1
G1
IN
0
IN
1
IN
2
IN
3
3
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
4
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
430
Blue (Black)
V0
Brown (Red)
1
Black (White)
CRT1B-ID04SP (NPN)
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric
sensor or proximity sensor)
Section 9-3
Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors
CRT1B-ID04SP-1 (PNP)
V0
1
2 NC
V1
NC NC NC
IN
3
Brown (Red)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Blue (Black)
IN
2
Blue (Black)
IN
1
Black (White)
IN
0
4
Note
V1
G0 G0 G1 G1
3
Brown (White)
V0
3-wire sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric
sensor or proximity sensor)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID04SP and CRT1B-ID04SP-1)
(594.5)
73
51
113
96.27
50
94.5
61.25
Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions.
(mm)
431
Section 9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks
9-4
9-4-1
Clamp Terminal Blocks
Two-point Input/Two-point Output Units (IP54)
CRT1B-MD04SLP/CRT1B-MD04SLP-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
CRT1B-MD04SLP
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common line
ON voltage
2 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each input 10.5 VDC min. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
OFF voltage
5 VDC max. (between each input
5 VDC max. (between each input
terminal and the V terminal)
terminal and the G terminal)
OFF current
1 mA max.
Input current
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Sensor power supply voltage
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
ON delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits per common 2 inputs/common
Power short-circuit detection
Supported.
Isolation method
No isolation
Input indicators
LEDs (yellow)
Degree of protection
IEC standard IP54
Installation
Screw installation (M4)
Power supply type
Network power supply
Communications power supply 80 mA max. for 24-VDC power sup- 75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supcurrent consumption (See note.) ply voltage
ply voltage
90 mA max. for 14-VDC power sup- 85 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
ply voltage
Input device supply current
80 mA/2 points
Weight
191 g max.
191 g max.
Note
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs and outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include
input device current consumption or output load current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O
power supply for sensors and actuators. Be sure to consider the
sensor and actuator current consumption and the number of sensors and actuators connected. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used) + (actual load current x number of actuators used)
432
Section 9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Load power short-circuit
detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Specification
CRT1B-MD04SLP
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1
2 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.2 A/output
Communications power supply voltage + 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage − 1.2 V (min.)
1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each
output terminal and BS−)
output terminal and BS+)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
2 outputs/common
Supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-MD04SLP/CRT1B-MD04SLP-1)
Node address switches:
×100, ×10, and ×1
Power short-circuit indicators (SHT0 and SHT1)
Communications indicators: MS and NS
I/O indicators 0 and 3
I/O connectors
(screwless clamp terminals)
Flat Cable
(attached)
Display Section
Communications
Indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
433
Section 9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks
I/O Indicators
The meanings of the I/O and status indicators are given in the following table.
Name
0 to 3
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
I/O status
Input/output ON
Meaning
The input/output is ON.
Not lit.
Input/output OFF
The input/output is OFF.
SHT0
Lit red.
SHT1
Lit red.
Power short-circuit
detected
Load short-circuit
detected
The power supply is
short-circuited.
The load is short-circuited.
The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the
100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary
switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch.
3
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
100s digit of node address
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
10s digit of node address
4
9
5 6
0 1
2
7 8
3
1s digit of node address
7 8
Internal Circuits
CRT1B-MD04SLP (NPN)
V0
NC
BS+
G0
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
IN0
BS−
V1
BD H
NC
G1
BD L
Internal Circuits
IN1
Load short-circuit
protection circuit
V0
NC
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
NC
OUT0
V1
NC
NC
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
434
OUT1
Section 9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 (PNP)
V
NC
BS+
G
BS−
IN0
Internal Circuits
DC-DC converter
(not isolated)
BD H
V
NC
G
BD L
IN1
Load short-circuit
protection circuit
NC
NC
G
Internal Circuits
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
Wiring
OUT0
NC
NC
G
Load
shortcircuit
protection
circuit
OUT1
The I/O connector section uses a screw-less clamp terminal block.
Pin arrangements and signals are shown below.
V
2
NC
NC
3
Blue (Black)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Brown (White)
4
1
G
G
IN
0
IN
1
V
V
2 NC
NC
3 NC
NC
Blue (Black)
V
Brown (Red)
1
Black (White)
CRT1B-MD04SLP (NPN)
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric
sensor or proximity sensor)
4 OUT OUT
0
1
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
435
Section 9-4
Clamp Terminal Blocks
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 (PNP)
G
G
IN IN
1
4 0
1 NC NC
2 NC
3
G
Brown (Red)
Blue (Black)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Brown (White)
3
NC
NC
G
Blue (Black)
2 NC
V
Black (White)
V
1
3-wire sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric
sensor or proximity sensor)
4 OUT OUT
0
1
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
Note
Solenoid,
valve, etc.
(1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a
built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode.
(2) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses
are the wire colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-MD04SLP and CRT1B-MD04SLP-1)
(594.5)
73
51
113
96.27
50
94.5
61.25
436
Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions.
(mm)
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5
9-5-1
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors
Connecting to Communications Cables
The following communications connectors can be connected to Bit Slave
Units with Compact Connectors.
Applicable Communications Connectors
Name
Model
Open Type Connector (for Unit connection)
Flat Connector Plug
Multidrop Connector Plug for Flat Cable I
HCN-TB4LMZG+
(Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co.,
Ltd.)
DCN4-BR4
DCN5-BR4
DCN4-MR4
Hook
Internal
Internal
Internal
Internal
Applicable
communications cable
Round Cable I and
Round Cable II
Flat Cable I
Flat Cable II
Flat Cable I
The DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector and DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector
cannot be used with Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors. For information on
how to process and attach the communications connectors, refer to 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors.
Applicable Functions
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors do not include functionality to collect
data to help shorten startup and recovery time for control systems and maintenance systems.
For details, refer to 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions on page 7.
Checking the Communications Power Supply Voltage
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors do not support a network power
supply voltage monitor. Use either of the following methods to check the voltage if a Flat Cable is connected.
• Connect a Flat Connector Socket connected to a cable to a Flat Connector Plug or Flat Cable I Multidrop Connector Plug at the location where a
Bit Slave Unit with Compact Connectors is to be connected, secure the
extended cable with the terminal block so as not to cause a short circuit,
and measure the voltage using a voltmeter.
• Use a tester or voltmeter to measure between the V and G terminals of
the I/O connector.
Note
(1) Be careful to not cause a short-circuit when performing the measurement. The system or Unit may be damaged if a short-circuit is created.
(2) Always turn OFF the output from the Output Unit before measuring between the V and G terminals of the I/O connector. The Unit may be damaged if a short-circuit is made with a signal pin for which the output is ON
when the measurement is performed.
Continuous Short- circuit Protection Circuit
This prevents the network power supply from continuously remaining shortcircuited if a short-circuit occurs in I/O wiring. This protection circuit may
become damaged when a short-circuit occurs, and cause the Unit to not operate correctly.
437
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5-2
Two-point Input Unit
CRT1B-ID02JS/CRT1B-ID02JS-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
Specification
CRT1B-ID02JS
CRT1B-ID02JS-1
2 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal)
OFF voltage
----OFF current
1.0 mA max.
Input current
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Sensor power supply voltage
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
ON delay
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay
1.5 ms max.
Number of circuits per common 2 inputs/common
Power short-circuit detection
Not supported.
Isolation method
No isolation
Input indicators
LEDs (yellow)
Degree of protection
IEC standard IP20
Installation
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Power supply type
Network power supply
Communications power supply
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
current consumption (See note.) 30 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
Input device supply current
50 mA/point (G terminal)
50 mA/point (V terminal)
Weight
16 g max.
Note
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
438
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID02JS and CRT1B-ID02JS-1)
CompoNet communications connector
(internal hook)
Communications
I/O indicators
indicators (MS, NS) (IN0, IN1)
Node Address
Setting Switch
I/O connectors
(IN0, IN1)
IN0
IN1
Left side of Unit
Front of Unit
I/O connector
labels
Right side of Unit
Display Section
Communications
indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O indicators
The indicators show the status of the inputs.
Name
IN0, IN1
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
Status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value
between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not
be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is
0000000.
ON
RSV: Not used (keep OFF).
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact
Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings.
439
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Internal circuits
CRT1B-ID02JS (NPN)
V0
BS+
IN0
BDH
BS-
DC-DC
Converter
(not isolated)
Internal circuits
BDL
G0
V1
IN1
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
G1
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
V0
CRT1B-ID02JS-1 (PNP)
BS+
IN0
BDL
BS-
DC-DC
Converter
(not isolated)
Internal circuits
BDH
G0
V1
IN1
G1
440
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
V
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Signal
G
S
Brown (white)
S
Blue (black)
G
Brown (red)
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
CRT1B-ID02JS (NPN)
V
V
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
V
3-wire sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Note
G
Signal
S
V
Brown (white)
S
V
Blue (black)
G
Brown (red)
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
CRT1B-ID02JS-1 (PNP)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID02JS and CRT1B-ID02JS-1)
21.65
15
24
48.9
(mm)
441
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5-3
Two-point Output Units
CRT1B-OD02JS/CRT1B-OD02JS-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
Specification
CRT1B-OD02JS
CRT1B-OD02JS-1
2 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.1 A/output
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.)
1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each
output terminal and G terminal)
output terminal and V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Load short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Output indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption (See
note.)
Output device supply current
Weight
1.5 ms max.
2 outputs/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
30 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
30 mA/point (G terminal)
16 g max.
Note
30 mA/point (V terminal)
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply
is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The
power supply current consumption is expressed by the following
formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current ×
number of actuators used)
442
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD02JS and CRT1B-OD02JS-1)
CompoNet communications connector
(internal hook)
Node Address
Setting Switch
I/O indicators
Communications
indicators (MS, NS) (OUT0, OUT1)
I/O connectors
(OUT0, OUT1)
OUT0
OUT1
Left side of Unit
Front of Unit
I/O connector
labels
Right side of Unit
Display Section
Communications
indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O indicators
The indicators show the status of the outputs.
Name
OUT0, OUT1
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
Status
Output ON
Meaning
The output is ON.
Not lit
Output OFF
The output is OFF.
Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value
between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not
be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is
0000000.
ON
RSV - Not used (keep OFF).
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact
Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings.
443
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Internal circuits
CRT1B-OD02JS (NPN)
V0
BS+
OUT0
BDH
DC-DC
Converter
(not isolated)
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
BS-
Internal circuits
BDL
G0
V1
OUT1
G1
CRT1B-OD02JS-1 (PNP)
V0
BS+
BS-
DC-DC
Converter
(not isolated)
Internal circuits
BDL
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
OUT0
BDH
G0
V1
OUT1
G1
444
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
S
V
G
V
S
V
Emitter OFF
input
G
G
V
Signal
G
Signal
CRT1B-OD02JS (NPN)
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
Solenoid, valve, etc.
G
S
G
V
G
V
S
V
Emitter OFF
input
G
V
Signal
Signal
CRT1B-OD02JS-1 (PNP)
Photoelectric
Solenoid, valve, etc.
sensor, emitter, etc.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD02JS and CRT1B-OD02JS-1)
21.65
15
24
48.9
(mm)
445
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5-4
Four-point Input Unit
CRT1B-ID04JS/CRT1B-ID04JS-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
Specification
CRT1B-ID04JS
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
Sensor power supply voltage
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Power short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption (See note.)
Input device supply current
Weight
Note
CRT1B-ID04JS-1
4 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal)
----1.0 mA max.
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
4 inputs/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
40 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
50 mA/point (G terminal)
50 mA/point (V terminal)
21 g max.
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
446
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID04JS and CRT1B-ID04JS-1)
CompoNet communications connector
(internal hook)
Node Address
Setting Switch
Left side of Unit
Communications
indicators (MS, NS)
I/O indicators
(IN0 to IN3)
Front of Unit
I/O connectors
(IN0 to IN3)
IN2
IN0
IN3
IN1
I/O connector
labels
Right side of Unit
Display Section
Communications
indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O indicators
The indicators show the status of the inputs.
Name
IN0 to IN3
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
Status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value
between 00000000 and 1111110 (0 to 126 decimal). Communications will not
be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is
0000000.
ON
RSV - Not used (keep OFF).
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact
Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings.
447
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Internal circuits
CRT1B-ID04JS (NPN)
V0
BS+
IN0
BDH
BDL
BS-
G0
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
V1
Internal circuits
IN1
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
G1
V2
IN2
G2
V3
IN3
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
448
G3
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
CRT1B-ID04JS-1 (PNP)
Continuous
short-circuit
protection circuit
BS+
V0
IN0
BDH
BDL
G0
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
V1
IN1
Internal circuits
BS-
G1
Continuous
short-circuit
protection circuit
V2
IN2
G2
V3
IN3
G3
449
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
V
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
G
Signal
S
V
V
Brown (white)
S
Blue (black)
G
Brown (red)
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
CRT1B-ID04JS (NPN)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
V
3-wire sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Note
450
G
Signal
S
V
Brown (white)
S
V
Blue (black)
G
Brown (red)
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
CRT1B-ID04JS-1 (PNP)
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID04JS and CRT1B-ID04JS-1)
20
6.65
24
62.9
(mm)
451
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5-5
Four-point Output Units
CRT1B-OD04JS/CRT1B-OD04JS-1
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
Specification
CRT1B-OD04JS
CRT1B-OD04JS-1
4 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.1 A/output
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.)
1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each
output terminal and G terminal)
output terminal and V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Load short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Output indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply current consumption (See
note.)
Output device supply current
Weight
1.5 ms max.
4 outputs/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
35 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
30 mA/point (G terminal)
21 g max.
Note
30 mA/point (V terminal)
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply
is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The
power supply current consumption is expressed by the following
formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current ×
number of actuators used)
452
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD04JS and CRT1B-OD04JS-1)
CompoNet communications connector
(internal hook)
Node Address
Setting Switch
Left side of Unit
Communications
indicators (MS, NS)
I/O indicators
(OUT0 to OUT3)
Front of Unit
I/O connectors
(OUT0 to OUT3)
OUT2
OUT0
OUT3
OUT1
I/O connector
labels
Right side of Unit
Display Section
Communications
indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O indicators
The indicators show the status of the inputs.
Name
LED status
OUT0 to OUT3 Lit yellow.
Not lit
Setting the Node
Address
Status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value
between 00000000 and 1111110 (0 to 126 decimal). Communications will not
be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is
0000000.
ON
RSV - Not used (keep OFF).
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact
Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings.
453
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Internal circuits
CRT1B-OD04JS (NPN)
V0
OUT0
BS+
BDH
G0
BDL
BS-
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
V1
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
Internal circuits
OUT1
G1
V2
OUT2
G2
V3
OUT3
G3
454
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
CRT1B-OD04JS-1 (PNP)
V0
OUT0
BS+
BDH
G0
BDL
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
V1
Internal circuits
BS-
OUT1
G1
V2
OUT2
G2
V3
OUT3
G3
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
S
V
G
G
V
S
V
Emitter OFF
input
G
V
Signal
G
Signal
CRT1B-OD04JS (NPN)
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
Solenoid, valve, etc.
455
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
S
G
V
G
V
S
V
Emitter OFF
input
G
V
Signal
G
Signal
CRT1B-OD04JS-1 (PNP)
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD04JS and CRT1B-OD04JS-1)
20
6.65
24
62.9
(mm)
456
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5-6
One-point Input/One-point Output Unit
CRT1B-MD02JS/CRT1B-MD02JS-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
Specification
CRT1B-MD02JS
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
Sensor power supply voltage
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Power short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption (See note.)
Input device supply current
Weight
Note
CRT1B-MD02JS-1
1 input
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal)
----1.0 mA max.
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1 input/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
30 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
50 mA/point (G terminal)
50 mA/point (V terminal)
16 g max.
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
457
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Load short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Output indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Output device supply current
458
Specification
CRT1B-MD02JS
CRT1B-MD02JS-1
1 output
NPN
PNP
0.1 A/output
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.)
1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each 1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each
output terminal and G terminal)
output terminal and V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1 output/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
30 mA/point (G terminal)
30 mA/point (V terminal)
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-MD02JS and CRT1B-MD02JS-1)
CompoNet communications connector
(internal hook)
Node Address
Setting Switch
Communications
indicators (MS, NS)
I/O indicators
(IN0, OUT0)
I/O connectors
(IN0, OUT0)
IN0
OUT0
Front of Unit
Left side of Unit
I/O connector
labels
Right side of Unit
Display Section
Communications
indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O indicators
The indicators show the status of the input and output.
Name
IN0, OUT0
Setting the Node
Address
Lit yellow.
LED status
Status
I/O ON
Meaning
The I/O is ON.
Not lit
I/O OFF
The I/O is OFF.
Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value
between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not
be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is
0000000.
ON
RSV - Not used (keep OFF).
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact
Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings.
459
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Internal circuits
CRT1B-MD02JS (NPN)
V
BS+
IN0
BDH
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
G
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
BS-
Internal circuits
BDL
V
OUT0
G
CRT1B-MD02JS-1 (PNP)
V
BS+
IN0
BS-
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
BDL
Internal circuits
BDH
G
V
OUT0
G
460
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
CRT1B-MD02JS (NPN)
Brown (red)
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
G
S
V
G
V
S
G
V
G
Signal
Signal
G
V
V
S
V
Emitter OFF
input
V
Brown (white)
S
Blue (black)
G
Signal
Output Connectors
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
Input Connectors
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
CRT1B-MD02JS-1 (PNP)
Brown (red)
G
3-wire sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
Note
S
V
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
G
S
V
G
G
Signal
Signal
V
S
V
V
Emitter OFF
input
V
Brown (white)
S
G
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
Output Connectors
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
Input Connectors
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
461
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Dimensions (CRT1B-MD02JS and CRT1B-MD02JS-1)
21.65
15
24
48.9
(mm)
462
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
9-5-7
Two-point Input/Two-point Output Unit
CRT1B-MD04JS/CRT1B-MD04JS-1
Input Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
ON voltage
Specification
CRT1B-MD04JS
OFF voltage
OFF current
Input current
Sensor power supply voltage
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Power short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Input indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Communications power supply
current consumption (See note.)
Input device supply current
Weight
Note
CRT1B-MD04JS-1
2 inputs
NPN
PNP
10.5 VDC min. (between each
10.5 VDC min. (between each
input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal)
----1.0 mA max.
3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC)
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.)
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
2 inputs/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage
40 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage
50 mA/point (G terminal)
50 mA/point (V terminal)
21 g max.
The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device
current consumption. The communications power supply is also
used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the
sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected
in addition to the communications power. The power supply current
consumption is expressed by the following formula.
Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave
Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input
current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption ×
number of sensors used)
463
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Output Section Specifications
Item
Model
I/O capacity
Internal I/O common
Rated output current
Load power supply voltage
Residual voltage
Leakage current
ON delay
OFF delay
Number of circuits per common
Load short-circuit detection
Isolation method
Output indicators
Degree of protection
Installation
Power supply type
Output device supply current
464
Specification
CRT1B-MD04JS
CRT1B-MD04JS-1
2 outputs
NPN
PNP
0.1 A/output
Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.)
Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.)
1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each 1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each
output terminal and G terminal)
output terminal and V terminal)
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
2 outputs/common
Not supported.
No isolation
LEDs (yellow)
IEC standard IP20
M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket
Network power supply
30 mA/point (G terminal)
30 mA/point (V terminal)
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-MD04JS and CRT1B-MD04JS-1)
CompoNet communications connector
(internal hook)
Node Address
Setting Switch
Communications
indicators (MS, NS)
I/O indicators
(IN0, IN1, OUT0, OUT1)
Front of Unit
Left side of Unit
I/O connectors
(IN0, IN1, OUT0, OUT1)
OUT0
IN0
OUT1
IN1
I/O connector
labels
Right side of Unit
Display Section
Communications
indicators
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
I/O indicators
The indicators show the status of the inputs.
Name
IN0, IN1,
OUT0, OUT1
Setting the Node
Address
LED status
Lit yellow.
Status
Input ON
Meaning
The input is ON.
Not lit
Input OFF
The input is OFF.
Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value
between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not
be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is
0000000.
ON
RSV - Not used (keep OFF).
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact
Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings.
465
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Internal circuits
CRT1B-MD04JS (NPN)
V
BS+
IN0
BDH
BDL
BS-
G
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
V
Internal circuits
IN1
Continuous
short-circuit
protection
circuit
G
V
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
OUT0
G
V
OUT1
G
466
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
CRT1B-MD04JS-1 (PNP)
Continuous
short-circuit
protection
circuit
BS+
V
IN0
BDH
BDL
G
DC-DC
Converter
(not
isolated)
V
Internal circuits
IN1
G
V
Continuous short-circuit
protection circuit
BS-
OUT0
G
V
OUT1
G
467
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Wiring
The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and
signals are shown below.
CRT1B-MD04JS (NPN)
Brown (red)
3-wire sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
G
S
V
G
V
S
G
V
G
Signal
Signal
G
V
S
V
V
Emitter OFF
input
V
Brown (white)
S
Blue (black)
G
Black (white)
G
Signal
Output Connectors
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
Input Connectors
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
CRT1B-MD04JS-1 (PNP)
Brown (red)
G
Note
V
2-wire sensor
(e.g., limit switch)
G
S
V
G
G
Signal
Signal
Signal
S
V
S
V
V
Emitter OFF
input
V
Brown (white)
S
G
V
Blue (black)
G
3-wire sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric sensor
or proximity sensor)
468
Output Connectors
G
Black (white)
V
Blue (black)
G
Signal
Input Connectors
Solenoid, valve, etc.
Photoelectric
sensor, emitter, etc.
Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for
photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire
colors prior to the revisions.
Section 9-5
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-MD04JS and CRT1B-MD04JS-1)
20
6.65
24
62.9
(mm)
469
Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
470
Section 9-5
SECTION 10
Repeater Units
This section describes the Repeater Unit.
10-1 Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
472
10-2 Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
474
10-2-1 Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
474
471
Section 10-1
Status Areas
10-1 Status Areas
An Repeater Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the
Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and OFF
based on the threshold/monitor values set for each function in that Unit. When
any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit
turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and
bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON.
The Repeater Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages.
Master Unit
The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all
slaves
Transmitted
to Master Unit
Repeater Unit
The Repeater Unit has two status areas:
the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area.
Warning Status Area
The Repeater Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits.
These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
2
Description
----Turns ON when the voltages drops
below the voltage set for the network
power voltage monitor function.
11
12
13
Content
Reserved
Reserved
Network Power Voltage Drop Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Voltage dropped below
threshold.)
Unit Maintenance Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Downstream Network Voltage Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error (Power OFF.)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
-----
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
472
Turns ON when the threshold set for
the Unit Conduction Time Monitor
function is exceeded.
------------Turns ON when the power supply to
the downstream network is OFF.
-------
Section 10-1
Status Areas
Alarm Status Area
The Repeater Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These
bits indicate serious errors in the Unit.
Bit
0
1
Content
Description
--Turns ON when there is an error in
the EEPROM data.
2
Reserved
EEPROM Data Error Flag
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
Reserved
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
---------------------
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
-------
---
473
Section 10-2
Repeater Unit
10-2 Repeater Unit
10-2-1 Repeater Unit
CRT1-RPT01
Specifications
Item
Model
Communications ports
Maximum number of layers
Number of nodes per network
(per Master Unit)
Number of nodes per trunk line
or sub-trunk line
Communications power supply
connector
Communications power supply
connector allowable current
capacity
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Ambient operating atmosphere
Storage temperature
Storage humidity
Installation
Weight
Communications power supply
voltage
Communications power supply
current consumption
474
Specification
CRS1-RPT01
Upstream port (port 1): Trunk line or sub-trunk line
Downstream port (port 2): Sub-trunk line (Can be wired with the
same communications specifications as the Master Unit.)
Different types of communications cable can be connected to the
upstream and downstream ports.
Up to two extra segment layers can be created from the Master Unit
64 nodes
32 nodes
One downstream communications port power supply connector
Note Communications power for the Repeater Unit is supplied from
the BS+ and BS− terminals on the upstream port communications connector (PORT1).
5 A max. (UL: 4 A)
Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line).
10 to 150 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm or 50 m/s2
150 m/s2
500 VAC (between isolated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits)
−10 to 55°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
−25 to 65°C
25% to 85% (with no condensation)
DIN Track or M4 screws
73 g
14 to 26.4 VDC
95 mA max.
Section 10-2
Repeater Unit
Component Names and Functions
Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left)
Communications indicators: MS and NS
Port 1:
Upstream port communications
23
23
MS NS
456
789
01
RPT
NODE ADR
789
456
01
PORT1
X10
[0-63]
RPT
X1
CRS1-RPT01
CRS1
RPT01
NETWORK POWER SUPPLY
PORT2
BS+
BSDC24V
INPUT
Downstream port
communications power supply
connector (removable)
Port 2:
Downstream port
communications connector
Indicator Section
Communications
Indicators
The communications indicators have the following meanings.
MS (Module Status): Indicates the status of the node with a two-color LED
(green/red).
NS (Network Status): Indicates the status of communications with a two-color
LED (green/red).
Name
MS
Indicator status
Lit green.
Status
Normal status
Meaning
The Unit is operating normally.
Flashing
green.
Lit red.
---
---
Flashing red.
Not lit.
NS
Lit green.
Flashing
green.
Lit red.
Flashing red.
Not lit.
Fatal error
A hardware error has occurred in the Unit. The watchdog
timer has timed-out.
Non-fatal error
There is an error in the settings.
An EEPROM checksum error has occurred.
Power OFF/Startup
The power supply is OFF, the Unit is being reset, or the Unit
is being initialized.
Online and participating
Normal communications are in progress and the node is participating in the network.
Online but not participatNormal communications are in progress but the node is not
ing
yet participating in the network.
Fatal communications
The address is set out of range or the same address has
error
been set for more than one node.
Non-fatal communications Polling has timed out. The network has timed out.
error
Power OFF/Baud rate not The power supply is OFF or the baud rate has not been
yet detected.
detected.
Note
When flashing, indicators are lit for 0.5 s and not lit for 0.5 s.
475
Section 10-2
Repeater Unit
Setting the Node
Address
The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left
rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum
node address is 63.)
7 8
2 3 4
5 6
9
5 6
7 8
9
0 1
2 3 4
The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON.
0 1
1s digit of node address
10s digit of node address
Terminal Arrangement
BS+
Communications power supply +
BDH
Communications data high
BDL
Communications data low
BS−
Communications power supply −
The BS+ and BS− terminals are the communications power for the
Repeater Unit.
BDL
BS+
Downstream Port
Communications
Connector (Port 2)
BDH
Note
BS−
Upstream Port
Communications
Connector (Port 1)
Communications power supply −
Communications data low
Communications data high
Communications power supply +
Downstream Port Communications Power Supply Connector
This connector supplies communications power to Slave Units and Repeater
Units connected to the downstream communications connector (port 2).
BS+
Communications power supply +
BS−
Communications power supply −
Note
476
Communications power for the Repeater Unit is supplied from the
BS+ and BS− terminals on the upstream port communications connector (port 1).
Section 10-2
Repeater Unit
27.5
42.3
3.1
50
Dimensions
95
(mm)
477
Repeater Unit
478
Section 10-2
SECTION 11
Smart Functions
This section individually describes the functions provided by CompoNet Slave Unit. The functions are divided into those
supported by all CompoNet Slave Units and those supported only by specific CompoNet Slave Units.
11-1 CX-Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-1 Offline Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-2 Online Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-1 Automatic Baud Rate Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-2 Hold/Clear Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-3 Network Power Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-4 Unit Conduction Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-5 Naming Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-6 Naming Connected Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-7 Communications Error History Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-8 Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-1 I/O Power Status Monitor (Digital I/O Slave Units Only) . . . . . . . .
11-3-2 Input Filter (Input Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-3 Error Prevention for Surge Current at Startup (Input Units Only) . .
11-3-4 Contact Operation Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-5 Total ON Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-6 Operation Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-7 Power Supply Short-circuit Detection (Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-8 Load Short-circuit Detection (Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-1 AD Conversion Point Setting (only Input Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-2 Moving Average Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-3 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-4 Peak/Bottom Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-5 Top/Valley Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-6 Rate of Change Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-7 Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-8 Disconnected Line Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-9 User Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-10 Cumulated Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4-11 Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-1 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-2 User Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-3 Cumulated Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-4 Setting Output Value for Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
481
481
482
486
486
486
487
488
490
491
492
494
495
495
496
497
498
499
502
504
505
507
507
508
509
513
515
518
520
524
524
526
529
530
530
534
537
539
479
11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-1 Moving Average Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-2 Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-3 Peak/Bottom Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-4 Top/Valley Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-5 Top/Valley Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-6 Rate of Change Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-7 Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-8 Temperature Range Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-9 Data Comparison between Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-10 Input Error Detection Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-11 Off-wire Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-12 Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-13 Cumulated Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-14 User Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
480
540
540
541
544
546
549
550
552
556
558
560
561
561
562
565
Section 11-1
CX-Integrator
11-1 CX-Integrator
There are two main network display windows in the CX-Integrator: the Online
Window and the Offline Window.
11-1-1 Offline Window
The Offline Window has a white background and is displayed when the CXIntegrator is started. Normally, parameters and other settings are made in this
window. The devices parameters for any Slave Unit can be set or edited simply by double-clicking on the Slave Unit in the Offline Window. Refer to 11-2
Functions Common to All Slave Units for details on how to set and edit functions for each Slave Unit. Also refer to the settings methods provided for each
Slave Unit.
Offline Window
Workspace
Window
Network
Configuration
Window
Component List
Configuration Window
The Configuration Window is used to set and edit functions. To display the
Configuration Window, double-click the icon for Slave Unit or right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.
481
Section 11-1
CX-Integrator
11-1-2 Online Window
The Online Window is used to monitor information for CompoNet Slave Units.
Use the following procedure to switch from offline to online.
1. Click the
icon in the menu, or select Network - Work Online from the
menu. The background color of the Network Configuration Window will
change to gray.
2. Right-click the network name in the Workspace Window, and select Connect from the pop-up menu.
Toggles to on-line status.
While connected online, information on the CompoNet Slave Units is displayed in the Monitor Window. Open this window to monitor the CompoNet
Slave Units.
Note
482
The Monitor Window displays data that is uploaded with the network. The
data is not constantly updated through communications. To obtain the latest
CompoNet Slave Unit status, click the Update Button in the Monitor Window
to read the data from the network.
Section 11-1
CX-Integrator
Online Window
Online
Connection
Information
Window
Monitor Window
To display the Monitor Window for a CompoNet Slave Unit, right-click the icon
for that Slave Unit and select Monitor from the pop-up window.
Maintenance information:
Displays the generated
maintenance information.
Update Button:
Refreshes the current Slave Unit
maintenance information.
Save Maintenance Counter Button:
The maintenance counter value can be
saved to the flash memory in the Slave Unit.
■
OUT, IN, and Operation Time Tab Pages
More detailed maintenance information can be found on the OUT, IN, and
Operation Time Tab Pages.
483
CX-Integrator
484
Section 11-1
CX-Integrator
Section 11-1
485
Functions Common to All Slave Units
Section 11-2
11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units
This section describes the functions common to all CompoNet Slave Units
and the procedures for using these functions.
The functions described in 11-2-1 Automatic Baud Rate Detection and 11-2-2
Hold/Clear Outputs are supported by Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors.
11-2-1 Automatic Baud Rate Detection
Description
The CompoNet Slave Units are automatically set to the same baud rate as the
Master Unit. It is not necessary to set the baud rate separately for any Slave
Unit.
The baud rate is set when communications is established with the Master Unit
after the power is turned ON. The baud rate setting is stored in memory until
the power is turned ON again or until the Master Unit baud rate setting is
changed.
11-2-2 Hold/Clear Outputs
Description
Output Units can be set to hold or clear outputs when an error occurs.
Procedure Using CXIntegrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the OUT Tab.
4. Double-click I/O Comment for the terminal to be set. The Edit Terminal
Window will be displayed. Select either to clear or hold outputs when a
communications error (Fault Action) and idle state (Idle Action) occurs, and
then click the OK Button.
486
Section 11-2
Functions Common to All Slave Units
Fault Action
Clear
Hold
Clears all output data from the Master Unit to 0 when a communications error occurs.
Holds all output data from the Master Unit at its current status when a
communications error occurs.
A communications error occurs when communications with the Master
Unit are interrupted.
Idle Action
Clear
Hold
Clears all output data from the Master Unit to 0 when idle action occurs.
Holds all output data from the Master Unit at its current status when idle
action occurs.
Idle action is the status that results when an idle output specification is received from the Master Unit. An idle output is specified when a CPU Unit
monitoring error occurs in a CS/CJ-series Master Unit.
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-2-3 Network Power Voltage Monitor
Description
The Network Power Voltage Monitor function stores the present value, minimum value, and maximum value of the network power voltage in the Slave
Unit memory. If a monitor voltage is set using the CX-Integrator, the monitor
voltage is stored in the Slave Unit memory. (The default is 14 V.) If the voltage
drops below the monitor voltage, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit will
turn ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using
the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.
Note
(1) The minimum communications power voltage for the CompoNet network
itself is 14 V, so if the network power voltage drops below 14 V, it may not
be possible to read a measurement value using the CX-Integrator.
(2) The maximum and minimum values of the network power voltage are
cleared when the network power is turned OFF.
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
487
Functions Common to All Slave Units
Section 11-2
3. Click the General Tab. Enter the desired value in the Network Power Voltage Threshold Field. (The default is 14 V.)
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-2-4 Unit Conduction Time Monitor
Description
The cumulative time that power is ON (i.e., the Total ON Time) to the Slave
Unit's internal circuits can be stored in the Slave Unit memory. (This data can
be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.)
The monitor value is stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the total ON
time reaches the monitor value, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns
ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the
CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.
• Measurement time: 0 to 429,496,729.5 h
(Stored data: 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex)
• Measurement unit: 0.1 h
• Storage unit: 0.2 h
488
Section 11-2
Functions Common to All Slave Units
Slave Unit
Stored in Slave Unit
memory
Total ON time
CompoNet network
Total ON time
Internal circuit
power supply
Note
ON
OFF
The Unit Conduction Time Monitor Function adds up the time the
CompoNet Slave Unit network power supply is ON. The time when
the power is OFF is not included.
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the General Tab. Enter the desired value in the Unit Conduction Time
Threshold Field.
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
489
Section 11-2
Functions Common to All Slave Units
11-2-5 Naming Units
Description
The user can set any name for each Unit (with up to 32 characters) as a comment. The name is stored in the Slave Unit memory. The CX-Integrator or
explicit messages can be used to read/write the name (i.e., the comment).
CX-Integrator
Unit name (comment)
CompoNet network
Slave Unit
Unit name
Stored in Unit memory
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the General Tab. Enter the desired value in the Comment Field.
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
490
Section 11-2
Functions Common to All Slave Units
11-2-6 Naming Connected Devices
Description
The user can set any name for each I/O contact in the Unit (with up to 32
characters). These names are stored in the Slave Unit memory. Connected
devices can be checked for each I/O contact, which is useful for remote maintenance and other applications where, for example, devices with errors need
to be identified. The CX-Integrator or explicit messages can be used to read/
write the name (i.e., comment).
CX-Integrator
Connected device name (comment)
CompoNet network
Slave Unit
Connected device
name
Stored in Slave Unit memory
Connected device
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the IN or OUT Tab.
491
Section 11-2
Functions Common to All Slave Units
4. Double-click in the I/O Comment Column of the device for which a comment is to be added. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Enter the
desired name in the I/O Comment Field and click the OK Button.
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-2-7 Communications Error History Monitor
Description
Enables storing the error (communication failure details, the communications
power supply voltage at the time of failure, and the Unit conduction time) for
the most recent 4 communication failures within the slave unit.
The communications error history can be read using the CX-Integrator.
CompoNet network
Status when
communications
error occurred
Slave Unit
1st error
2nd error
3rd error
4th error
492
Recorded in Slave Unit
memory
Functions Common to All Slave Units
Section 11-2
Checking Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Switch to the Online Window, and then right-click the icon for the desired
CompoNet Slave Unit in the Network Configuration Window and select
Monitor from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the Error History Tab in the Monitor Window. The communications
error history showing the previous four errors will be displayed, as shown
below. To reset the entire error history, click the Clear Button.
4. Click the Close Button and exit the window.
493
Functions Common to All Slave Units
Section 11-2
11-2-8 Last Maintenance Date
Description
This function can be used to write the date for the last date maintenance was
performed in the Slave Unit memory. This makes it easier to decide when the
next maintenance should be performed. This maintenance date can be written using the CX-Integrator.
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the General Tab and select a date from the Last Maintenance Date
Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pulldown menu.)
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
494
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
Bit Slave Units support the I/O filter described in 11-3-2 Input Filter (Input
Units Only).
11-3-1 I/O Power Status Monitor (Digital I/O Slave Units Only)
Description
The I/O power status monitor function can be used to detect whether the I/O
power is ON.
When the I/O power is turned OFF, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit
turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using
the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.
Slave Unit
I/O power
supply voltage
I/O power supply
Sensor
Monitors whether or not the I/O
power supply is ON.
Note
A detection voltage cannot be set for the I/O power supply.
Checking Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Switch to the Online Window, and then right-click the icon for the desired
CompoNet Slave Unit in the Network Configuration Window and select
Monitor from the pop-up menu. If IO Power Supply 1 Error is selected in
the Monitor Window, it means that the I/O power is not ON.
3.
Click the Close Button and exit the window.
495
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
11-3-2 Input Filter (Input Units Only)
Description
An input value is read more than once during a set time interval. The input
value can be set to be enabled only when all the read values are the same.
This function operates for all input points in one Slave Unit.
Input Time Constant
When the input data turns ON, the input data is read 4 times at a set time (1/4
of the time setting). The internal input data turns ON only when all four values
are ON. The ON timing is delayed by the value of the input time constant. The
same function is supported when the input data turns OFF.
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
ON
ON
ON
ON
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
The internal input data
remains OFF because the
read input data was not ON
all 4 times.
ON
The internal input
data turns ON
because the read
input data was
ON all 4 times.
Input data
Input data
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON delay (= input filter time)
OFF Response Time
When the input data turns OFF, the input data is read 5 times at a set interval
(1/5 of the OFF response time setting). The internal input data turns OFF only
when all values are OFF. The OFF timing is delayed by the value of the OFF
response time.
This function can also be used to implement an OFF delay.
To enable reading pulses shorter than the communications cycle time, set the
OFF response time to a value longer than the communications cycle time.
(The input may remain ON if the input pulse interval is too short.)
1
2
3
4
1
5
2
3
4
5
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Input data
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
The internal input
data remains ON
because read input
data was not OFF
all 5 times.
Input data
ON
The internal
input data turns
OFF because
the read input
data was OFF
all 5 times.
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF-delay time
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the IN Tab. Select the Input Time Constant and OFF Delay from the
pull-down lists.
496
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
Section 11-3
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5.
Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-3-3 Error Prevention for Surge Current at Startup (Input Units Only)
Description
This function can be used to prevent reading inputs while the I/O power is
OFF and for 100 ms after the I/O power is turned ON (i.e., until the Slave Unit
stabilizes). It helps avoid input errors caused by inrush current from connected devices when the I/O power supply is turned ON. This function is
enabled or disabled by the CX-Integrator or by explicit messages.
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the IN Tab, and select Enable for the Sensor Power ON Delay.
497
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-3-4 Contact Operation Monitor
Description
The number of times each input contact or output contact is turned ON can be
counted (resolution: 50 Hz max.) and stored in Slave Unit memory. (This data
can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.)
A monitor value can be stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the number
of contact operations reaches the monitor value, a flag in a status area in the
Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be
read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.
• No. of times measured: 0 to 4,294,967,295
(Stored data: 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex)
• Measurement unit: No. of operations
Slave Unit
Stored in Slave Unit memory
No. of
operations
OFF → ON
I/O power supply
Output device
(e.g., relay)
Note
No. of times output
contact turns ON:
1
2
(1) The contact operation monitor and the total ON time monitor cannot be
used for the same contact at the same time. Select only one of these
functions under the Detection Mode.
(2) This function does not operate if the I/O power is not turned ON.
498
3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
Section 11-3
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the IN Tab.
4. Double-click the I/O Comment column for the terminal to be set. The Edit
Terminal Window will be displayed. Select Count for the Detection Mode,
enter the monitor value, and then click the OK Button.
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-3-5 Total ON Time Monitor
Description
This function totals the time that each input and output contact is ON (unit: s)
and stores this total time in the Slave Unit memory. (This data can be read
using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.)
A monitor value can be stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the set total
time has been reached, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to
notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.
499
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
• Measurement time: 0 to 4,294,967,295 s
(Stored data: 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex)
• Measurement unit: s
Slave Unit
Stored in Slave
Unit memory
Total ON time
I/O power supply
Sensor
Total ON time
Connected device
ON
OFF
Note
(1) The total ON time monitor and the contact operation monitor cannot be
used for the same contact at the same time. Select only one of these
functions under the Detection Mode.
(2) This function does not operate if the I/O power is not turned ON.
(3) The Total ON Time Monitor Function checks at 1 second intervals whether or not the connected device is turned ON. Keep this in mind when measuring total ON times for inputs of less than 1 s.
■
Measuring an ON Time of 0.5 s
As shown in Figure A, the actual ON time is 1.5 s (3 × 0.5 s) but the total ON
time is measured only as 1 s because the input is ON only once when a measurement is taken.
Measured approx. every 1 s
ON
OFF
0.5 s
Figure A
In Figure B, the actual ON time is 1.5 s (3 × 0.5 s) but the total ON time is
measured as 2 s because the input is ON twice when a measurement is
taken.
Measured approx. every 1 s
ON
OFF
0.5 s
Figure B
■
Measuring an ON Time of 1.5 s
In Figure C, the actual ON time is 3 s (2 × 1.5 s) but the total ON time is measured as 4 s because the input is ON 4 times when a measurement is taken.
500
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
Measured approx. every 1 s
ON
OFF
1.5 s
Figure C
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the IN Tab.
4. Double-click the I/O Comment column for the terminal to be set. The Edit
Terminal Window will be displayed. Select Time for the Detection Mode,
enter the monitor value in the Value Field, and then click the OK Button.
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
501
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
11-3-6 Operation Time Monitor
Description
This function can be used to measure the contact I/O timing (ON/OFF) in the
Slave Unit (measurement unit: ms) and store the measurement in the Slave
Unit memory. (This data can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit
messages.)
The operation time of various combinations of contacts can be monitored in
the Slave Unit (e.g., input-output, output-input, input-input, and output-output).
In addition, the trigger edge pattern can be set to ON→OFF, ON→ON,
OFF→OFF, or OFF→ON. Any input number and output number combination
can also be set. (The number of contact points that can be set depends on the
Unit.)
This function allows high-precision measurement of the operation time without
being affected by the communications cycle. A monitor value can be stored in
the Slave Unit memory so once the set monitor time has been exceeded, a
flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The
notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.
• The operation time is stored after the time lag from when the output turns
ON until when the input turns ON is measured. The operation time continues to be measured internally until the next output turns ON. The measurement value is refreshed if the input turns ON again before the next
output turns ON. For cylinders and other applications with reciprocating
operation that receive inputs during the operating time, the measurement
taken during operation (outward motion) may be refreshed during the
release (return motion).
Alternatively, if the output turns ON twice before the input turns ON, the
time measured is from when the second output turns ON till when the input
turns ON.
Output ON
OFF
Input
ON
OFF
t1
t3
t2
Operation
Time
Monitor
Output
(Previous value)
t1
t2
t3
ON
OFF
ON
Input
OFF
Measures this time period.
Note
(1) If the same contact is used for the start and end of measurement and the
same trigger edge pattern is used for both, the measured time will always
be 0 ms.
(2) If monitor settings are changed while this function is being used, the accuracy of subsequent monitoring operations cannot be guaranteed. Cor-
502
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
Section 11-3
rect monitoring operations will begin again from the point of the next start
trigger.
(3) If the measurement start trigger is input and the monitoring set value expires, the flag in the internal Unit Status Area turns ON even if the measurement end trigger has not been input. The Unit's operation time
monitor value will retain the previous measurement value until the measurement end trigger is input.
Settings Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the Operation Time Tab.
4. Double-click the Equipment Name to be monitored. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Enter the set value in the Operation Time Field and
select the points to be monitored from the pull-down lists of the Start Point
and End Point Fields. Then select the ON edge or OFF edge monitoring in
the Edge Pattern Field and click the OK Button.
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
503
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
11-3-7 Power Supply Short-circuit Detection (Inputs)
Description
This function monitors the current in the sensor power supply section and
detects a power supply short-circuit if the current per input contact exceeds a
rated value. Power supply short-circuit detection functions in two different
ways depending on Unit specifications. For some Units, the I/O power supply
is turned OFF to the entire Unit if a short-circuit is detected for even one input.
For other Units, the I/O power is turned OFF individually for each input.
For information on load short-circuit detection, refer to the power short-circuit
protection and input device power supply specifications for the applicable
Unit.
An indicator on the Slave Unit can be used to see if a power supply short-circuit has been detected. Also, if a short-circuit has been detected, an internal
status bit will turn ON in the Slave Unit to inform the Master Unit. The current
status can be read using the CX-Integrator or an explicit message. Once the
cause of the short-circuit has been removed, operation will recover automatically and power will be output to the connector where the short-circuit was
detected.
Short-circuit
Is the sensor power supply short-circuited?
Sensor
Note
Use a power supply device with a rating of 100 W or higher as the communications power supply for network power supply. A short-circuit is detected if a
current that exceeds a specified value flows in the sensor power supply output
of the Unit. Also, the communications power supply may temporarily turn OFF
when a short circuit occurs. Operation will automatically be restored once the
cause of the short circuit has been removed, but implement an external circuit
so that the system operates safely while the outputs are turned OFF. Use the
following formula as a guide for Sensor communications power supply capacity.
• Total network current = Total Unit current consumption + Total Sensor current consumption
• Communications power supply capacity used ≥ (Total network current +
(Short-circuit detection current)) × (CompoNet network voltage used)
Monitoring Status
with the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Go online, right-click the icon of the applicable CompoNet Slave Unit in the
Network Configuration Window, and select Monitor.
3. Make sure that the Sensor Power Supply Short-circuit Check Box is selected.
504
Section 11-3
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
4. Click the Close Button. The window will close.
11-3-8 Load Short-circuit Detection (Outputs)
Description
This function monitors the load current in the output section and detects a
load short-circuit if the current per contact (or common) exceeds a rated
value. If a load short-circuited is detected, the outputs are turned OFF to prevent damage to the Unit output circuits. Load short-circuit detection functions
in two different ways depending on Unit specifications. For some Units, the
outputs are turned OFF for the entire Unit if a short-circuit is detected for even
one output. For other Units, the outputs are turned OFF individually. For information on load short-circuit detection, refer to the rated output current and
internal circuits in the specifications for the applicable Unit.
An indicator on the Slave Unit can be used to see if a load short-circuit has
been detected. Also, if a short-circuit has been detected, an internal status bit
will turn ON in the Slave Unit to inform the Master Unit. The current status can
be read using the CX-Integrator or an explicit message. Once the cause of the
short-circuit has been removed, operation will recover automatically and
power will be output to the connector where the short-circuit was detected.
Short-circuit
Output forced OFF
Is the load short-circuited?
Load
Note
An OMRON S82J-series Power Supply device is recommended for the I/O
power supply. Load short-circuits may not be detected if a power supply with
vertical-drop overcurrent protection characteristics is used. If a power supply
505
Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units
Section 11-3
device with vertical-drop overcurrent protection characteristics is used, use
one with a rating of 100 W min.
Monitoring Status
with the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Go online, right-click the icon of the applicable CompoNet Slave Unit in the
Network Configuration Window, and select Monitor.
3. Make sure that the External Load Short-circuit Protection Check Box is selected.
4. Click the Close Button. The window will close.
506
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
11-4-1 AD Conversion Point Setting (only Input Unit)
Description
Normally, when using a four-point Input Unit, the values for the four inputs are
converted in sequence. The setting can be changed, however, so that unused
inputs are not converted. By reducing the number of conversion points, the
conversion cycle speed is increased.
Conversion points
4 points (default)
Details
Converts Input CH0, CH1, CH2, and
CH3.
CRT1-AD
0
1
2
3
All points used.
3 points
Converts Input CH0, CH1, and CH2.
CRT1-AD
0
1
2
3
Used points
2 points
Converts Input CH0 and CH1.
CRT1-AD
0
1
2
3
Used points
1 point
Converts Input CH0 only.
CRT1-AD
0
1
2
3
Used points
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
507
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
3. Click the General Tab and select the number of conversion points from the
inputs listed on the pull-down menu under the Available Channels Field.
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-4-2 Moving Average Processing
Description
This function calculates the average value (moving average) of the previous
eight inputs, and uses the resulting value as conversion data. When the input
value fluctuates frequently, as shown in the following diagram, averaging can
be used to produce a stable input value.
Input analog value
Actual input
Averaged input
Time
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where moving average processing is to
be performed, and select Moving Average under the Function Choice
heading
508
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-4-3 Scaling
Description
The default setting is used to perform AD conversion of analog input values,
scaling them to a count between 0 and 6,000. Scaling can be used to change
scaled values that correspond to the input signal range into other values
required by the user (industry unit values). Scaling also eliminates the need
for ladder programming in the Master Unit to perform math operations. The
following two methods of input scaling can be used.
Default Scaling
Analog input values (count values) are converted to the original voltage and
current values. The units used are mV or µA. When default scaling is
selected, scaling is performed according to the range used, as shown in the
following table.
Input
range
0 to 5 V
100%
5,000 mV
0%
Disconnected
line
0000 mV
0000 hex
0 to 10 V
10,000
mV
0000 mV
0000 hex
5,000 mV
−10 to 10 V
0 to
4 to
(CRT120 mA
20 mA
AD04 only)
10,000 mV 20,000 µA 20,000 µA
1,000 mV
7FFF hex
–10,000 mV 0000 µA
0000 hex
0000 hex
1 to 5 V
4,000 µA
7FFF hex
509
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
User Scaling
Analog input values (count values) are scaled to user-defined values. The
conversion values for 100% and 0% are set using the CX-Integrator.
Input
range
100%
0%
Disconnected
line
−10 to 10 V
0 to
(CRT120 mA
AD04 only)
Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000)
Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000)
0000 hex 0000 hex 7FFF hex 0000 hex
0000 hex
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
4 to
20 mA
7FFF hex
Scaling value
Value for 100% set by user
(Scaling point 2)
Conversion
Value for 0% set by user
(Scaling point 1)
Input signal range
0%
100%
Note Reverse scaling, where the 0% scaling value is higher than the 100% scaling
value, is also supported.
Offset Compensation
Scaling the analog input values of linear sensors to distances produces
mounting error in the sensor. Offset compensation compensates for the error
that occurs during scaling. The offset amount is added to the scaled line
before processing, as shown in the following diagram. The offset (error) value
can be input between –28,000 to 28,000, but make sure that underflow or
overflow does not occur. The High Limit is 7FFE hex and the Low Limit is
8000 hex.
Note The offset value can be set even when using default scaling.
Upper limit: 7FFE hex (32766)
100% scaling value
Scaled line
0% scaling
Offset value
(–28,000 to 28,000)
Lower limit: 8000 hex (−32768)
0%
100%
Input signal range
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
510
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where scaling is to be performed, and select Scaling under the Function Choice heading.
4. Click the Scaling Tab, and select either Default Scaling or User Scaling.
511
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
5. When User Scaling is selected, set the 0% value in the Scaling Point (0%)
Field, and set the 100% value in the Scaling Point (100%) Field.
6. For offset compensation, set the offset value in the Scaling Offset Field.
Either Default Scaling or User Scaling can be set in the Scaling Type Field.
7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
8. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
512
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
11-4-4 Peak/Bottom Hold
Description
Peak/bottom hold is used to hold the maximum (peak) value or minimum (bottom) value of the analog input value. When the Hold Flag (output) allocated in
the OUT Area turns ON, the hold function starts, searching for the peak or
bottom value until the Hold Flag turns OFF. (The peak/bottom value is
refreshed when the Hold Flag turns OFF.) The comparator function can be
used to compare the peak or bottom values allocated as analog data. (Refer
to details on the comparator function.)
■ Example of Bottom Hold
Analog input value
The bottom value will
be updated.
Hold value
Previous value
Hold Flag
ON
Hold function starts
Bottom hold value
OFF
Hold function stops
Note A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag
turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit’s ladder program until notification of the
flag’s status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even when the Hold Flag
is ON, the first analog data transmitted to the Master Unit after the CPU Unit
power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag was OFF. To
collect peak/bottom hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master Unit, configure a ladder program that considers the transmission delay when the Hold
Flag is turned ON, and enables only the peak/bottom hold values after a fixed
time lag.
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where Peak/Bottom is to be set, and select Peak/Bottom under the Function Choice heading.
513
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
4. To allocate the Hold Flags (output) in the default connection path, click the
General Tab and select Holding Value from the pull-down menu in the Default Connection Path (Out) Field.
5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
514
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
11-4-5 Top/Valley Hold
Description
Top/valley hold is used to hold the top and valley values of the analog input
value.
Analog values that fluctuate more than twice the hysteresis value are monitored, and the top or valley values are held. The top or valley value is allocated along with the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, which can be used to
check the hold timing.
When the Hold Flag (output) allocated in the OUT Area turns ON, the hold
function starts, refreshing the top or valley value until the Hold Flag turns OFF.
(The last value is held when the Hold Flag turns OFF, but the next time the
Hold Flag turns ON, the hold value is initialized as soon as a top or valley
occurs.) The comparator can be used to compare the top or valley value allocated as analog data. (Refer to details on the comparator function.)
■ Example of Valley Hold
Analog input value
Valley hold value
Last value is held.
Hold value
Hold Flag
Hold function starts
Hold function stops
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flag
One-shot time
Note
1. A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag
turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit’s ladder program until notification of
the flag’s status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even after the Hold
Flag is ON, the first analog data transmitted to the Master Unit after the
CPU Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag
was OFF. To collect top/valley hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master
Unit, configure a ladder program which considers the transmission delay
time when the Hold Flag is turned ON, and enables only the top/valley hold
values after a fixed time lag.
2. The time that the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are ON can be adjusted by setting the one-shot time. Use the CX-Integrator to set the one-shot
time (the setting range is 1 to 65,535 ms).
3. If the Hold Flag turns OFF during the time the Top/Valley Detection Timing
Flag is set to be ON, both flags will turn OFF simultaneously.
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where top/valley hold is to be set, and select Top/Valley under the Function Choice heading.
515
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
4. To allocate the Hold Flag (output) in the default connection path, click the
General Tab, and select Holding Value from the pull-down menu in the
Default Connection Path (Out) Field.
5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
516
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Hysteresis Setting
The hysteresis value can be set using the CX-Integrator to prevent detection
of top or valley values that occur due to minor fluctuations in the analog input
value. This will cause the start of data holding to be delayed after the actual
top or valley value occurs, as shown in the following diagram.
Timing for Setting Data
Analog input value
Set hysteresis value × 2
Valley hold value
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flag
Delay
Setting Hysteresis Using
the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Input the value for hysteresis in the Hysteresis Field in the Top/Valley Tab
under the Function Choice heading.
2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button.
3. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Note The hysteresis value set for the top/valley hold function is also used as the
hysteresis value for the comparator function.
517
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
One-shot Time Setting
1,2,3...
1. Input the desired value in the SHOT Off Delay Field of the Top/Valley Tab
under the Function Choice heading.
2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button.
3. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-4-6 Rate of Change Calculation
Description
The rate of change can be obtained for each sampling cycle set for the analog
input data. This function calculates the difference between each set sampling
cycle and value obtained in the previous cycle. The default setting for the
sampling cycle is 100 ms and the sampling cycle setting range is 10 to
65,530 ms (in units of 10 ms).
Analog input value
Analog data
Time
0
Rate of change
Differentiation data
Note If the sampling cycle is set to a small value, the rate of change will be sensitive
to small changes. If the analog data is subject to minute fluctuations, and the
518
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
sampling cycle is shorter than the cycle of fluctuation, the fluctuation will be
regarded as the rate of change. To prevent this occurring, use moving average
processing, which will set a longer sampling cycle.
Desired gradient
Fluctuation in analog value
Short sampling cycle
Long sampling cycle
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where rate of change is to be set, and
select Rate of Change under the Function Choice heading.
4. Click the Rate of Change Tab and input the desired value for the sampling
cycle in the Sampling Rate Field.
519
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-4-7 Comparator
Description
Four values can be set in the Slave Unit, and compared with the Analog Data
values.
The four set values are the Alarm Trip Point High (HH), the Warning Trip Point
High (H), the Warning Trip Point Low (L), and the Alarm Trip Point Low (LL).
When the analog data value exceeds the set value, the Comparator Result
Flag in the area for Analog Status Flags turns ON. If an alarm does not occur,
the Normal Flag (pass signal) turns ON.
HH
H
Set values
L
LL
HH alarm
Comparator Result Flag
(in Analog Status Flags)
ON/OFF
H alarm
Normal Flag
(Pass signal)
L alarm
LL alarm
Note When the analog input value changes earlier than the conversion cycle, the
High Limit alarm may turn ON without the Normal Flag (pass signal) turning
ON for the Low Limit alarm. Configure ladder programs to prevent this occurring.
520
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Setting Hysteresis
The Comparator Result Flag turns OFF when the value is lower than the hysteresis width (H or HH alarm occurs) or exceeds it (L or LL alarm occurs), as
shown in the following diagram. If the analog value fluctuates around the
threshold, and the flag repeatedly turns ON and OFF, set the hysteresis to
stabilize the flag operation.
HH set value or
H set value
Hysteresis width
Hysteresis
width
LL set value or L
set value
HH Alarm Flag or
H Alarm Flag
OFF Delay
LL Alarm Flag or
L Alarm Flag
The time until the Comparator Result Flag turns OFF can be extended. For
example, even if the Flag is ON momentarily, the OFF delay can be set so that
the Master Unit can receive notification of the Flag’s status.
HH set value
Hysteresis width
OFF delay
HH Alarm Flag
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where the comparator function is to be
set, and select Comparator under the Function Choice heading.
521
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
4. Click the Comparator Tab and set the four trip points. The example here
shows the setting for Alarm Trip Point High (HH).
5. To set the hysteresis value, input the desired value in the Hysteresis Field.
522
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
Note The hysteresis value set for the comparator function is also used as the hysteresis value for the top/valley hold function.
6. To set the OFF delay function, input the desired value in the Comparator
Off Delay Field.
7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
523
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
8. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-4-8 Disconnected Line Detection
Description
When a disconnection occurs in an analog input line (voltage input or current
input), the Disconnected Line Detection Flag turns ON for each input that is
valid in the number of AD conversion points. The Disconnected Line Detection
Flags are included in the Analog Status Flags.
When Disconnected Line Detection is enabled, the value of AD conversion
data is set to 7FFF hex. When the input returns to a value within the range
that can be converted, the Disconnected Line Detection function will automatically be turned OFF, and normal data conversion will occur.
Disconnected Line detection is supported for input ranges of 1 to 5 V or 4 to
20 mA only. With the 1 to 5 V input range, a disconnected line is detected
when the input voltage is below 0.76 V (less than 6%). With the 4 to 20 mA
input range, a disconnected line is detected when the input current is below
3.04 mA.
11-4-9 User Adjustment
Description
Depending on factors such as the characteristics and connection methods of
the input device, the input can be adjusted to compensate for error in the input
voltage or current. The following diagram shows when compensation is
applied to the conversion line at the two points for 0% and 100%.
Conversion data
After adjustment
Before adjustment
0%
100%
Voltage/current
The following table shows the input ranges that support user adjustment.
Input range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Low Limit
–0.25 to 0.25 V
0.8 to 1.2 V
–0.5 to 0.5 V
–11 to –9.0 V
3.2 to 4.8 mA
–1.0 to 1.0 mA
High Limit
4.75 to 5.25 V
4.8 to 5.2 V
9.5 to 10.5 V
9.0 to 11 V
19.2 to 20.8 mA
19 to 21 mA
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
524
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
3. Select the Tab Page for the input to be adjusted, and click the Adjustment
Button. (At this time, set the input range.)
4. Input the voltage (or current) transmitted from the connected device to the
Unit’s input terminal that is equivalent to the 100% value.
5. Click the Fix Upper Adjusting Value Button in the Adjustment Window,
and input the adjusted value.
6. Input the voltage (or current) transmitted from the connected device to the
Unit’s input terminal that is equivalent to the 0% value.
7. Click the Fix Lower Adjusting Value Button, and input the adjusted value.
525
Section 11-4
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
To return the set value to the default setting, click the Default Setting Button.
8. Click the Close Button to close the Adjustment Window.
9. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
10. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-4-10 Cumulated Count
Description
The cumulated count calculates an approximation to the integral of analog
input values over time. The cumulated value can be calculated in “count
hours” (by selecting “hours”) or “count minutes” (by selecting “minutes”). The
count value is the analog input value in the industry unit obtained after scaling. For example, 100.0 count hours indicates a value equivalent to an analog
input value of 100 counts continuing for one hour. The counter range for a
four-byte area (two words) for count hours or count minutes is –214,748,364.8
to 214,748,364.7. Data is displayed on the CX-Integrator in units of 0.1 hour
or minute.
Monitor values can be set in the Slave Unit. When the cumulated count value
exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Flag in the area for
Generic Status Flags turns ON.
Analog input value
Cumulated value
(count × hour or count × minute)
Time
Division width (See note.)
Note
The following table shows the divisions for the cumulated counter.
Unit
Hour
Minute
526
Divisions
3.6 s (1/1,000 hour)
60 ms (1/1,000 minute)
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the input where the cumulated counter is to be set,
and select Cumulated Count under the Function Choice heading.
4. To set the counter unit, click the Cumulated Count Tab and select Hour
or Minute from the pull-down menu in the Cumulated Timer Field.
527
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
5. To set the monitor value, click the Cumulated Count Tab, and input the desired value in the Threshold Cumulated Counter Field.
6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
7. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
528
Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions
Section 11-4
11-4-11 Last Maintenance Date
Description
Writes the maintenance date to the unit, individually to units and connected
devices. It enables the user to easily determine the next maintenance date.
The date can be set using the CX-Integrator.
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
■ Setting the Last Maintenance Date of the Unit
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the General Tab and select a date from the Last Maintenance Date
Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pulldown menu.)
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
■ Setting the Last Maintenance Date of the Connected Device
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Click the Tab Page for the input that is connected to a device requiring the
last maintenance date to be set. Select the applicable date from the pulldown menu in the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current date,
select Today, which is at the bottom of the pull-down menu.)
529
Section 11-5
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
11-5-1 Scaling
Description
In default setting, the output values are scaled to a count between 0 to 6,000
and converted to analog values in the output signal range. The scaling function allows user-specified scaling (or industry-specific units) for output signal
ranges. The function eliminates the need for ladder programming in the Master Unit to perform math operations. The following two methods of scaling can
be used.
Default Scaling
Default scaling converts analog output values into voltage or current values.
The units used are mV or µA. When default scaling is selected, scaling is performed according to the output range, as shown in the following table.
Output
0 to 5 V
range
100%
5,000 mV
0%
Disconnected
line
530
0000 mV
---
0 to 10 V
10,000
mV
0000 mV
---
1 to 5 V
–10 to 10 V
0 to
4 to
20 mA
20 mA
20,000 µA 20,000 µA
5,000 mV
10,000 mV
1,000 mV
7FFF hex
–10,000 mV 0000 µA
-----
4,000 µA
7FFF hex
Section 11-5
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
User Scaling
User scaling allows analog output values to be scaled to user-defined values.
The conversion values for 100% and 0% are set using the CX-Integrator.
Input
range
100%
0%
Disconnected
line
0 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
–10 to
10 V
Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000)
Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000)
----7FFF hex ---
0 to
20 mA
---
4 to
20 mA
7FFF hex
Scaling value
100% value set by user
(scaling point 2)
Output conversion
0% value set by user
(scaling point 1)
Output signal ran
0%
100%
Note Reverse scaling, where the 0% scaling value is higher than the 100% scaling
value, is also supported.
Offset Compensation
Offset compensation is used to compensate for error that occurs during scaling. The offset amount is added to the scaled line before processing, as
shown in the following diagram. The offset (error) value can be input between
–28,000 and 28,000, but if underflow or overflow occurs in the scaled line, the
100% or 0% output will not be possible. The High Limit is 7FFE hex and the
Low Limit is 8000 hex.
Note The offset value can be set even when using default scaling.
Upper limit 7FFE hex (32766)
Scaling line
100% scaling value
Offset value
(–28,000 to +28,000)
0% scaling value
Cannot output 100% value
even if it is set to 7FFF.
Lower limit 8000 hex (−32768)
0%
100%
Output (signal) range
531
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
Section 11-5
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the output where scaling is to be performed, and
select Scaling under the Function Choice heading.
4. To select the scaling type, click the Scaling Tab, and select either Default
Scaling or User Scaling.
532
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
Section 11-5
5. When user scaling is selected, set the 0% value in the Scaling Point (0%)
Field, and set the 100% value in the Scaling Point (100%) Field.
6. For offset compensation, set the offset value in the Scaling Offset Field.
Also select either Default Scaling or User Scaling in the Scaling Type
Field.
533
Section 11-5
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
8. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-5-2 User Adjustment
Description
Depending on factors such as the characteristics and connection methods of
the output device, the output can be adjusted to compensate for error in the
final output. The following diagram shows when compensation is applied to
the conversion line at the two points for 0% and 100%.
Conversion data
After adjustment
Before adjustment
0%
100%
Voltage/current
The ranges supported for adjustment (–5% to 5%) are shown in the following
table. If adjustment cannot be performed within the following ranges, check
the method being used to connect the output device.
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
534
Low Limit
–0.25 to 0.25 V
0.8 to 1.2 V
–0.5 to 0.5 V
High Limit
4.75 to 5.25 V
4.8 to 5.2 V
9.5 to 10.5 V
Section 11-5
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
Output range
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Low Limit
–11 to –9.0 V
3.2 to 4.8 mA
0.2 to 1.0 mA
High Limit
9.0 to 11 V
19.2 to 20.8 mA
19 to 21 mA
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the output to be adjusted, and click the Adjustment Button. (At this time, set the output range.)
Adjusting the Low
Limit
4. Output the value from the Master Unit that is equivalent to 0%. Always perform adjustment with the 0% value.
5. Adjust the analog value that is output from the terminal using the Lower
Adjustment slide bar, as shown in the following window. Repeat adjustments until the correct 0% value is output from the output device. After
compensation is completed, click the Fix Lower Adjusting Value Button.
535
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
Adjusting the High
Limit
Section 11-5
6. Output the value from the Master Unit that is equivalent to the Output Unit’s
maximum (100%) value. Adjustment using the 100% value is highly recommended, but adjustment can be performed using a lower value.
7. Adjust the analog value that is output from the terminal using the High Adjustment slide bar, as shown in the following window. Repeat adjustments
until the correct 100% value is output from the output device. After compensation is completed, click the Fix Upper Adjusting Value Button.
To return to the default settings, click the Default Setting Button.
8. Click the Close Button to close the Adjustment Window.
9. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
10. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Note In Analog Output Slave Units, always adjust the Low Limit first. If the Low Limit
is adjusted without adjusting the High Limit 100%, dislocation may occur.
536
Section 11-5
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
11-5-3 Cumulated Count
Description
The cumulated count calculates an approximation to the integral of analog
output values over time. The cumulated value can be calculated in “count
hours” (by selecting “hours”) or “count minutes” (by selecting “minutes”). The
count value is the analog output value in the industry unit obtained after scaling. For example, 100.0 count hours indicates a value equivalent to an analog
output value of 100 counts continuing for one hour. The counter range for a
two-word area (four bytes) for count hours or count minutes is –214,748,364.8
to 214,748,364.7. Data is displayed on the CX-Integrator in units of 0.1 hours
or minutes.
Monitor values can be set in the Slave Unit. When the cumulated count value
exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Flag in the area for
Generic Status Flags turns ON.
Analog output value
Cumulated value
(count × hour or minute)
Time t
Division width
(See note.)
Note The following table shows the divisions for the cumulated counter.
Unit
Hour
Minute
Divisions
3.6 s (1/1,000 hour)
60 ms (1/1,000 minute)
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the tab page for the output where the cumulated counter is to be set,
and select the Cumulated Count Check Box under the Function Choice
heading.
537
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
Section 11-5
4. To set the counter unit, click the Cumulated Count Tab and select Hour
or Minute from the pull-down menu in the Cumulated Time Field.
5. To set the monitor value, click the Cumulated Count Tab, and input the desired value in the Threshold Cumulated Counter Field.
538
Section 11-5
Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions
6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
7. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-5-4 Setting Output Value for Errors
Description
The value that is output when communications errors (time-out and BusOff
errors) occur can be set for each output. The four output settings are set using
the CX-Integrator.
Setting Patterns
Low limit
High limit
Hold last state
Outputs the values in the following table according to the output range.
Outputs the values in the following table according to the output range.
Holds and outputs the value from immediately before the error occurred.
Zero count
Outputs the value when 0 is written from the Host. This setting will be
affected by scaling settings that are used.
Output Ranges and Values
Output range
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Low limit
–0.25 V
0.8 V
–0.5 V
–11 V
3.2 mA
0 mA
High limit
5.25 V
5.2 V
10.5 V
11 V
20.8 mA
21 mA
Hold last state
Holds value.
Holds value.
Holds value.
Holds value.
Holds value.
Holds value.
Note When a node address has been used more than once or a Unit error has
occurred, the current output will be 0 mA and the voltage output will be 0 V,
regardless of the setting.
539
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Setting Using the CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration
Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the
icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.)
3. Select the Tab Page for the output where the communications error output
value is to be set, and select the desired item from the pull-down menu in
the Fault State Field.
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions
11-6-1 Moving Average Processing
Description
This function calculates the moving average of the previous eight input values,
and uses the resulting value as the converted data. When the input value fluctuates frequently, the moving average can be used to produce a stable input
value, as shown in the following diagram.
Temperature
input value
Actual input
Averaged input
Time
540
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where moving average processing is to be performed, and select the Moving Average Check Box in the Function Choice
Area.
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-2 Scaling
Description
Scaling can be used to convert the temperature input values (measured values) to display values at the scale required by the user. Scaling also eliminates the need for ladder programming in the Master Unit to perform these
basic math operations.
541
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
To scale the temperature input values to the scale required by the user, use
the CX-Integrator to set the conversion values (−28,000 to 28,000) for two
points in the scale (the 100% value and 0% value).
Scaling value
Value for 100% set by user
(Scaling point 2)
Conversion
Value for 0% set by user
(Scaling point 1)
Input signal range
0%
Note
100%
1. The default values are 0 and 28,000.
2. Reverse scaling, where the 0% scaling value is higher than the 100% scaling value, is also supported.
Offset Compensation
The scaling function is equipped with offset compensation, which can compensate for any error that occurs during scaling. The offset amount is added
to the scaled line as shown in the following diagram. The offset value can be
input between −28,000 to 28,000. Make sure that underflow or overflow does
not occur. The High Limit is 7FFE hex and the Low Limit is 8000 hex. (The
High Limit is 7FFFFFFE Hex and the Low Limit is 80000000 Hex for 1/100
Display Mode.)
Note The offset value can be set even when using default scaling.
Upper limit: 7FFE hex (32766)
100% scaling value
Scaled line
0% scaling
Offset value
(–28,000 to 28,000)
Lower limit: 8000 hex (−32768)
0%
100%
Input signal range
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where scaling is to be performed, and select the
Scaling Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
542
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
4. Set 0% value in the Scaling Point (0%) Field, and set the 100% value in the
Scaling Point (100%) Field.
5. To offset the scaled values, set the offset value in the Scaling Offset Field.
543
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
7. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-3 Peak/Bottom Hold
Description
Peak/bottom hold is used to hold the maximum (peak) value or minimum (bottom) value of the temperature input value. When the Hold Flag allocated in the
Output Area turns ON, the hold function starts, searching for the peak or bottom value until the Hold Flag turns OFF. (The peak/bottom value is refreshed
when the Hold Flag turns OFF.) The comparator function can be used to compare the peak or bottom values allocated as temperature data 1. (Refer to
details on the comparator function.)
Example of Bottom Hold
Temperature input value
The bottom value
is updated.
Hold value
Previous
value
Hold Flag
ON
Hold function starts.
Bottom hold value
OFF
Hold function stops.
Note A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag
turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit's ladder program until notification of the
flag's status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even when the Hold Flag
is ON, the first temperature data transmitted to the Master Unit when the CPU
Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag was OFF.
To collect peak/bottom hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master Unit, con-
544
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
figure a ladder program that considers the transmission delay when the Hold
Flag is turned ON, then enables the peak/bottom hold values after a fixed time
interval.
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where peak/bottom hold is to be set, and select
the Peak/Bottom Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
4. To allocate the Hold Flag (output) in the default connection path, click the
General Tab Page and select Holding Value in the Default Connection
Path (Out) Field.
5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
545
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-4 Top/Valley Hold
Description
The top/valley hold function is used to hold the top and valley values of the
temperature input value.
Temperature values that fluctuate more than twice the hysteresis value are
monitored, and the top or valley values are held. The top or valley value is
allocated along with the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, which can be
used to check the hold timing.
When the Hold Flag (output) allocated in the OUT Area turns ON, the hold
function starts, refreshing the top or valley value until the Hold Flag turns OFF.
(The last value is held when the Hold Flag turns OFF, but the next time the
Hold Flag turns ON, the hold value is initialized as soon as a top or valley
occurs.) The comparator can be used to compare the top or valley value allocated as Temperature Data 1. (Refer to details on the comparator function.)
Example of Valley Hold
Temperature
input value
Valley hold
value
Last value
is held.
Hold value
Hold Flag
Hold function
starts.
Hold function
stops.
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flag
One-shot time
Note
1. A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag
turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit's ladder program until notification of
the flag's status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even when the
Hold Flag is ON, the first temperature data transmitted to the Master Unit
when the CPU Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the
Hold Flag was OFF. To collect top/valley hold data using the Hold Flag at
the Master Unit, configure a ladder program which considers the transmission delay time when the Hold Flag is turned ON, then enables the top/valley hold values after a fixed time interval.
2. The time that the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are ON can be adjusted by setting the one-shot time. Use the CX-Integrator to set the one-shot
time (the setting range is 1 to 65,535 ms).
3. If the Hold Flag turns OFF during the time the Top/Valley Detection Timing
Flag is set to be ON, both flags will turn OFF simultaneously.
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
546
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
3. Click the tab for the input where top/valley hold is to be set, and select the
Top/Valley Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
4. To allocate the Hold Flag (output) in the default connection path, click the
General Tab Page and select Holding Value in the Default Connection
Path (Out) Field.
5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Hysteresis Setting
The hysteresis value can be set using the CX-Integrator to prevent detection
of top or valley values that occur due to minor fluctuations in the temperature
input value. This will cause the start of data holding to be delayed after the
actual top or valley value occurs, as shown in the following diagram.
547
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Timing for Setting Data
Temperature
input value
Set hysteresis value × 2
Valley hold value
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flag
Delay
Setting the Hysteresis Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Click the Top/Valley Tab and input the hysteresis in the Hysteresis Field.
2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
3. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Note The hysteresis set for the top/valley hold function is also used by the comparator function.
Setting the One-shot Time
1,2,3...
548
1. Select the Top/Valley Tab Page and input the desired value in the Shot Off
Delay Field.
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
3. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-5 Top/Valley Counter
Description
The top/value count function counts the number of temperature tops or valleys
in devices or applications that have repetitive constant temperature rises (or
drops). A monitor value can be set for the counter to indicate when maintenance is required for the Unit or sensor. The status can be read in the Monitor
Window or via an explicit message to know when the monitor value has been
exceeded.
Valley Counter Operation
Temperature
input value
Valley hold
value
Last value
is held.
Hold value
Hold Flag
Hold function
starts.
Hold function
stops.
The Valley Count function counts the number
of valleys in the temperature input value.
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
549
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
3. Click the tab for the input where top/valley count is to be used, and select
the Top/Valley Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
4. Select the Top/Valley Tab Page and select Top Count or Valley Count in
the Count Type Field.
5. Set the monitor value for the top/valley counter.
6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
7. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-6 Rate of Change Calculation
Description
550
The rate of change can be obtained for each sampling cycle set for the temperature input data. This function calculates the difference between the current sampling cycle the previous cycle. The sampling cycle can be set to
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
between 250 ms and 65,500 ms in 250-ms increments. The default setting for
the sampling cycle is 250 ms.
Temperature
input value
Temperature data
Time
Rate of
change
0
Derivative data
Note If the sampling cycle is set to a small value, the rate of change will be sensitive
to small changes. If the temperature data is subject to minute fluctuations, and
the sampling cycle is shorter than the cycle of fluctuation, the fluctuation will
be regarded as the rate of change. To prevent this occurring, use moving
average processing, which will set a longer sampling cycle.
Desired gradient
Fluctuation in the
temperature input value
Short sampling cycle
Long sampling cycle
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where rate of change is to be calculated, and select the Rate of Change Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
551
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
4. Click the Rate of Change Tab and input the desired value for the sampling
cycle.
5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
6. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-7 Comparator
Description
When the High High Limit, High Limit, Low Low Limit, and Low Limit are set in
the Unit, a status flag will be turned ON when a value exceeds the set range.
The four set values are High High Limit (HH), High Limit (H), Low Low Limit
(LL), and Low Limit (L). The values are compared with those in Temperature
Data 1. (The comparator function cannot be used with Temperature Data 2.)
The setting range is −415,000 to 415,000.
In each case where settings are exceeded, the comparator results bit in the
"Temperature Data Status Flag" is turned ON. If a warning is not set, a Normal
Flag (Pass signal) is turned ON.
552
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
HH
H
Set values
L
LL
HH alarm
Comparator results
(within Temperature Data
Status Flag) bit ON/OFF
H alarm
Normal Flag
(Pass signal)
L alarm
LL alarm
Note When the temperature input value changes faster than the conversion cycle,
the status may go from a Low Limit alarm directly to a High Limit alarm without
having the Normal Flag (pass signal) go ON in between. Write ladder programs to allow for this.
Setting Hysteresis
The Comparator Result Flag turns OFF when the value is lower than the hysteresis width (H or HH alarm occurs) or exceeds it (L or LL alarm occurs), as
shown in the following diagram. If the temperature input value fluctuates
around the threshold and the flag repeatedly turns ON or OFF, set hysteresis
to stabilize the flag operation. The setting range is 0 to 16,383.
HH set value or
H set value
Hysteresis width
Hysteresis
width
LL set value or L
set value
HH Alarm Flag or
H Alarm Flag
LL Alarm Flag or
L Alarm Flag
Note When setting the hysteresis value, allow for the decimal point position or the
1/100 Display Mode for each input. Always correct the hysteresis value after
changing the display mode or replacing the input with one that has a different
decimal point position.
Examples for an Hysteresis of 10°C:
• R thermocouple (normal display) setting: 0010 decimal
• T thermocouple (normal display) setting: 0100 decimal
• Setting for any input with 1/100 display: 1000 decimal
553
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
OFF Delay
The time until the Comparator Result Flag turns OFF can be extended. For
example, even if the Flag is ON momentarily, the OFF delay can be set so that
the Master Unit can receive notification of the Flag's status.
HH set value
Hysteresis width
OFF delay
HH Alarm Flag
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where comparator function is to be set, and select
the Comparator Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
4. Click the Comparator Tab and set each of the alarm values. The example
here shows the setting for Alarm Trip Point High (HH).
554
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Note
Section 11-6
When setting the alarm value, allow for the decimal point position or the 1/100
Display Mode for each input. Always correct the alarm value after changing
the display mode or replacing the input with one that has a different decimal
point position.
Example: Alarm value setting for 250°
R thermocouple (normal display) setting: 00250 decimal
T thermocouple (normal display) setting: 02500 decimal
Setting for any input with 1/100 display: 25000 decimal
5. To set the hysteresis value, input the desired value in the Hysteresis Field.
Note
The hysteresis value set for the comparator function is also used by the top/
valley hold function.
6. To set the OFF delay function, input the desired value in the Comparator
Off Delay Field.
555
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
8. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-8 Temperature Range Count
Description
This function times (in 1-second units) how long the temperature input value is
within a user-set temperature range. The range count (zone count) can indicate when preventative maintenance is required for devices or applications
that deteriorate at a fixed rate within the user-set temperature range.
Select the temperature range settings on the Comparator Tab Page. The
temperature range boundaries are defined by the High High Limit (HH), High
Limit (H), Low Low Limit (LL), or Low Limit (L). If the time within the set temperature range exceeds the monitor value, it indicates that a threshold value
has been exceeded. The status can be read in the Monitor Window or via an
explicit message to know when a threshold has been exceeded.
The Over Threshold status can be read in the Maintenance Information Window or via an explicit message.
Temperature
10°C
Counting starts when this
85°C
temperature is exceeded.
When the temperature range is
set to 10°C above the set
temperature (95°C), the function
counts how long the temperature
is within that 10°C range.
Time
Counting
starts
Counting
stops
Counting
starts
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
556
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where time is to be measured, and select the
Comparator Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
4. Click the Comparator Tab and select the desired type of temperature
range in the Zone Type Field.
5. Set the monitor value in the Monitoring Zone Counter Field to indicate
when the temperature has been in the temperature range longer than the
set value.
557
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
7. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-9 Data Comparison between Channels
Description
This function can be used to compare the temperature values between of two
inputs (inputs 0 to 3) and monitor the relative temperature difference. A monitor value can be set to detect an excessive temperature difference for preventative maintenance in devices in which the temperature difference may cause
or indicate a problem. The comparison result can be checked in the Monitor
Window on the Data Comparison between Channels Tab Page.
The comparison result and status can be read in the Monitor Window or via
an explicit message.
Note
1. The comparison operation can be performed only on the data set as Temperature Data 1.
2. When the peak value or bottom value is selected as the temperature data
for Temperature Data 1, that processed value will be used in the comparison operation and not the actual temperature input value.
558
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
3. The comparison result will be read to a precision of 0.01, regardless of the
setting.
The temperature difference
with device B is much higher
than the other devices.
Is it an error?
Device A
540°C
Device B
Device C
543°C
580°C?
Compare
Compare
Device D
538°C
Compare
Detect temperature differences
with each input.
Temperature
Input Terminal
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the Data Comparison Between Channels Tab.
4. Double-click the Calculation Data1 or Calculation Data2 cell to open the
Edit Calculation Data Window.
5. Select the two temperature inputs to be compared in the Calculation Data1
and Calculation Data2 Fields. Set a monitor value in the Monitor Value
Field. Always set the threshold value to two decimal places. For example,
when setting 10°C, input 1000 for 10.00°C.
559
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
6. Click the OK Button. The Edit Calculation Data Window will close.
7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
8. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-10 Input Error Detection Disable Function
Description
If there are inputs that are not being used, input error detection (including offwire detection) can be disabled. If this function is used, the Temperature Input
Warning Flag and Off-wire Detection Flags will be OFF regardless of the connection status of the input sensor or temperature range.
When this function is enabled, the temperature data is set to 7FFF hex (7FFF
FFFFF when 1/100 Display Mode is being used).
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where the input error detection disable function
is to be set, and select the Disable Input Error’s Detection Check Box in the
Function Choice Area.
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
Note
560
Use this function only if there are unused inputs. If this function is used while a
sensor is connected, it will not detect input errors (including disconnections).
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
11-6-11 Off-wire Detection
Description
If the input sensor is disconnected, the Disconnected Line Detection Flag for
each channel is turned ON.
The Disconnected Line Detection Flag is included in "Temperature Data Status Flag".
When an off-wire condition is detected, the value of AD conversion data is set
to 7FFF hex (7FFF FFFF when 1/100 Display Mode is being used). When the
input returns to a value within the range that can be converted, the Off-wire
Detection function will automatically be turned OFF, and normal data conversion will resume.
11-6-12 Last Maintenance Date
Description
The last maintenance date can be set within the Unit for the Unit and for each
of the connected devices. This enables the user to easily determine the next
maintenance date. The date can be set using the CX-Integrator.
Setting Using CX-Integrator
■ Setting the last maintenance date in the Unit
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the General Tab, and select a date in the Last Maintenance Date
Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pulldown menu.)
4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click
the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
■ Setting the Last Maintenance Date for a Connected Device
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
561
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input to which the device to be set is connected, and
select a date in the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current
date, select Today from the bottom of the pull-down menu.)
4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
5. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
11-6-13 Cumulated Counter
Description
The cumulated counter integrates the temperature input value over time to
determine the amount of heat endured by a sensor or device. The cumulated
value can be calculated in hours (°C × hours or °F × hours) or minutes (°C ×
minutes or °F × minutes).
For example, when the units are set to hours, a cumulated value of 100 hours
indicates a temperature value equivalent to 100°C continuing for one hour.
The value stored in the four-byte area (two words) is the integral value for 300
time divisions. The data is displayed according to the set conditions. (See
notes 1 and 2.)
Monitor values can also be set in the Unit. When the cumulated count value
exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Exceeded Flag in the
area for Generic Status Flags turns ON.
Note
1. When °F units are selected, the integration is performed on the °F values.
2. Even if the 1/100 display mode is selected, the integration is performed on
the original (×100) temperature values.
3. The meaning of the integral value depends on the decimal point position
for the temperature input value.
562
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Temperature
input value
Integral value
(°C × hours or °C × minutes)
Time
Time division
(See note.)
Note The following table shows the time divisions and number of measurements.
Units
Hours
Minutes
Time division
12 seconds
200 ms
Number of measurements
300
300
Setting Using CX-Integrator
1,2,3...
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit.
2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
3. Click the tab for the input where the cumulated counter is to be set, and
select the Cumulated Count Check Box in the Function Choice Area.
4. To set the counter unit, click the Cumulated Count Tab and select Hour
or Minute in the Cumulated Timer Field.
563
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
5. To set the monitor value, click the Cumulated Count Tab, and input the desired value in the Threshold Cumulated Counter Field.
Note
When the Threshold Cumulated Counter is set to 0, the cumulated value will
not be monitored.
6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to
download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit.
7. Click the OK Button and exit the window.
564
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
11-6-14 User Adjustment
Description
This function can be used to compensate for offsets in the input value caused
by factors such as the characteristics and connection methods of the input
sensor.
Conversion data
After
adjustment
0%
100%
Temperature
input value
Before
adjustment
Note
1. Temperature Input Units are properly adjusted at the factory before shipment, so it is normally unnecessary to make adjustments. Use the User
Adjustment function only when absolutely necessary. OMRON is not responsible for the results of user adjustments. If a mistake is made in the
adjustments, the adjustment data can be cleared to return to the factory
default settings.
2. The Temperature Input Unit continues the temperature conversion operations even after user adjustments have been made. It is possible for temperature data values to change suddenly from previous values after the
user adjustments are made, so always consider the effects on the operating environment before applying user adjustments.
565
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Adjustment Procedure for the CRT1-TS04T
Adjustment Procedure
Use the following procedure to adjust the Temperature Input Units. Follow the
flowchart closely for proper adjustment.
Prepare the device that requires adjustment.
Connect the device that requires adjustment.
When performing upper/lower limit adjustment,
open end of the cold junction compensator to
disable it.
First
adjustment?
No
Yes
Turn ON the power to the associated system
devices. Wait at least 30 minutes for the CRT1TS04T’s internal temperature to stabilize.
This stabilization time is the time required
when the power is turned ON for the first time.
This step can be skipped when adjusting the
second and following inputs.
Refer to the Operating Manuals for the other
devices in the system for details on their
required stabilization times, if any.
Set the input's lower limit adjustment value.
Set the input's upper limit adjustment value.
Prepare to adjust the bias compensation.
Short the leads of the cold junction
compensator and wait at least 60 minutes for
the temperature to stabilize.
A cold junction compensator and
compensating conductor are required for the
thermocouple being adjusted.
Set the input's bias compensation.
Yes
Adjust other
inputs?
No
Test indication accuracy after adjustment.
End
Note The only sensors that can be adjusted are ones that operate while the power
supply is ON. When adjusting for sensors that are not presently in use,
change the input type setting, toggle the power supply or reset the Unit from
the CX-Integrator, and perform the adjustment procedure from the beginning
of the flowchart.
566
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Connecting the Devices
Required for Adjustment
The following paragraphs explain how to connect the devices that must be
connected to the CRT1-TS04T for user adjustment. Wire the following devices
properly when adjusting the CRT1-TS04T.
■ Reference Voltage/Current Generator and Precision Digital Multimeter
Used to make adjustments at the upper limit and lower limit.
Prepare devices that can generate accurate 0 mV, 20 mV, and 50 mV voltages. Use a precision digital multimeter that can measure the output voltage
and indicate when the voltage/current generator is not producing an accurate
voltage output.
■ Cold Junction Compensator (such as a ZERO-CON 0°C Bath) and
Compensating Conductors
Used to adjust the bias compensation value.
The cold junction compensator (the ZERO-CON 0°C bath is used in following
examples) is a device that maintains an accurate 0°C (32°F) temperature for
thermocouple sensors. Use a cold junction compensator compatible with the
sensor being adjusted.
Note When using an R, S, E, B, or W type thermocouple, a K type can be substituted. Set the ZERO-CON to 0°C (32°F).
■ CX-Integrator
Actual adjustments are made from the CX-Integrator windows.
Adjustment Device Connection Diagram
Connect the reference voltage/current generator (STV), precision digital multimeter (DMM), and ZERO-CON to the input terminals. Connect to the corresponding input terminals when adjusting inputs 0 to 3.
CompoNet
CRT1-TS04T
Compensating
conductors
DeviceNet Configurator
CX-Integrator
Reference voltage/current generator (STV)
Remove when performing bias compensation.
Precision digital multimeter (DMM)
Use to confirm that the STV is generating an accurate voltage.
Cold junction compensator (such as a ZERO-CON)
Leave open (disabled) until performing bias compensation.
Note The personal computer (CX-Integrator) is connected through CompoNet in
the above diagram. If a CS1W-CRM21 or CJ1W-CRM21 Master Unit is being
used, the Temperature Input Unit can be adjusted by connecting the CX-Integrator through the Master Unit using a peripheral bus connection.
567
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Input Terminal Connections
Wiring for Adjusting the Upper and Lower Limits
DMM
Ferrule for two wires
NC
NC
0
+
0
−
NC
NC
1
+
NC
NC
1
−
2
+
2
−
NC
NC
3
+
3
−
Cold junction compensator
STV
Lead wires for adjusting bias
NC
NC
0
+
0
−
NC
NC
1
+
NC
1
−
NC
2
+
2
−
NC
NC
3
+
3
−
Cold junction compensator
Compensating conductors
ZERO-CON (0°C bath)
0°C/32°F
INPUT
Checking the Wiring and
Making Adjustments
1,2,3...
Short-circuit
OUTPUT
Adjusting the Upper and Lower Limit Values
1. Set the wiring for adjusting the upper and lower limits. If connecting the
precision digital multimeter (DMM), use a ferrule for two wires.
2. Check the sensor and input type being used.
Note
When using an R, S, B, E, or W sensor, use a compensating conductor for a K
thermocouple. In addition, when using an R, S, or B sensor, set the input type
to K (0.0 to 500.0°C). When using an E or W sensor, set the input type to K
(−200 to 1,300°C).
3. Connect the CX-Integrator to the CompoNet network and go online.
4. Upload settings to the CX-Integrator.
5. Turn ON the power supplies of all Units, including the Temperature Input
Unit to be adjusted. Wait approximately 30 minutes for the Temperature Input Unit's internal temperature to stabilize.
6. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
7. Click the tab for the input that will be adjusted and click the Adjustment
Button.
568
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
8. Adjust the lower limit value. Input 0 mV from the reference voltage/current
generator (STV) to the Temperature Input Unit's input terminals. Wait at
least 1 minute for the input to stabilize.
9. Click the Fix lower adjusting Value Button in the Adjustment Window to
write the adjustment value.
10. Adjust the upper limit value. Input the upper limit voltage from the reference
voltage/current generator to the input terminals of the input to be adjusted.
Refer to the following table for the appropriate voltage. Wait at least 1
minute for the input to stabilize.
Type
K (−200 to 1300°C)
K (0.0 to 500.0°C)
J (−100 to 850°C)
J (0.0 to 400.0°C)
T
L (−100 to 850°C)
L (0.0 to 400.0°C)
U
N
PL2
Input voltage
50 mV
20 mV
50 mV
20 mV
20 mV
50 mV
20 mV
20 mV
50 mV
50 mV
11. Click the Fix upper adjusting Value Button and write the adjustment value.
569
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Section 11-6
Checking That the Adjustment Is Effective
1,2,3...
1. Right-click the Unit icon to be adjusted and select Monitor. The Monitor
Window will be displayed.
2. Click the tab for the temperature input that was adjusted. If the User Adjustment Check Box is selected, the Unit is operating with user-set adjustment values.
Note
(1) When checking whether the user adjustment values have been set correctly, refresh the data by clicking the Update Button in the Monitor Window's General Tab Page or uploading the settings again. For details on
the Monitor Window, refer to 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data.
(2) If the correct reference voltage was not input, the adjustment values may
not be accepted.
Adjusting the Bias Compensation Value
1,2,3...
1. Disconnect the wiring for adjusting the upper and lower limits and change
to wiring for bias compensation.
2. After completing the wiring, wait at least 20 minutes with the temperature
data in a stable state, and click the Fix Bias Value Button in the Bias Adjustment Window. The bias compensation value will be written in the Unit.
Resetting Adjustments
If it is necessary to reset the upper limit adjustment value, lower limit adjustment value, and bias compensation value to the factory defaults, click the
Default Setting Button. The settings will be returned to the factory settings.
The upper/lower limit adjustment values and bias compensation value are all
initialized at the same time.
570
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Note
1. The bias compensation value may not be accepted if there is a large temperature difference between the Terminal Block and ZERO-CON (0°C
bath). If this problem occurs, correct the adjustment system by using a
ZERO-CON compatible with the sensor being adjusted or other means.
2. Always test the indication accuracy after making user adjustments to verify
that the adjustments are correct. Test the indication accuracy at three
points: the lower limit value, an intermediate value, and the upper limit value.
• Connect the external devices as shown in the following diagram.
• After verifying that the ZERO-CON is set to 0°C, set the STV’s output
voltage to produce a voltage equivalent to the test voltage.
Note Always use the compensating conductors (the same kind that will be
used with the sensor being adjusted) to connect the ZERO-CON to
the CRT2-TS04T’s input terminals.
ZERO-CON
(0°C bath)
Compensating
conductors
CRT1-TS04T
Input (+)
STV
OUTPUT
INPUT
Input (–)
571
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Stabilization Times
required in Each Step
The following diagram shows the stabilization times (waiting times) required
when adjusting all 4 inputs.
Step
Timing chart
Input Unit’s power supply ON
Wiring for input 0 adjustment
Input 0 upper/lower limit adjustment
Wait at least 30 minutes.
(Check whether additional
time is required for devices
such as the STV, DMM,
and ZERO-CON.)
Stabilization time
Temperature
Input Terminal’s
stabilization time
Terminal Block temperature
stabilization time 1 after wiring
10 minutes
Input 0 bias compensation
Change wiring for input 1 adjustment
Input 1 upper/lower limit adjustment
Input 1 bias compensation
Change wiring for input 2 adjustment
Input 2 upper/lower limit adjustment
Input 2 bias compensation
Change wiring for input 3 adjustment
Input 3 upper/lower limit adjustment
40 minutes
Terminal Block temperature
stabilization time 2 after wiring
is changed
40 minutes
Terminal Block temperature
stabilization time 3 after wiring
is changed
40 minutes
Terminal Block temperature
stabilization time 4 after wiring
is changed
Input 3 bias compensation
(End of adjustment)
Note
(1) The terminal block temperature stabilization time does not affect the upper/lower limit adjustment after changing the wiring for input 1, so the adjustment can be performed immediately if 30 minutes have passed since
the Temperature Input Unit's power was turned ON.
(2) To perform the adjustment procedure properly, always allow sufficient
time for the temperature to stabilize. Also allow sufficient time for devices
such as the STV, DMM, and ZERO-CON to stabilize. Refer to each device's operating manual for details.
572
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Adjustment Procedure for the CRT1-TS04P
Adjustment Procedure
Use the following procedure to adjust the Temperature Input Unit. Follow the
flowchart closely for proper adjustment.
Prepare the device required for adjustment.
Connect the adjustment devices.
To make the upper/lower limit adjustment, connect a
six-dial resistance box to the Temperature Input Unit
that is being adjusted.
Turn ON the power to the system devices.
Wait at least 30 minutes for the internal
temperature to stabilize.
Set the input's lower limit adjustment value.
Set the input's upper limit adjustment value.
Yes
Adjust other inputs?
No
Test indication accuracy after adjustment.
End
Note
Connecting the Devices
Required for Adjustment
Only sensors that operate while the power supply is ON can be adjusted.
When adjusting sensors that are not presently in use, change the input type
setting, reset the power or CX-Integrator, and then perform the adjustment
procedure from the beginning of the flowchart.
The following paragraphs explain how to connect the devices that must be
connected to the Temperature Input Unit for user adjustment. Wire the following devices properly when making adjustments.
Six-dial Resistance Box and Precision Digital Multimeter
These devices are used to make adjustments at the upper limit and lower
limit. Prepare devices that can provide accurate resistance values.
Use a precision digital multimeter that can measure the resistance values and
indicate when the six-dial resistance box is not producing an accurate resistance.
CX-Integrator
Actual adjustments are made from the CX-Integrator.
573
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Adjustment Device
Connection Diagram
Connect the six-dial resistance box to the input terminals.
Connect them to the input terminals for the required input from input 0 to 3.
CompoNet
CX-Integrator
CRT1-TS04P
Six-dial resistance box
Connect to the input terminals of
the input being adjusted.
Precision digital multimeter (DMM)
Use to confirm that the six-dial resistance
box is providing an accurate resistance.
Note
(1) When connecting the six-dial resistance box, use a cable with the same
gauge as the one that will be used for operation.
(2) The personal computer (CX-Integrator) is connected through CompoNet
in the above diagram. If a CS1W-CRM21 or CJ1W-CRM21 Master Unit is
being used, it can be connected through the Master Unit using a peripheral bus connection to adjust the Temperature Input Unit.
Input Terminal
Connections
0A
NC
0B
0B
1A
NC
1B
1B
NC
NC
2A
NC
2B
2B
3A
NC
Six-dial resistance box
Checking the Wiring and
Making Adjustments
1,2,3...
3B
3B
DMM
Adjusting the Upper and Lower Limit Values
1. Set the resistance value on the six-dial resistance box equivalent to the
test value and properly wire the box to the input of the Temperature Input
Unit that is being adjusted.
2. If the correct resistance cannot be obtained, properly wire the digital multimeter to the six-dial resistance box and measure the resistance.
3. Connect the CX-Integrator to the CompoNet network and go online.
4. Upload settings to the CX-Integrator.
5. Turn ON the power supplies of all Units, including the Temperature Input
Unit to be adjusted. Wait approximately 30 minutes for the Temperature Input Unit's internal temperature to stabilize.
6. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network
Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit.
The Configuration Window will be displayed.
7. Click the tab for the input that will be adjusted and click the Adjustment
Button.
574
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
8. Adjust the lower limit value. Input 18 Ω from the six-dial resistance box to
the Temperature Input Unit's input terminals. Wait at least 1 minute for the
input to stabilize.
9. Click the Fix Lower Adjusting Value Button in the Adjustment Window to
write the adjustment value.
10. Adjust the upper limit value. Input the resistance from the six-dial resistance box. Refer to the following table for the appropriate resistance to input. Wait at least 1 minute for the input to stabilize.
Type
PT100 (−200 to 850°C)
PT100 (−200 to 200°C)
Input resistance for upper
limit adjustment
390 Ω
180 Ω
11. Click the Fix Upper Adjusting Value Button to write the adjustment value.
575
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Checking That the Adjustment Is Effective
1,2,3...
1. Right-click the Unit icon to be adjusted and select Monitor. The Monitor
Window will be displayed.
2. Click the tab for the temperature input that was adjusted. If the User Adjustment Check Box is selected, the Unit is operating with user-set adjustment values.
Note
When checking whether the user adjustment values have been set correctly,
refresh the data by clicking the Update Button in the Monitor Window's General Tab Page or uploading the settings again. For details on the Monitor Window, refer to 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data.
Resetting Adjustments
If it is necessary to reset the upper limit adjustment value, and lower limit
adjustment value to the factory defaults, click the Default Setting Button. The
settings will be returned to the factory settings.
Note
Always test the indication accuracy after making user adjustments to verify
that the adjustments are correct. Test the indication accuracy at three points:
the lower limit value, an intermediate value, and the upper limit value.
• Connect the external devices as shown in the following diagram.
• Wait at least 30 minutes after the Temperature Input Terminal’s power
is turned ON and set the resistance value on the six-dial resistance
box equivalent to the test value.
576
Section 11-6
Temperature Input Unit Functions
Note If the power supply is not turned OFF after making an adjustment, it
is not necessary to wait 30 minutes before continuing testing.
CRT2-TS04P
Six-dial
resistance box
Input A
Input b
Input B
577
Temperature Input Unit Functions
578
Section 11-6
SECTION 12
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section provides troubleshooting information that can be used in the event a problem occurs in CompoNet Slave Unit
operation. It also provides information on maintenance that should be performed to ensure optimum application of the
CompoNet Slave Units.
12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
580
12-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
581
12-2-1 Troubleshooting for Errors Shown by Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
581
12-2-2 Troubleshooting by Slave Unit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
582
12-3 Device Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
588
12-3-1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
588
12-3-2 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
588
12-3-3 Handling when Replacing Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
589
579
Section 12-1
Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting
12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting
MS and NS
indicators
Meaning
Remarks
Lit green
Remote I/O communications or message
communications are in
progress.
Remote I/O communications are being executed.
Either remote I/O communications, message
communications, or both are being executed.
Status is normal.
MS
Lit green
Synchronizing speed.
Waiting for connection
with Master Unit.
NS
Not lit
If only certain Slave Units show this status,
check that the baud rate is the same and then
restart the Slave Units.
MS
Lit green
Waiting for a connection.
Waiting for a connection
with the Master Unit to
be established.
Watchdog timer error
A watchdog timer error
has occurred in the
Slave Unit.
Illegal switch setting
A DIP switch or other
switch setting is illegal.
EEPROM data error
MS
Lit green
NS
NS
Flashing
green
MS
Lit red
NS
Not lit
NS
Flashing
red
NS
Not lit
MS
Lit green
NS
Lit red
MS
Lit green
NS
NS
NS
580
EEPROM checksum
error
Configuration error
Communications timeout
Flashing
red
Flashing
red
Lit red
Configuration error
Replace the Slave Unit. Alternatively, check the
Expansion Unit connection.
Check the switch settings then restart the
Slave Units.
Use the CX-Integrator to restore the default
data.
Check that the node address is set within the
• The same node
allowable range and that it is used only once.
address has been
used more than once. Check the Repeater Unit configuration and
• Repeater Unit configu- then restart the Slave Units. If the node
address and Repeater Unit configuration are
ration error
correct, check the following items, and then
restart the Slave Units.
• Are the baud rates the same for the Master
Unit and Slave Units?
• Is the cable length (trunk line/branch lines)
OK?
• Is the cable disconnected or loose?
• Is there a Terminating Resistor on each end
of the trunk line?
• Is there too much noise?
--Check the following items then restart the
Slave Units:
Is the baud rate the same for the Master Unit
and Slave Units?
Is the cable length (trunk line/branch lines)
OK?
Is the cable disconnected or loose?
Is there a Terminating Resistor on each end of
the trunk line?
Is there too much noise?
A node address has
been set out of range.
Make sure that the node address is set within
the specified range, and then restart the Slave
Unit.
Troubleshooting
Section 12-2
12-2 Troubleshooting
12-2-1 Troubleshooting for Errors Shown by Indicators
Indicators Are Lit or Flashing Red
Problem
MS indicator is lit red.
Cause and possible corrections
• The Slave Unit is malfunctioning. Replace the Slave Unit.
• The Expansion Unit is disconnected. Check the Expansion Unit connection.
MS indicator is flashing • The DIP switch or other setting is illegal. Check the switch settings then restart the Slave
red.
Unit.
• There is an error in the Slave Unit's EEPROM memory data. Double-click the icon for the
Slave Unit in the CX-Integrator. The Configuration Window will open. Click the Default Setting Button and then click the Reset Button. Replace the Slave Unit if the MS indicator
keeps flashing red even after the data has been returned to the default settings.
The NS indicator lights
Check the following items, and then restart the Slave Unit with the error.
red without flashing
• The node address has been set out of range or duplicated, or a Repeater Unit configuration
green.
error has occurred. Check all node addresses and check the Repeater Unit configuration
and change the settings if required.
• Make sure that the I/O words allocated to the Slave Unit are not used by any other Slave
Unit. If the same words are being used by more than one Slave Unit, change the node
address.
• Refer to the next item “The NS indicator lights green momentarily and then changes to red”.
• Replace the Slave Unit if its NS indicator is always lit red.
Check the following items then restart the Slave Unit with the error.
The NS indicator lights
green momentarily and • Check that a Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) is connected to each end of the network's trunk
then changes to red. The line. If the correct Terminating Resistors are not set, connect a Terminating Resistor of
NS indicator lights green 121 Ω.
momentarily and then
• Check that all Slave Units are set correctly.
changes to flashing red.
• Check that the communications cable is wired correctly.
• Check that the power supply cable and power supply are wired correctly and that the settings are correct.
• Check connector wiring for all nodes to make sure that the communications cable and power
supply cables are not disconnected.
• Check that the communications power is supplied correctly.
• If there are devices in the vicinity that generate noise, take necessary measures against the
noise to protect the Master Unit and Slave Units and the communications cable.
• If using an OMRON Master Unit, refer to the manual for that Master Unit if an error has
occurred in the Master Unit. If using a Master from another manufacturer, refer to the user's
manual for that product if an error has occurred in the Master.
• Replace the Slave Unit if its NS indicator is always lit red.
581
Section 12-2
Troubleshooting
Cannot Participate in Network
Problem
NS indicator remains
not lit and status does
not change.
NS indicator remains lit
green and status does
not change.
Cause and possible corrections
• Check that all Slave Unit connectors are connected correctly.
• Check that the Master Unit is operating correctly. If using an OMRON Master Unit, check the
Master Unit mode and the Slave Unit node addresses.
• If using a Master from another manufacturer, refer to the user's manual for that Master.
• Check that the communications cable is wired correctly.
• Check that the power supply cable and power supply are wired correctly and that the settings are correct.
• Check connector wiring to make sure that the communications cable and power supply
cables are not disconnected.
Check the following items and take corrective measures based on the Master Unit indicator
display.
• Check that the Master Unit is operating correctly. Refer to the manual for the Master Unit.
• Check that the Slave Unit is registered in the Master Unit registration table.
• Re-register the registration table.
• Check that the Slave Unit I/O area is not outside the area permitted by the Master Unit.
Change the node address if the I/O area is outside the permitted area.
12-2-2 Troubleshooting by Slave Unit Type
Model
All Slave Units
Problem
The MS and NS indicators do
not light green.
The Network Power Voltage
Drop Flag does not turn ON
even if the network power supply voltage drops.
Cause
Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators.
The monitor value for the network power supply voltage is
set too low.
--Increase the network power
voltage monitor value.
Note The default setting is
14 V or less.
The Network Power Voltage
The monitor value for the netDrop Status is ON even though work power supply voltage is
the network power supply volt- set too high.
age is appropriate.
Decrease the network power
voltage monitor value.
The attempted setting is outside the setting range (14 to
26.4 V).
Cannot set the name of a con- The name (comment) exceeds
nected device or Unit.
32 characters.
The status for Unit MainteThe status flag will be OFF
nance Date and Connected
regardless if the monitor value
Device Maintenance Date do
is set to 0 (function not exenot turn ON.
cuted).
Set the voltage within the 14 to
26.4-V range.
Cannot set the network power
voltage monitor value.
When the Unit power was
turned ON again, the following
values did not change to the
ones immediately after the
power was turned OFF. Word
Slave Units: Unit Conduction
Time and Maintenance
Counter
582
Possible correction
The Maintenance Counter
value is stored in internal
EEPROM memory every 12
minutes while the power is ON.
Execute Save Maintenance
Counter to save the value. If
the power is turned OFF without executing saving the maintenance counter, the value
saved previously (from up to
12 minutes earlier) will be
read.
Set a name within 32 characters.
Set the monitor value to a
value other than 0.
Execute Save Maintenance
Counter in the Maintenance
Information Window of the CXIntegrator before turning OFF
the power.
Section 12-2
Troubleshooting
Model
Problem
Cause
All models other than The Maintenance Counter
Analog I/O Slave
returned to 0.
Units
• The Maintenance Counter will
return to 0 if the Unit is reset.
• The Maintenance Counter will
always return to 0 when the
setting is switched between
the Total ON Time Monitor
Function and the Contact
Operation Monitor Function.
Some functions do not change The functions that have been
even after parameters have
changed are enabled only after
been edited or set.
the power is cycled.
The Maintenance Counter is
The I/O power supply is OFF.
not counting even though outputs are turned ON.
The number of I/O points
Slave Units to which I/O communications stopped
Expansion Units can after mounting or removing an increase or decrease when
Expansion Unit and turning ON Expansion Units are mounted
be mounted
the power.
or removed. The number of I/O
points may not match the I/O
table registered in the Master
Unit.
Expansion Units cannot be
The MS indicator lights red
after mounting or removing an mounted or removed online.
Expansion Unit online.
Slave Units with
The Operation Time Monitor
• If the input filter is set, there is
Operation Time Moni- does not show the expected
a delay with the ON or OFF
tor Function
values.
time.
• The operation time ON or
OFF edge selection may not
be on the intended setting.
• The selected operation time
combination is not supported.
If the operation time monitor
does not show the expected
values, the settings may be
different from the intended
settings. The accuracy is ±6
ms.
The status flag for the Opera- The Operation Time Flag is
tion Time Monitor value turns refreshed every measurement
cycle, after the operation time
ON and OFF.
is compared with the monitor
value. The Operation Time
Flag turns ON for one cycle
and turns OFF, if the operation
time drops below the monitor
value at refreshing. There is
another flag that holds the contents of monitor value
exceeded flags.
Slave Units with out- Cannot hold outputs when
The Unit is set to clear outputs
puts
communication errors occur.
for communications errors.
Slave Units with
inputs
Cannot clear outputs when
communication errors occur.
The Unit is set to hold outputs
for communications errors.
There is a delay with the ON
and OFF timing for input values.
An input filter may be set.
Possible correction
---
Cycle the power or reset the
CX-Integrator.
Check that the I/O power supply is turned ON.
Change the Master Unit I/O
table settings.
Turn OFF the power before
mounting or removing Expansion Units.
• Use the Operation Time Monitor function considering the
filter setting or set the filter
constant to 0 ms.
• Check the operation time
combination set for Slave
Units for which the operation
time edge can be set.
---
Change the setting to hold outputs for communications
errors.
Change the setting to clear
outputs for communications
errors.
Set the input filter value to 0.
Alternatively, change the input
filter to an appropriate value.
583
Section 12-2
Troubleshooting
Model
Problem
Slave Units with
Power Short-circuit
Detection Function
Cause
Possible correction
The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a
power short-circuit has been
detected, even though the
error has been fixed.
The Unconnected Line DetecSlave Units with
tion Status Flag turned ON for
Unconnected Line
an unused input.
Detection Function
The Unconnected Line Detection Status Flag turned ON
even though the sensor power
supply was connected.
The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a
unconnected line has been
detected, even though the
error has been fixed.
Slave Units with Load The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a
Short-circuit Detecload short-circuit has been
tion Function
detected, even though the
error has been fixed.
Slaves with DisconThe Disconnected Line Detecnected Line Detection Status Flag turned ON for
tion
an unused output.
The Disconnected Line Detection Status Flag turned ON
even though the external load
was connected.
The status will not turn OFF
until the power for the node
where the error was detected
is reset.
Cycle the communications
power after fixing the error.
Unconnected line detection is
enabled for an unused input.
Disable unconnected line
detection for that input.
Current consumption is low.
(Output current: 3 mA max.)
Disable unconnected line
detection for that input (so that
the unconnected line detection function does not operate.)
Cycle the communications
power after fixing the error.
The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a
load short-circuit has been
detected, even though the
error has been fixed.
Communications are operating correctly, and the correct
area is ON, but the output and
the output indicator are not
ON.
The status will not turn OFF
until the power for the node
where the error was detected
is reset.
Output Slave Units
with Continuous
Short-circuit Protection Circuit
584
The status will not turn OFF
until the power for the node
where the error was detected
is reset.
The status will not turn OFF
until the power for the node
where the error was detected
is reset.
Cycle the communications
power after fixing the error.
Disconnected line detection is
enabled for an unused output.
Disable disconnected line
detection for that output.
Current consumption is low.
(Output current: 3 mA max.)
Disable disconnected line
detection for that output (so
that the disconnected line
detection function does not
operate.)
Cycle the communications
power after fixing the error.
The output current exceeds the
rated output current, continuous short-circuit protection
operates, and the outputs are
turned OFF. Once operation is
performed, all outputs remain
OFF until the power supply is
reset.
Remove the cause of the error
and restart the communications power supply once operation has been recovered.
Section 12-2
Troubleshooting
Model
Analog I/O Slave
Units and Temperature Input Units
Problem
The status does not turn ON
even if the monitor value is
exceeded.
Cause
• The required Analog Smart
Function is not enabled. The
status will be OFF unconditionally if the monitor value is
set to 0.
The following conditions apply
to Temperature Input Units
only.
• The input's decimal point
position for a Temperature
Input Unit was in the wrong
place when the monitor value
was set.
• The changes will not be
• The expected analog input
enabled until the power is
value is not received or the
expected analog output is not cycled or the CX-Integrator is
used to reset the Unit.
output after changing the
input type, display mode, or
unit.
• The Unit does not operate as
expected after changing the
allocated I/O data or a function enable bit.
Possible correction
Enable the required function.
Set the monitor value setting to
a value other than 0.
(Check the decimal point position then set the monitor value
again.)
Check the decimal point position and enter the monitor
value again.
• Cycle the power or reset the
CX-Integrator.
585
Section 12-2
Troubleshooting
Model
Analog I/O Slave
Units and Temperature Input Units
Problem
Cause
• The analog data values are
• The I/O data function allocadifferent from expected or the tions are not correct.
analog data error is too large.
• A disconnection is detected
• The scaling function is opereven though it is not disconating.
nected.
• The connected Sensor is different from the set input type.
• The user adjustment error is
too large.
The following conditions apply
to Temperature Input Units
only.
• The setting for the 1/100 Display Mode/Normal Display
Mode is incorrect.
• The sensor's decimal point
position was read incorrectly.
The following conditions apply
to the CRT1-TS04T only.
Possible correction
• Check again that the analog
data type to be set is correctly
allocated for the I/O data.
• If using the Scaling function,
check again that the scaling
value is correct.
• Remove the Scaling function
if it has been allocated by
mistake.
• Check the input type again.
• Execute user adjustment
again.
The following conditions apply
to Temperature Input Units
only.
• In Normal Display Mode, the
display value is multiplied by
x1 or x10, depending on the
input type setting.
• In 1/100 Display Mode, the
display value is multiplied by
x100, regardless of the input
type setting. Check the settings and input type again.
• Check the Unit's mounting
direction.
• The Unit is mounted vertically
or face-down.
• The Unit was replaced, but
the terminal block was not
changed. (The accuracy may
be reduced if the components
are not replaced as a set.)
• SW8 is turned OFF (default). • Turn ON SW 8.
Cannot set using external
switches.
The user adjustment and bias • Attempted to calibrate with
compensation settings are not
inputs outside the setting
accepted for the CRT1-TS04T. range.
The Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag will not go ON.
The Top/Valley Count Over
Flag will not go ON (Temperature Input Units only).
The Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags go ON too frequently.
The top/valley count is unexpectedly high for a Temperature Input Unit.
586
The hysteresis setting is too
high.
The hysteresis setting is 0.
The hysteresis setting is too
low.
• Calibrate again with the correct input voltage (current).
• Change the adjustment system if necessary.
Adjust the hysteresis setting.
Section 12-2
Troubleshooting
Model
Analog I/O Slave
Units (Inputs)
Problem
The disconnection display
does not clear.
No disconnection display.
Analog I/O Slave
Units (Outputs)
Temperature Input
Units
Cause
Possible correction
• The Sensor is disconnected.
• Restore the Sensor connection.
• Check the connected Sensor
and input type again.
---
• Disconnection is not displayed for ranges other than 1
to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
The conversion cycle is too
• The setting of the number of • Reduce the number of points
if some inputs are unneceslong.
AD conversion points is on
sary, and execute conversion
the maximum (4 points).
again.
• The processing time gets
longer each time a function is • Delete any unused functions,
and execute conversion
added.
again.
The expected value is not held • The output value that is set
• Check the output setting for
when communications errors
for communications errors is
communications errors.
occur.
incorrect.
The 1/100 Display Mode has
The allocated word is the one Either change the default conbeen set, but the display reads word in the normal display
nection path to the 1/100 dis0.
area.
play area or select a
connection path in the Master
Unit for the 1/100 display area.
The temperature range
The comparator function is not Enable the comparator. (The
effective.
power must be turned OFF
counter is not counting even
and then ON again.)
though the temperature value
is set as the count condition.
The Top/Valley Count Over
• The top/valley hold function is • Enable the top/valley hold
Flag will not go ON.
not enabled.
function. (The power must be
turned OFF and then ON
again.)
• The hysteresis setting is too • Adjust the hysteresis setting.
high.
• The hysteresis setting is 0.
The comparator does not oper- • The temperature display set- Check the decimal point posiate as expected even though
ting has been switched (°C to tion and °C/°F display for the
the function and hysteresis
°F or vice versa).
input type and display mode.
value have been set.
If these settings have been
changed during operation,
check the comparator and hysteresis settings and correct if
necessary.
• The decimal point position
was read incorrectly.
587
Section 12-3
Device Maintenance
12-3 Device Maintenance
This section describes routine device maintenance, in particular cleaning
methods, inspection methods, and how to replace Units.
12-3-1 Cleaning
Perform the following cleaning regularly to ensure the network is kept in the
best condition possible.
• Wipe the network over with a soft, dry cloth when doing daily cleaning.
• If dirt remains even after wiping with a soft, dry cloth, wipe over with a
cloth that has been wet with a sufficiently diluted detergent (2%) and
wrung dry.
• Units will become stained if items such as rubber or vinyl products or
adhesive tape are left on the Unit for a long period. Remove such items
during regular cleaning.
Note
Never use benzine, thinners, or other volatile solvents, or chemical cloths. The
Unit coating may change if these products are used.
12-3-2 Inspections
Always perform periodic inspections to ensure the network is kept in the best
possible condition.
Periodic inspections should occur every 6 months to a year. Periodic inspections should occur more frequently, however, for Units that are used in environments subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or a lot of dust.
Materials Required for
Inspections
The following materials are required to perform periodic inspections.
Materials Used Regularly
Phillips screwdrivers and flat-blade screwdrivers
Screwdrivers for communications connectors
Testers (or digital voltmeters)
Industrial alcohol and pure cotton cloth
Materials Sometimes
Required
Synchroscope
Pen oscilloscope
Thermometer and hygrometer
Inspection Items
Periodically inspect the following items to ensure that they do not deviate from
the criteria. If the items deviate from the criteria, adjust the environment so the
criteria are met or adjust the Unit itself.
Inspection
item
Environment
588
Inspection details
Are the ambient and
in-panel temperatures appropriate?
Is the ambient and inpanel humidity appropriate?
Has dust collected?
Criteria
Refer to the specifications for each
Slave Unit.
Refer to the specifications for each
Slave Unit.
No dust
Inspection method
Thermometer
Hygrometer
Visual inspection
Section 12-3
Device Maintenance
Inspection
item
Installation
Inspection details
Has the Unit been
secured?
Are the communications cable connectors inserted
properly?
Are the external wiring screws loose?
Are the connection
cables damaged?
Criteria
Inspection method
No looseness
Phillips screwdriver
No looseness
Phillips screwdriver
No looseness
Phillips screwdriver
No visible damage
Visual inspection
12-3-3 Handling when Replacing Units
Networks are constructed from a Master Unit and Slave Units. If a Unit is malfunctioning, the entire network will be affected. The malfunctioning Unit must
be replaced quickly. To restore network functions as quickly as possible, it is
recommended that spare Units are kept on hand ready to replace malfunctioning Units immediately.
Precautions When
Replacing Units
Heed the following precautions when replacing nodes after a periodic inspection has revealed a problem.
Check that the new Unit does not have errors after replacement.
If returning malfunctioning devices for repair, attach a detailed description of
the malfunction to the device and send the device to the OMRON representative listed at the end of this manual or to your OMRON representative.
If contacts are defective, wipe them with a clean pure cotton cloth that has
been soaked in industrial alcohol.
Settings after Unit
Replacement
After replacing a Unit, make the switch and other settings the same as before
the Unit was replaced.
589
Device Maintenance
590
Section 12-3
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
CompoNet explicit messages sent from the CompoNet Master Unit to a CompoNet Slave Unit can be used to
read or write any parameter of the specified Slave Unit.
The CompoNet Slave Units process the commands sent from the Master Unit and then return responses.
Sending Explicit Messages by FINS Commands
FINS commands are used to send CompoNet explicit messages from a CS/CJ-series CompoNet Master Unit.
For details on FINS commands, refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP-series and SYSMAC One NSJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (Cat. No. W342).
Message Flow
FINS commands are sent by using the CX-Programmer's CMND instruction. When a FINS command is sent
from the CPU Unit to the CompoNet Master Unit, the CompoNet Master Unit converts the FINS command to a
CompoNet explicit message and sends it to a CompoNet Slave Unit. The response from the Slave Unit is then
converted by the Master Unit from a CompoNet explicit message to a FINS response and sent back to the CPU
Unit.
CPU Unit
Explicit
message
CMND
instruction
(See note.)
FINS
header
FINS
header
Explicit
message
CompoNet Network
Note: The command code
for the FINS
command is 2802.
FINS
header
CompoNet Slave Unit
CompoNet Master Unit
FINS command
Response
FINS
header
Response
FINS response
FINS Format
The FINS command code of 2802 hex is used to send CompoNet explicit messages.
Command Format
28
532 bytes max.
02
Service Code Class ID
Command
code
Destination node address
Instance ID
Service Data
Response Format
• When a Normal Response Is Returned for a CompoNet Explicit Message
28
02
Command
code
00
00
End code
532 bytes max.
Number
of bytes
received
Service Code
Service Data
Destination node address
• When an Error Response Is Returned for a CompoNet Explicit Message (CompoNet Explicit Message
Communications Error)
591
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
28
02
Command
code
00
00
End code
00
Number
of bytes
received
94
Error code
Service Code (always 0094 hex)
Destination node address
• When a CompoNet Explicit Message Transmission Failure or Timeout Occurs (FINS Communications
Error)
28
02
Command
code
End code
Description of Parameters
Destination Node Address (Command)
Specifies the Slave Unit destination node address for the explicit message.
Word, input or mixed
10xx hex
Word, output
20xx hex
Bits, input or mixed
30xx hex
Bits, output
50xx hex
Repeater
70 xx hex
The Slave Unit's node address (hex) is entered in xx.
Service Code (Command, Response)
In a command this parameter specifies the service code defined by the CompoNet Network. For details, refer
to the following table. In a normal response, a value is returned with the leftmost bit turned ON for the service
code specified by the command. In an error response, 0094 hex is returned to indicate an error.
Service Codes
Service
Command
Normal response
Read
0E hex
8E hex
Write
10 hex
90 hex
Reset
05 hex
85 hex
Save
16 hex
96 hex
Class ID (Response)
Specifies the class ID for the explicit message.
Instance ID (Command)
Specifies the instance ID for the explicit message.
Service Data (Command, Response)
In a command, the data defined for the service code is specified for this parameter. In a response, the reception data defined for the service code is returned.
Number of Bytes Received (Response)
The number of bytes received in the data from the destination node address onwards is returned.
Destination Node Address (Response)
The node address of the remote Slave Unit (the source of the response) is returned.
Error Code (Response)
The error code defined by the CompoNet Network is returned. For details, refer to the list of error codes in the
following table.
List of Error Codes
Response code
08FF
09FF
592
Error name
Service not supported
Invalid attribute value
Cause
The Service code is incorrect.
The specified Attribute value is not supported.
The data written was outside valid range.
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Response code
16FF
15FF
13FF
0CFF
20FF
0EFF
Error name
Object does not exist
Too much data
Not enough data
Object state conflict
Invalid parameter
Attribute not settable
10FF
14FF
19FF
Device state conflict
Attribute not supported
Store operation failure
Appendix A
Cause
The specified Instance ID is not supported.
The data is larger than the specified size.
The data is smaller than the specified size.
The specified command cannot be executed due to an internal error.
The specified operation command data is not supported.
An Attribute ID supported only for reading has been executed for a
write service code.
The specified command cannot be executed due to an internal error.
The specified Attribute is not supported.
The data cannot be stored in memory.
End Code
The FINS communications end code is returned. For details, refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP-series and SYSMAC One NSJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (Cat. No. W342).
593
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit Messages Common to Slave Units
Refer to 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions for information on which functions are supported by the various
Slave Units.
Setting and Monitoring the Unit Conduction Time
Explicit
message
Read/
write
Function
Service
code
Command
Class ID Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
95 hex
01 hex
73 hex
---
Unit Main- Read
tenance Set
Value
Reads the set value 0E hex
for Unit Conduction
Time (unit: 0.1 hr)
Write
Writes the set value 10 hex
for Unit Conduction
Time (unit: 0.1 hr)
95 hex
01 hex
73 hex
Unit Maintenance
Present
Value
Read
Reads the present
value for Unit Conduction Time (unit:
0.1 hr)
0E hex
95 hex
01 hex
71 hex
Unit Maintenance
Flag
Read
Reads the monitor
status of Unit Conduction Time
0E hex
95 hex
01 hex
72 hex
Response
Service data
4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(0 to 4294967295)
---
4 bytes
0000000
0 to
FFFFFFF
F hex
(0 to
4294967
295)
--4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(0 to 4294967295)
--1 byte
00 hex: Within
range
01 hex: Out of
range (over the
monitor value)
Reading Warning Status and Alarm Status
Explicit
message
Warning
Status
Read
Alarm Status Read
Read/
write
Read
Read
Function
0E hex
95 hex
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 hex
C5 hex
---
0E hex
95 hex
01 hex
Service
code
Reads the Slave
Unit’s warning status area.
Reads the Slave
Unit’s alarm status
area.
Class ID
C6 hex
---
Response
Service data
2 bytes
2 bytes
Note For information on individual bits in the status areas of a Slave Unit, refer to the Status Areas section for
the Slave Unit.
594
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit Messages for Digital I/O Slave Units
Setting and Monitoring Inputs
Explicit
message
Read/
write
Function
Service
code
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
08 hex 01 to 20 65 hex
--hex
Class
ID
Response
Service data
Read
Terminal
Maintenance Information
Monitor
Mode
0E hex
Reads the monitor
mode for maintenance
information of the input
(No. 1 to 32) specified
by the Instance ID.
Write
Writes the monitor
10 hex
mode for maintenance
information of the input
(No. 1 to 32) specified
by the Instance ID.
08 hex 01 to 20
hex
65 hex
Read
Reads the set value for 0E hex
the total ON time (unit:
s) or number of contact
operations (unit: operations) of the input (No.
1 to 32) specified by
the Instance ID.
Writes the set value for 10 hex
the total ON time (unit:
s) or number of contact
operations (unit: operations) of the input (No.
1 to 32) specified by
the Instance ID.
0E hex
Reads the total ON
time (unit: s) or number
of contact operations
(unit: operations) for
the input (No. 1 to 32)
specified by the
Instance ID.
05 hex
Resets the total ON
time (unit: s) or number
of contact operations
(unit: operations) for
the input (No. 1 to 32)
specified by the
Instance ID.
08 hex 01 to 20
hex
68 hex
08 hex 01 to 20
hex
68 hex
--4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF
hex
(0 to
4294967295)
08 hex 01 to 20
hex
66 hex
---
4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(0 to
4294967295)
08 hex 01 to 20
hex
66 hex
---
---
08 hex 01 to 20
hex
67 hex
---
1 byte
00 hex: Within
range
01 hex: Out of
range (over the
monitor value)
Set Value
for Input
Total ON
Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Write
Input Total Read
ON Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Read
Input Total Reset
ON Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Reset
Monitor
Read
Status for
Input Total
ON Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Read
Reads the monitor sta- 0E hex
tus for total ON time or
number of contact
operations for the input
(No. 1 to 32) specified
by the Instance ID.
1 byte
00 hex: Total
ON time
mode
01 hex: Contact operation counter
mode
---
1 byte
00 hex: Total ON
time mode
01 hex: Contact
operation
counter mode
---
4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(0 to
4294967295)
595
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Setting and Monitoring the Outputs
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 20 65 hex
--hex
Response
Service data
Terminal
Read Reads the monitor mode 0E hex
Maintefor maintenance infornance Information of the output (No.
mation
1 to 32) specified by the
Monitor
Instance ID.
Mode
09 hex
Write Writes the monitor mode 10 hex
for maintenance information of the output (No.
1 to 32) specified by the
Instance ID.
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
65 hex
Read Reads the set value for 0E hex
the total ON time (unit: s)
or number of contact
operations (unit: operation) for the output (No. 1
to 32) specified by the
Instance ID.
Write Writes the set value for 10 hex
the total ON time (unit: s)
or number of contact
operations (unit: operation) for the output (No. 1
to 32) specified by the
Instance ID.
Read Reads the total ON time 0E hex
(unit: s) or number of
contact operations (unit:
operation) for the output
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
the Instance ID.
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
68 hex
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
68 hex
4 bytes
--00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(0 to
4294967295)
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
66 hex
---
4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF
hex
(0 to
4294967295)
Set Value
for Output
Total ON
Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Output
Total ON
Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Read
1 byte
00 hex: Total
ON time
mode
01 hex: Contact operation counter
mode
---
1 byte
00 hex: Total
ON time mode
01 hex: Contact
operation
counter mode
--4 bytes
00000000 to
FFFFFFFF
hex
(0 to
4294967295)
Reset for
Output
Total ON
Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Reset
Reset Resets the total ON time 05 hex
(unit: s) or number of
contact operations (unit:
operation) for the output
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
the Instance ID to 0.
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
66 hex
---
---
Monitor
Status for
Output
Total ON
Time or
Contact
Operation
Counter
Read
Read Reads the monitor sta0E hex
tus for total ON time or
contact operation
counter for the output
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
the Instance ID.
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
67 hex
---
1 byte
00 hex:
Within range
01 hex: Out
of range
(over the
monitor
value)
596
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Setting and Monitoring Operation Time
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service
data
Operation
Time Monitor Status
Read
Read Reads the monitor sta0E hex
tus for the time (unit: ms)
from the start point trigger until the end point
trigger specified by the
Instance ID (No. 1 to 8).
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
66 hex
---
Operation
Time Monitor Setting
Read Reads the setting for the 0E hex
time (unit: ms) from the
start point trigger until
the end point trigger
specified by the Instance
ID (No. 1 to 8).
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
67 hex
---
Write Writes the setting for the 10 hex
time (unit: ms) from the
start point trigger until
the end point trigger
specified by the Instance
ID (No. 1 to 8).
Read Reads the peak value for 0E hex
Operation
the time (unit: ms) from
Time Monithe start point trigger
tor Peak
Value Read
until the end point trigger
specified by the Instance
ID (No. 1 to 8).
05 hex
Reset Resets to the present
Operation
value the peak value for
Time Monithe time (unit: ms) from
tor Peak
the start point trigger
Value
until the end point trigger
Reset
specified by the Instance
ID (No. 1 to 8)
Operation
Read Reads the monitor his0E hex
Time Monitory for the time (unit:
tor History
ms) from the start point
trigger until the end point
trigger specified by the
Instance ID (No. 1 to 8).
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
67 hex
---
2 bytes
(See note.)
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
68 hex
---
2 bytes
0000 to
FFFF hex
(0 to 65535)
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
68 hex
---
---
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
6D hex
---
Reset Resets the monitor his- 05 hex
tory for the time (unit:
ms) from the start point
trigger until the end point
trigger specified by the
Instance ID (No. 1 to 8)
to 0.
97 hex
01 to 08
hex
6D hex
---
1 byte
00 hex:
Value not
exceeded
01 hex:
Value
exceeded
---
Operation
Time Monitor History
Reset
1 byte
00 hex:
Threshold
not passed
01 hex:
Threshold
passed
2 bytes
(See note.)
Note Refer to the note on page 613.
597
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Setting Hold/Clear for Communications Errors for Outputs
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
0E hex
Setting for Read Reads whether hold or
clear is set as the output
Output Stastatus after a communitus (Hold or
cations error for an outClear) after
put (No. 1 to 32)
Communispecified by the Instance
cations
ID. The setting can be
Error
read for a specified number of points.
10 hex
Setting for Write Sets whether hold or
clear is set as the output
Output Stastatus after a communitus (Hold or
cations error for an outClear) after
put (No. 1 to 32)
Communispecified by the Instance
cations
ID. The setting can be
Error
set for a specified number of points.
Class
ID
09 hex
09 hex
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 20 05 hex
--hex
01 to 20
hex
05 hex
1 byte
00 hex: Clear
01 hex: Hold
Response
Service
data
1 byte
00 hex:
Clear
01 hex: Hold
---
Note The default setting is for all outputs to be cleared (0).
Monitoring Power Short-circuit Detection (Slave Units with Input Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection)
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Read Reads the sensor power 0E hex
supply short-circuit status for the input (No. 1 to
32) specified by the
Instance ID.
08 hex
Power
Read Reads the sensor power 0E hex
Short-cirsupply short-circuit stacuit Status
tus for all Slave Units.
for all Slave
Units Read
at Once
1D hex
Power
Short-circuit Detection
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 20 69 hex
--hex
01 hex
67 hex
---
Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 inputs, 2 bytes for 16 inputs, or 4 bytes for 32 inputs.
598
Response
Service
data
1 byte
00 hex: Normal
01 hex:
Short-circuit
1 byte,
2 bytes, or
4 bytes
00 hex: Normal
Other than
00 hex: Sensor power
supply
short-circuit
for applicable terminal
(Inputs 0 to
31: Bits 0 to
31) (See
note.)
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Monitoring and Setting Unconnected Line Detection
(Slave Units with Input Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection)
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 20 6B hex
--hex
UnconRead Reads the unconnected 0E hex
nected Line
line detection setting for
Detection
the input (No. 1 to 32)
Setting
specified by the Instance
ID
08 hex
Write Writes the unconnected 10 hex
line detection setting for
the input (No. 1 to 32)
specified by the Instance
ID.
08 hex
01 to 20
hex
6B hex
0E hex
UnconRead Reads the connection/
nected Line
unconnected status for
Status
the input (No. 1 to 32)
specified by the Instance
ID.
08 hex
01 to 20
hex
6A hex
1 byte
00 hex:
Disabled (Not
used.)
01 hex:
Enabled
(Used.)
---
UnconRead Reads the connection/
nected Line
unconnected status for
Status for
all Slave Units.
all Slave
Units Read
at Once
1D hex
01 hex
68 hex
---
0E hex
Response
Service
data
1 byte
00 hex: Disabled (Not
used.)
01 hex:
Enabled
(Used.)
---
1 byte
00 hex: Connected (or
detection
not set).
01 hex:
Unconnected.
1 byte,
2 bytes, or
4 bytes
00 hex:
Normal
Other than
00 hex:
Applicable
input connector is not
connected.
(Inputs 0 to
31: Bits 0 to
31) (See
note.)
Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 inputs, 2 bytes for 16 inputs, or 4 bytes for 32 inputs.
599
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Monitoring Load Short-circuit Detection (Slave Units with Output Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection)
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Load Short- Read Reads the load short-cir- 0E hex
circuit
cuit status for the output
Detection
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
Status
the Instance ID.
09 hex
Load Short- Read Reads the load short-cir- 0E hex
cuit status for all Slave
circuit StaUnits.
tus for all
Slave Units
Read at
Once
1E hex
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 20 69 hex
--hex
01 hex
64 hex
---
Response
Service
data
1 byte
00 hex: Normal
01 hex:
Short-circuit
1 byte,
2 bytes, or
4 bytes
00 hex:
Normal
Other than
00 hex:
Load shortcircuit at
applicable
terminal.
(Outputs 0
to 31: Bits 0
to 31) (See
note.)
Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 outputs, 2 bytes for 16 outputs, or 4 bytes for 32 outputs.
600
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Monitoring and Setting Load Unconnected Line Detection (Slave Units
with Output Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection)
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 20 6B hex
--hex
Load
Read Reads the load uncon0E hex
Unconnected line detection
nected Line
setting for the output
Detection
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
Setting
the Instance ID.
09 hex
Write Writes the load uncon10 hex
nected line detection
setting for the output
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
the Instance ID.
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
6B hex
0E hex
Read Reads the load unconLoad
nected line detection
Unconsetting for the output
nected Line
(No. 1 to 32) specified by
Detection
the Instance ID.
Status
09 hex
01 to 20
hex
6A hex
1 byte
00 hex:
Disabled (Not
used.)
01 hex:
Enabled
(Used.)
---
0E hex
1E hex
01 hex
68 hex
---
Read Reads the load line disLoad Line
connection status for all
Disconnecoutput Slave Units.
tion Status
for all Slave
Units Read
at Once
Response
Service
data
1 byte
00 hex: Disabled (Not
used.)
01 hex:
Enabled
(Used.)
---
1 byte
00 hex: Normal
01 hex: Line
disconnection
1 byte,
2 bytes, or
4 bytes
00 hex:
Normal
Other than
00 hex:
Load line
disconnection at applicable
terminal.
(Inputs 0 to
31: Bits 0 to
31) (See
note.)
Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 outputs, 2 bytes for 16 outputs, or 4 bytes for 32 outputs.
Writing Maintenance Information
Explicit
message
Maintenance
Counter
Save
Read/
write
Function
Save
Stores the maintenance
counter in the Slave
Unit's memory.
Command
Service
code
16 hex
Class ID Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
95 hex
01 hex
75 hex
---
Response
Service
data
---
601
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Reading Operation Time Monitor and Total ON Time/Contact Operation
Counter for All Slave Units at Once
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Monitor
Read Reads the monitor sta- 0E hex
Status for
tus for total operation
Operation
time monitor for all
Time MoniSlave Units.
tor for All
Slave Units
Read at
Once
Read Reads the monitor sta- 0E hex
Monitor
tus for total ON time or
Status for
contact operation
Total ON
counter for all Slave
Time or
Units.
Contact
Operation
Counter for
All Slave
Units Read
at Once
Note
Command
Class ID Instance Command data
ID
Attribute Data
ID
95 hex
01 hex
7E hex
---
95 hex
01 hex
7F hex
---
Response
Service data
+00: Response size
+01: 02 hex (fixed)
+02: Response area 1
+03: Response area 2
(See note 1.)
+00: Response size
+01: 08 hex (fixed)
+02: Response area 1
+03: Response area 2
+04: Response area 3
+05: Response area 4
+06: Response area 5
+07: Response area 6
+08: Response area 7
+09: Response area 8
(See note 2.)
(1) The Attribute (7E hex) is bit 6 of the Generic Status and so the size is fixed at 4 bytes and has the
following format.
+00
+01
+02
+03
Size, 0002
Fixed
IN+OUT combined, terminals 0 to 7
Not used.
The bit turns ON when the set value is exceeded.
•Depending on the Unit size, not all bits are used.
• A value of 14FF is returned for all Units except Mixed I/O Units.
(2) The Attribute (7F hex) is bit 7 of the Generic Status and so the size is fixed at 6 bytes and has the
following format.
Offset (byte)
+00
+01
+02
+03
+04
+05
Up to 32 inputs
Up to 16 inputs
4
No. of data items (UNIT)
Up to 32 inputs
Inputs and outputs
IN Area, terminals 0
to 7
IN Area, terminals 8
to 15
IN Area, terminals 16
to 23
IN Area, terminals 24
to 31
OUT Area, terminals
0 to 7
OUT Area, terminals
8 to 15
OUT Area, terminals
16 to 23
OUT Area, terminals
24 to 31
IN Area, terminals 0
to 7
IN Area, terminals 8
to 15
OUT Area, terminals
0 to 7
OUT Area, terminals
8 to 15
Not used.
OUT Area, terminals
0 to 7
OUT Area, terminals
8 to 15
•Depending on the Unit size, not all bits are used.
602
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit Messages for Analog I/O Slave Units
Reading DIP Switch Settings
Explicit
message
DIP Switch
Status
Read
Read
/write
Function
Read Reads the status of the
Input/Output Terminals
DIP switch.
Service
code
Class
ID
0E hex
94 hex
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 hex
68 hex
---
Response
Service data
1 byte
Setting and Reading for Analog Input Units
Explicit
message
Analog
Data 1
Value
Analog
Data 2
Value
Setting the
Number of
AD Conversion Points
Read
/write
Function
Command
Response
Service
code
Class
ID
Read Reads the value for
Analog Data 1.
0E hex
0A hex
Read Reads the value for
Analog Data 2.
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
65 hex
---
2 bytes
Write/ Sets the number of AD
Read conversion points.
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
00 hex
64 hex
2 bytes
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
07 hex
1 byte
1 byte
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
66 hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
68 hex
1 byte
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
69 hex
1 byte
1 byte
Input
Write/ Sets the input range.
Range Set- Read −10 to 10 V: 0
ting
0 to 5 V: 1
0 to 10 V: 2
4 to 20 mA: 3
1 to 5 V: 7
0 to 20 mA: 8
Analog Sta- Read Reads the status of the
tus Flag
Analog Status Flags.
Read
LL = 0; L = 1;
Pass signal = 2; H = 3;
HH = 4; Valley shot = 5;
Top shot = 6;
Disconnected line
detection = 7
Analog
Write/ Selects the data alloData 1 Allo- Read cated to Analog Data 1.
cation
Analog input value: 0
Selection
Peak value: 1,
Bottom value: 2,
Top value: 3,
Valley value: 4,
Rate of change value: 5
Write/ Selects the data alloAnalog
Data 2 Allo- Read cated to Analog Data 2.
cation
Analog input value: 0
Selection
Peak value: 1,
Bottom value: 2,
Top value: 3,
Valley value: 4,
Rate of change value: 5
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 04 03 hex
--hex
Service data
2 bytes
603
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service data
Service
code
Class
ID
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
6E hex
1 byte
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Scaling
Write/ Sets an analog value as Write:
Point 1 Set- Read the 0% value for user
10 hex
ting
scaling.
Read:
0E hex
Scaling
Write/ Sets an analog value as Write:
Point 2 Set- Read the 100% value for user 10 hex
ting
scaling.
Read:
0E hex
Offset
Write/ Compensates for scal- Write:
Compensa- Read ing errors with an offset 10 hex
value.
tion after
Read:
Scaling
0E hex
Read:
Maximum
Read/ Reads the maximum
0E hex
Value Read Reset value after power is
turned ON.
Reset:
35 hex
Read:
Minimum
Read/ Reads the minimum
0E hex
Value Read Reset value after power is
turned ON.
Reset:
35 hex
Peak Value Read The peak value is held 0E hex
Read
while the hold function
is enabled. The held
value is read by this
message.
Bottom
Read The bottom value is held 0E hex
Value Read
while the hold function
is enabled. The held
value is read by this
message.
Top Value
Read The top value is held
0E hex
Read
while the hold function
is enabled. The held
value is read by this
message.
0E hex
Top Detec- Read Reads the timing for
detecting top values.
tion Timing
Flag Read
Valley
Read The valley value is held 0E hex
Value Read
and read.
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
6F hex
1 byte
1 byte
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
70 hex
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
71 hex
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
72 hex
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
73 hex
---
2 bytes
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
74 hex
---
2 bytes
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
75 hex
---
2 bytes
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
76 hex
---
2 bytes
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
77 hex
---
2 bytes
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
78 hex
---
1 byte
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
79 hex
---
2 bytes
Function
Setting
Scaling
Type Setting
604
Write/ Sets each function.
Read Bit status:
ON: Enabled,
OFF: Disabled
Moving average: 0;
Scaling: 1;
Peak/bottom hold: 2;
Top/valley hold: 3;
Comparator: 4;
Cumulative counter: 5;
Rate of change: 6
Write/ Default scaling: 0:
Read User scaling: 1
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Write/
Read
H Value
Setting
Write/
Read
L Value
Setting
Write/
Read
Scaled
Analog
Input Value
Read
Rate of
Change
Value Read
Sampling
Cycle Setting
Read
Response
Service data
Class
ID
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
7A hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Sets the LL value.
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Sets the H value.
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Sets the L value.
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Reads analog input val- 0E hex
ues for which have only
been scaled.
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
7D hex
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
7E hex
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
7F hex
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
80 hex
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
2 bytes
(−32768 to
32767)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
8D hex
---
2 bytes
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
8E hex
---
2 bytes
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Read:
0E hex
Reset:
35 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
90 hex
2 bytes
(10 to 65535)
2 bytes
(10 to 65535)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
91 hex
---
4 bytes
(−214748364.8
to
214748364.8)
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
92 hex
---
1 byte
Valley
Read Reads the timing for
Detection
detecting valley values.
Timing Flag
Read
HH Value
Write/ Sets the HH value.
Setting
Read
LL Value
Setting
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Service
code
Read Reads the rate of
change for each sampling cycle.
Write/ Sets the sampling cycle
Read for obtaining the rate of
change based on the
previous value.
Cumulated Read/ Reads the cumulated
Value Read Reset analog input value.
Cumulative
Counter
Flag Read
Read Reads the cumulative
count status in the
Cumulative Counter
Flag in the area for
Generic Status Flags.
0: Counter overflow
1: Counter underflow
7: Set value overflow
Cumulative
Counter
Monitor
Value Setting
Cumulative
Counter
Unit Setting
Write/ Writes/reads the set
Read monitor value for the
cumulative counter.
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
93 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
Write/ Sets the unit for the
Read cumulative counter.
0: Hour (count hours);
1: Minute (count
minutes)
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0A hex
01 to 04
hex
94 hex
1 byte
1 byte
605
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Setting and Reading for Analog Output Units
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Analog Out- Read Reads analog output
put Value
values.
Read
Output
Write/ Sets the output range.
Range Set- Read 4 to 20 mA: 0;
ting
0 to 10 V: 1;
0 to 20 mA: 2;
−10 to 10 V: 3;
0 to 5 V: 4;
1 to 5 V: 6
Communi- Write/ Sets the communicacations
Read tions error output value
Error Outfor each output.
put Setting
0: Hold last state
1: Low limit
2: High limit
3: Zero count
Function
Write/ Sets the function.
Setting
Read Scaling: 0;
Cumulative counter: 1
Scaling
Type Setting
Write/
Scaling
Point 2 Set- Read
ting
Offset
Write/
Compensa- Read
tion after
Scaling
Cumulated Read/
Value Read Reset
Cumulative
Counter
Flag Read
606
Read
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service data
0E hex
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
03 hex
---
2 bytes
0E hex
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
07 hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
09 hex
1 byte
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
6E hex
1 byte
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Sets a conversion value Write:
as the 0% value for user 10 hex
scaling.
Read:
0E hex
Sets a conversion value Write:
10 hex
as the 100% value for
user scaling.
Read:
0E hex
Compensates for scal- Write:
ing errors with an offset 10 hex
value.
Read:
0E hex
Reads the cumulated
Read:
analog output value.
0E hex
Reset:
35 hex
Reads the cumulative
Read:
count status in the
0E hex
Cumulative Counter
Flag in the area for
Generic Status Flags.
0: Counter overflow
1: Counter underflow
7: Set value overflow
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
6F hex
1 byte
---
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
70 hex
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
71 hex
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
72 hex
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
2 bytes
(−28000 to
28000)
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
91 hex
---
4 bytes
(−214748364.8
to
214748364.8)
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
92 hex
---
1 byte
Write/ Default scaling: 0:
Read User scaling: 1
Write/
Scaling
Point 1 Set- Read
ting
Class
ID
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Cumulative
Counter
Monitor
Value Setting
Cumulative
Counter
Unit Setting
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class
ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service data
Write/ Writes/reads the set
Read monitor value for the
cumulative counter.
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
93 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
Write/ Sets the unit for the
Read cumulative counter.
0: Hour (count hours);
1: Minute (count minutes)
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
0B hex 01 to 02
hex
94 hex
1 byte
---
Explicit Messages for Temperature Input Units
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
Class ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
00 hex
64 hex
---
Response
Service data
Display For- Read Reads the display for- 0E hex
mat Read
mat.
(Normal or
Normal display: 0
1/100)
1/100 display: 1
Read Reads the value of tem- 0E hex
Temperaperature data 1.
ture 1 Read
for Normal
Display
31 hex
1 byte
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
A5 hex
---
2 bytes
TemperaRead Reads the value of temture 1 Read
perature data 1.
for 1/100
Display
Input Type Write/ Sets the input type.
Set
Read R=0, S=1, K1=2, K2=3,
J1=4, J2=5, T=6, E=7,
L1=8, L2=9, U=A, N=B,
W=C, B=D, PL2=E,
PT=F, PT2=11
User
Read Checks to see if user
Adjustment
adjustment has been
Check
performed for the temperature conversion
constant.
User adjustment: 1
Default setting: 0
Display Unit Read Reads the display unit.
Read
°C: 1200, °F: 1201
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
06 hex
---
4 bytes
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
A2 hex
1 byte
1 byte
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
84 hex
---
1 byte
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
04 hex
---
2 bytes
607
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Reading of Read Reads the status of the
the TemperTemperature Data Staature Data
tus Flag.
Status Flag
LL = 0;
L = 1;
Pass signal = 2;
H = 3;
HH = 4;
Valley shot = 5;
Top shot = 6;
Off-wire detection = 7
TemperaWrite/ Selects the data alloture Data 1 Read cated to Temperature
Allocation
Data 1.
Selection
Temperature input
value: 0;
Peak value: 1;
Bottom value: 2;
Top value: 3;
Valley value: 4;
Rate of change value: 5
Function
Write/ Sets each function.
Setting
Read Bit status: ON: Enabled,
OFF: Disabled
Moving average: 0;
Scaling: 1;
Peak/bottom hold: 2;
Top/valley hold: 3;
Comparator: 4;
Cumulative counter: 5;
Rate of change: 6
Input error detection
disable: 7
Scaling
Write/ Sets an temperature
Point 1 Set- Read value as the 0% value
ting
for user scaling.
Scaling
Point 2 Setting
Offset
Compensation
Maximum
Value Read
Minimum
Value Read
608
Service
code
Class ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service data
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
66 hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
68 hex
1 byte
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
6E hex
2 bytes
2 bytes
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
70 hex
2 bytes
2 bytes
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
71 hex
2 bytes
2 bytes
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
72 hex
2 bytes
2 bytes
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
73 hex
---
4 bytes
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
74 hex
---
4 bytes
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Write/ Sets an temperature
Write:
Read value as the 100%
10 hex
value for user scaling.
Read:
0E hex
Write/ Compensates for scal- Write:
Read ing errors with an offset 10 hex
value.
Read:
0E hex
Read/ Reads the maximum
Read: 0E
Reset value after power is
hex
turned ON.
Reset: 35
hex
Read/ Reads the minimum
Read: 0E
Reset value after power is
hex
turned ON.
Reset: 35
hex
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Peak Value
Read
Read The peak value is held
and read if the hold
function is being executed.
Bottom
Read The bottom value is
Value Read
held and read if the hold
function is being executed.
Top Value
Read The top value is held
Read
and read if the hold
function is being executed.
Top Detec- Read Reads the timing for
detecting top values.
tion Timing
Flag Read
Valley
Read The valley value is held
Value Read
and read if the hold
function is being executed.
Valley
Read Reads the timing for
detecting valley values.
Detection
Timing Flag
Read
HH Value
Write/ Sets the HH value.
Setting
Read
LL Value
Setting
Write/ Sets the LL value.
Read
H Value
Setting
Write/ Sets the H value.
Read
L Value
Setting
Write/ Sets the L value.
Read
Scaled
Read Reads temperature
Temperainput values for which
ture Input
have only been scaled.
Value Read
Rate of
Read Reads the rate of
Change
change for each samValue Read
pling cycle.
Reads the Write/ Sets the sampling cycle
Read for obtaining the rate of
rate of
change based on the
change for
previous value.
each sampling cycle.
Set in multiples of 250
ms. (Default: 250 ms)
Service
code
Class ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service data
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
75 hex
---
4 bytes
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
76 hex
---
4 bytes
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
77 hex
---
4 bytes
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
78 hex
---
1 byte
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
79 hex
---
4 bytes
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
7A hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
11 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
(−415000 (−415000 to
to
415000)
415000)
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
12 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
(−415000 (−415000 to
to
415000)
415000)
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
15 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
(−415000 (−415000 to
to
415000)
415000)
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
16 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
(−415000 (−415000 to
to
415000)
415000)
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
8D hex
---
4 bytes
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
8E hex
---
4 bytes
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
90 hex
2 bytes
(250 to
65500)
2 bytes
(250 to 65500)
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
609
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Service
code
---
4 bytes
(−214748364.8
to
214748364.7)
01 to 04
hex
92 hex
---
1 byte
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
93 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
94 hex
1 byte
1 byte
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
A3 hex
---
1 byte
Read: 0E 31 hex
hex
Reset: 35
hex
Reads whether the top/ 0E hex
31 hex
valley count has
exceeded the threshold
value.
0: Counter overflow
7: Set value overflow
Selects counting either Write:
31 hex
tops or valleys.
10 hex
Count tops = 0
Read:
0E hex
Count valleys = 1
Sets the threshold value Write:
31 hex
to compare with the top/ 10 hex
valley count.
Read:
0E hex
Reads (in seconds) the Read: 0E 31 hex
time the system has
hex
been in a user-set tem- Reset: 35
perature range.
hex
01 to 04
hex
A9 hex
---
4 bytes
01 to 04
hex
AA hex
---
1 byte
01 to 04
hex
AB hex
1 byte
1 byte
01 to 04
hex
AC hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
01 to 04
hex
AD hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
Read Reads the cumulative
count status in the
Cumulative Counter
Monitor Flag in the general status area.
0: Counter overflow
1: Counter underflow
7: Set value overflow
Write:
Write/ Writes/reads the set
Read monitor value for the
10 hex
cumulative counter.
Read:
0E hex
Top/Valley
Count
Threshold
Status
Read
Read
Top/Valley
Counting
Selection
Write/
Read
Top/Valley
Count
Threshold
Set
Write/
Read
Time in
Temperature Range
Read
Read/
Reset
Response
Service data
91 hex
Cumulative
Counter
Monitor
Value Setting
Cumulative Write/ Sets the unit for the
Counter
Read cumulative counter.
Unit Setting
0: Hour (count hours
1: Minute (count minutes)
Read Reads the position of
Decimal
the decimal point.
Position
Read
0000 = 0
0000.0 = 1
0000.00 = 2
Top/Valley
Read/ Reads the number of
Count Read Reset tops or valleys that have
been counted.
610
Read: 0E 31 hex
hex
Reset: 35
hex
0E hex
31 hex
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
01 to 04
hex
Cumulated Read/ Reads the cumulated
Value Read Reset temperature input
value.
Cumulative
Counter
Flag Read
Class ID
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Explicit
message
Read
/write
Function
Read Compares the time the
system has been in a
user-set temperature
range with a threshold
value.
0: Counter overflow
7: Set value overflow
Write/ Sets the range for timRange for
Read ing the time in the set
Time in
temperature range.
Temperature Range
Above HH = 0, Between
Set
HH and H = 1, Pass = 2,
Between L and LL = 3,
Below LL = 4
Write/ Sets (in seconds) the
Threshold
for Compar- Read threshold value that is
compared to the time in
ison with
the user-set temperaTime in
ture range.
Temperature Range
Set/Read
Input Tem- Read Reads the result of
input temperature variaperature
tion detection.
Variation
Detection
Read
Variation
Read Compares the input
Detection
temperature variation
Threshold
detection result with a
Compare
threshold value and outputs the result.
0: Counter overflow
1: Counter underflow
6: Invalid data
7: Set value overflow
Input Tem- Write/ Sets the threshold for
perature
Read comparison with the
Variation
detection result of temDetection
perature difference
Threshold
between inputs.
Set
Threshold
Status for
Time in
Temperature Range
Read
Service
code
Class ID
Command
Instance
Command data
ID
Attribute
Data
ID
Response
Service data
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
AE hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
AF hex
1 byte
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
31 hex
01 to 04
hex
B0 hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
0E hex
69 hex
01 to 06
hex
67 hex
---
4 bytes
0E hex
69 hex
01 to 06
hex
68 hex
---
1 byte
Write:
10 hex
Read:
0E hex
69 hex
01 to 06
hex
6E hex
4 bytes
4 bytes
611
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Appendix A
Example of Using Explicit Messages
Example of Sending an Explicit Message with the CMND Instruction
CompoNet Master Unit
Unit number: 0
CMND instruction
executed to send
explicit message
CPU
Unit
Unit address: 20 hex (See note.)
Explicit message
Input Slave Unit
Node address: 11
Note: The CompoNet Master Unit (or Special I/O Unit)
unit address is the unit number + 20 hex.
Operation
The unit maintenance PV (class ID: 95 hex, instance ID: 01 hex, attribute ID: 71 hex) is read from the Slave
Unit.
The command data is read by using the EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command (28 02).
The command data is written in words starting from D01000 in the CPU Unit and the response data is stored in
words starting from D02000.
612
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
Command Details
[CMND S D C]
Contents of S
Address
D01000
D01001
D01002
D01003
D01004
D01005
Contents (hex)
28 02
10 0B
00 0E
00 95
00 01
71 00
Meaning
Command code
Destination node address (Input Slave Unit: node address 11)
Service code: 0E hex
Class ID: 0095 hex
Instance ID: 0001 hex
Attribute ID: 71 hex
(The rightmost 00 hex is not read because the number of bytes of
command data is set to 11 bytes.)
D: First Response Storage Word
Contents of C
Address
D00000
D00001
D00002
D00003
Contents (hex)
00 0B
00 0E
00 00
00 20
D00004
00 00
D00005
00 64
Meaning
Number of bytes of command data: 11 bytes
Number of bytes of response data: 14 bytes
Destination Master Unit network address: 0
Destination Master Unit node address: 0
Destination Master Unit unit address: 20 hex
Response required
Communications port number: 0
Number of retries: 0
Response monitoring time
Response
Contents of D
Address
D02000
D02001
D02002
D02003
D02004
D02005
Contents (hex)
28 02
00 00
00 08
10 0B
00 8E
2F 07
D02006
00 00
Note
Meaning
------Destination node address: 11 (0B hex)
Normal completion: 8E hex
The Unit maintenance PV (0000072F hex) is stored in order from
leftmost to rightmost. (See note.)
---
(1) The service data is stored for the command format with the lower byte stored first followed by the
upper byte for word (2-byte) or double-word (4-byte) data. For example, with word data, 1234 hex
would be specified by setting 34 hex first followed by 12 hex. With double-word data, 12345678 hex
would be specified by setting 78 hex first followed by 56 hex, 34 hex, and then 12 hex. This is illustrated below.
Example for 1234 hex
34
Example for 12345678 hex
12
Service data
78
56
34
12
Service data
Data is thus set in I/O memory starting from the address specified for operand S of the CMND in-
613
Appendix A
CompoNet Explicit Messages
struction as follows:
Example for 1234 Hex
Starting from the Upper
Byte of I/O Memory
Bit
S+n
15
08 07
34
00
12
Example for 12345678 Hex
Starting from the Upper
Byte of I/O Memory
Bit
Starting from the Lower
Byte of I/O Memory
Bit 15
08 07
00
Bit
S+n
S+n
34
12
15
S+n
08 07
00
78
56
34
12
Starting from the Lower
Byte of I/O Memory
15
08 07
00
78
56
34
12
(2) The service data is stored in the same way for the response format, i.e., when word (2-byte) or double-word (4-byte) data is received, the lower byte is stored first.
614
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Identity Object (0x01)
Object class
Object
instance
Attribute
Service
Attribute
Service
ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Not supported
Not supported
Contents
Vendor
Device type
Product code
Revision
Status (bits supported)
Serial number
Product name
Get (read)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8
State
Code
Description
05 Reset
0E Get_Attribute_Single
Set (write)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Value
47
See note.
See note.
1.1
Bit 0 only
Unique for each Unit
See note.
No
Parameter option
No
No
Note The product code and product name depend on the type of Slave Unit being used, as shown in the following table.
Basic Unit
CRT1-ID08
CRT1-ID08-1
CRT1-OD08
CRT1-OD08-1
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16-1
Model
Expansion Unit
---
Device type
Product
code
Product name
None
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID16
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD16
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-OD16-1
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
1557
1558
1559
1560
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
CRT1-ID08
CRT1-ID08-1
CRT1-OD08
CRT1-OD08-1
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16
None
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID16
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD16
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-OD16-1
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-ID16-1
615
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Basic Unit
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-MD16
CRT1-MD16-1
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ID08TA
CRT1-ID08TA-1
CRT1-OD08TA
CRT1-OD08TA-1
CRT1-ID08TAH
CRT1-ID08TAH-1
CRT1-OD08TAH
CRT1-OD08TAH-1
616
Model
Expansion Unit
None
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID16
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD16
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-OD16-1
None
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID16
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD16
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-OD16-1
---
None
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID16
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD16
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-OD16-1
None
XWT-ID08
XWT-ID16
XWT-OD08
XWT-OD16
XWT-ID08-1
XWT-ID16-1
XWT-OD08-1
XWT-OD16-1
---
Device type
Product
code
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1561
1562
1593
1594
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
Product name
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-MD16
CRT1-MD16-1
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ID08TA
CRT1-ID08TA-1
CRT1-OD08TA
CRT1-OD08TA-1
CRT1-OD08TAH
CRT1-OD08TAH-1
CRT1-OD08TAH
CRT1-OD08TAH-1
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Basic Unit
CRT1-ID16TA
CRT1-ID16TA-1
CRT1-OD16TA
CRT1-OD16TA-1
CRT1-MD16TA
CRT1-MD16TA-1
CRT1-ID16TAH
CRT1-ID16TAH-1
CRT1-OD16TAH
CRT1-OD16TAH-1
CRT1-MD16TAH
CRT1-MD16TAH-1
CRT1-VID08S
CRT1-VID08S-1
CRT1-VOD08S
CRT1-VOD08S-1
CRT1-ID16S
DRT1-ID16S-1
CRT1-OD16S
CRT1-OD16S-1
CRT1-MD16S
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-ID16SH
CRT1-ID16SH-1
CRT1-OD16SH
CRT1-OD16SH-1
CRT1-MD16SH
CRT1-MD16SH-1
CRT1-ID32S
CRT1-ID32S-1
CRT1-OD32S
CRT1-OD32S-1
CRT1-MD32S
CRT1-MD32-S
CRT1-ID32SH
CRT1-ID32SH-1
CRT1-OD32SH
CRT1-OD32SH-1
CRT1-MD32SH
CRT1-MD32SH-1
CRT1-VID16ML
CRT1-VID16ML-1
CRT1-VOD16ML
CRT1-VOD16ML-1
CRT1-VID32ML
CRT1-VID32ML-1
CRT1-VOD32ML
CRT1-VOD32ML-1
Model
Expansion Unit
---
Device type
Product
code
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1595
1596
1597
1598
1571
1572
1710
1711
1712
1713
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1599
1600
1601
1602
1579
1580
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1706
1707
1708
1709
1700
1701
1702
1703
Product name
CRT1-ID16TA
CRT1-ID16TA-1
CRT1-OD16TA
CRT1-OD16TA-1
CRT1-MD16TA
CRT1-MD16TA-1
CRT1-ID16TAH
CRT1-ID16TAH-1
CRT1-OD16TAH
CRT1-OD16TAH-1
CRT1-MD16TAH
CRT1-MD16TAH-1
CRT1-VID08S
CRT1-VID08S-1
CRT1-VOD08S
CRT1-VOD08S-1
CRT1-ID16S
DRT1-ID16S-1
CRT1-OD16S
CRT1-OD16S-1
CRT1-MD16S
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-ID16SH
CRT1-ID16SH-1
CRT1-OD16SH
CRT1-OD16SH-1
CRT1-MD16SH
CRT1-MD16SH-1
CRT1-ID32S
CRT1-ID32S-1
CRT1-OD32S
CRT1-OD32S-1
CRT1-MD32S
CRT1-MD32-S
CRT1-ID32SH
CRT1-ID32SH-1
CRT1-OD32SH
CRT1-OD32SH-1
CRT1-MD32SH
CRT1-MD32SH-1
CRT1-VID16ML
CRT1-VID16ML-1
CRT1-VOD16ML
CRT1-VOD16ML-1
CRT1-VID32ML
CRT1-VID32ML-1
CRT1-VOD32ML
CRT1-VOD32ML-1
617
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Model
Basic Unit
Expansion Unit
CRT1-VMD32ML
--CRT1-VMD32ML-1
CRT1-ID08SL
CRT1-ID08SL-1
CRT1-OD08SL
CRT1-OD08SL-1
CRT1-ID16SL
CRT1-ID16SL-1
CRT1-OD16SL
CRT1-OD16SL-1
CRT1-MD16SL
CRT1-MD16SL-1
CRT1B-ID02S
CRT1B-ID02S-1
CRT1B-OD02S
CRT1B-OD02S-1
CRT1B-ID02SP
CRT1B-ID02SP-1
CRT1B-OD02SP
CRT1B-OD02SP-1
CRT1B-ID04SP
CRT1B-ID04SP-1
CRT1B-MD04SLP
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1
CRT1B-ID02JS
CRT1B-ID02JS-1
CRT1B-OD02JS
CRT1B-OD02JS-1
CRT1B-MD02JS
CRT1B-MD02JS-1
CRT1B-ID04JS
CRT1B-ID04JS-1
CRT1B-OD04JS
CRT1B-OD04JS-1
CRT1B-MD04JS
CRT1B-MD04JS-1
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
CRS1-RPT01
618
Device type
Product
code
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
07 hex
00 hex
00 hex
00 Hex
00 Hex
00 Hex
00 Hex
00 hex
00 hex
26 hex
1704
1705
1587
1588
1589
1590
1541
1542
1543
1544
1591
1592
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1727
1728
1725
1726
1729
1730
1733
1734
1731
1732
1735
1736
65
66
1715
1717
1714
1716
1631
1632
1363
Product name
CRT1-VMD32ML
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
CRT1-ID08SL
CRT1-ID08SL-1
CRT1-OD08SL
CRT1-OD08SL-1
CRT1-ID16SL
CRT1-ID16SL-1
CRT1-OD16SL
CRT1-OD16SL-1
CRT1-MD16SL
CRT1-MD16SL-1
CRT1B-ID02S
CRT1B-ID02S-1
CRT1B-OD02S
CRT1B-OD02S-1
CRT1B-ID02SP
CRT1B-ID02SP-1
CRT1B-OD02SP
CRT1B-OD02SP-1
CRT1B-ID04SP
CRT1B-ID04SP-1
CRT1B-MD04SLP
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1
CRT1B-ID02JS
CRT1B-ID02JS-1
CRT1B-OD02JS
CRT1B-OD02JS-1
CRT1B-MD02JS
CRT1B-MD02JS-1
CRT1B-ID04JS
CRT1B-ID04JS-1
CRT1B-OD04JS
CRT1B-OD04JS-1
CRT1B-MD04JS
CRT1B-MD04JS-1
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
CRT1-RPT01
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Message Router Object (0x02)
Object class
Object instance
Attribute
Service
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
None
Vendor specification addition
Assembly Object (0x04)
Object class
Object instance
Attribute
Service
Attribute
Service
Not supported
Not supported
ID
1
2
3
Code
0E
Contents
Number of members in
list
Member list
Data
Description
Get_Attribute_Single
Get
No
Set
No
No
Yes
No
No
Parameter option
None
Value
The assembly instances for CompoNet Slave Units are given below.
619
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Digital Input Slave Units
Instance number
Assembly instance 2
2 inputs
Type
Input
---
---
---
Assembly instance 3
4 inputs
Assembly instance 4
8 inputs
Input
---
---
---
---
3
Input
7
6
5
4
3
Assembly instance 5
16 inputs
Input
Assembly instance 6
32 inputs
Input
Assembly instance 7
24 inputs
Input
620
Bit allocation
-------
1
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
23
31
7
15
23
14
22
30
6
14
22
13
21
29
5
13
21
12
20
28
4
12
20
11
19
27
3
11
19
10
18
26
2
10
18
9
17
25
1
9
17
8
16
24
0
8
16
Supported model
CRT1B-ID02S(-1)
CRT1B-ID02SP(-1)
CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)
CRT1B-ID02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD04JS(-1)
CRT1B-ID04SP(-1)
CRT1B-ID04JS(-1)
CRT1-ID08(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID08(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID08(-1)
CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID08(-1)
CRT1-ID08TA(-1)
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)
CRT1-MD16TA(-1)
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-VID08S(-1)
CRT1-MD16S(-1)
CRT1-MD16SH(-1)
CRT1-ID08SL(-1)
CRT1-MD16SL(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ID16TA(-1)
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)
CRT1-ID16S(-1)
CRT1-ID16SH(-1)
CRT1-MD32S(-1)
CRT1-MD32SH(-1)
CRT1-VID16ML(-1)
CRT1-VMD32ML(-1)
CRT1-ID16SL(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ID32S(-1)
CRT1-ID32SH(-1)
CRT1-VID32ML(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-ID08(-1)
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Digital Output Slave Units
Instance number
Assembly instance 32
2 outputs
Type
Output
---
---
---
Bit allocation
-------
Assembly instance 33
4 outputs
Assembly instance 34
8 outputs
Output
---
---
---
---
3
Output
7
6
5
4
3
Assembly instance 35
16 outputs
Output
Assembly instance 36
32 outputs
Output
1
0
2
1
0
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
23
31
14
22
30
13
21
29
12
20
28
11
19
27
10
18
26
9
17
25
8
16
24
Supported model
CRT1B-OD02S(-1)
CRT1B-OD02SP(-1)
CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)
CRT1B-ID02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD04JS(-1)
CRT1B-OD04JS(-1)
CRT1-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD08(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-OD08TA(-1)
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)
CRT1-MA16TA(-1)
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-VOD08S(-1)
CRT1-MD16S(-1)
CRT1-MD16SH(-1)
CRT1-OD08SL(-1)
CRT1-MD16SL(-1)
CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID08(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID08(-1)
CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID08(-1)
CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID16(-1)
CRT1-OD16TA(-1)
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)
CRT1-OD16S(-1)
CRT1-OD16SH(-1)
CRT1-MD32S(-1)
CRT1-MD32SH(-1)
CRT1-VOD16ML(-1)
CRT1-VMD32ML(-1)
CRT1-OD16SL(-1)
CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-OD16(-1)
CRT1-OD32S(-1)
CRT1-OD32SH(-1)
CRT1-VOD32ML(-1)
621
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Instance number
Assembly instance 37
24 outputs
Type
Output
7
15
23
6
14
22
5
13
21
Bit allocation
4
3
2
12 11 10
20 19 18
1
9
17
0
8
16
Supported model
CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-OD08(-1)
CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-OD08(-1)
Analog Input Slave Units
Instance number
Instance 104
Analog Data (input)
Byte
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
Bit allocation
Input 0, Analog Data 1
Input 1, Analog Data 1
Input 2, Analog Data 1
Input 3, Analog Data 1
Instance 122
Top/Valley Detection
Timing Flags
+0
+1
0
0
Instance 134
Analog Status Flags
+0
BW0
T_ST0 V_ST0
HH0
+1
+2
+3
BW1
BW2
BW3
T_ST1 V_ST1
T_ST2 V_ST2
T_ST3 V_ST3
HH1
HH2
HH3
Instance 174
Analog Data 1 + Top/
Valley Detection Timing Flags
+0
Supported
model
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VAD04ML
0
0
0
0
0
0
V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 CRT1-AD04
T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VAD04ML
H0
PS0
L0
LL0 CRT1-AD04
H1
PS1
L1
LL1 CRT1-VAD04S
H2
PS2
L2
LL2 CRT1-VAD04ML
H3
PS3
L3
LL3
Input 0, Analog Data 1
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VAD04ML
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
Input 1, Analog Data 1
Input 2, Analog Data 1
Input 3, Analog Data 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0
T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0
Analog Output Slave Units
Instance number
Byte
Instance 190
Hold Flags
+0
Instance 192
Analog output data
+0
+1
+2
+3
622
Bit allocation
---
---
Input 0, Analog Data
Input 1, Analog Data
---
---
HD3
HD1
HD1
HD0
Supported
model
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VDA02ML
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Temperature Input Terminals (Inputs)
Instance number
Byte
Instance 104
Temperature data 1,
normal display
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
Instance 108
Temperature data 1,
1/100 display)
Instance 122
Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags
Instance 134
Temperature Data
Status Flag
Instance 174
Temperature data 1,
normal display +
Top/valley detection timing flag
Bit allocation
Supported
model
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Ch0 Temperature Data 1
Ch1 Temperature Data 1
Ch2 Temperature Data 1
Ch3 Temperature Data 1
Ch0 Temperature Data 1
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Ch1 Temperature Data 1
Ch2 Temperature Data 1
Ch3 Temperature Data 1
+14
+15
+0
0
0
0
0
V_ST3
V_ST2
V_ST1
+1
0
0
0
0
T_ST3
T_ST2
T_ST1
HH0
HH1
HH2
HH3
H0
H1
H2
H3
PS0
PS1
PS2
PS3
L0
L1
L2
L3
+0
+1
+2
+3
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
BW0
T_ST0 V_ST0
BW1
T_ST1 V_ST1
BW2
T_ST2 V_ST2
BW3
T_ST3 V_ST3
Ch0 Temperature Data 1
V_ST0 CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
T_ST0
LL0
LL1
LL2
LL3
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Ch1 Temperature Data 1
Ch2 Temperature Data 1
Ch3 Temperature Data 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
V_ST3
T_ST3
V_ST2
T_ST2
V_ST1
T_ST1
V_ST0
T_ST0
623
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Instance number
Byte
Instance 178
Temperature data 1,
1/100 display + Top/
valley detection timing flag
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
+16
+17
Bit allocation
Supported
model
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Ch0 Temperature Data 1
Ch1 Temperature Data 1
Ch2 Temperature Data 1
Ch3 Temperature Data 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
V_ST3
T_ST3
V_ST2
T_ST2
V_ST1
T_ST1
V_ST0
T_ST0
Temperature Input Terminals (Output)
Instance number
Instance 190
Hold flag
624
Byte
+0
Bit allocation
---
---
---
---
HD3
HD1
HD1
HD0
Supported
model
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Connection Object (0x05)
Object class
Attribute
Service
Maximum number of active
connections
Object instance Section
1
Instance type
Production trigger
Transport type
Transport class
Attribute
Information
Polled I/O
Cyclic
Server
2
ID
Contents
1
State
2
Instance type
3
Transport class
trigger
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
Service
Not supported
Not supported
1
Code
05
0E
10
Maximum number of instances
1
---
Get (read)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set (write)
No
No
No
Yes
No
01 (hexadecimal)
82H (Input and
Mixed I/O Slave
Units)
80H (Output
Slave Units and
Repeater Units)
---
Yes
No
---
Yes
No
01 (hexadecimal)
Yes
No
See note.
Yes
No
See note.
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
No
00 (hexadecimal)
Yes
No
See note.
Yes
No
See note.
Yes
No
See note.
Yes
No
See note.
Yes
No
0000 (hexadecimal)
Produced connection ID
Consumed connection ID
Initial comm.
characteristics
Produced connection size
Consumed connection size
Expected packet
rate
Watchdog timeout action
Produced connection path
length
Produced connection path
Consumed connection path
length
Consumed connection path
Production inhibit
time
Description
Reset
None
Get_Attribute_
None
Single
Set_Attribute_
None
Single
Value
Parameter option
Note The data depends on the type of Slave Unit being used, as shown in the following table.
625
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Model
Name
Basic Unit Expansion
Unit
CRT1B-ID02S (-1)
Input Data
Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed
connection connection connection connection connection connection
size
path length
path
size
path length
path
0001
0006
CRT1B-OD02S (-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1B-ID02SP (-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1B-OD02SP (-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1B-ID04SP (-1)
Input Data
0001
0006
CRT1B-MD04SLP (-1)
Input Data
0001
0006
0001
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1B-ID02JS(-1)
Input Data
0001
0006
CRT1B-ID04JS(-1)
Input Data
0001
0006
CRT1B-OD02JS(-1)
Output Data ---
CRT1B-OD04JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD02JS(-1)
CRT1B-MD04JS(-1)
20_04_24_
03_30_03
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
0000
---
0001
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
0001
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
---
0000
---
0001
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
---
0000
---
0000
0001
0006
Output Data ---
0000
---
0001
0006
Input Data
0006
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
---
0000
20_04_24_
20_30_03
20_04_24_
21_30_03
---
0001
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
22_30_03
---
---
0000
---
---
0000
---
---
0000
---
0001
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
22_30_03
---
0002
0006
0001
Output Data ---
0000
Input Data
0006
0001
0000
CRT1-ID08(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD08(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1ID16 (-1)
Input Data
0002
0006
0003
0006
0004
0006
0002
0006
---
0000
XWT-ID08 Input Data
(-1)
XWT-ID16 Input Data
(-1)
XWT-OD08 Input Data
(-1)
Output Data
0001
XWT-OD16 Input Data 0002
(-1)
Output Data ---
626
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
---
20_04_24_
02_30_03
20_04_24_
03_30_03
---
Output Data ---
NA
20_04_24_
02_30_03
---
0006
0000
20_04_24_
02_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
20_04_24_
07_30_03
20_04_24_
06_30_03
20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
---
20_04_24_
20_30_03
--20_04_24_
20_30_03
---
20_04_24_
23_30_03
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Model
Basic Unit Expansion
Unit
CRT1OD16 (-1)
Name
Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed
connection connection connection connection connection connection
size
path length
path
size
path length
path
NA
Output Data ---
0000
---
0002
0006
XWT-ID08
(-1)
Output Data
0000
---
0002
0006
0006
20_04_24_
04_30_03
---
---
0000
0002
0006
Input Data
XWT-ID16
(-1)
0001
Output Data ---
0000
Input Data
0002
0006
XWT-OD08 Output Data --(-1)
XWT-OD16 Output Data --(-1)
CRT1-MD16(-1)
Input Data 0001
---
0000
0000
20_04_24_
05_30_03
---
0003
0006
0000
---
0004
0006
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
Output Data ---
0000
20_04_24_
04_30_03
---
CRT1-ROS08
Output Data ---
0000
---
0001
0006
CRT1-ROF08
Output Data ---
0000
---
0001
0006
CRT1ROS16
NA
Output Data ---
0000
---
0002
0006
XWT-ID08
(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
---
0002
0006
Input Data
0006
20_04_24_
04_30_03
---
---
0000
0002
0006
XWT-ID16
(-1)
CRT1ROF16
0001
Output Data ---
0000
Input Data
0006
XWT-OD08 Output Data --(-1)
XWT-OD16 Output Data --(-1)
NA
Output Data ---
0000
20_04_24_
05_30_03
---
0000
---
0004
0006
0000
---
0002
0006
XWT-ID08
(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
---
0002
0006
Input Data
0006
20_04_24_
04_30_03
---
---
0000
0002
0006
XWT-ID16
(-1)
0002
0001
Output Data ---
0000
Input Data
0002
0006
XWT-OD08 Output Data --(-1)
XWT-OD16 Output Data --(-1)
CRT1-ID08TA(-1)
Input Data 0001
CRT1-OD08TA(-1)
0000
Output Data ---
---
0000
0003
0006
---
0000
0000
20_04_24_
05_30_03
---
0003
0006
0000
---
0004
0006
0006
20_04_24_
04_30_03
---
---
0000
0001
0006
20_04_24_
23_30_03
20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
25_30_03
20_04_24_
24_30_03
--20_04_24_
22_30_03
20_04_24_
22_30_03
20_04_24_
22_30_03
20_04_24_
23_30_03
20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
25_30_03
20_04_24_
24_30_03
20_04_24_
23_30_03
20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
25_30_03
20_04_24_
24_30_03
--20_04_24_
22_30_03
627
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Model
Basic Unit Expansion
Unit
Name
Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed
connection connection connection connection connection connection
size
path length
path
size
path length
path
CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)
Input Data
0001
CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID16TA(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD16TA(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-MD16TA(-1)
Input Data
0006
0002
0001
0006
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)
Input Data
0006
0002
0001
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-VID08S
Input Data
0006
CRT1-VOD08S
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID16S(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD16S(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-MD16S(-1)
Input Data
0006
0001
0002
0001
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID16SH(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD16SH(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-MD16SH(-1)
Input Data
0006
0002
0001
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID32S(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD32S(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-MD32S(-1)
Input Data
0006
0002
0002
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID32SH(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD32SH(-1)
Output Data ---
628
0004
0000
20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
06_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
06_30_03
---
---
0000
---
0001
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
22_30_03
---
0002
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
---
0000
0002
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
20_04_24_
22_30_03
---
0000
---
0002
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
23_30_03
---
0001
0006
---
0000
0002
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
---
0000
0002
0006
---
0000
0002
0006
---
0000
0004
0006
20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
22_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
22_30_03
----
20_04_24_
22_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
22_30_03
--20_04_24_
24_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
24_30_03
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Model
Basic Unit Expansion
Unit
CRT1-MD32SH(-1)
Name
Input Data
Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed
connection connection connection connection connection connection
size
path length
path
size
path length
path
0002
0006
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-VID16ML(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-VOD16ML(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-VID32ML(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-VOD32ML(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-VMD32ML(-1)
Input Data
0006
0002
0004
0002
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID08SL(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD08SL(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-ID16SL(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-OD16SL(-1)
Output Data ---
0000
CRT1-MD16SL(-1)
Input Data
0006
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-VAD04S
CRT1-VAD04ML
0001
0002
0001
20_04_24_
05_30_03
---
---
0000
---
0002
0006
---
0000
20_04_24_
23_30_03
---
0002
0006
---
0000
0004
0006
---
0000
0002
0006
---
0000
0001
0006
---
0000
0002
0006
20_04_24_
23_30_03
---
0000
---
0001
0006
20_04_24_
68_30_03
20_04_24_
79_30_03
20_04_24_
7A_30_03
20_04_24_
86_30_03
0000
0000
20_04_24_
22_30_03
---
0000
0000
---
0000
0000
---
0000
0000
---
20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
06_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
--20_04_24_
05_30_03
--20_04_24_
04_30_03
---
20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
24_30_03
--20_04_24_
23_30_03
--20_04_24_
22_30_03
---
Output Data ---
0000
Analog
Data 1
Generic
Status
Top and
Valley shot
Analog Status
Top and
Valley shot
+ Generic
status
Analog Status +
Generic
status
Analog data
1 + Top and
valley shot
Analog data
+ Top and
valley shot
+ generic
status
Hold control
0008
0006
0001
0006
0002
0006
0004
0006
0003
0006
20_04_24_
97_30_03
0000
0000
---
0005
0006
20_04_24_
A4_30_03
0000
0000
---
000A
0006
20_04_24_
AE_30_03
0000
0000
---
000B
0006
20_04_24_
B8_30_03
0000
0000
---
0000
0000
---
0001
0006
20_04_24_
BE_30_03
629
Appendix B
Object Mounting
Model
Basic Unit Expansion
Unit
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VDA02ML
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
630
Name
Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed
connection connection connection connection connection connection
size
path length
path
size
path length
path
Generic
Status
Analog
Data
Temperature Data 1
(Normal)
Temperature Data 1
(1/100 display)
0001
0006
---
---
0008
0006
0010
Top and
Valley shot
Temperature Status
Temperature data 1
(Normal) +
Top and valley shot
Temperature data 1
(1/100 display) + Top
and valley
shot
20_04_24_
79_30_03
---
---
---
---
0004
0006
20_04_24_
68_30_03
0000
0000
20_04_24_
C0_30_03
---
0006
20_04_24_
6C_30_03
0000
0000
---
0002
0006
0000
0000
---
0004
0006
0000
0000
---
000A
0006
20_04_24_
7A_30_03
20_04_24_
86_30_03
20_04_24_
AE_30_03
0000
0000
---
0012
0006
20_04_24_
B2_30_03
0000
0000
---
Hold control 0000
0000
---
0001
0006
20_04_24_
BE_30_03
Appendix C
Current Consumption Summary
Digital I/O Slave Units
Model
CRT1-ID08
CRT1-ID08-1
CRT1-OD08
CRT1-OD08-1
CRT1-ID16
CRT1-ID16-1
CRT1-OD16
CRT1-OD16-1
CRT1-MD16
CRT1-MD16-1
CRT1-ROS08
CRT1-ROF08
CRT1-ROS16
CRT1-ROF16
CRT1-ID08TA
CRT1-ID08TA-1
CRT1-OD08TA
CRT1-OD08TA-1
CRT1-ID08TAH
CRT1-ID08TAH-1
CRT1-OD08TAH
Communications current consumption
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
55 mA max. (for 24 V)
85 mA max. (for 14 V)
55 mA max. (for 24 V)
85 mA max. (for 14 V)
55 mA max. (for 24 V)
85 mA max. (for 14 V)
55 mA max. (for 24 V)
85 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
95 mA max. (for 24 V)
150 mA max. (for 14 V)
60 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
155 mA max. (for 24 V)
255 mA max. (for 14 V)
85 mA max. (for 24 V)
130 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
631
Current Consumption Summary
Model
CRT1-OD08TAH-1
CRT1-ID16TA
CRT1-ID16TA-1
CRT1-OD16TA
CRT1-OD16TA-1
CRT1-MD16TA
CRT1-MD16TA-1
CRT1-ID16TAH
CRT1-ID16TAH-1
CRT1-OD16TAH
CRT1-OD16TAH-1
CRT1-MD16TAH
CRT1-MD16TAH-1
CRT1-VID08S
CRT1-VID08S-1
CRT1-VOD08S
CRT1-VOD08S-1
CRT1-ID16S
CRT1-ID16S-1
CRT1-OD16S
CRT1-OD16S-1
CRT1-MD16S
CRT1-MD16S-1
CRT1-ID16SH
632
Communications current consumption
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
37 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
110 mA max. (for 24 V)
125 mA max. (for 14 V)
110 mA max. (for 24 V)
120 mA max. (for 14 V)
38 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
39 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
95 mA max. (for 14 V)
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
95 mA max. (for 14 V)
125 mA max. (for 24 V)
145 mA max. (for 14 V)
Appendix C
Current Consumption Summary
Model
CRT1-ID16SH-1
CRT1-OD16SH
CRT1-OD16SH-1
CRT1-MD16SH
CRT1-MD16SH-1
CRT1-ID32S
CRT1-ID32S-1
CRT1-OD32S
CRT1-OD32S-1
CRT1-MD32S
CRT1-MD32S-1
CRT1-ID32SH
CRT1-ID32SH-1
CRT1-OD32SH
CRT1-OD32SH-1
CRT1-MD32SH
CRT1-MD32SH-1
CRT1-VID16ML
CRT1-VID16ML-1
CRT1-VOD16ML
CRT1-VOD16ML-1
CRT1-VID32ML
CRT1-VID32ML-1
CRT1-VOD32ML
Appendix C
Communications current consumption
125 mA max. (for 24 V)
145 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
60 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
60 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
195 mA max. (for 24 V)
200 mA max. (for 14 V)
195 mA max. (for 24 V)
200 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
210 mA max. (for 24 V)
235 mA max. (for 14 V)
210 mA max. (for 24 V)
235 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
60 mA max. (for 24 V)
100 mA max. (for 14 V)
60 mA max. (for 24 V)
100 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
40 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
633
Current Consumption Summary
Model
CRT1-VOD32ML-1
CRT1-VMD32ML
CRT1-VMD32ML-1
CRT1-ID08SL
CRT1-ID08SL-1
CRT1-OD08SL
CRT1-OD08SL-1
CRT1-ID16SL
CRT1-ID16SL-1
CRT1-OD16SL
CRT1-OD16SL-1
CRT1-MD16SL
CRT1-MD16SL-1
XWT-ID08 (See note.)
XWT-ID08-1 (See note.)
XWT-OD08 (See note.)
XWT-OD08-1 (See note.)
XWT-ID16 (See note.)
XWT-ID16-1 (See note.)
XWT-OD16 (See note.)
XWT-OD16-1 (See note.)
Appendix C
Communications current consumption
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
50 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
34 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
34 mA max. (for 24 V)
55 mA max. (for 14 V)
37 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
37 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
60 mA max. (for 14 V)
5 mA max.
5 mA max.
5 mA max.
5 mA max.
10 mA max.
10 mA max.
10 mA max.
10 mA max.
Note The communications current consumption indicated for Expansion Units is the additional current consumed when the Expansion Unit is connected to a Basic Unit. For example, the current consumption for
the case of combining CRT1-ID16 + XWT-OD16 is 55 + 10 = 65 mA for a communications power supply
voltage of 24 VDC and 85 + 10 = 95 mA for a communications power supply voltage of 14 VDC.
Analog I/O Slave Units
Model
CRT1-AD04
CRT1-DA02
CRT1-VAD04S
634
Communications current consumption
110 mA max. (for 24 V)
175 mA max. (for 14 V)
125 mA max. (for 24 V)
205 mA max. (for 14 V)
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
115 mA max. (for 14 V)
Current Consumption Summary
Model
CRT1-VDA02S
CRT1-VAD04ML
CRT1-VDA02ML
Appendix C
Communications current consumption
105 mA max. (for 24 V)
170 mA max. (for 14 V)
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
115 mA max. (for 14 V)
105 mA max. (for 24 V)
170 mA max. (for 14 V)
Temperature Input Units
Model
CRT1-TS04T
CRT1-TS04P
Communications current consumption
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
110 mA max. (for 14 V)
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
110 mA max. (for 14 V)
Bit Slave Units
Model
CRT1B-ID02S
CRT1B-ID02S-1
CRT1B-OD02S
CRT1B-OD02S-1
CRT1B-ID02SP
CRT1B-ID02SP-1
CRT1B-OD02SP
CRT1B-OD02SP-1
CRT1B-ID04SP
CRT1B-ID04SP-1
CRT1B-MD04SLP
CRT1B-MD04SLP-1
Communications current consumption
65 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
45 mA max. (for 24 V)
65 mA max. (for 14 V)
55 mA max. (for 24 V)
75 mA max. (for 14 V)
55 mA max. (for 24 V)
70 mA max. (for 14 V)
65 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
65 mA max. (for 24 V)
80 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
75 mA max. (for 14 V)
50 mA max. (for 24 V)
75 mA max. (for 14 V)
85 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
85 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
80 mA max. (for 24 V)
90 mA max. (for 14 V)
75 mA max. (for 24 V)
85 mA max. (for 14 V)
635
Current Consumption Summary
Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors
Model
CRT1B-ID02JS
CRT1B-ID02JS-1
CRT1B-OD02JS
CRT1B-OD02JS-1
CRT1B-ID04JS
CRT1B-ID04JS-1
CRT1B-OD04JS
CRT1B-OD04JS-1
CRT1B-MD02JS
CRT1B-MD02JS-1
CRT1B-MD04JS
CRT1B-MD04JS-1
Communications current consumption
25 mA max. (for 24 V)
30 mA max. (for 14 V)
25 mA max. (for 24 V)
30 mA max. (for 14 V)
25 mA max. (for 24 V)
30 mA max. (for 14 V)
25 mA max. (for 24 V)
30 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
40 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
40 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
35 mA max. (for 14 V)
30 mA max. (for 24 V)
35 mA max. (for 14 V)
25 mA max. (for 24 V)
30 mA max. (for 14 V)
25 mA max. (for 24 V)
30 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
40 mA max. (for 14 V)
35 mA max. (for 24 V)
40 mA max. (for 14 V)
Repeater Unit
Model
CRS1-RPT01
636
Communications current consumption
95 mA max.
Appendix C
Appendix D
Precautions with Connecting
Two-wire DC Sensors
When using a two-wire sensor with a Slave Unit with DC inputs, check that the following conditions have been
met. Failure to meet these conditions may result in operating errors.
Relation between ON Voltage of Slave Unit with DC Inputs and
Sensor Residual Voltage
VON ≤ VCC − VR
VCC:
I/O power supply voltage (The allowable power supply voltage range is 20.4 to 26.4 V, so 20.4 V will be
used here to allow for the worst possible conditions.)
VON:
ON voltage for a Slave Unit with DC Inputs
VR :
Sensor's output residual voltage
It is sometimes possible to satisfy the above equation by adjusting the I/O power supply voltage (VCC) to
26.4 V.
Relation between ON Current of Slave Unit with DC Inputs and
Sensor Control Output (Load Current)
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.)
IOUT:
Sensor control output (load current)
ION:
ON current of Input Slave Unit with DC inputs
ION is calculated as follows:
ION = (VCC − VR − VF)/RIN
VF :
Internal residual voltage of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs
RIN:
Input impedance of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R.
The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated using the following equation.
R ≤ (VCC − VR)/(IOUT (min.) − ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC − VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
2-wire
sensor
Slave Unit
with DC Inputs
637
Precautions with Connecting Two-wire DC Sensors
Appendix D
Relation between OFF Current of Slave Unit with DC Inputs and
Sensor Leakage Current
IOFF ≥ Ileak
IOUT:
OFF current of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs
Ileak:
Sensor's leakage current
Connect a bleeder resistor if the Sensor's leakage current is greater than the OFF current of a Slave Unit with
DC Inputs.
The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated using the following equation.
R ≤ (IOFF × RIN + VF)/(Ileak − VOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC − VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
638
Appendix E
I/O Power Supply Current
The I/O power supply current to be supplied to the V and G terminals of each Digital I/O Slave Unit is provided
by the following equation.
The points to which I/O power must be supplied are divided into small blocks. The I/O power supply currents
supplied to these points are calculated in block units.
For example, in a CRT1-ID16TA Slave Unit, the points are divided into two blocks. One includes 8 points on the
left: Inputs 0 to 7. The other contains 8 points on the right: Inputs 8 to 15. Currents are calculated for each
block.
Input Unit
The I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = input current (for number of points used) + current supplied to input devices (for number of points used) * + I/O power supply current consumption
* This value does not apply to 2-tier terminal block type slaves.
Calculate using I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = input current (for number of
points used) + I/O power supply current consumption.
Output Unit
The I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = rated output current (for number of points used)
* + current supplied to input devices (for number of points used) + I/O power supply current consumption
* Compare with the restricted value for common and apply whichever value is the smallest.
(Example)
Case of having seven 30-mA sensors connected to the CRT1-ID08TA
I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = (6 mA x 7 points) + (30 mA x 7 points) + 5 mA =
257 mA
639
I/O Power Supply Current
640
Appendix E
Appendix F
Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units
with Compact Connectors
BIT NODE ADR
000
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
005
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
010
021
026
031
022
027
032
023
028
033
024
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
019
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
018
014
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
017
013
009
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
030
016
012
008
004
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
025
011
007
003
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
020
006
002
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
015
001
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
029
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
034
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
641
Appendix F
Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
BIT NODEADR
035
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
040
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
045
642
056
061
066
057
062
067
058
063
068
059
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
054
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
053
049
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
052
048
044
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
065
051
047
043
039
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
060
046
042
038
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
055
041
037
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
050
036
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
064
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
069
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Appendix F
Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
BIT NODEADR
070
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
075
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
080
091
096
101
092
097
102
093
098
103
094
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
089
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
088
084
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
087
083
079
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
100
086
082
078
074
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
095
081
077
073
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
090
076
072
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
085
071
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
099
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
104
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
643
Appendix F
Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors
BIT NODEADR
105
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
110
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
115
644
116
121
126
117
122
127
118
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
123
114
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
113
109
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
112
108
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
125
111
107
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
120
106
BIT NODE ADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
119
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
BIT NODEADR
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
124
ON
RSV
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Index
A
AD conversion data, 311
analog data 1, 312, 313, 316
Bottom, 314
Peak, 314
Rate of Change, 314
Raw Value, 314
selecting, 312
Top, 314
Valley, 314
Analog Data Selection Method, 314
Analog I/O Slave Units, 24
overview, 306
analog input value, 311
Analog Slaves
peak/bottom hold, 544
scaling, 541
top/valley hold, 546
applications
precautions, xx
assembly object, 619
automatic baud rate detection, 2, 486
CompoNet networks, 32
Configurator
writing maintenance dates, 561
connection object, 625
contact operation monitor, 2, 498
control system, 2
cumulated count, 526, 537
cumulated value, 311
cumulative counter, 4, 562
D
data processing functions, 306
communications error output setting, 307
comparator, 306
cumulative counter, 307
disconnected line detection, 306
moving average, 306
peak/bottom hold, 306
rate of change, 306
scaling, 306
top/valley hold, 306
user adjustment, 306
Digital I/O Slave Units, 20
B
bottom value, 311
branch lines, 33
branches, 33
multidrop connections, 34
T-branch connections, 34
C
cables
DCA4-4F10 Standard Flat Cable, 37
DCA5-4F10 Sheathed Flat Cable, 38
selecting cable types, 38
CMND instruction, 612
communications
power supply, 34
communications cables, xx
disconnected line detection, 5, 524
E
EC Directives, xxii
electromagnetic fields, xxii
EMC Directives, xxii
EMI Standard, xxii
EMS Standard, xxii
error codes, 592
Error History Window, 329
explicit messages, 591, 594
example, 612
external load short-circuit detection, 3
F
communications error history monitor, 3, 492
FALS instruction, xix
communications error output setting, 3
flags
Analog Status Flags, 313, 316
Hold Flags, 314, 318
Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, 313, 316
communications power supply, 85
comparator, 4, 520
Comparator Result Flag, 552, 553
645
Index
G
Generic Status Flags, 562
N
naming connected devices, 3, 491
naming Units, 3, 490
H
Network Power Supply Slave Units, 86
network power voltage monitor, 3, 487
Hold Flag, 544, 546
noise, xxii
hold/clear outputs, 486
NS indicators, 580
hysteresis, 547, 553
number of conversion points, 4
hysteresis setting, 517, 521
I
O
OFF delay, 521
I/O power status monitor, 3, 495
offset compensation, 510, 531
I/O power supply, 85, 98
Off-wire Detection, 561
identity object, 615
one-shot time setting, 518
indicator meanings and troubleshooting, 580
operating environment precautions, xix
input filter, 3, 496
operation time monitor, 2, 502
input range and conversion data, 308
output data, 322
inrush current, 3
preventing malfunctions, 497
output range and conversion data, 319
installation
location, xix
L
outputs
precautions, xix
P
peak value, 311
last maintenance date, 4, 494, 529
peak/bottom hold, 4, 513, 544
locking devices
precautions, xx
power supply, xxii
precautions, xxi
wiring, 85
M
maintenance
cleaning, 588
device maintenance, 588
inspections, 588
writing maintenance dates, 561
Maintenance Information Window, 325, 483
maintenance system, 2
precautions, xvii
applications, xx
general, xviii
operating environment, xix
safety, xviii
preventing malfunctions, 3
R
Master Units, 32
radiated emission, xxii
message router object, 619
radioactivity, xxii
moving average, 4
moving average processing, 508
rate of change, 311
calculation, 4, 518
MS indicators, 580
Repeater Units, 33
Multi-power Supply Slave Units, 85
replacing parts
precautions, xxi
replacing Units
646
Index
precautions, xxi
S
V
valley value, 311
Voltage/Current Input Mode Settings Switch, 340
safety precautions, xviii
scaling, 4, 509, 530, 541
default scaling, 509, 530
user scaling, 510, 531
screw-less clamp, 111
Selecting Temperature Data, 370
W
wiring
trunk line-branch line formation, 35, 36
unrestricted wiring formation, 36
sensor power short-circuit detection, 3
Sensor Power Supply Connector, 341
Sensor Power Supply Mode Settings Switch, 339
setting output value for errors, 539
short-circuits
precautions, xxi
signals
precautions, xxi
Slave Units, 33
models, 19
specifications, 116
Standard Window, 481
static electricity, xxii
status areas, 120, 322, 392, 408, 472
Alarm Status Area, 121, 324, 325, 409, 473
Warning Status Area, 120, 323, 324, 408, 472
T
Temperature Data Status Flag, 370, 373
Terminating Resistor, 33
top value, 311
top/valley hold, 4, 515, 546
Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, 546
total ON time monitor, 2, 499
troubleshooting, 581
errors shown by indicators, 581
specific slave troubleshooting, 582
trunk lines, 33
U
unit conduction time monitor, 3, 488
user adjustment, 5, 524, 534
647
Index
648
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W457-E1-07
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Date
Revised content
September 2006 Original production
July 2007
Additions to include Digital I/O Slave Units (16-point Input Unit with 3-tier terminal
block, 16-point Output Unit with 3-tier terminal block, 8-point Input/8-point Output
Unit with 3-tier terminal block, and 16-point Output Unit with relay outputs).
Connector names were also changed globally.
October 2007 Information was added on the following.
Digital I/O Slave Units:
16-input Units (Connector Model and Clamp Model),
16-output Unit (2-tier Terminal Block Model with SSR Outputs, Connector Model,
and Clamp Model)
8-input and 8-output Units (Connector Model)
May 2008
Added information on the following Digital I/O Slaves 8-point Input Units (with 2-tier
terminal block, with 3-tier terminal block, with e-CON connector, or with screwless
clamp terminals), 8-point Output Units (with 2-tier terminal block, with 2-tier terminal
block and relay outputs, with 2-tier terminal block and SSR outputs, with 3-tier terminal block, with e-CON connector, or with screwless clamp terminals), 8-point Input/8point Output Units (with 2-tier terminal block, with 3-tier terminal block and detection
function, with e-CON connector and detection function, or with screwless clamp terminals), 16-point Input Units (with 3-tier terminal block and detection function, with eCON connector and detection function, or with MIL connector), 16-point Output
Units (with 3-tier terminal block and detection function, with e-CON connector and
detection function, or with MIL connector), 32-point Input Units (with e-CON connector or with MIL connector), 32-point Output Unit (with e-CON connector or with MIL
connector), and 16-point Input/16-point Output Units (with e-CON connectors or with
MIL connector).
October 2008 Added information on Temperature Input Units (4 inputs).
December 2008 Revised through addition of Analog I/O Slave Unit [4 point input unit (e-CON connector type/MIL connector type)/2 point output unit (e-CON connector type/MIL connector type)]
October 2009 Added information on Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors (2-point Input Unit,
2-point Output Unit, 4-point Input Unit, 4-point Output Unit, 2-point I/O Unit, and 4point I/O Unit). Added information on multidrop connectors for Flat Cable I.
649
Revision History
650
OMRON Corporation
Industrial Automation Company
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Network Devices Department
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81) 75-344-7116/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149
2-2-1 Nishikusatsu, Kusatsu-shi,
Shiga, 525-0035 Japan
Tel: (81) 77-565-5219/Fax: (81) 77-565-5569
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Authorized Distributor:
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com
© OMRON Corporation 2006 All Rights Reserved.
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W457-E1-07
1009
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement